m 



] 




% „ 












C 



*. v* 



,0 0. 









%r$ 



























^% 






J ■ 






























X V 









%$ 






V % /'^% ** v \ l »w* / % : ->a 














































V * 



**<& :A 



<p \\ 






w : #*% 



<i v. ' « 



*o 






, ^ 












^ y 



O. * 



% s 




^ ^ 






%■ <f 



* z 







v 0o y * V 












A NEW 

PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR 

IN FOUR PARTS; 

CONTAINING 

L Rules fdr the combination and ufe of the different Parts 
of Speech. 

II. The Syntax, in which are explained, after a more 
copious manner than hitherto attempted; the peculiar ufes 
of the Portuguese Particles. 

III. A Vocabulary, more particularly containing the Terms 
of Commerce, War, and Navigation, with a variety 
of Phrafes and familiar Dialogues, taken from common 
coriverfation and the beft authors. s 

IV. Various Paffages extracted front the moft approved 
modern and ancient writers,, with a view to facilitate 
the reading of the ancient and moft valuable Portuguefe 
books. 

The Seventh, Edition, carefully revifed and improved, and 
the Portuguefe Words properly accented, according to 
the latejl and. best Authorities.. 

By ANTHONY VIEYRA, Tranftagano. 



Necejeejl enim inter quos mercatura& contracluumjint, in- 
ter eos quoque/ermonis e^e c ommercza.U berths To liet a. 



LONDON; 

Printed for F. WINGRAVE, in the 'Strand, 

1809. 




^ 

^ 






3 



8B7270 
'2© 



rT. C. Kansard, Printer,^ 

fcterborough-Court, > 

L Fleet-StresC, J 



TO 

ROBERT ORME, Efq, 



SIR, 
HPHE beft Hiftorians and the greateft Poet 
my country has produced, have dedi- 
cated their talents to the fubjedl which at 
prefent employs yours ; and as no one is 
more fenfible than yourfelf of the Geo- 
graphical, Commercial, and Political Know- 
ledge, which may be derived from an ac- 
quaintance with their writings on Indian 
affairs, this work of mine can nowife be 
addreffed with greater propriety than to 
yourfelf. 

I am, Sir, 

Your moft humble fervant, 



i 



ANTHONY VIEYRA, 



PREFACE, 



AS the ufefulnefs of the Portuguefe language is Jo 
well knozvn to all EnglijJi merchants zvho carry on 
a general trade with the different Parts of the known 
world, it will be needlefs to life any arguments here to 
prove it ; and I fhall refer what I have to Jay on the 
copioufnefs and energy of this language, to the Preface to 
my Englifh and Portuguefe Diclionary. 

The reader wilt find in the Firfi Part of this 
Grammar, what is material as a foundation of the 
whole. 

At the end of the Second Part is a full explanation 
of the Particles, on which I have beftowed more time 
and labour, becauje this fubjecl has- been hitherto much 
7ieglecled y although the principal ornament and elegance 
not only of the Portuguefe, but of every other language, 
chiefly confifl in the proper arrangement and judicious, 
interfperfion of thefe words. 

In the Third Part is a larger colletlion than hitherto 
publijhed of the terms of Trade, War, Navigation, 
&;c. which the prefent inter courfe between the two nations 
renders particularly ujejul. 

Having 



[ vi ] 

Having found a great difficulty in -procuring Portuguefe 
books in this Country, I have been commonly obliged to 
furnijli with -part of my private colleclion thofe Gentle- 
men whom I have had the honour of aj/ifting in thejludy 
of this language , during my refidence here ; therefore, in 
the Fourth Part I have given fome paffages felected 
from the bejl. Portuguefe Authors, and zvhich will, at the 
fame time, facilitate the reading of their mojl eminent 
Hiftorians, fuch as Goes, Barros, Pinto, &c. whofe 
Orthography differs confiderably from the more modern. 



CONTENTS. 



PART I. 



f\P the Portuguefe Alphabet, and the manner of pro- 

^ nouncing eachjeparate Letter ---. Page 1 

Of the manner of pronouncing the Portuguefe Letters 

as combined in Syllables - * 

Of the Articles _ . . 8 

Of the Nouns n 

Of the Pronouns _. --.- 23 

Of Verbs --- - 44 

Of theParticiples -._'_ 113 

Of the Adverbs --.. 114 

Of the Prepofitions -. 117 

Of the Conjunctions - - ... 118 

Interjective Particles 120 

Some Abbreviations ufedin the Portuguefe Language - 121 

PART 



CONTENT S, 
P A R T II. 



Of the Divijion of Syntax - 122 

Of the Syntax of Articles - --- 126 

Of the Syntax of Nouns, and firfl, of the Subjlan- 

iives - - ---- 131 

Of the Syntax of Adjectives 132 

Vf the Syntax of the Comparatives and Superlatives - 135 

Of the Syntax of Pronouns - 136 

Of the Syntax of Verbs - - 139 

Vf the Syntax of Participles and Gerunds - - 152 

Of Prepofitions - 154 

Of the Portuguefe Orthography 191 

Of the Quantity of Syllables, and their Sound ■ 209 

Etymology of the Portuguefe Tongue from the Latin - - 215 



PART III. 



The most elegant Phrafes of the Portuguefe Lan~ 

guage .. _ 218 

A Vocabulary of Words most ufed in Difcourfe - 1 

Of the Portuguefe Coin - ^ 

A Collection of Portuguefe Proverbs „._,».__ ^g 

Familiar Dialogues - - Sy 

Letters on Mercantile Affairs, &c. ---., - 83 



PART IV. 



Several ufeful and entertaining Paff ages, whereof the 
greatest Part is collected from the best Portuguefe 
Writers, as Andrade, Barros, &c n§ 



PORTUGUESE AND SPANISH LANGUAGES. 



Lately. Published. 

1. A Dictionary of the Portuguese and English Languages, in Two Parts : 
Portuguese and English, and English and Portuguese : by Anthony Vieyra. 
In two large Volumes, 8vo. a new Edition, carefully revised and im- 
proved, arid the Portuguese Words properly accented, to facilitate the. 
Pronunciation to Learners. 

2. An Abridgment of the above in a pocket volume. 

3. A New Grammar of the Portuguese and English Languages. By Mr. 
Vieyra. Svo. New Edition, with the Portuguese Words properly accented, 
7s. 66. **■ 

4. Exercises upon the different Parts of Speech of the Portuguese Lan- 
guage, refering to Mr. Vieyra's Grammar. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 

5. Grammatica Portugueza e Ingleza, a qual serve p3ra Instruir aos 
Porluguezes na Lingua Ingleza. 4s. 6d. boards. 8vo. 

6. Historia de Gil Braz de Santilhana traduzida em Portuguez, 4 torn. 
12mo. 

7. Historia de Portugal, por Antonio de Moraes Silvo, natural do Rio de 
Janeiro, e continuada ateos nossos tempos, por Hippolyto Jose da Costa, 
3 torn. 12mo. 

8. Selections in Portuguese and English, for the Use of Persons learning: 
those languages, with the Portuguese Words properly accented. 8vo. 

9. A hew Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, in TWy 
p art 5 — i. Spanish and English; .2. English and Spanish. ~ A New Edition, 
corrected and improved. By Joseph Baretti. 2 vols. Svo. 

10. The same abridged, in a small size. 

1 1 . A New Spanish Grammar : or, the Elements of the Spanish Language, 
By Mr. Delpino. A new Edition, improved by Delpueyo; 8vo. 7s. 

12. Fernandez's New Practical Grammar of the Spanish Language; a 
New Edition, considerably enlarged by the Author. Svo. 6 s. 

13. Exercises upon the Rules of Construction of the Spanish Language, 
with references to the above Grammar. By Mr. Fernandez. A New- 
Edition, greatly improved by the Author. 3s. 6d. 

14. Las Aventuras de Gil Bias de Santillana ; Nueva Edition revisadas 
por el Rev. Don Felipe Fernandez. 4 vol. 12mo. 

15. Don Quixote de \s Maricha, compuesta por MigUel de Cervantes 
Sa^vedra. Nueva Edicion por M. Fernandez. 4 torn. l2mo. 

15. Novelas Nuevas, por Mr. De Florian, traducidas libremente, e 
ilustradas con algunas notas curiosas e instructivas, por Don Gaspar Zavala 
y Zamora. 12 mo. 

17. Gonzalvo de Cordova, por Mr. De Florian, trad, per D. Juan Lopez 
de Penalvor^ 2 torn. 12me< 

London: Printed for F. Wingrave^ Strand. 

A New 



A NEW 



PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 

CHAP. I. 

Of the PORTUGUESE Alphabet, 

And the manner of pronouncing each feparate 
Letter. 

THE Portuguefe alphabet contains twenty-four 
letters, viz. ^« 

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M, N, O, P, 
Q,R,S,T,U,V ?X X,Y,Z. 

The A is expressed by a sound like that of a in 
the English words at, rat, fat, &c. 

B is expressed by a sound like that of the be, m 
the first syllable of the English word Betty. 

C is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word celebrated, 

D is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word declare. 

E is expressed by a sound like that which we give 
to the English a when we pronounce the word care. 

B Fis 



2 PORTUGUESE 

F is expressed by the same sound as in English. 

G is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word generation. 

H is expressed by a sound like that, of the Eng- 
lish word aghast if you cut off the two last letters 
st, and keep the accent on the second a. 

I is expressed by. the sound of our ee. 

J is called j consoante, i. e. the j consonant, and 
has the same power as the g before e or /. 

L, as in English. 

M, as in English. 

N, as in English. 

O has nearly the same sound as in the English 
word store. 

P is expressed by a sound like that of pe in the 
English word penny. 

Q is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- 
lish *. 

R is expressed by a sound like that of the English 
participle erred, if you can cut off the last letter d> 

S, as in English. 

T is expressed by a sound like that of tha in the 
English word Thames. 

U is expressed by a sound like that of oo in the 
English w r ord poop. 

V is exprefsed by a sound like that of oo ; they 
call it also oo consodnte, i. e. the v consonant. 

X is expressed by a sound like that of our pro- 
noun personal she, if you add an s to it, or as shees. 

Y is expressed by a sound like that of i in the 
English word vifible, and is called ypsilon. 

Z is expressed by the sound of our English zed, 
leaving out the d, or zea* 



GRAMMAR, 3 

Of the manner of pronouncing the Portuguese 
Letters as combined in Syllables; and first 

Of the Vowels. 



A in Portuguese is commonly pronounced like a 
in the following English words, adapted \ castle \ &c. 
It is sometimes pronounced with less strength, and 
closely, as in ambos, where the a is pronounced like 
a in the English word ambition. 

E. 

The letter e has two different sounds 5 the one 
open like ay in daily ; the other close, like that in the 
English word mellow. Examples of the former,//, 
faith, pi \ foot, &c. Examples of the latter, rede, a 
net, parede, a wall, &c. In this consists a great part 
of the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation,wnich 
however, cannot be learnt but by a long use, not- 
withstanding all the rules that can be given. 

I. 

Is pronounced like ee in the English word steel, 
aco ; or like / in the English words still, ainda ; vi- 
sible, visivei. 

O. 

This vowel has two sounds; one open, as in the 
word do, pity, where the 6 is pronounced like our 
in the word store , the other close, a's in the Por- 
tuguese article do, of, and the word redondo, round, 
where the is pronounced like our u in turret or 
stumble. It is likewise -in the different pronuncia- 
tion of this vowel that consists the greatest part of 
the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation ; but 
it can be learned only by a long use, 

B % - U. The 



PORTUGUESE 

U, 

The vowel u is pronounced like oo in English. 

Y. 
Y has the same sound as the Portuguese vowel /. 



Of Consonants. 

B 

Keeps always the same sound as in English. 

C 

Before a, o, u, and the consonants /, r, is pro- 
perly pronounced as k ; but before e and i it takes 
the hissing sound of s: it takes also the sound of s 
before a, o, u, when there is a dash under it thus $. 

£f I could wish the learned in Portugal would follow the 
resolution of the Royal Academy of Madrid, by expunging 
such dash, and placing the s in its stead, since they have 
in both languages the same hissing sound which frequent- 
ly occasions great confusien in the proper use of them. 

C before h is pronouced like ch in the English 
words charity, cherry, &c. 

Double c is. sounded only before e and /, the first 
with the sound of k, and the other with the hissing 
sound of s; as in accidente, accident, pronounce 
aksidente. 

D 

Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. 

F 
Is pronounced always as in English. 

G 

Before the, vowels a, o, », and before consonants, 
is pronounced as in English : example, gosto, taste 3 
gaiola, cage 5 grito, a cry. 

G before 



GRAMMAR. 5 

G before e and / denotes the sound of j conso- 
nant. 

Gua sounds almost like our wa : example, guar da, 
pronounce gwdrda. 

Gue,gui, are pronounced as gue in the word guest, 
and gi in the word gift-, but in the verbs arguir and 
redarguir, it is to be pronounced as if it were written 
argueer, &c. 

H. 

The letter h is never aspirated nor pronounced at 
the beginnning of words, as hbra, an hour ; homem, 
a man : but, according to the modern orthography, 
all those words are written without an k. 

H when preceded by a c, makes a sound with it 
like our ch. See the letter C, and also the letters 
L and N. 



Is pronounced like our j consonant, 

K. 
The Portuguese have no such letter as k. 

L 

Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. 
Lh is pronounced like g before an I'm the Italian 
words figlioyfoglio, &c. 

M 

Is pronounced as in English, when placed before 
a vowel with which it forms a syllable -, but, when it 
is at the end of words, and preceded by the letter 
e, it forms in Portuguese a nasal sound like that of 
the French words vin, wine ; pain, bread ; except 
seem, tbem, from the verbs soar, toar, and some 
others. 

M at the end of words, preceded by an a, », or 
i, has such a nasal obtuse sound that can only be 
learned from a master's mouth. 

B 3 N being 



6 PORTUGUESE 

N. 

N being before a vowel with which it forms a syl- 
lable, is pronounced as in English ; otherwise, it 
only gives a nasal sound to the vowel that precedes it. 

N before h has the same sound as gn in Italian, or 
in the French words Espagne, Allemagne. 

P. 

P and ph are pronounced as in English. 

Q 

Is pronounced like k : example, quero, I am will- 
ing, pronounce kero. 

^" The vowel u after q in the word qual, which, 
must be uttered so smoothly as to render it almost 
imperceptible to the ear, is pronounced as in the 
English word quantity, in order to distinguish it 
from the substantive cat, lime. 

R. 

R and double r are pronounced as in English. 

S. 

S and ss are pronounced as in English. 
S between two vowels is pronounced like a z ; 
particularly in the words ending in oso, and esa, as 

amor 6 so y cuidado$o > mesa> defesa, &c, 

T 

Is pronounced as in English. 

V 
Is pronounced as in English. 

X 

Is pronounced as sh in English > except in tfie 
word axioma, in which, according to Feyjo, the x is 
to be pronounced like c, 

X after 



GRAMMAR. 7 

X after the vowel e is pronounced like cs, in the 
words extengam, extenuado, expuho, excellent e, and 
some other words. 

X between two vowels is pronounced like gz in 
the words exactamente, exornar ; except Alexandre, 
Paixam, Puxo, baxo, and some other words, that may 
be learnt by use. You must take care to pronounce 
the^so smoothly as to render it almost imperceptible 
to the ear. 

Z 

Is pronounced as in English, but at the end of 
words it is pronounced like s, as rapaz, boy ; Fran-. 
cez, French; perdiz, partridge; vox, voice; lux, 
light, &c. 

The tittle, or little dash, which the Portuguese 
call til> is set by them over some letters instead of 
m > as be instead of hem ; emve instead of convem ; 
hua instead of huma ; and as it is then to be consi- 
dered as an m, see what we have said about the 
pronunciation of that letter. 

They also set their til over the vowels, ao, aa, in 
the end of words, thus ao, aa. See what we have 
said above of m at the end of words preceded by 
an a. 



Of Diphthongs. 



The meeting of many vowels in one and the same 
syllable constitute what is called Diphthongs, and 
they are the following in the Portuguese language. 

Aa, as in magaa, an apple. 

Ae, as in caes, dog. 

Ay, as in pay, father. 

At, as in mais, more. 

Ao, as in pao, wood. 

Au, as in causa, a cause. 

Eo, as in ceo, heaven. 

Ey, as in rey, king. 

B a El, 



8 PORTUGUESE 

El, as in amei, I loved. 

Eu, z$eu,\. 

lo, as v'to, he saw. 

Oe, as in po%M% they put; compoem, they compose; 
meloes, rtielons, &c. 

Oy, as in boy, an ox ; fby, he was. 

Ou, as */<?#, I give \ sou, I am. 

£&, as azues, blue : 

pr The two vowels in the following words must 
be plainly and distinctly pronounced : 

Ai, as in paiz, a country, pronounce pa-iz. 

Ea> as in lamprea, a lamprey, pronounce, lampre-a. 

la, as dementia, clemency, pronounce, clemenci-a+ 

Jo, as in navio, a ship, pronounce, navi-o. 

Iu, as viuva, a widow, pronounce, vi-uva. 

Oa, as Lisboa, Lisbon, proa, a poop, pronounce, 
hi$bb-a, &c. 

Oe, as /#m, j^w, from the verbs toar, and soar, 
pronounce to-em, &c. 

0/, as rtf/w, bad, pronounce ro~im. 

Oo, as cooper agam, co-operation, pronounce, co- 
cperagao. 

Ui, as rw, a ruin, pronounce ru-ina. 



CHAP. II. 

Of the Articles. 

THOSE particles called Articles, are properly 
prepositions, commonly put before nouns, to 
shew their gender, number, and case. 
These articles are definite or indefinite. 

Of the Definite Article, 

The definite article marks the gender, number, 
and case, of the nouns which it precedes. 

The 



GRAMMAR. 9 

The English tongue has but one definite article, 
namely the, which serves for both numbers. 

The Portuguese has two, viz. o for the masculine 
and a for the feminine. 

The definite article has five cases, the nominative, 
genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative ; because 
the vocative in the nouns is designed and preceded 
merely by the particle o. 

The Declension of the Masculine Article o. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nominative, o, the. Nominative, os, the. 

Genitive, do, of the. Genitive, dos, of the. 

Dative, ao, or o, to the. Dative, aos, or os, to the. 

Accusative, ao, or o, the. Accusative, aos, or os, the. 

Ablative, do, from or by the. Ablative, dos, from or by the. 

The Declension of the Feminine Article a. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nominative, a, the. Nominative, as, the. 

Genitive, da, of the. Genitive, das, of the. 

Dative, a, to the. Dative, as, to the. 

Accusative, a, the. Accusative, as, the. 

Ablative, da, from the. Ablative, das, from or by the. 

£f° Observe, that the Portuguese have an article 
for each gender, both in the singular and the plural. 

Of the Indefinite Article. 

The indefinite article may be put before the mas- 
culine as well as the feminine gender, before the 
plural as well as the singular number. 

The indefinite article has but four cases, the geni- 
tive, dative, accusative, and ablative. 

One may put de before a noun masculine as well 
as a feminine, as hkma corba de rey, a king's crown ; 
the word rey is masculine ; hum chapeo de pdiha, a 
hat of straw; the word palha' is of the feminine 
gender. 

The indefinite article de is also put before the plu- 
ral as well as the singular number: example, kuma 

corba 



10 PORTUGUESE 

coroa de fibres ', a crown of .flowers; hum prdto de 
arroz, a plate of rice. 

Declension of the Indefinite Article. 

Genitive, de of. Accusative, a. 

Dative, a, to. Ablative, de, from. 

($•$- The accusative of this article is not expressed 
in English : example, En conheci a sen pay, I knew* 
his father, eu conheci a sua may, I knew his mother. 

The indefinite article may also be put before infi- 
nitives, and then it signifies to ; as, he tempo defallar, 
de dormir, de ler, &c. it is time to speak, to sleep, to 
read, &c. eu von a ver, afallar, I am going to see, 
to speak. 

N. B. Whenever we meet with of and to in Eng- 
lish, followed by the, remember they are the indefi- 
nite articles, and then we must make use of the in- 
definite article de, or a, in Portuguese. 

When the verb is in the infinitive mood, and 
serves as nominative to the following verb, they put 
the article o before it ; as o come?' e o dormir sao as 
cousas mats necessdrias nesta vida, eating and sleeping 
are the greatest necessaries of life. 

W 7 hen the preposition in is followed by the article 
the or by a pronoun possessive, as in the, in my, in 
thy, in his, we must render it in Portuguese by em 
o or no, em os or nos, for the masculine ; and by em a 
or na, em as or nds, for the feminine : example, in the 
garden, em ojardim, or no jardim ; in the street, em a 
rua or na rua ; in thy book, em o teu, or no ten livro\ 
in his bed, em a iua, or na sua cam-a, &c. 

When after the preposition with, which in Portu- 
guese is expressed by com, we find the articles the, or 
a pronoun possessive, as with the, with my, Sec. we 
may say, com o or co, com a or coa, com gs or cos, comas 
or coas : example, with the prince, com o or co prin- 
cipe -, with the sword, com a or coa espdda ; with the 
eyes, com os or cos olhos ; with my books, com os or 
eos me us livros, &c. 

When 



I 



GRAMMAR. 11 

When the preposition* with is followed by a pro- 
noun possessive, and this by a noun of quality or 
kindred, as with your majesty, with your highness, with 
your excellency, with his brother, &c. with must then 
be rendered by the Portuguese word com, as com 
vbssa majestade, com vbssa alteza, com seu irmao, with- 
out using the article.- 

Observe, that sometimes the dative and accusative 
of the indefinite article are not expressed in English, 
particularly before pronouns personal and proper 
names > example, convem a nos, it behoves us ; An- 
tonio matou a Pedro, Anthony killed Peter. 



C H A P. III. 

Of the Nouns. 

THE Portuguese nouns have various termina- 
tions, as will appear hereafter. 
They have but two genders, the masculine and 
feminine. 

The Portuguese nouns have no variation of cases, 
like the Latin, and the article only distinguishes 
the case. 

Of nouns ending in a ; and of their declension. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. a rainha, the queen. Nom. as rainkas, the queens. 
Gen. da rainka, of the queen, Gen. das rainkas, of the queens. 
Dat. a rainha, to the queen. Dat. as rainkas, to the queens. 
Ace. a rain/ia, the queen. Ace. as rainkas, the queens. 
Voc. o rainka, O queen. Voc. o rainkas. O queens. . 
Abl. daonpella rainka,irom Abl. da on pellas rainkas from 
or by the queen. or by the queens. 

We have already observed that the Portuguese 
Nouns have no variation of cases $ therefore there is 

no 



12 PORTUGUESE 

no occasion to display more examples of their de- 
clensions, because you need but change the article 
according to their gender. 

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in a. 

Nouns ending in a are generally of the feminine 
gender ; as rosa, a. rose ; janella, a window, &c. 
You must except dia, a day, planeta, a planet ; and 
other nouns ending in a, belonging to a man ; as 
mariola, a porter; jesttUa^p. Jesuit : those derived 
from the Greek are likewise masculine ; as dogma, 
epigramma, clirna 5 except scientific names as mathe- 
matical theologia, &c. 

Except also from this general rule some nouns 
that have the accent upon the last syllable 5 at aha- 
ra, a charter, or a prince's letters patent ; Para, one 
of the captainships of the Portuguese America, &c. 

Observe, that the plural of nouns ending in a is 
formed by adding the letter s to the singular ; as 
likewise the plural of all nouns that terminate in 
vowels. 

Observe also, that nouns ending in aa are of 
the feminine gender, and form their plural as those 
ending in a. 

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in e. 

Nouns ending in e are generally of the masculine 
gender ; as dente, a tooth -, valle, a valley -, ventre, 
the womb, &x. 

The exceptions axtfe, faith ; fonte, a fountain ; 
chcive, a key ; tone, a tower ; dve, a fowl ; came, 
flesh or meat ; genie, people ; mbrte, death ; neve, 
snow ; noite, night ; pbnte, a bridge ; peste, plague ; 
parte, part ; serpente, a serpent -, lebre, a hare. 

Except also all names of virtues, vices, faculties, 
and those expressive of the passions of the mind ; as 
virtude, virtue ; santidade, holiness ; bondade, good- 
ness -, vaidade, vanity 5 ociosidade, idleness, &c. 

Thirdlv, 



GRAMMAR. IS 

Thirdly, iddde, age ; velhke, old age ; rusticiddde, 
rusticity; capacidade, capacity ; feliciddde, happi- 
ness ; sorte, fortune ; arte, art ; drvore, a tree ; 
fertilidade, fertility ; sede, thirst ; ' sebe, a hedge ; cbuve, 
cabbage; herddde, a farm or manor ; diamine, a 
chimney ; parede, a wall ; sdude> health ; rede, a net ; 
mare, the tide ; fibre, fever ; gale, a gallery, &c. 

Of the Gender of the Nouns ending in i. 

Nouns ending in / are masculine; as extdsi, a 
rapture ; nebri, a hawk, &c. 

Of Nouns ending in o. 

Nouns ending in o are of the masculine gender ; 
as livro, a book ; filho, a son ; brdgo, an arm ; vest 1 'do , 
a garment ; espelho, a looking glass, &c. Except 
mo-, a ship ; filho, a. fritter or pancake ; eiro, an 
eel. 

Of Nouns ending in u. 

All nouns ending in u are masculine ; asperu, a 
turkey ; grou, a crane. 

Of Nouns ending in y. \ 

Nouns ending in y are of the masculine gender ; 
as rey. king ; pay, father ; boy, ox, &c. except ley, 
a law ; may, a mother. 

1 Of the other Terminations of Nouns, or of those 
terminating in consonants. 

1. All nouns ending in al, are masculine; as 
sinal, a sign or token ; sal, salt. You must except 
cal, lime, which is feminine, and has no plural. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the letter / of the singular into es ; as ^sindes from si- 
nal ; anhxdes from animal. 

2. Nouns ending in ar are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as ar, air. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as ares from ar. 

Some 



U PORTUGUESE 

Some nouns ending in as in the plural are femi- 
nine, arid have no singular ; as rnigas, exequias, 
&c. 

3. Nouns ending in az are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as rapdz, a boy ; except paz, peace. The 
plural is formed by the addition of ez to the singular. 

4. Nouns ending in el are masculine ; as annel ; 
a ring ; papel, paper, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into is; as anneis, from annel \ 
pap e is, from pap el. 

5. Nouns ending in em are of the masculine 
gender 5 as hbmem, a man 5 pent em > a comb, &c. 
Except brdem, order ; viagem, a voyage ; virgem, 
ii virgin, &c. but salvagem, a sort of beast, is com- 
mon. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the mof the singular into ns ; as hbmens from hbmem, 
&c. 

6. Nouns ending in er are of the masculine 
genders as poder, powder $ prazer, pleasure, &C; 
Except cottier, a spoon; mulher, a woman. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as cottier es, from cottier. 

7. Nouns ending in ez are of the masculine 
gender \ as freguez, a parishioner or a customer ; 
mez, month ; arnez, levez, revez, &c. Except 
surdez, deafness ; torquez, vez, &c. 

The plural'of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to thq singular, asfregue'zes, from freguez ; but tez - 
has no plural. 

8. Nouns ending in //are of the masculine gen- 
der ; asfuml, a funnel ; barr'tl, a barrel. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into s, as funis, from funil, &c. 
Except aquatil, facil, penstl, &c. which change the 
il into els in the plural, as faceis, from facil. 

9. Nouns ending in /w-are of the masculine gen- 
der, as espadhn, a little sword. 

The 



GRAMMAR. 15 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the m of the singular into ns, as espadms from es- 
padim. 

10. Nouns ending in ir or yr are of the mas- 
culine gender^ but martir or martyr, a martyr, is 
common. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 

1 1. All nouns, ending in iz are of the mascu- 
line gender ; as apprendiz an apprentice ; nariz, 
nose ; verniz, varnish ; matiz, a shadowing in paint- 
ing ; chafariz, chamar'iz, &c. Except aboiz, perdiz, 
raiz, cordomz, matriz t Sec. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as perd/zes from perdiz. 

12. Nouns ending in o/are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as anzbl, a hook ; sol, the sun, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into es, as anzoes from anzbl, 
&c. 

13. Nouns ending in om'are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as som, sound ; dom, gift, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the m of the singular into ns, as sons from som, &c. 

14. Nouns ending in or are of the masculine gen- 
der - 3 as amor, love, iembr, fear, &c. Except dor, 
pain ; cor, colour, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as ambres from amor. 

Nouns ending in os are of the masculine gender; 
as Deos,God. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing, 
the s into zes, as Deozes from Deos. 

15. Nouns ending in oz are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as albernbz, a Moorish coat ; qrroz, rice ; a/goz 9 
hangman, Sic. Except nbz, a walnut, vbz, voice y 
foz, the mouth of a river. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 

16. Nouns 



16 PORTUGUESE 

16. Nouns ending in ul or um are of the mascu- 
line gender ; as sul, the south ; Saul, Saul, a proper 
name of a man ; atum, tunny-fish. 

The plural of those ending in ul, according to the 
learned Bluteau, is formed by changing the /of the 
singular into es, as sues from sul, azues from azul 
blue, &c. Except consules from consul, a consul. 

The plural of those ending in um, is formed by- 
changing the m of the singular into ns, as atuns 
from atum, 

17. Nouns ending in uz are of the masculine 
gender ; as arcabuz, an arquebuss. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 

18. Nouns ending in do are of the feminine gen- 
der ; as mdo, hand ; composicdo, composition, ora~ 
gdo, oration, &c. Except pdo, bread 3 anao, a 
dwarf; ougdo, a hand-worm; trovdo, thunder^ es- 
quadrdo, a squadron; pido, a child's top; borrdo, 
a blot with ink ; papeldo, brown paper ; c/ido, the 
ground, quinhao, a share. 

There is no certain rule for the formation of the 
plural of the nouns ending in a ; because' some 
change the do of the singular into des, as Alemdes, 
from Alemdo, a German ; capitaes, from eapitdo, a 
captain ; cads, from cad, a dog, paes, from pad, a 
loaf; &c. : Some change the do of the singular in- 
to dos ; as cidaddos, from cidaddo, a citizen ; chri- 
stdos, from chrisido, a christian ; cortezdos from cor- 
tezao, a courtier ; villdes, from villdo,z. villain, &c. 
Some change the do of the singular into des; as es- 
quadroes, from esquadrdo, a squadron ; trovdes,. from 
trovdo, thunder; conclusdes, from conclusdo, a con- 
clusion of these sheets ; oragezs, from oragdo, an ora- 
tion : and generally all the Portuguese nouns that 
may be easily made English, by changing their ter- 
mination gdo into the English termination Hon, as de- 
clinacao, declension or declination, consideragdo, con- 
sideration, &c. and these are of the feminine gender. 

19. All 



GRAMMAR. n 

19. All nouns signifying a male, must be of the 
masculine gender^ as duque, duke ; marquez, a mar- 
quis ; conde, count, and those denoting a female are 
always feminine. '' 

You may form two general rules from what has 
been said concerning the formation of the plural of 
nouns, viz. 

I. That all nouns ending in any of the vowels 
have their plural formed by adding the letter s to 
the 1 singular. 

If. That the plural of nouns ending in az, ez, iz, 
oz 3 uz> is formed by adding es to the singular. 

Of Augment atives. 

The Portuguese have their augmentatives formed 
by the increase of one or two syllables, which 
they add to the end of their nouns, and se ve 
either to augment the signification of nouns, or to 
declare a thing contemptible ; and so, from homem, 
a man, they form, homemzarrao, a great strong 
man ; tolo, a fool, toleirao, a great fool, &c. 
and some others that may be learnt by use. 
They have also their augmentatives for the femi- 
nine 5 2^,molher6na > a great stout woman j toleirona, 
&c. 

There are a great many nouns that appear, by 
their termination, to be augmentatives, though they 
are not ; as,forao, a ferret , atafona, an ass or a horse- 
mill, &c. 

Of Diminutives. 

The diminutives lessen the signification of their 
primitives. 

The diminutives in the Portuguese language are 
always formed by changing the last vowel of the pri- 
mitives into inho ; but they denote either smallness 
of things, or kindness and flattery $ as bichmko, a 
little worm, from b'icho>a. worm; coitad'mkoy hom 
coitado. a poor little man ; bonithiho i a little pretty 

C person 



18 PORTUGUESE 

person or thing, from jfawto, pretty. Sometimes 
they are formed by adding zhi/io to the primitives ; 
as caozinho, a little dog, from cao, a dog, irmaozmhoy 
dear little brother, from irmao, 8rc. 

The diminutives that serve for the feminine have 
their termination in Ma, or zinka ; as maozmha, 
a little hand, from moo, a hand 3 cabecmha, a little 
head, from cabeca, a head. You may see in the last 
example, that the diminutives serving for the femi- 
nine and ending in inha, are formed by changing 
the last syllable a of the primitive into hiha. 

Observe that many nouns appear to be diminu- 
tives without being so , as mohiho, a. mill ; espmha, 
a fish-bone. 

Note, the diminutives in Portuguese convey some- 
times a bad meaning, and denote contempt. 

Of Nouns Adjective. 

All adjectives ending in make their feminine by 
changing into a -, as dbuta, from douto, learned ± 
but mao, bad, makes ma in the feminine. 

Those that end in ao have their feminine in aa > 
as, saa, from sao, healthy ; loucaa, from loucao, brisk, 
gay, beautiful 3 meaa, from meaa, middling, ordi- 
nary. 

Those ending in e are common to both genders ; 
as, forte, strong, &c. 

Those that end in m make their feminine by add- 
ing an a to the masculine 5 as, huma, from hum^ 
one ; alguma, from algum, some, &c. and sometimes 
by changing the m into a ; as, commua, from com- 
mum, common ; boa, from bom, good. 

Those that end in u make their feminine by add- 
ing a to the masculine, as nua, from nu, naked 9 
crua, from cru, raw. 

Those that end in ez are common to both gen- 
ders -, as cortex, civil, kind ; capaz, capable, &c. ex- 
cept some which make the feminine, by adding a to 

the 



GRAMMAR. 19 

the masculine ; as, Franceza, from Franc ez, French; 
Portugueza, from Portuguez, Portuguese. 

Espanhol, Spanish, makes Espanhbla m the fe- 
minine ; but generally those that end in / are com- 
mon to both genders; as, affavel, affable; cruel, 
cruel, &c. 

Of the Comparison of Adjectives^ 

The comparison of adjectives is the way of in- 
creasing their signification by certain degrees, which 
are three, viz. the positive, comparative, and super- 
lative. 

The positive lays down the natural signification 
of the adjective ; as, nbbre, noble ; grande, great. 

The comparative raises it to a higher degree, by 
comparing it to the positive, which in Portuguese 
is performed by the adverbs mais, more ; menos, less ; 
as, mais nobre, more noble ; menos bella, less hand- 
some. 

There are some adjectives which do not admit of 
mats or menos before them ; as, celeste, nacido, com- 
prado, desterrado, &c. 

There are four Portuguese comparatives which 
end in or : they may -also be expressed by mats, 
more, before their positive ; as, 
Mayor, greater, mais grande. 
Menbr, less, mats pequeno. 
Pebr, worse, mais rohn. 
Melhbr, better, mais bom. 

To which may be added superior, superior ; in~ 
feribr, inferior ; deteribr , and some others. 

Observe, that there can be no comparison made 
without the word than-, and that this word is ex- 
pressed in Portuguese by que. Ex. Mais claro que o 
sol, clearer than the sun ; mais brdnco que a neve, 
more white than the snow. The particle que is 
sometimes preceded by the word do. Ex. isto he 
mais do que eu Ihe d'tsse, this is more than I told him y 

C 2 be 



20 PORTUGUESE 

he mais prudent e do que parece, he is more wise than 
it appears 

N. B. The comparatives superior, inferior, and 
some others, do not require que before the second 
term but the dative of the articles, viz. a, as, do, 
aos : Ex am p. O cutro he superior a este, the other is 
superior to this. 

When the Portuguese have a mind to heighten 
their comparisons, they make use of, muito mais, a 
great deal or much more ; as also of muito menos, a 
great deal, or much less. Ex. C<esar he muito mais 
estimado que Pompeo, Caesar is much more esteemed 
than Pompey ; Pompeo fbi muito menos feliz que Ca- 
sar, Pompey was much less happy than Caesar. 

Of the Superlative. 

The Portuguese^ superlative is formed from the 
noun adjective, by changing the last letter into 
issimo for the masculine, and into issima for the femi- 
nine : thus, from bello is formed bellissimo and bellis- 
sima, most handsome. But sometimes the superla- 
tive is formed by adding muito, very, to the posi- 
tive ; as, muito alto, very tall. 

Observe that some superlatives are differently 
formed; as, frigidissimo, from frio, cold 5 amicissimo, 
from amigo, friend; antiquissimo, from antigo, an- 
cient ; capacissimo, from capdz, capable ; nobilissimo, 
from nobre, noble -, acerrimo, from acre, sharp, or 
acerb ; riquissimo, from rico, rich ; fertilissimo, from 
fertil, fruitrul ; bonissimo, from bom, good ; Jidelis- 
simo, from fiel, faithful -, sacratissimo, from sagrado, 
sacred, &c. 

The most is expressed also in Portuguese by mais 
and a mais ; as the most fair, or fairest, mais bel- 
lo, a mais bella. But you must observe, that there 
are some adjectives which do not admit of muito, 
very. mais, ox a mais ; as morto, desterrado, &c. 

Observe, that by changing the last letter of the 
superlatives into amente, superlative adverbs are 

composed 5 



GRAMMAR 



21 



compofed ; as, from doutijfimo, learned, doutifjima- 
mente, moil learnedly, &c. But the pofitive adverbs 
are formed by adding mente to the feminine of the 
pofitive; as, doutamente, learnedly, from douta, the 
feminine of dbuto , prudent entente, prudently, from 
prudent e 9 prudent. 

Of numeral Nouns ; and first, of Cardinal. 
The cardinal nouns are fuch as exprefs the num- 
ber of things ; as, 

Vinte e do us, twenty-two 
Vinte e ires, &c. twenty. 

three, &c. 
Trinta, thirty 
Quarenta, forty 
Cmcoenta, fifty 
Sejfenta, fixty 
Setenta, feventy 
Oitenta, eighty 
Noventa, ninety 
. Cem, a hundred 

Duzentos, two hundred 
Trezentos, three hundred 
Mil, a thoufand 
•Dous mil, two thoufand 
Milhao, or cento., a million 
Huma dezena, half a fcore 
Huma Duzia, a dozen 
Huma Vintena, a fcore 
Duas Vinthias, two fcore 
Tres Vintenas, three fcore 



Hum, one 

Dous, two 

Tres, three 

Quatro, four 

Cinco, five 

Seis, fix. 

Sete, feven 

Outo or otto, eight 

Nove, nine 

X)^z, ten 

O'nze, eleven 

Doze, twelve 

Treze, thirteen 

Quatorze, fourteen 

Ouinze, fifteen 

Dezafeis, fixteen 

Dezafete, feven teen 

Dezouto, eighteen 

Dezanove, nineteen 

Vinte, twenty 

Vinte e hum, twenty-on« 



Obferve, that all the cardinals that are adjective 
nouns, arenot declined, beingof the common gender, 
except hum, huma, one; dous, duas, two ; and thofe 
compofed of cento, a hundred ; as, duzentos, duzen- 
ias, two hundred ; quatro centos, quatro centas, four 
hundred, &c. and when the feminine huma is pre- 
ceded by a, and followed by a outra, then huma fig- 
nifies first, and a Sutra, fecondiy. 

The plural, huns, humas, is taken fometimes in- 
Head of alburn, algumas, fignifying fome ; as hum 
reys, fome kings; humas rahihas, fome queens, 



C3 



,R. 



22 PORTUGUESE 

N. B. Cento lofes to before a noun, either mafcu- 
]ine or feminine, and the n is changed into m ; there- 
fore you mult fay, cem fc/dados, not cento fo/dados. 
It only, retains to and n when it is followed by an- 
other number, as cento e hum, &c. a hundred and one, 
&c. and when it is fubfiantive. 

N. B. Sometimes cento is made a fubfiantive; as 
hum cento de cajlanhas, one hundred of chefnuts ; and 
fo ail the cardinal numbers, when preceded by an 
article, or by another noun of numbers, as o cinco 
de paos, the five of clubs ; hum fete, a feven. 

The cardinal number is rendered into Englifh ■ 
by the ordinal, when it exprefses the day of the 
month, or the date of any act ; as, chegou a quatro 
de Mayo, he arrived the fourth day of May. ' 

Ordinal Nouns. 

Ordinal nouns are fuch as exprefs the order of 
things; as, 

Primeiro, firft Decimo-oitavo, eighteenth 

Segundo, fecond Decimo-nono, nineteenth 

Terceiro, third Vigefimo^ or ventefimo, twen- 
Qtiarto, fourth tieth 

Quinto, fifth Vigejimo^primeiro, one and 
Sexto, fixth . twentieth 

Setimo, feventh Trigefimo, thirtieth 

Oitavo, eighth Quadrage/imo, or quarentefi- 
Nono, ninth mo, fortieth 

Decimo, tenth Ouinquagcfimo , fiftieth 

Undecimo, or onzeno, eleventh Sexagejimo, fixtieth 

Duodecimo, twelfth Septuagejmo, feventieth 

Decimo-tercio, thirteenth Octagefimo, eightieth 

Decimo- quarto, fourteenth Nonagejimo, ninetieth 

Decimo- quinto, fifteenth Centejirno, the hundreth 

Decimo-Jexto, fixteenth Millefimo, the thoufandth 

Decimo-fkimo, feventeenth U'ltimo, the laft 

The proportionable numbers zre,Jimp/ez, duplicado 
or dobrddo, iriplicado or tr/plice or trefdobrado, qua- 
druplicado or quadruplo, centuplo^ a fingle, double, 
threefold, fourfold, a hundredfold. 

The 



GRAMMA R. 23 

The diftributive nouns are, hum a hum, one by 
one ; dous a dous, two by two. 

In Engliih all ordinal numbers may be formed 
into adverbs ; but in Portuguefe they have only 
primeiramente, and fecundariamente, or fegundariamen- 
te, firft, fecondly ; "and to exprefs thirdly, fourthly, 
&c. they fay, emterciho lugar, em quarto lugar, in the 
third place, in the fourth place. 

A method (for thofe who under/land French) to 

learn a great many Portuguefe words 

in a fhort time. 

We must obferve, that the French fyllable cha is 
generally exprefled in Portuguefe by ca, rejecting 
the h. Exam p. Charbon, charite, chajlete, chapon, 
chapelle, ckapitre, &c. the Portuguefe fay, carvao, 
caridade, cafiiddde, capao, capella, cap'itulo, &c. Ob-. 
ferve alfo the following rules. 

French words ending in anc€, or ence ; as, con- 
Jfance, vigilance, clemence, prudence, &c. in Portu- 
guefe end in ancia or encia ; as conft ancia, vigilancia, 
dementia, prudencia, &c. 

Agne makes anha ; montagne, montanha ; cam- 
pagne, campanha. 

Ie makes ia , comedie, comedia. Here you lean 
the accent upon the e, and not upon the /, as in 
French ; poefie, poesia. 

Oire makes bria ; gloire, gloria ; viftoire, victoria. 

Ure makes ura ; impofture, impoftura; figure, 
figura. 

Ifon makes zao ; raifon, razao ; prifon, prizao. 

On makes ao ; charbon, carvao , baron, barao. 

Ulier makes ular : regulier, regular y particulier, 
particular. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguefe in e. 

Ant, ante -, vigilant, vigilante ; amant, amante. 
Ent, adjective, ente ; prudent, prudinte ; diligent, 
diligfate* 



24 PORTUGUESE 

Ti makes dade ; purete, piiridade , liberalite, U- 

beraiidade. 

French Terminations ending inPortuguefe in vel. 

AbkyVel; louable, louvavel ; aimable, amavel. 
French Terminations ending in Portuguefe in ez. 

Oisy names of nations, ez -, Francois, Franc ez , 
Anglois, Jng/iz. 
French Terminations ending in Portuguefe in o. 

Ain 3 and ien, names of nations, ano; Romain, 
Romano: Italien, ltaliano ; Napolitain, Napolitano, 
Aire, ario : fal aire, fa/arid; temeraire, temerario. 
Eau, eo, cbapeau ; chapio. 
Ent\ fu bflantive, into ; facrement, facraminto. 
Eux, Sfo ; genereux, generofo, grzcieux, graciofo. 
If ivo ; actif, activo, passif, passive. 
C y CO, pore, pur co , Turc, Turco. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguefe in or, 

Eur, or , terreur, terror y humeur, humor; chaleur, 
calbr. 

Change of Terminations of the Verbs and Par- 
ticiples. 

Er, in the infinitive mood of the flrfi: conjugation, 
makes ar ; aimer, amcir ; cbanter, caniar. 

Ir makes /r, in the infinitive mood: as, partir, 
partir -yizxAWyfentir. 

Oir makes er in the infinitive mood ; as, concevoir> 
conceber. 

The participles in e make ado , aime, amddo ; 
parle, fallado. 

The participles in i make ido , dormi, dor mi do ; 
menti, mentido. 

The participles in u make do: as, concu, concebido, 
entenduy entendido, &c. 

There are a great many Portuguefe words that 
have no manner of analogy with the French, which 
prevent thefe rules from being general. 



GRAM M A R. 25 

CHAP. IfL 

Of Pronouns. 

THE pronouns are perfonal, conjunctive, mixed, 
pofitive, demonflrative, interrogative, relative, 
or improper. 

Of perfonal Pronouns. 

The pronouns perfonal are en and nos for the flrft 
perfon ; they ferve for the mafculine and the femi- 
nine. 

Tu and vos for the fecond; thefe ferve alfo for 
the mafculine and feminine. 

Elk for the third perfon of the mafculine gender; 
and elks in the plural. 

Ella, for the third perfon of the feminine gender, 
-makes in the plural ellas. 

The pronouns perfonal are declined with the arti- 
cle indefinite, d$, a, a, da. 

The Declension of personal Pronouns. 

First Person. 
Singular Number. Plural Number. 

Norn. En, I. Nom. hoj, we. 

Gen. de mim, of me. Gen. de nos, of us. 

Dat. a ?nim, to me. Dat. a nos, or no s, us. 

Ace. a mini, me. Ace. a nos, us. 

Abl. de mini, or por mini, Abl. de nos, or por no-s, 
from or by me. from or by us. 

With me 'is rendered by comigo ; and fometimes 
they add the pronoun mefmo to it; me is expreffed 
by me in the Portuguefe ; as fpeak to mz,fallai-me ; 
tell me, dizei~me : fend me, mandai-me ; write to me, 
efcrevei-me ; elk d'ljje-me, he told me, &c. 

With us is rendered by Portuguefe by com nofco. 

Us 






2jS P O PvT uguese 

Us is rendered by nos. Examp. tell us, dizeinos ; 
give us, dai-nosj show us, mofirai-nos ; ?//<? d'JJe-nos, 
he told us, &c. In thefe examples us is not a pro- 
noun perfonal, but conjunctive, as you will fee . 
hereafter. 

Second Person. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. tu, thou, Nom. vis, ye or you. 

Gen. de ti r of thee. Gen. de vos, of you. 

Dat. a ti, or te, to thee. Dat. a vos, or vos, you. . 

Ace. 12 ti, or ^, thee. Ace. a vos, or t/w, you. 

Abl. de ti, ox por ti, from Abl. de vos, ox por vos, horn 
or by thee. or by you. 

#7/^ /fo* is rendered by comt/go-, and fometimes 
they add to it the pronoun me/mo. You, or yourfelf, 
after imperatives are rendered by vos, and not vos ; 
as, be you contented, content ai-vos ; (how yourfelf, 
mojlrai-vos ; hide yourfelf, efcondei-vos. 

Thee or thy/elf, are expreffed after imperatives by 
/£; as mbjlrate, fhow thyfelf. 

With you is rendered in Portuguefe by row v<?/?0. 

Third Person. For the Masculine. 
Singular. Plural. 

Nom. elle, he, or it, Nom. elles, they. 

Gen. delle, of him, or of it. Gen. delles, of them. 

Dat. a elle, to him, or to it. Dat. a elles, to them. 

Ace. tf ///*, him, or it. Ace. a elles, them. 

Abl. delle ox por elle, from Abl. delles ox por elles, £xom 
or by him or it. or by them. 

The Portuguefe have no particular pronoun, as 
our it, for things that are inanimate. 

Remember that the pronoun him, or to him, when 
joined to a verb, is always rendered in Portuguefe, 
by Ihe, and them, or io them, by Ihes. 

With him is rendered in Portuguefe fometimes by 
com elle, and fometimes by comfigo, to which they add 
the pronoun me/mo. 

Third 



GRAMMAR. 27 



Third Person. Feminine. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ella, she or it. Nom. ellas, they. 

Gen. delta, of her or of it. Gen. deltas, of them. 

Dat. a ella, to her or to it. Dat. a ellas, to them. 

Ace. a ella, her or it. Abl. a ellas, them. 

Abl. delta, or por ella, from Ace. deltas or j&<?r ///<w, 
0r by her 0r it. from or by them. 

Remember that the pronoun her or to her, when 
joined to a verb, is always rendered in Portuguefe 
by Ihe, and them, or /p /^w, by Ikes ; as you will fee 
in the pronouns conjun6tive. 

#^ her is rendered in Portuguefe by com ella or 
comfigo. 

Of the Pronoun fi, himfelf, or one's felf. 

There is another pronoun perfonal that ferves 
indifferently for the mafculine and feminine : this is 
fi, one's felf. It has no nominative. 

Gen. de fi, of one's self, himfelf, or herfelf. 

Dat. a fi, to one's felf, &c» 

Ace. dfi, one's felf, &c. 

Abl. de fi, por fi t from or by one's felf. 

It is joined with the pronoun mefmo or mef- 
ma ; as de or por fi mefmo, by himfelf; por fi mefma, 
or de ft me [ma, by herfelf; o homem nao ama fenao a 
fi mefmo, man loves himfelf only;'^#z nao he bom 
fenao para fi, nao he hem que viva, who minds no 
body but himfelf only, don't deferve to live ; o vicio 
he abominavel de ft mefmo, vice is hateful of itfeif ; 
iz terra de ft, or de.fi mefma he fertil, the earth is 
fruitful of itfeif. 

Obferve that they join alfo the pronoun mefmo to 
pronouns perfonal, as the French do with their pro- 
noun mime> viz. 

Eu 



28 PORTUGUESE 

Eu mefmo, mvfelf. nes mefmos, ourfelves. 

Tu m'efmo, thyfelf. vos mefmos, yourfelves. 

E'lle mefmo, himfelf. elks mefmos \ i r % 

Ella mefma, herfelf. ellas mefmas J 

o komem me/mo, man himfelf; a mefma virtude, virtue itfelf. 

lft. Obferve, that mefmo with the article is alfo 
an adjective, fignifying the fame ; thus o mefmo, a 
mefma, os mefmos, as mefmas, the fame, relating to 
fome nouns expreffed or underftood. 

2dly. Note, That they alfo join the adjective 6u- 
tro, other, to the plural of the pronouns perfonal, 
/ and thou ; so they fay, nos cutros, we -, vos outros, 
you. 

3dly. Comfigo may be rendered in Englifh (as we 
have faid above) by with him and with her; but you 
muft obferve, that it may be rendered alfo by with 
them in the plural ; and fometimes by about him, 
about her or about them. Exam. Elle or ella, nunc a 
traz dinheiro comfgo, he, or fhe, never has money 
about him, or about her. 

Of conjunctive Pronouns. 

The pronouns conjunctive are fo called, becaufe 
they always come immediately before or after the 
verb that governs them. 

The pronouns conjunctive bear a great refem- 
blance to the pronouns perfonal ; the pronouns per- 
fonal are, 
Eu, I; tu, thou; elk, he: nos, we; vos, ye; elks, they. 

There are feven pronouns conjunctive, viz. me t 
to me, or me : te, to thee, or thee ; fe, to himfelf, 
or himfelf, to herfelf, or herfelf ; Ihe to him, or him, 
to her, or her ; nos, to us, or us ; vos, to you, or you ; 
Ihes, to them, or them. 

Example. 

Ijlo me agrada, this pleafes me ; he-me neceffaric, I want. 

Deos te ve, God fees thee. 

E'lla fe leuva, ihe pmifes herfelf. 

En 



GRAMMAR. 29 

E'u lhe direi, I will tell him, or I will tell her. 
E'u Ihes pro?netti, I promifed them : as well for the maf- 
culine as the feminine. 

The pronoun conjunctive, lhe, is always put after 
the verb, when it is in the imperative mood -, as 
dizii-lhe, tell him ; cortai-lhe as azas, cut his wings; 
but when the verb is in fome other mood, it may be 
put either before or after it ; as Hie Ihe coribu, or 
elle cortou-lhe a cabeca, he has cut off his head. The 
fame obfervation takes place in the other pronouns 
conjunctive. 

The pronoun conjunctive, fe, is fometimes fol- 
lowed by me, Ihe, &c. as offer ece-fe me, it is offered 
to me; reprefentou-fe Ihe, it w T as reprefented to him, 

fee. 

i ft. Note, that the pronouns conjunctive are 
very often joined to a verb, preceded or followed 
by the verb haver. Examp. Dar Ihe hiitantapancada, 
or eu Ihe hii de dar thnta pancada, que, &c. I will 
cudgel him fo much, that, &c. 

2dly, Lhe is fometimes rendered in Englifh by 
you. Examp. Que lhe par ice aqitillo f What do you 
think of that ? ajjsnte no que lhe d/go, be perfuaded, 
or believe what 1 tell you. 

Of Pronouns mixed. 

There are fome pronouns in Portuguefe which 
are compofed of the pronouns perfonal and con- 
junctive, and which therefore are called mixed. 

To clear up this matter, you mull exprefs them 
: as underneath, changing the letter e of the pronoun 
conjunctive into o for the rnafculine, and a for the 
feminine ; as to fay, to me of it', inftead of me o, or 
me a, you muft fay, mo or ma. In the like manner* 
inftead of lhe o or lhe a you muft fay, Iho or lha, &c. 
as you may obferve in the following pronouns mixed, 
or rather contracted. 

mo 



r me of it, / thee of it 

mo, m. 3 or to J or 

C it or him to me. C it or him to thee. 

f me of it. e thee of it 

?na, f. s or ta < or 

' it or her to me. C it #r her to thee. 



mos,m, 



( me of them, c thee of them 

1 tnem\ 



l me ot them, ( 

,m, ) Qr tos, m. \ 

, f . / . : taj, f. / 

' v them to me ' t 



or 
mas, t. i , taj, t. / - . 

v them to me ' t them to thee. 

felo, m. 1 it to himfelf, to herfelf, or to themfelves. 

fela, f. J it to herfeif, to himfelf, or to themfelves. 

felo s,m. l them to himfelf, to herfelf, or to themfelves. 

ftlas % f. j them to herfelf, to himfelf, or to themfelves. 

r to him, or to her of it 

Iko, m. < 0r 

C it to him, or to her. 

f to him, or to her of it 

lha, f. < or 

' it to him, <?r to her. 

Ihos, m. "> to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 

Ikas, f. j to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 

nolo, m. 1 us of it, or it to us. 

nola, i. - / us of it, or it to us. 

nolos, m. p. \ them to us. 

nolas, f. p. J them to us. 

volo. m. \ c . . f 

, ■ r ^ y° u °* Ifc » ^ r jt °* y 013 * 

vo s, . p. > y Qu Q £ ^gjjj^ tfr ^gjn to y OU# 

Here you have fome examples. 

Para dar-lho, to give it to him or to her. 

Dai-mo, give it me. 

Eu to darei, I'll give it you. 

Entrego to, I deliver it to you. 

Dize-lho, you tell it him, or her. 

Entrega Ihos, deliver them to him, or to her. 

La silo baja, let that to himself. 

Elk nolo disse, he told us of it. 

Eu volos mandarei, I'll send them to you. 

If the verbs are in the infinitive, the pronouns 

mixed may be put either before or after the verbs ; 

as, para dizermo^ or para mo dizer, to tell me it ; 

but if the verbs are in the gerund, the pronouns 

mixed 



GRAMMAR. |i 

mixed rauft be tranfpofed ; as, dizindomo, and not 
mo dizendo, in telling me it. 

You rauft make ufe of thefe pronouns, both maf- 
culine and feminine, according to the gender of the 
thing named, sent or delivered, and not of the per- 
fon to whom the thing is faid, fent, given, &c. 

Of pojfejjive Pronouns. 

Pronouns pofieffive, fo called, becaufe they denote 
that the thing fpoken of belongs to the perfon or 
thing they are connected' with, are of two forts, ab- 
folute and relative. See the remarks hereafter. 

The Englifh have no article in the nominative 
before the pronouns pofieffive ; but the Portuguefe 
have, 2lS, my, o meu, ammha, fern. Plur. os mens, as 
^minhas, fern. 

The pronouns poiTeflive in Portuguefe are the 
following : 

' Sing, meu, m. minha, f. 1 

Plur. metis, m. minhas, f. j ^* 

Sing, tiu, m. tua, f. ? , 

Plur. this, m. tuas, f. j ^* 

Sing;, feu, m. 1 , • 

-ni & /> r nis or its. 

Plur. Jeus, m. J 

in §* J > I h er or j ts 
Plur. Juas, i. J 

Sing, nojfo, m. n6Jfa % f. 1 q ^ 
Plur. nojfos, m. nojfas, f. 3 
Sing, vbjfo, m. t/^i, f. 7 
Plur. vojfos, m. vojfas, f . 3 - 
The pronouns pofTeflive are declined with the 
definite article for the rnafculine, and a for the fe- 
minine. 

Example. 

Singular. 

Nora. meu livro, my book. 
Gen. do meu livro, of my book.' 
Dat. ao meu livro, to my book. 
Ace, meu livro, my book. 

Abl. do ou pHlo meu livro, from or by my book. 

Plural 



32 PORTUGUESE 



Plural. 

Nom. os meus livres, my books. 

Gen. dos meus livros, of my books. 

Dat. aos meus livros, to my books. 

Abl. dos ou pellos meus livros, from or by'my books. 

Decline all the other mafculines after the fame 
manner, and their feminines by the article a\ as 
my houfe ; a mmlia cafa ; of my houfe, da mtnha 
chfa\ &c. 

Note, you muft not ufe the definite article when 
the pronouns pofTeflive precede nouns of quality, as 
well as thofe of kindred, but the indefinite article 
de, a, &c. 

Example. 

V'ojfa mage/fade, your majefly. 

Be vcjfa magefiade, of your majefty, &c. 

Meu pay, my father. 

De meu pay, of my father, &c. 

From the above examples it appears that nouns 
declined by the indefinite article have no article in 
the nominative. 

Though the definite article is fometimes ufed be- 
fore nouns of kindred, yet we ought not to ufe it, 
according to the old proverb: tu vivendo bonos, fcri- 
bendofequare peritos. 

Sen is. fometimes made ufe of in room of vojjo and 
vojfa, in the polite way of fpeaking : fo they fay, 
tenho o feu livro, I have your book : fall'ii ho feu 
criado, 1 fpoke to your fervant ; os feus 6/lws fao for- 
mofos, your eyes are handfome. 

Remarks upon the PoJfeJ/ives. 

The pronouns pofTeffive abfolute always come be- 
fore the noun they belong to. We have exprefied 
them above. 

Pronouns 



GRAMMAR. 33 

Pronouns pofleflive relative are fo called becaufe 
they, not being joined to their fubftantive, fuppofe 
it either exprefled before, or understood, and are 
related to it. They are the following : 

Mafc. Fern. 
Sing. Mete, rriinha, \ . 

Plur. Mtus, minhas, f mint ' 

Sincr. Ten, tua, \a* 

t»i t" ±' > thine. 

Plur. Tens, tuas, y , 

Sing. Seu, his, fua, hers. 
Phir. Seus, juas, theirs. 

Sing. Nofo, no fa, \ 
Plur. Nojfos, nbfas, J 0Urs ' 

Sine. Vb/fo, vo/fa, \ 

■di a ir^rr ^rr >your&. 

Plur. Vofos, vofas, y 

To exprefs in Portuguefe it is mine, it is thirte> 
&c. we muft fay kemhi* he ten, &c. 

The pronouns pofleflive abfolate do not agree, in 
Portuguefe, in gender with the noun of the pofTef- 
for, as in Englifh, but with that of the thing pof- 
fefled -, as, a mat ama a feu filho, the mother loves 
her fon % o pai hma a fuafilha, the father loves his 
daughter. So you fee that the pronoun mafculine 
ffa, in Portuguefe, is fometimes rendered by her in 
Englifh, and the feminine /## by his. 

The fame obiervation is to be made upon the 
pofleflives relative, according to the gender of the 
noun that is underftood ; therefore they fay of a 
hat, (for inftance) belonging to a lady, he ofeu, it 
is hers ; becaufe the noun underftood, viz. chapso, 
hat, is of the mafculine gender. 

We have already faid, that feu and fua, are fome- 
times rendered into Englifh by your, when they are 
:abfolute : but you muft alfo obferve, that they are 
! fometimes rendered into Englifh by yours-, when 
they are pronouns relative, and that in the polite 
Way of fpeaking ; and fo they fay, fpeaking of any 
thing belonging to a gentleman or lady, he o feu, or 

D he 



M PORTUGUESE 

he a fua, it is yours ; but if the gentleman or lady 
are not prefent, or it they do not fpeak directly to 
them, though prefent, then the pronouns/<?« and 
fua muft be rendered into Englilh by his or hers. 

Note, That the pronouns poffeffive abfolute, in 
Portuguefe, agree alfo in number with the noun of 
the thing poflefled ; hence it is that they fay a fua 
htfloria, its hiftory, fpeaking of a kingdom, province, 
&c. or, his hiftory, fpeaking of any hiftory com- 
pofed by a man ; or, her hiftory, fpeaking of that 
written by a woman ; or, their hiftory, fpeaking of 
that written by feveral hands, or of ieveral people. 
And from this example you may learn, that the Por- 
tuguefe have no particular pronoun poflefTive for 
things that are inanimate, as we have the pronoun 
its. Hence at laft it follows, that when the Portu- 
guefe poflelTives feu and Jua are relative, they are 
rendered into Englifti by his, or hers, or theirs, ac- 
cording to the gender and number of the noun of 
the pofleffor that is underftood. 

You muft alfo obferve, that they fometimes add 
the third pronoun perfonal, delle, of him, delles, of 
them, della, of her, del/as, of them ; to denote more 
plainly whofe thing it is they fpeak of ; as o feu li- 
vro delles, their book ; as, asfuas palavras della, her 
words, &c. . 

Note, that the pofleffives abfolute are left out 
when they are preceded by a verb, or by a pronoun 
conjunctive, which fufficiently denote whofe thing 
it is they fpeak of ; the Portuguefe being then con- 
tented with the article : as devo-lhe a vida, I owe 
my life to him, or to it ; doe-me a barriga, my belly 
aches. 

When the pronouns pofleffive abfolute are before 
nouns of different genders in the fame fentence, and 
with which they are grammatically conitrued, they 
ought to be repeated ; as, feu phi e fua nnti, his fa- 
ther and mother : not fin pal e mat 

Moreover, 



GRAMMAR. 35 

"Moreover; the Portuguefe ufe the pronoun pof- 
feffive abfolute in the following cafe, when we ufe 
the pofleffive relative ; a friend of mine, hum dos 
mens amigos. 

The poiTeffives mmha, tua,fud, ribfja, vbjfa, may 
be alfo relative, but with a different meaning. Ex- 
amples • Levarei a minha avcinte, I will infill upon 
it, I will obtain it ; Ule levara a fua avante, he will 
infill upon it, he will do it ; levai a vbjfa avdnte, 
go on with your refoiutibn ; fazer das fuas, to play 
tricks, to dodge. 

Os meus, os feus, &c. fignify my relations, of 
my friends, thy relations^ or thy friends ; as, os feus 
nao o querem, his parents or relations do not like 
him ; deixa-o hir com os feus, let him go with his 
people, his countrymen, &c. 

Take notice, that when the pronoun pofTeflive is 
accompanied by a pronoun demonftrative, they 
do not put the article in the nominative ; they 
do not fay b efte meu livro, but efte meu livro, this 
book of mine. But in all other cafes they make 
ufe of the indefinite article -, as 4 y ejie or defte vvjjo 
livro, &c. 

. Of the Pronouns demonftrative* 

They are called pronouns demonftrative, becaufe 
they ferve to point out or demonftrate any thing or 
perfon ; as, this book, efte livro ; that man, aquelie 
homem. 

There are three principal demonftratives in Por- 
tuguefe, viz. efte, this ; efte, that ; aquelie, that \ but 
i obferve that efte Ihews the thing or perfon that is 
! juft near or by us ; ejfe mews the thing that is a little 
farther, or neat the perfon ; and aquelie (hews what 
i is very diftant from the perfon who fpeaks, or is 
1 fpoken of, and is expfelTed in Englilh by that there, 
or yonder. You muft alfo obferve, that ejfe, ejja, is 
ufed in writing to any perfon to exprefs the place or 
town wherein he dwells ; zsienho fallado nijja cidade 

T) 2 com 



36 PORTUGUESE 

com muitos amigos, I have fpoken in your city with 
many friends. 

Thefe Pronouns are declined thus : 

Mafc. Fern. Neut. 

/"Norn, ejie, (fia y i/lo, this, 

l Gen. d'ejle, dejia, dijio, of this. 

Singular. < Dat. a cfte, a ejla, d iflo i to this. 

J Ace. ejie, ejta, ifto, this. 

vAblr defte, dejla^ djfte, from this, 

No Neut. 

Norn, e/les, ejlas, thefe. 

,Gen. 'defies, dejtas, of thefe. 

Plural. ^Dat. aeftes, a ejias % to thefe. 

]Acc. (fies, ejtas^ thefe. 

Abl. dejks, d'ejtas, from thefe 

Fern. Neut. 

ijfo, that or it. 

dijfo, of that &c. 

Singular. -{ Dat. a'Tfe, d^ffa, aijfo, to that. 

iffo, that. 

dijfo, from that. 

No Neut. 

(ffas, thofe. 

deffas, of thofe. 

Plural. -^Dat. alfes, a ijfas, to thofe. 

effas, thofe. 

dejfas, from thofe 

Fem. 

aqu'ella, aquillo, that. 

of that. 





>, to that, 
that. 

from that. 
No Neut. 
Norn, aquelles-,- aquella?> thofe. 

Gen. daquelles y daquelles y of thofe. 

Plural. ^Dat. a aquetles\a aquellas, to thofe. 

Ace. aqitelles; aquellas, thofe. 

L Ab J , daq u illcs^ da q uella s, from thofe 

You 






GRAMMAR. 37 

You muft obferve, that there is an elifion of the 
vowel of the indefinite article in the genitive and 
ablative of the pronouns efle and ' ejfe> both in the 
lingular and plural ; and that they write and pro- 
nounce defte, deflas, &c. inflead of de efle, de eflas $ 
and fo in the neuter they write diffo, d'flo, inflead of 
de if so, de ijlo. The fame obfervation you muft make 
upon the pronoun aquelle, wherein you will fee an- 
other elifion befides, in the dative cafe. 

Note, That both the Portuguefe and Spaniards 
have demonftratives of the neuter gender ; though 
they do not agree with the subftantives as in Latin, 
becaufe they do not fay tflo homem, but efle hbmem, 
this man. But the word cbuja, thing, is always un- 
derftood, though the neuter demonftrative does not 
agree with it ; so that it is the fame thing to fay 
f/lo, or eft a cbufa, this thing ; ifso, or efia cbufa, that 
thing, &c. Example, zfso he or efsa he a cbufa de 
que nos eftamos fallando, that is the thing we are 
fpeaking of ; aquUlo he or aquella he a ecu/a que vos 
deveisfazer, that is the thing you muft do, &c. 

When the prepofition em 9 in, comes before the 
pronouns demonftrative, they make an elifion of the 
vowel of it, and change the confonant m into n - 9 
and fo, inflead of writing and pronouncing em efle, 
em efla, em ijlo, em if so, em aqutllo, they write and 
pronounce, nefle, nefla, n/Jlo, nlfso, &.e. in this, in 
that, Sic. 

The words butro, outra, are often joined to the 
pronouns demonftrative, taking off the laft e ; as 
ejlbutro, efscutro, aquellbutro. Example ; Eft butt o hb- 
mem, this other man; eftbutra wolher, this other 
woman ; efsbutro hbmem, that other man. 

They alfo join very often the pronoun mefmo, the 
fame, to the demonftrative ; as efle mefmo hbmem, 
this very fame man ; aquille mefmo, that very fame 
thing. 

Aqul, alt, and la, are fometimes added to the de- 
monftrative, or on the noun that comes after it, iji or- 

p 3 der 



58 PORTUGUESE 

der to fpecify. and particularize it dill more ; as {fit 
hbmem aqui, this man ; aquella molher la, that wo- 
man : aqui, denoting a near, or prefent object ; and 
M, a diftant and abfent one. 

The pronouns aquelle, aquella, aquelles, aquella^, 
when they relate to perfons, and are followed by the 
relative que, are rendered into Englifh by he who or 
he that Jhe who or that, they who or that ; as aquelle 
que am a a virtude he fe!iz,ht who loves virtue 'is 
happy ; aquelles que defprezao a ciencia nao conhecem 
o valor della, they who defpife learning know not the 
value of it. You mult obferve, that when aquelle, 
aquella, &c. are preceded by efte, efta, &c. then 
efte fignifies the laft thing or perfon fpoken of, and 
aquelle, &c. the fir ft ; as Carlos fo'i grande, Fredkica 
amhicibjo, efte valente, aquelle poderofo, Charles was 
great, Frederic, ambitious, the firft powerful, the 
laft courageous. 

The pronoun poflefiive abfolute his, her, their, 
conftrued in Englifh with a noun followed by the 
pronoun relative who or that before a verb, is made 
into Portuguefe by the genitive of the pronouns 
aquelle, aquella, aquelles, followed by que, and the 
poflefiive is left out; as, all men blame his manners 
who often fays that which himfelf does not think, 
tbdo o mundo cenjura o procedimcnto da que lie que tempor 
cojtume dizer o que tide tern no penjamet.it o ; Providence 
does not profper their labours that flight their befl 
friends, a Providencia nao abencoa o trabalho daquelles 
que defprezao os/eus melhbres am/gos. 

The Englilh pronoun Jitch followed by as or that 
(but not governed of the verb fubflantive to be), is 
alfo rendered into Portuguefe by aquelles que, or 
aquelles taes que, or aquelle que \ as, fuch as do not 
love virtue do not know ir, aquelles or aquelles taes 
que nao amao a virtude, nao a, conhhem. 

The pronouns tfso, fjh, aquillo, before que, are 
Engliihed by what ; as elle diz aqu'dlo qiiejii.be, he 
fays .what he knows. 






GRAMMAR. 



39 



AqueUe is alfo ufed to fhew contempt ; as que quer 
aquelk hbmem ? what does that man defire? 

Of the Pronouns interrogative. 

The pronouns interrogative ferve to afk queflions, 
and are as follows ; who, what, which, quem, 
que, qua/. 

Example. 



Quern h-e ? 

Quern vos dijfe ifo ? 

Que quereis ? 

Com quefefufienta f 

Que eftdisfazendo ? 

De quefejaz ijlo ? 

Que livro he ejte ? 

Que negocios tendes ? 

Que cafa he ? 

De qual falldis vas ? 

Qual delles ? 

Quern or qua/ dos da us? 



who is it ? 

who told you fo ? 

what will you have ? 

what does he maintain him* 

felf with ? i 
what are you doing? 
from what is this done ? 
what hook is this ? 
what affairs have you ? 
what houfe is it ? 
which do you fpeak of ? 
which of them ? 
which or whether of the 

two ? 



Thefe pronouns are thus declined, 



Singular and Plural. 
Masculine and Feminine. 



Singular and Plural. 
Mafculine and Feminine. 
Nom. ^«w, who. 
Gen. de quern, of whom. 
Dat. a quern, to whom. 
Ace. quern, whom. 
Abl. de quern, from whom. 

Qua/ \s ufed in fpeaking both of perfonsand things, 
and is declined thus : 



Nom. que, 
Gen. de que, 
Dat. a que, 
Ace. que, 
Abl. de que, 



what. 
of what, 
to what 
what, 
from what. 



Singular. 
Nom. qual, 
Gen. de qual, 
d qual, 
qual, 
de qua!, 



Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 



Masculine and Feminine, 
which or what, 
of which or what, 
to which or what, 
which or what, 
from which or what. 
*>4 



Flwral 



40 PORTUGUESE 

Plural. Mafculine and Feminine, 

Nom. quaes, which or what. 

Gen, de quaes, of which or what. 

Dat. a quaes, to which or what. 

Ace. qudes, which or what. 

Abl. de quaes, from which or what. 

Obferve, that when the word quer is added to 
quern, or qua/, it quite alters the meaning ; quemquer 
fignifvrng whoever, or any perfon, and qualquer 
any one, whether man, woman, or thing; and 
fonietirn.es they add the participle que to tl^em, as 
quemquer que, &c. 

Of the Pronouns relative. 

Pronouns relative are thofe which fhew the rela- 
tion, or reference, which a noun has to what follows 
it. They are the following ; qua/, which ; que, that 
or which ; cujo, whofe ; quern, who. 

Qua/, in a fenfe of comparifon, is followed by idh 
and then qual is Englifhed by as, and tal by of. 

N. B. When qual is only a relative, it is declined 
with the definite articles o or a. 

The pronoun que may be relative both to perfons 
and things, and is common to all numbers, gen- 
ders, and cafes ; as o Uvro que, the book which ; 
os Uvros que, the books which j a carta que, the let- 
ter which ; as cartas que, the letters which ; o meftrc 
que enfina, the m after who teacheth ; a mother que 
ienlio, the wife that I have ; o kbmem que eu amo, the 
man whom I love ; and it is declined thus : 

Singular and Plural. 

Nom. que, which or who, 

Gen. de que, of which or of whom. 

Dat. a que, to which or to whom. 

Ace. que, which or whom. 

Abl. de que, from which or from whom, 

Qut 



GRAMMAR. '41 

Que is fometimes a conjunction ; as creyo que birei, 
I believe that I fhall go. See the Syntax. 

The relative- -quern, who, is only relative to per- 
fons ; but; in the nominative cafe of the lingular is 
rendered into Englifh by be who, or who j as, quern 
fhlla deve confiderar, &c. he who. f peaks ought to 
confider, &c. eu naofei quern, I know not who. 

Obferve, that quern is common to all numbers, 
genders, and cafes; but it has no nominative in the 
plural, 

Quern is declined thus : 

Singular and Plural. 
Nom. quem., he who, or me who, or whoever. 
Gen. de quern, of whom. 
Dat. a quern, to whom. 
Ace. quern, whom. 

Abl. de quern, from whom.. 

Que m is fometimes a particle disjunctive, and then 
It {\gmx\esfome ; as, quern canta, e quern ri, fome ling, 
and fome laugh ; and fometimes it ferves to excla- 
mation ; as quern me dera ejlar em cafa ! how fain 
would I be at home ! 

Cujo, cuja, is declined thus : 

Mafe. Fern. 

■Nom. cujo, cuja, whofe. 

Gen. de cujo, de cuja, of whofe. 

ing.JDat. a cujo, M cuja, to whofe. 



I 



Ace. cujo, cuja, whofe. 

Abl. de cujo, de cuja, from whofe. 



The plural is formed by adding s to the Angular j 
aj^ cujos, cujas, whofe, &c. 

Note, that cujo mud be followed by the noun or 
term which it refers to, and with which it agrees in 
gender, number and cafe ; as, a pejjoa cuja reputa~ 
cam vos admirats, the perfon whofe reputation you 
wonder at ; o ceo cujo joccbrro nunc a falla, heaven, 
whofe afliftanee never fails ; cfja bella chra, whofe 
fair vifage; cujas bellezas, whofe beauties,; a cujo 



42 PORTUGUESE 

pdi, to whofe father ; de cujos irmaos tenho reeebido, 
from whofe brothers I have received. Obferve alfo 
that cujo is not to be repeated, though the terms 
which it refers to be of different number; as, cuja 
v-alia e bbras, whofe value and deeds. 

Note, that o, a, os, as, lo, la, &c. are alfo pro- 
nouns relative, when joined to verbs. See the fyn- 
tax, chap. iv. 

Of the improper Pronouns. 

Thefe pronouns are called improper, becaufe indeed 
they are not properly pronouns, but have a great 
refemblance with pronouns, as well as with adjec- 
tives. They are the following : 

Hum* one. 

A'lguem, fomebody. 

Al^um, fome. 

Ninguem, nobody. 

Nenhum, pone. 

Cadahum, every one, each. 

Cadet, every. 

Outro, outra, other. 

Outre?n, another. 

Qualquer, any one ; whether man, or woman, or thing. 
Qualquer dos dous, either of the two, or whetherfoever of 

the two. 
Quemqucr, whoever, or any perfon, 
Todo, all, or every. Tat, fuch, &c. 

Hum has two terminations, viz. bum, buma; and 
in the plural it makes buns, and bumas. It is declin- 
able with the indefinite article. 

A'lguem has only one termination, and it is only de- 
clinable in the lingular with the indefinite article. 

A'lgum has two terminations, viz. algum, alguma ; 
and in the plural, alguns, algumas. It is declinable 
with the indefinite article. 

Nmgueni has only one termination, and is only 
declinable in the lingular with the indefinite article: 
ninguem o ere, nobody believes it, 

Nenhum 



GUAM MAR. 43 

Nenbumhas two terminations, viz. nenhum, nenhuma t 
and in the plural nenhuns, nenhumas ; and is only de- 
clinable with the indefinite article: nenhum homem, 
no man ; de nenhum effeiio, of no effect. 

Cadahum has two terminations, viz. cadahum, ca~ 
dabuma; but it has no plural, and is only declinable 
with the indefinite article. 

Cdda has but one termination. It has no plural, 
and is only declinable with the indefinite article: 
cada dia, every day; cada mez, every month. 

Outro has two terminations, viz. cutro, outran and 
in the plural, oulros, outras, It is declinable both 
with the definite and indefinite articles. 

Outrem has only one termination. It has no plu- 
ral, and takes the indefinite article. 

Qualquer has but one termination. >It makes 
quaefquer in the plural, and is declined with the 
indefinite article, Qjtalquer is faid both of perfons 
and things. 

Quemquer has but one termination. It has no 
plural, and is declined with the indefinite article, 
It is rendered in Englifli by any body : quemquer vos 
dira, any body will tell you. Quemquer is ufed in 
fpeaking of a perfon. 

Todo has two terminations, viz. todo, toda; and 
in the plural, todos, iodas. It is declinable with the 
indefinite article. It is fometimes taken fubftan-r 
tively, and then it fignifies the whole ; as, o todo he 
mayor que a Jua parte, the whole is bigger than its 
part! 

Tal has only one termination. It makes iaes 
in the plural, and it is declined with the indefinite 
article. .It is common to the mafculine and to the 
feminine genders ; and fometimes it is joined to 
qual; as, tal qual elle be, fuch as it is. 

Tal fupplies fometimes the place of the perfon 
whofe name is not fpecified ; as, bum tal velhaco dive 
fer caftigado, fuch a rogue ought to be punifhed, 

CHAP, 



44 PORTUGUESE 



CHAP. IV. 

Of Verbs. 

THE verb is a part of fpeech which ferves to 
exprefs that which is attributed to the fubjecl: 
in denoting the being or condition of the things and 
perfons fpoken of, the aclions which they do, or the 
imprejjions they receive. 

The firft and the mod general divilion of Verbs 
is into perfonal and irnperfonal. 

A verb perfonal is conjugated by three perfons. 

Example. 

(hi c,mo 9 I love. 

tu amas, thou loveft. 



he loves. 

' nos a?namos, we love. 

Plur.^ vos amdis, ye love. 

Ules amao, they love. 



lur.< v. 



A verb irnperfonal is conjugated by the third per- 
son of the lingular number only ; as, chove, it rains, 
convem> it behoves. 

A verb, confidered in regard to the fyntax, is of 
four forts, viz. active, pafiive, neuter, and recipro- 
cal. 

Some of the verbs are regular, and others irre- 
gular. 

Some are alfo called auxiliary verbs. We fhall 
give their definitions in their proper places. 

Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it 
will be proper to obferve, that all the verbs may be 

, conju- 



G R AM M A R. 45 

conjugated with the pronouns personal, eu, iu, elle, 
&c. or without them. 

Of the auxiliary Verbs. 

The auxiliary verbs are fo called, becaufe they 
help to the conjugation of other verbs. They are 
four in Portuguese, viz. haver, ter, to have;^r, 
eftar, to be. The auxiliary verb fer, to be, is alfo 
called the verb fubftantive, becaufe it affirms what 
the fubjecl is, and is always followed by a noun 
that particularizes what that fubject is ; as fer rico, 
prudente, dbulo, &c. to be rich, wife, learned, &c. 



The Conjugation of the auxiliary Verb ter, or 
haver, to have. 



The Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

ou hey, I have, 

ou has, thou had. 

ou ha, he has or hath* 

Cnos temos, ou havemos, ou hemos, we have. 

Plur.< vos tendes, ou havcis, ou hits, you have. 

Relies tern, ou hao. they have. 

Preterimperfect. 

'iu finha, ou havia, ou hia, I had. 

Sing.^ tu tinkas, ou havids, ou hias, thou hadft. 

J lie ttnha, ou havia, ou hia, he had. 
nos tinhamos, ou haviamos,o\\ hiamos, we had, 

Plur.-^ vos tinhieis, ou havieis, ou hieis, you had. 

///e* tinhao, ou havia o, ou /zztfc, they had, 
Preterperfe£l definite. 

f/z/ &'*;£, ou h ouve, I had. 

Sing,** tu tivejte, ou houvejle, thou hadft. 

V///* //i/^, ou houve, he had. 

r«(7j tivernos, ou kouvemcs, we had. 

Plur.*\ vos tivejles, ou kouvejles, you had. 

I^elles tiverao ou hoverao, they had. 

Prefer- 



fV« tenho, 
!ing.< /« jVtzj, o 



46 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfe£h 

'eu tenko tido, I have had. 

Sin g^ tu tens tido, thou haft had. 



feu tenko tido 
•\ tu tens tido, 
\Jlle tern tido. 



he has had. 
fnos temos tido, we have had. 

PIur.< vos tendes tido, you have had. 

\jlles tern tido, they have had. 

Preterpluperfeft. 

r eu tinha tido, I had had. 

Sing. -J tu tinhas tido, thou had had. 

( elk tinha tido, he had had. 

fnos tinhamos tido, we had had. 

PIur< vos tinhieis tido, you had had. 

X^illes tinhcTo tido, they had had. 

This tenfe may alfo be conjugated thus ; tivera, 
tiveras, ttvera, tiveramos> tivereis, tiveruo. 

Firft Future. 

feu terei, ou haverei, t mall or will have* 

Sing.< tu teras, ou haverds, thou (halt or wilt have< 

X^elle terd, ou havera, he fhall or will have. 

fnos teremos, on haver emos, we lhall or will have, 

PJur.^ vos tereis, ou havereis, ye {hall or will have. 

\_elles terdo, ou haverao, they fhall or will have. 

Second Future. 

Sing, eu Mi de ttr, ou haver, &c. I mufl have, &c. 

Third Future. 

Sing, eu haverei de ter, ou haver, &c. I (hall be obliged to 
have, &c* 

Fourth Future. 

Sing, eu havia de ter^ ou haver, &c. I was to have, &c„ 

Imperative. 

«. J tern tu, ou hdjas tu, have thou. 

S* \ tenha elle, ou Afl/a ///*,■ let him have, 

ftenhamos, ou hajamos nos, let us have. 
PIur.< tende, ou Aaz/Zz', zwj", have ye. 

\tirited, ou Atf/tffl eV/fj, let them have* 

The 



GRAMMAR. 



47 



The imperative has no firft perfon, becaufe it is 
impoflible to command one's felf. 

Optative and Subjundive. 

I join them together, becaufe their tenfes arefimihr. 

Prefcnt. 

que eu tenha, ou hajas, that I have, or that I may have, 
que tu tenhas, ou hdjas, thou haft, or mayeft have. 
que elle tenha, ou haja, he has, or may have. 
quenos tenhamos pwhajamos , we have, or may have. 
que vos tenhais, ou hajais, ye have, or may have. 
que elles tenhao, ou hdjao, they have, or may have, 

Firft Preterimperfecl. 

1 



Sin 



PJur 






f 



Sing. 



Plur. 



Sine 



Plui 



que eu tivira or tlvejfe, 

houvera or houvejfe, 
J que tu tiveras or tivejfe, 

houveras or houvejfes, ' 
que elle tivera or tivejfe, 

houvera or houvejfe, 
fque nos tiveramos or tivejfemos, 

houveramos or houvejfemos 
\ que vos tivereis or tivejfeis, 
I houvereis or houvejfeis, 

j ^ w* ///<? tiverao or tiveffem, 
L houverao or houvejjem, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

/« Z^r/ia ou haveria, 
tu terias ou haverias, 
Hie teria ou kaveria, 
nos teriamos ox\havsria?nos 
vos terms ou haverieis, 
elles teriao ou haveriao. 



that I had, <?r I 
mould, would, 
£?c. have, &5V. 



> 



>ing 



Plur, 



that we had, tfr 
we mould, 
would, &c. 
have, &c. 



I fhould, would, or 
could have, &c. 



we mould, would, 
or could have,&c. 



Preterperfect. 
que eu tenha tido ou havido, 
que tu tenhas tido ou havido, 
que elle tenha tido ou havido, 
que nos tenhdmos tido ou havido, 
que vos tenhais tido ou havido, 
que elles tenha 9 tido ou havido, 



that I have had. 
thou haft had. 
he has had. 
we have had* 
you have had, 
they have had, 

Preter- 



48 PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfect. 
It is compounded of the ftrft preterimperfecl fu&- 
junctive and the participle. 

Cfeeu tivera ou tivejfe ~\ f 

Slng.<Jetu tiver as ou tivejfes j 

\^fe elk tivera ou tivejfe \*iJ J if I had had, 

CJe nos tiveramosoxitivejfemos [ l * j &c. 
PIur.<y^ vos tiver eis ou tivejjeis 

\je elks tiver ao ou tivejfem J L 

Se.cond PreterpluperfecT:. 
It is compounded of the fecond preterimperfed 
fubjunclive and the participle. 

teria ' "S 



feu 
.< tu 



Sing.s tu terms 



W&ji I ftould have had, 6?f* 



PIur.< 5y^ terms 



nos teriamos . 

^//^ teriao J ^ 



Firfl Future. 

f/e eu tiver, if I fhall have. 

Sing. -i tu tiver es, thou fhalt have* 

(^ elk tiver, he fhall have. 

Cfe nos tivermos, if we fhall have. 

Plur.< vos tiverdes, you fhall have. 

^ elks tiverem, they fhall have. 

This tenfe may be conjugated alfo thus : houver^ 
bouvereSy houver; bouvermos, bouverdes, bouvefem* 
See the fynt. of the auxiliary Verbs. 

Second Future. 

It is compofed of the Firfl Future and the Parti- 
ciple. 



tje eu tiver ^ f* 
Sing.< tiver es 

\ |g& \tzdo,\ 

tiver mos ( j 

iPlur,< tiver des 

\^ tivfaem J V. 



tido. < if I fhall have had, &c» 

iiv'er?nos 

tiverdes 
tiverem 



Infinitive Mood* 

Prefent. 

ter t to have. 



Preter*. 



G R A M MAR: 49 

Preterperfect. 

ter tido, to have had. 

Participles. 
Preterit. Sing. tido, tida, Plur. tidos, ttdas, had. 

Future. 

que ha de ter, that is to have. 

Gerunds.. 

iirido, having or in having, tendo, tido, having had. 

Supine. 
It is fupplied in Portuguese by the prepofitions # 
or 'para, and the verb in the infinitive ; as, 
para ter, to have. 

In like manner are conjugated its compounds 
contenhoy detenhoy mantenhOy &c. 

Remarks upon the auxiliary verb, ter, to have. 

The verb ter, to have, is an auxiliary or helping 
verb, which ferves to conjugate other verbs : ex- 
ample, ter Udoy to have read ; nos thnosfeitOy we have 
done ; elles tern v\fto y they have feen, &c. 

When the verb ter is followed by the participle que % 
before an infinitive mood, it denotes the duty, incli- 
nation, &c. of doing any thing; as, que iendes que 
fazerf what have you to do? tenho que faze r huma 
vifitciy I mufl pay a viiit ; tile tern mm to que dizer*. 
vos, he has a great many things to tell you. 

Of the auxiliary verb haver. 

This is one of the moft ufefui verbs in Portuguefe, 
iince it is not only auxiliary to itfelf, as eu hei de 
haver y I muft have; euhavia de haver, 1 was to have, 
&c. but alfo to all forts of verbs ; as eu hei de can- 
i idr y 1 will ling, or I mufl fing, or 1 am to fing ; 
eu hei de hir, I mufl go ; eu havia de fallar, I was 
tofpeak; eu hei de escrever y I muft write, &c. In 
which examples you may fee that the verb haver, 
when auxiliary, has generally the particle de and 
the verb of the infinitive mood after it; and 

E that 



£5 PORTUGUESE 

that thenit denotes a firm resolution, possibility, or 
necessity of doing any thing, therefore it is not to 
be rendered into Englifh by the verb to have; as 
you may see by the fecond, third, and fourth future 
of the indicative mood. 

The verb haver, with the particle de, and the verb 
fer, to be, after it, is an auxiliary both to the passive 
verbs, and fometimes to the verb fer itfelf ; as, bit 
de fer feliz, I {hall be happy : O principe ha de Jer 
refpeitddo, the prince ought to be, or mull be, re- 
spected. 

The fame verb haver is also auxiliary without the 
particle de\ but then it is put after the verb to 
which it is auxiliary; and so they fay, ddrvos hei, I 
will give you ; darlhe-hei, I will give to him, &x. 
In which examples you may obferve, that the auxi- 
liary verb haver is put after the verb and the pro- 
nouns conjunctive, ie, Ibe, &c. and sometimes it is 
put after the verbs and the pronoun mixed; as, 
mandar volo bet, I'll fend it to you. Take notice, 
however, that in the foregoing examples the verb 
haver may be put before the other verb ; but then it 
requires the particle de, and has a different meaning; 
as, in the firft example, you ma} fay, hei de darvos, 
I muft .give to you. You muft aLo obferve, that 
when the indicative prefent of the auxiliary verb 
haver is auxiliary to other verbs , as in the foregoing 
examples, you muft cut off the lafr letters ei from 
the future of the verbs; and fo you may say ddrlhe- 
hei, or hei de dar Ihe ; but not darei Ibe-bei, nor bet 
de darei Ihe. Moreover, when the preterimperfect 
havia is to be auxiliary to any verb, and it is to be 
placed after it, you muft make use of Ma t bias, bia, 
biamos, hieis, Mao ,• and so you may say, dar-lbe lua, 
bias, &c. but not dar Ihe havia, bavias, &c. I 
iliould give to him, thou fhouldft, &c. 

We ihall not be at a lofs how to exprefs the in- 
terrogation in Portuguese, if we do but put the pro- 
nouns perfonal after the verbs, as in Englifh, and 

we 



GRAMMAR. 51 

we fhall never mistake in faying terei eu ? fhall I 
have ? temos nos f have we ? tens tu f haft thou ? 
tern elk? has he? but fometimes they do not men- 
tion the pronouns at all ; as, que foremost what fhall 
we do ; cantarimos f fhall we ling ? 

Obferve, that haver is fometimes Englifhed by to 
le ; as, que ha defer de mhn f what is to become of 
me? 

When we fpeak by negation, we mufl ufe the 
word nao before the verb ,• as, nao tenbo^ I have not ; 
vos nao con}jeceis y you do not know, &c. 

The conjugation of the auxiliary verb fer, or eftar % 
to be. 



Indicative. 



Prefent. 

Cki squ or esto'u, I am. 

Sing. < tu es or estds, thou art. 

\elle he or t[ta % he is. 

{nos somas or eftdmos, - we, are. 

vos sdis or estais, you are. 

e lies f do or estav, they are. 



Pre terpluper feet. 



f 

{ 



eu era or estdva, I was. 

Sing. ^ eras or estdva s 9 thou wast. 

era or estdva, he was. 

nos eramos or eftdvamos, we were. 

Plur. ^ ereis or estdveis, you were. 

erao or estdvdo, they were. 



PreteiperFect definite. 



Sing 
Plur 



•{ 
{ 



Sufui or estive, 


I was. 


fbfte or estiveste, 


ihou waft. 


Joi or est eve, 


he was. 


Jomos or'estivemos, 


we were. 


fostes or estivestes, 


you were. 


fordo or estiverdo, 


they were. 


E2 





Preter. 



' 



p PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfect. 

It is compofed of the prefent Indicative of the 
auxiliary verb ter, to have, and .its own participle^ 
sido, or eftado. 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is cpmfounded of the preterirnperfect indica- 
tive, and the participle si do, ox eftado, 

C eu tihlta sido or eftado, I had been. , 

Sing. < tinhas sido or eftcido, ' thou hadfl been, 

(, tinha sido ox eftado, he had been. 

f tin/tamos sido or eftado, we had been. 
Plur. < tinheis sido or eftddo. r you had been. 

^ tinhao sido or eftado, they had been. 

This tenfe may alfo be conjugated thus ; for a, or 
tftrcera ; for as, or eft 'iveras \fbra, or eftivera-, fora- 
mos, or efiiveramos ; fbreis, or eftivereis ; fordo, or 
efliverub. 

Future. 

f eu ferei or eftarei, I fhall <?r will be. 

Sing. < ferds or eftards^ thou {halt be. 

(^ y^7-<2 or eftard, he (hall be. 

feremos, or eftaremos, we fhall be. 

Plur. -^ fereis or eftareis, you mail be. 

^taJ or eftarad, they {hall be. 



{ 

Imperative. 



e . f ft: tu or efta, be thou 

Sing. ^ 



Plur. 4 j£<& 



^ a or eftej a elk, let him be, 

"jejdmos or eftejdmos nos, let us be. 

fc or e/^ii <y^J, be you. 

do or e/iejao elks, let them be. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 
Prefent. 
'cue eujeja or efteja, that I may be, or that I be. 



{£«£ eufeja or <^%£, that I may be, or tha 

y^'flj or eftejas, thou mayst be or be, 
y^/'fl or £/%#, he may be, &c. 



Plur, 






GRAMMAR. 53 

fejdmos or estejdmos, we may be, . 

!P1 u r. < fejdis or estejdis, , you may be. 

(_ jejao or estsjdo, they may be. 

First Preterimperfect. 

(que eufora or fosse, ") that I were <?<r might 

j estivera or estivesse, T be. 

c:.»„ J for as ox fosses. ■ [ . 

bing. < J -n- > J f \- y-rr > thou wert. 

for a or fosse, ^ i 

i J a ■ , J a • , ■ > he were. 

I VI ejtivera or ejtives'sti J 

f que.no s f'oramos or fossemos, 1 , . - 

.' j ,• x ^ ,- / . >tnat we were 

estiveramos ox estivessemos, J 

Pi,,*- J foreis ox fosseis, 1 '• 

iiur. < J . , J . . y . >vou were, 

j estivereis or estivesseis, J 

fordo or fosse m, 

L estiverao or estix)essem, 



fordo or fossem, 1 . , . 

>they were, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

{euferia ox-estaria, I mould (97" would be, 

ferias or estarias^ thou fhouldeft be» 

j^r2^ or estaria, he mould be. 

{feriamos or estariamos, we mould be. 

fcrieis or estarieis, ' you fhould be. 

feriao or estariao-> they mould be. 

PreterperFect. 

It is compounded of the prefent conjunctive of 
the auxiliary verb /^r, and its own participle #'<&, 
or eftado. 

C que eu tenka sido or estddp, that I have been. 
Sing. < tenhas sido or eft ado, thou hall been. 

(^ //?z/^ j/rtV, &c. he has been. 

C tenhdmos sido, &c. that we have been. 

Plur. < tenkdis sido, &c. you have been. 

^ tenhdo sido, &Cj they have been. 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the firft preterimperfecl fub~ 
junctive of the verb ter t and its own participle. 

E 3 Sing. 



54 PORTUGUESE 

' fe eu tivcra or tiveffe 1 -r T i ' 1 i. 

sidoovejtado j»H had been. 



Sing. ^ 
Plur. «{ 



tivcras, &c. thou hadft been* 

tivera, &c. be had been. 

tiveramos, &c. we had been. 

tivereis, &c. you had been. 



tiverao, &c. they had been. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the second preterimperfect 
subjunctive of the verb ter % and its own participle 
s'ido or eftado. 

{e'u terin sido or eftado I fhould or would have been- 
terias, &c. thou fhouldft have been. 

teria, &c. he fhould have been. 

teriamos, &c. we fhould have been. 

Plur. < terieis, &c. you fhould have been. 

t teriao, &c. they fhould have been. 



{ 
{ 



Firft Future. 
'ouando hi for or eftiver, when I. (hall be. 



Sing. < feres or eftiveres, thou fhalt be^-< 

for or eflivJr, he fhall be. 

formos or ejhvermos, we fhall be. 

Plur. \ fordes or efliverdes, you fhall be. 

Jbrem or ejiiverem, they fhall be. 



Second Future. 

It is compounded of the future fubjunctive of the 
verb ter y and its own participle* 

C 'quando eutiver sido or .ejiado , when I fhall have been. 
Sing. \ tiveres sido, &c. thou fhalt have been. 

^ fiver sido, &c. he fhall have been. 

f ; thermos sido, &c. we fhall have been. 

Flur. < tiverdes sido, &c. you fhall have been. 

tiverem sido, &c. they fhall have been* 

Infinitive. 

PrefeRt. 

fir or ejli'ir ; to be. 

Preterperfecl:. 

ier sido or eftddo, to have been. 

Parti- 



Grammar, $ s 

Participles, 

fret. 

sidy or eft ado > bksri; 

Future. 
future-, or que ha de ser, or eftdr, future, or that is to be. 

Gerurids. 

fen do or eftdndo, beirig. 
tendo szdo or eftddo, having beem 

Supine. 
par d fer or eft dr t to be. 

Remarks upon the vetbfer and efidr. 

There is a corifiderable difference between these 
verbs, fer and eftdr > both in Portuguese and Spanifh. 
In Engliih there is no word to diftinguifh them, lince 
they are both rendered into Englifh by to be. Ser 
iignifies the proper and infeparabie effehce of a thing, 
its quality or quantity ; fer hbmem> to be a man ; 
fer bom> to be good ; fer alto, to be tall; fer Idrgo^ 
to be wide ; fer branco, to be white, &c. But eftdr 
denotes a place, or any adventitious quality ; as, 
esldr em Londres^ to be in London ; efidr defdude, to 
be in health ; eftdr f no, to be cold ; eftdr quente, to 
be warm ; eftdr dothtte, to be lick ; eftdr enfadddo t 
to be angry ,• eftdr allegre, to be merry, &c. 

Take notice, that you may use eftdr before the 
gerunds, but not fer; therefore you may fay, eftfa 
falldndo, lendo y &c. lam fpeaking, reading, foe* 
but not fou falldtido, &c. 

The three Conjugations of regular Active Verbs- 

A regular verb is fuch as is confined to general 
rules in its conjugation. 

E 4 A verb 



56 PORTUGUESE 

A verb active denotes the action or impression of 
the subject, and governs a noun which is the object 
of that action or impression ; as, amdr a virtude t to 
love virtue ; receber cartas, to receive letters. 

The regular Portuguese verbs have three diffe- 
rent terminations in the infinitive; to wit, in ar t er> 
ir ; as, amar, to love ; temer, to fear ; admit tir, to 
admit. 

An eafy Method of learning to conjugate the 
Portuguefe Verbs, 

I have reduced all the tenses of the Portuguefe 
verbs to eight; four of which are general, and 
have the same terminations in all the verbs ; and 
the other four may be likewise made general by 
changing fome letters, and all the conjugations re- 
duced to one. 

The general tenfes are, the future indicative, 
the firft and fecond preter imperfect fubjunctive, and 
the firft future fubjunctive. 

The future indicative is terminated in all the 
verbs, in 

reiy fas, ra ; remos, rets, rod. 

The imperfect fubjunctive, in 

ra or sse, ras or sses, ra or sse ; rdmos or ssemos, reis 

or sse is, rad or ssem. 

The fecond imperfect, in 

ria, r/as, ria ,♦ riamos, rieis, riao. 

The firft future fubjunctive,. in 
es, mos, des, em. 

Note, that I have only put the termination of the 
fecond perfon fingular of the future fubjunctive, 
becaufe the firft and third of the fame number ate 
like their respective infinitives of the three conjuga- 
tions, which however keep both their lail consonant 

and 



GRAMMAR. S7 

and vowel before the terminations I have marked 
for the fecond perfon lingular, aad for the whole 
» plural. As to'the future indicative, you have no- 
thing to do but add el to the refpective prefent infi- 
nitive of the three conjugations, in order to form 
the firft perfon lingular; and if you add to the fame 
infinitive prefent as y you will form the fecond perfon 
lingular of it, and so of all the reft, by adding to 
the infinitive prefent, a % emos, eis y do. 

The imperfect fubjunctive has two terminations 
for every perfon, both in the lingular and plural ; 
but if you cut off the laft confonant r of the infini- 
tive, and then add to it the terminations above- 
mentioned, you fhall form the .imperfect fubjunc- 
tive, according to its two different terminations. 
Laftly, if you cut off the laft confonant of the infi- 
nitive, and add to it the terminations above men- 
tioned, you will form the fecond imperfecl: iubjunc- 
tive. 

The prefent indicative of the three conjugations* 
is formed by changing the laft letters of the infini- 
tive, viz. ar y er y ir, into o ; as, 'amo y entendo, admitto % 
from amar, entender y admit t/r. 

The preterimperfect indicative is formed in the 
firft conjugation, by changing the laft confonant of 
the infinitive, viz. r, into va y vas y va, vamos, vets, vao ; 
but in the fecond conjugation it is formed by 
changing the termination er of the infinitive into ia % 
ias y ia y tamos , zeis y iao ; and in the third by changing 
the laft confonant r of the infinitive into, a y as y a.; 
amos y eis y do. 

The' perfect definite in the firft conjugation is 
formed by changing the terminaion ar of the infini- 
tive into ei y afte y 6n y dmos, aftes y ardo ; and in. the 
second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
termination er of the infinitive into /', efte, eo y emu, 
eftes y erdo. In the third conjugation, the fame tenfe 

is 



5& PORTUGUESE 

is formed by changing the termination ir of the in- 
finitive into /, ijle, h y imos, ifles, irao. 

The prefent fubjunctive in the firft conjugation 
is formed by changing the termination ar of the 
infinitive into e, es, e, emos, eis y em ; and in the 
second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
termination er of the infinitive into a, as, a, amos % 
his, ao. In the third conjugation, the same tenfe is 
formed by changing the termination ir of the infU 
nitive into the fame terminations, a, as, a, &c. 

As to the imperative mood, you may only ob- 
serve, that the second person lingular is always the 
fame as the third person lingular of the present indi- 
cative, in all the conjugations. 

The participles of the preterperfect tense in the 
firfl conjugation are formed by changing the laft 
consonant r of the infinitive into do for the mascu- 
line, and da for the feminine ; and into dos, das, 
for the plural; but when you come to verbs of the 
second conjugation, you change the termination r 
of the infinitive into ido, ida s &c. 

In the third conjugation, you mud change the laft 
consonant r of the infinitive into do for the mascu- 
line, da for the feminiae, &c. 

The firfl Conjugation of the verbs in ar. 

The Indicative Mood. 

I fhali put the pronouns personal, eu, tu, elle, Sec 
no more. 

Prefent. 



dmo, 


I love. 


amas. 


thou love ft 


ama, 


he loves. 


dmamos, 


we love. 


amais. 


ye love 


amao, 


they love. 



Ureter- 



GRAMMAR. 59 





Preterimperfect. 


dmdva, 


I did love. 


amdvas t 


thou didft love 


amdva. 


he did love. 


amavamos, 


we did love. 


amaveis, 


you did love. 


amavae, 


they did love- 




Preterperfe£l definite. 


amti, 


I loved. 


amdlie, 


thou lovedfL 


amozi, 


he loved. 


amamos, 


we loved. 


amdfles, 


you loved. 


amarac* 


they loved. 



Preterperfect. 

This tense is compofed of the participle amado, 
and the present indicative auxiliary verb ter a 

tenho amado, I have loved. 

tens amado, thou haft loved. 

tern amado, he has loved. 

temos amado, we have loved. 

tendes amado, you have loved. 

• tern amado, they have loved. 

Preterpluperfect. 
This tense is composed of the particle amado * 
and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. 

N. B. This tenfe may be conjugated thus, amara^ 
amdras, amdra, amaramos> amdreis y amdrdo ; or, 

tinha amado, I had loved. 

tinhas amado, thou hadft loved. 

tinha atria do, he had loved. 

tinhamos amado, we had loved. 

tinheis amado, you had loved. 

tinha amado, they had loved. 

Future. 
amarei, I (hall or will love. 

,a?naras, thou fhalt love. 

amard, he (hall love. 

ama* 



me eu ame, 
dmes, 



ameis, 
a mem, 



60 PORTUGUESE 

amaremoSy we fhall love. 

amareis, you (hall love. 

amarao, they (hall love. 

Imperative, 

dma tu, love thou, 

dme Me, let him love. 

amemos no's, let us love. 

amai vos, love you. 

^flzm elles, let them love. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

that I may love. 

thou mayeft love. 
ame, he may love. 

amemos, we may love. 

you may love. 

they may .love. 

Firft Preterimperfect. 

que eu amara or amasse, that I might or could love. 
amdras, or amasses, they mighteft. love. 

amdra, or amasse, he, might love. 

amaramos, or amdssernos, we might love. 

amdreis or amasseis, you might love. 

amarao or amassem, they might love. 

When we find the conjunction j^ before the in- 
dicative imperfect, we muft use the imperfect of the 
subjunctive or optative, when we speak by way of 
wi(h or defire ; as, If I did love, Je eu amaffe t or 
amara y and not Je eu amdva i if I had loved ; if I 
had, Je eu tivera i tiveffe, and not fe eu tinha ; and 
so in all the verbs. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

amaria, I mould love. 

amarias, thou fhouldft love, 

amaria, he mould love. 

amariamost we mould love. 

amarieis, you fhould love. 

amariao, they fhould love. 

Preter- 



G R AM MAR. 61 

Preterperfect. 

It is compofed of the participle amado arid the 
prefent fubjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

, que eu ienha amado, that I have loved, 

tenhas amado, thou haft loved. 

\iehha amado, he has loved. 

tenhamos amado, we have ioved. 

tenkdis aniado, you have loved. 

tenhUodmddo , they have loved. 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is compofed of the participle amado and the firfi 
preterimperfecl: fubjundtive of the auxiliary verb 
ter. • 

Jeeu tivera of tivsfse. amado, , if I had, loved. 

liver as or tivefses amado, thou hadft loved. 

tivera or tivefse amado, . he had loved. 

tiverdmds or tivefsemos amado, we had loved. 
-tiyereis or tivefseis amado, ' you had loved. 

tiverao or tivefsem amado, they had loved. 

Second Preterpluperfecl:. 

It is compofed of the participle amado and the 
second preterimperfecl: fubjunclive of the auxiliary 
verb ter. 



teria amado, 


I fhould have loved. 


terias amado, 


thou fhouldft have loved. 


teria amado, 


he fhould have loved. 


teriamos amado, 


we fhould have loved. 


ierieis amado, 


ye fhould have loved. 


teriao amado, 


they fhould have loved. 




Future. 


quando euamar, 


when I fhall love. 


amdres, 


thou {halt love. 


amdr, 


he fhall love. 


amdrmos, 


we fhall love. 


amdrdes, 


you fhall love. 


amdrem 


they fhall love. 




Second 



62 PORTUGUESE 

Second Future. 

It is compofed df the participle amado, and the 
future fubjunctiveof the auxiliary verb ter. 

quando eu liver amado, when I {hall have loved. 

tiveres amado, thou (halt have loved. 

tiver amado, he lhall have loved. 

tivermos amado, we fhall have loved. 

tiverdes amado, you (hall have loved. 

tiverem amado, they fhall have loved. 

Infinitive. 

.Prefent. 

am'ar, to love. 

Preterperfect. 

ter amado, to have loved. 

Participle. 

Prefent. 

que ama, or am'ante, that loves. 

Pret. 

amado, masc. amado, fem. loved. 

Future. 
que ha de amar, that is to love. 

Gerunds. 

amkndo, loving. 
i'endo amado, having loved. 

Supine. 
para amar ', to love. 
Note, the verbs terminating in the infinitive in 
tar take qu in those tenses, where the c would other- 
wise meet with the vowel e } and those terminating 
in the infinitive in gar take an // in those tenses, 
-where the£ would otherwise meet with the same 
voweL e ; that is to say, in the.firft person lingular 
of the preterperfect definite, in the third person 

Angular. 



G R A MM A R. 63 

lingular, in the firft and third plural of the impera- 
tive, and in the whole prefent lubjundtive, which 
are the tenfes I fhali give you by way of example 
in the verbs pecchr and pagdr. 

Pec car, to fin. 

Preterperfe£l definite. 

eu pequei, I sinned — instead of peccti. 

Imperative. 

ptque elle, let him sin : pequemos nos, let us sin ; pequem 
elks, let them sin — and not pecce tile, &c- 

Prefent fubjun&ive. 

que eu peque, tu peques, that I may sin— - 
and not que eu pecce, pecces, 8cc. 

Pagdr, to pay. 

Preterperfect definite. 

paguei, I paid. 

Imperative. 

pague tile, paguemos nos, pdguem elles, let him pay, &c. 

Prefent fubju'netive. 

qut eu pdgue, pagues, pague, paguemos, pagueis, paguem, 
that I may pay, &c. — and not page, pages, &c. 

The other tenfes are conjugated like amar* 

■ Regular verbs in ar. 

Abajar, to claoke, <?rto fmo- Agarrdr, to lay hold of. 

ther. Alagdr, to overflow. 

Abalar, to fhake. Amaldlcoar, to curfe. 

Abanar, to fan. Annular, to annul, or to 

Abaftdr, to fatiate. make void. 
Abaxar, to bring or let down. Aprefsdr, to press, tfrhaften. 

Abencodr, to blefs. Aquentar, to warm. 

AbocanMr, to carp. Argumentar, to argue. 

Abo?nindr i to abominate. Afsoprar, to blow. 

Abotoar, to button. Atdr, to tie. 

Acabar, tofinifh. Avajsalar, tofubdue, to con- 

Admoejidr, to admonifh» quer. 

Affrontar, to abufe, Azeddr x to four* 

Of 



6 4 



PORTUGUESE 



Of the Verbs PaJJive. 

Before we proceed to the second conjugation, it 
is neceflary to know that the Verbs patlive, which 
express the suffering of an action, are nothing more 
than the participles of verbs active, conjugated with 
the verb fer, to be. 

E x A M PL E. 



Prefent tenfe. 



eufou amado, 
tu es amado, 
elle he amddo, 
nos fomos am ados, 
vosjois amados, 
elles fob amado s, 



I am loved, 
thou art loved, 
he is loved, 
we are loved, 
you are loved, 
they are loved. 



and so throughout the other moods and tenses, 

The second conjugation of the verbs in er. 

Indicative Mood. 





Prefent. 


vendo, 


I sell. 


vendes, 


thou selleft. 


•uende, 


he sells. 


vendimos, 


we sell. 


vendeis, 


you sell. 


vendem, 


they sell. 




Preterimperfect. 


vendia, 


I did sell. 


vendzas, 


thou didft sell 


vendia, 


he did sell. 


vendiamos. 


we did sell. 


v en diets, 


you did sell. 


vendiao, 


they did sell. 




Preterperfect definite. 


vendi, 


I sold. 


vendefte, 


thou soldeft. 


vendt'O, 


he sold. 



l£K 



GRAMMAR, 65 

vendemos, we fold. 

vendejies, you fold. 

vender ao, they fold* 



tenko 

tens 

tern 

temos 

ttndes 

tern 



tinha 

tinhas 

tinha 

tinhamos 

tinheis 

tinha o 



Preterperfect* 

I have fold, &c* 

Preterpluperfect. 
vendido, < I had fold, &c* 



y vendido, J ] 

) 1 



This tense may alfo be conjugated thus ; vender a, venderas, 
vender a, vender amos, vender eis, venderao* 

Future. 

venderei, \ 
vender as, | 

venderi, ( T fl^ or wiU fell, £<? c „ 

venaeremos, ( 
vendereis, | 
vender ad, I 

Imperative Mood. 

vende tu, fell thou 

venda elle, let him fell. 

vendamos nos, let us fell. 

vendei vos, fell ye. 

vendao elles, let them fell. 



Optative and Subjundivc 



que eu venda, 
vendas. 



v { nd p What I may fell, &t. 
vendamos, / 

venduis, 

vendao , 



Preterm 



66 



PORTUGUESE 



Preterimperfect. 

one 'en vendera or vendhse, that I might or could fell, 

venderas or vendesses, &c. 

vendera or vendesse^ 
vender amos or venJessemos, 
vender eis or vendesseis, 
vender ao or vendessem, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

venderia, I mould fell, &c. 

venderias, 

venderia, 

venderiamos, 

venderieis, 

venderiao, 



que eu t'enha 
tenhas 
tenha 



Preterperfect. 






t vendido, 
tenhamos [ 

tenhais 

tenhao "* 



that I have fold, Be, 



Preterpluperfect. 



fe eu tivera or tivejfe, 
tiveras or tivejfes, 
tivera or tivejfe 
tiveramos or tivefemos 
tivereis or tivejjeis 
tiverao or tivejfem 



> vendido, J if I had fold, &c. 



Second Preterpluperfect. 



eu teria 
terias 
teria 
teriamos 
terieis 
teriao 



vendido , 



mould have fold, &c. 



Future. 



GRAMMAR. 67 



Future. 



quando eu vender, when I fhall fell, &c. 

vender es, 
vender, 
vendermos, 
venderdes, 
vcnderem, 

Second Future. 

quando eu tiver 
tiveres 

tiver I ,,, \ when I fhall have foldj 
tiver mo s f ' ' \ &c, 

tiverdes 
tiverem 

, Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. 
vender, to fell. 

Preterperfect. 
ter vendido, to have fold. 

Participle. 

Prefent. 
que vende, that fell, that fells. 

Preterit. 
vendt-do, mafc. vendidd, fem. Plur. vendidos, vendidas, fold. 

Future. 
que ha de vender, that is to fell. 

Gerund. 

vendendo, felling. 
tendo vendido, having fold. 

Supine. 
para vender^ to fell. 

After the fame manner as the verb vender •, are 
I conjugated all the other regular verbs of the fecond 
! conjugation ending in er ; as the following ; 

F 2 . Acometer, 



68 P O RT U G U E S E 

Acomtter, to attack. Efconder, to hide. 

Beber, to drink. Emp render, to undertake. 

Comer, to eat. Meter, to put in. 
Comprehender, to perceive, <?r Offender, to offend. 

apprehend. Pro meter, to promife. 

Cometer, to commit. Rejponder, to anfwer. 

Conceder, to grant Reprehender, to reprove. 

Correr, to run. Temer, to fear. 

Dever, to owe. Varrer, to fweep, £5V. 

The third conjugation of the verbs ending in /r. 
Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

adnutto, I admit, &c. admittimos. 

admittes, admitteis. 

admit te, admit tern. 

Preterimperfect. 

admktia, I did admit, &c. admittiamos. 
admittias, admittieis. 

admittia, admittiao. 

Preterperfect definite. 

admitti, I admitted. admittimos. 

admittijle, admit ti ft es. 

admitiio, admittirao. 

Preterperfect. 
This tenfe is compofedof the participle admittido, 
and the prefent indicative of the auxiliary verb ter. 

tenho admittido, I have admitted. 

tens admittido, &c. thou haft, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 
This tenfe is compofed of the participle admittido, 
and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. 
tinha admittido, I had admitted. 

tinhas admittido, he. < thou hadir, &c. 
' This tenfe may alfo be conjugated thus ; admittira, ad- 
mittiras, admittira, admittiramos, admittireis, admittirao. 

Future 



. GRAM -MAR. 69 

Future. , 
admittirei, I fliall or will admit. 

admzttiras. 
admittira, 
admit tire mas, 
admittireis, 
admit tirao, 

Imperative. 

admitte tu\ admit thou.' 

admitta elk, let him admit. 

admittamos nos, t let us admit. 

admitti vos, admit ye. 

admittdo elles, let them admit. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

Prefent. 

que cu admitta, that I may admit, &c. 
admitta s, 
admitta, 
admittamos, 
admit tens, 
admittdo, 

Firft Preterimperfect. 

que eu admittira or admittijfe, that I might admit, &c, 

. admittiras or admittljfes, 
adtnittira or admktijje, 
admittiramos or admit tijfanos, 
admittireis or admittijfels, 
admittirao or admittijfem, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

admittiria, I mould or would admit, &c. 

admiUirjds, 

admittiria, 

admittiriamos, 

admittirieis, 

admittiria o t 

Preterperfect. 
This tenfe is compofed of the particle admittido, 
and the prefent fubjunctive of the verb ter. 
que eu tenha admittido, that I have admitted. 

tenhas admittido, &c. thou halt admitted, &c. 

F 3 - Preter- 



70 PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfect. 
It is compofed of the firft preterimperfect fub- 
jundive of the verb ter and the participle admittido. 
ft eu tivera admittido, If I had admitted.^ 

tiveras, &c. thou hadft admitted, &c. 

Second Preterpluperfect. ^ 

It is compofed of the fecond preterimperfect fub- 
junctive of the verb ter and the participle admittido. 
eu term admittido, I mould have admitted. 
terias, &c. thou fhouldft, &c 

Firft Future. 
' Je iu admittir, If I mall admit, &c. 

admittires, 
admittir, 
admittirmos, 
admittirdes, 
admittirem, 

Second Future. 
It is compofed of the firft future fubjundlive of 
the verb ter and the participle admittido. 

fe eu tiver admittido, If I mall have admitted. 
tiveres, &c. thou malt, &c. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. 
admittir, to admit. 
Preterperfect. 
ter admittido, to have admitted. 
Participle. 
Prefent. 
admittido, for the mafc. admittida, for the fern, admitted. 

Future. 

que ha de adynittir, that is to admit. 

Gerunds. 

admittindo, . admitting. 

Undo admittido, having admitted. 

Supines. 

para admittir, to admit. 

Conjugate 



GRAMMAR. 71 

Conjugate after the fame manner the following 
verbs : 

Abrir, to open. Nutr{r, to nourifti. 

Conduzir, to conduct. Reduzir, to reduce, to bring 
Introduzir, to introduce. to. 

Induzir, to induce. Traduzir, to tranflate. 

Produzir, to produce. Deduzzr, to deduct, &c. 
Luzir, to fhine. 

Of £/&£ irregular Verbs in ar. 

There are in each conjugation fome verbs which 
do not conform to the common rule, and on that 
account are called irregulars. 

There are but two of the firfl conjugation, which 
in fome of their tenfes depart from the rule of the 
verb amat\ viz. efiar and dar. We have already 
conjugated the firft, and the fecond is conjugated 
in the following manner. 

Indicative. 
Prefent. 
dou, I give. da?nos, we give. 

das, thou givefr. dais,, yon give. 

da, he gives. dab, they give. 

PreterimperfecL 

dava, I did give, &c. (as in regular verbs of the firjft 

davas, &c. Conjugation.) 

Preterperfect definite. 

dei, I gave. demos, we gave. 

dejie, thou gaveft. dejhs, you gave. 

deu t he gave. derao, they gave. 

Preterperfect. 

This tenfe is compofed of the participle dado and 
the prefent indicative of the auxiliary verb ter ; as 
tenho dado, I have given, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 

This tenfe is compofed of the participle dado and 
the imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter i as eu Unha 
dado, &c. 1 had given, &c. 

¥ 4 Future, 



72 PORTUGUESE 

Future. 
ddrei, I (ball or will give, &c. (as in the verb amar) 
dards, &c, 

Imperative. 

demos nos t let us give. 
<?» *a, give thou. ddi v6s 9 give you. ^ 

//<• ///e, let him give. dem elles, let them -give. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 
Prefent. 
qui eu de f that I may give, &c. 

dcs, 

de, 

demos ', 
deis, 
dem, 

Prcterimperfect. 
que eu dera or desse, that I might give, &c« 

deras or desses, 
dera or desse, 
deramos or dessemos, 
dereis or desseis, 
derao or dessem, 

Second Imperfect. 
dar'ia, I mould give, &c. dariamos. " 

darias, ddrieis. 

daria, dariao, 

The preterperfect, preterpluperfect, and the fe- 
cond preterpluperfedt, are compofed of the participle 
dddo y and the auxiliary verb ter y as in the regular 

verbs. 

Future. 

quando eu der, when I mall' give, &c, 
dfres, 
der, 

dermos, 
derdes, 
derem t 

Second Future. 
It is compofed of the participle dado, &c. as the 
regular verbs. 

Infinitive. 



GRAMMAR. 73 

Infinitive. 

Prefent. 

dar, to give, &c. as in the regular verbs. 

Of the irregular Verls in er. 

I begin with fazer, poder, and faber % becaufe they 
occur ofteneft in difcourfe. 

Fazer > to do or make. 

Indicative. 

Prefent. 

fago, I do. fazemos, we do. 

fazes, thou doft. faziis, you do. 

faz\ he does. fazem, they do. 

Imperfect. 

fazia, I did or did make, &c. fazz'amos. 
fazias, fazieis. 

fazia, faziao. 

Preterperfect definite. 

' fiz, I made, &c. fzemos. 
fzefle, fz'efhs. 

fez, fzerao. 

Preterperfect. 

tenho feiio, I have done, &c, 
tensfeito, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 

tinkafeito, I had done, &c. 
tmhasftito, &c. 

Future. 

farei, I (hall do, &c. (according to the regular verb.) 
faras, &c. 

Imperative. 

fagamos nos, let us do. 
faze tu, do thou. fazei vos, do you. 

faga (lie, let him do. fdgaoelles, let them do. 

Optative, 



- ■> — rs« 



74 PORTUGUESE 

Optative. 

Prefent. 

qut/eu faqa, that I may do, &c. (according to the re- 
fagas, gular verbs. 

jag a, &c. 

Preterimperfect. 

que eujizera or jizefse, that I might do, &e. 
Jizeras or fizefses, 
Jizera or fizijfe^ 
jizerames or Jizejf ernes > 
Jizereis ovfizeJfeis i 
jizerao or fizz/sera. 

Second Imperfect. 

farm, I mould do, &c. fariamos* 
f arias. farieis. 

Jaria i Jariao. 

Future. 

quando eufizer,- when I (hall do, &c. 

jizeres, 

jfizer, 

fizermos, 

Jizerdes t 

Jizerem, 

Second Future. 

quando eu iivcrfeito, when I (hall have done. 
tiveresfeito, &c. 

- Infinitive. 
fazer, to do. 
Gerunds. 
jazendo, doing or in doing, 
Participle. 
feito, made or done. 
After the fame manner are conjugated desfazer, 
to undo / contrafazer> to counterfeit ; refazev, to 
make again. , 

Poder, 



GRAMMAR. 75 

Poder, to be able. 

Indicative. 

Preterit. 

p'ofso, I can or am able. podetnos, we can. 

podes, thou canft. podeis, you can. 

pode, he can. podem, they can. 

Imperfect. 

podia, I could or was able, &c. 
podias, &c. 

Preterperfecl definite. 

j^<&, I could. pude?nos, we could. 

pudefte, thou couldft. pudejtes, you could. 

/>«dfe, he could,, puderao, they could. 

Preterpcrfeft. 

^?ft^0 podido, &c. I have been able, &c. 

Future. 

poderh', I (hall be able, &c. 
poderas, &c. 

There is no Imperative. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

Prefent. 

que iu pofsa, that I may be able. 

pofsas, thou mayeft be able, &c* 

pofsa, 
pofsamos, 
po/sdis, 
p'ofsao, 

Imperfect. 
que eu pudera, or pudefse, that I might be able. 

puderas or pudejses, thou mightft be able, &c. 
pudera or *pudefse, 
puderamos or pudefsemos, 
pudereis or pudefsds, 
puderao or pudefsem, 

Second 



76 



PORTUGUESE 



poderia, 
poderias, &c. 



Second Imperfect. 
I fhould be able, &c. 



Future, 
quando eu puder; ' when I fhall be able, &c, 

puder es, 
puder, 
puder mos, 
puderdes, 
■puder em, 

Infinitive. 

Prefent. 
poder, to be able. 

Gerunds. 
podendo, being able. 

Participle. 
pudido, been able. 



fabes, 
Jabe, 



Saber> to know. 

Indicative. 
Prefent. 

I know. Jabe mos, 

thou knoweft. Jabeis, 
he knows. Jab em, 

Imperfect. 



we know, 
you know, 
they know. 



Jabia, I did know. 

fabias, thou didft know, &c. 

Jabia, Sec. 

Preterperfect definite. 

Jcube, I knew, &c. Joubemos, 
Joubijie, Joubejies. 

Joube, Jouberao, 

Preterperfect. 
tenhojabido, I have known, Sec. 



Future, 



GRAMMA R. 77 

Future. 

fakerei, I fhall or will know, &c. (according to the 

Jaberas y &c. regular verbs.) 

Imperative. 

faibamos nos, let us know. 
y^tf tu> know thou. Jabei vos t know you. 

J'aiba elle, let him know. J'aibao elies, let them know. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 
Prefent. 
que eu faiba, I may -know. 

faibas, thou mayft know, &c. 

faiba^ 

Jaibamos, 

Jaibais, 

Jaibao, 

Imperfect. 

que eu foubera or foubefse, that I might know, Sec. 
foubcras or foubefses, 
foubera orfoubefse, 
fouberamos or foubefsemos, 
foubereis or foubefseis, 
fouberao oxjoube/sem. 

Second Imperfect. 

faberia, I mould know, &c. faberiamos. 
faberias, Jaberieis. 

faberia, faberiao. 

Future. 
qudndo eufouber, when I (hall know, &c, 
JbubereS) 
fouber, 
foubermos, 
fouberdes, 
fouberem, 

Infinitive. 

Prefent. 

fiber, to know. 

Gerund. 

fabendo, knowing. 

Participle, 



78 PORTUGUESE 

Participle. 
fabido (for the mafc.) fabida (for the feminine,) known. 

Of the irregular Verb trazer, to bring. 

Indicative. 

Prefent. 

trago, I bring. trazemos, we bring, Sec. 

trazeSy thou bringeft. trazeis, 

trdz, he brings, trazem, 

Imperfect. 

trazia, I did bring. 

trazias, &c. thou didft bring, &c. (according to the regulars.) 

Preterperfect definite. 

trouxe, I brought. trouxemos. 

trouxeje, thou broughteft, &c, trouxeftes, 
toouxci trouxcrao. 

Preterperfect. 

tenho trazido, I have brought, &c. 
tens traztdo, &c. 

Future. 

travel, I fliall or will bring, &c. traremos. 
traras, trareis, 

trard, irarah 

Imperative. 

tragcimos- n'os, let us bring. 
trazetu, bring thou. . trazavbs, - bring you. 

trdga elle, let him bring. trdgao elles, let them bring. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

t Prefent. 

que eu trdga,/ that I may bring, &c. 
tragqs, 
trafa 
tragd?nos, 
tra'gais, 
tragao, 
P Imperfect, 



GRAMMAR. 79 

Imperfect. 

que eu trouxera or trouxejfe, that I might bring, &c. 
trouxeras or trouxeffes, 
trouxera or trouxejfe , 
trouxeramos or trouxejfemos, , 
trouxereis or trouxejfeis, 
trouxerao or troux£jfem> 

Second Imperfect. 

eu traria, I mould bring, &c. ■ trariamos. 
tr arias > trarieis. 

traria % trariao. 

Future. 

qiiuiido eu trouxer, when I mall bring, &c. 
trouxeres, 
trouxer, 
trouxe'rmoSy 
trouxer des ', 
trouxerem, 

Infinitive. 

Prefent. 

trazer, to bring. 

Gerund. 

trazendo, bringing. 

Participle. 

trazido, mafc. trazida, fern, brought. 

The conjugation of the Irregular Verb ver, to fee* 
Indicative. 
Prefent. 

vejo, I fee, vemos. 

Ves, thou feeft, vedes. 

<ve, he fees, &c. z/t'ffz. 

Imperfect. 

via, I did see, &c. 

vias y 

via t &c. 

Preter- 



80 



PORTUGUESE 



vijie, 
vio, 



que eu veja, 
v'ejas 
veja, 



Preterperfect definite. 

I faw, &c. vimos. 

vijtes. 
virao. 

Preterperfect. 
tenho viflo, I have feen, &c. 
tens vijto, &c. 

Future. 

verei, I fliall fee, &c. 
veras, &c. 

Imperative. 

ve tu, fee thou. 

veja elle, let him fee. 

vejamos nos, let us fee. 

vede vos, fee you. 

vejao elks, let them fee. 

Optative, 

that I may fee, &c. 



vejamos* 

vejjis. 

vejao. 



Imperfect. 

que eu vira or vifse, that I might fee, &c. 
viras or vijfts, 
vira or vifse, 
viramos or vijftmos, 
vireis or visseis, 
virao or vijsem, 

Second Imperfect. 

I mould fee, &c. 



eu vena, 
verias, 
veria, 

qua n do eu vir, 
vires, 
vir, 

virmos, 
virdes, 
vir em, 



veriamos, 

verieis. 
veriao. 



Future. 

when I mail fee, &c. 



Infini- 



GRAMMAR. 81 

Infinitive. 
ver, to fee. 

Gerund. 
vendo, feeing. , 

Participle. 
vijio, vifla, feen. 

In like manner are conjugated the compounds 
antever s prever, and rever. 

The verb prover, when it fignifies to provide for, 
or, to take care of, is conjugated in the prefent indi- 
cative thus ; 

euprovenho, I take care of, &c. provimos. 
pr ovens, provindes. 

proyem, prevent. 

But when it fignifies to make provifion, it is conju- 
gated thus : 



& 



euprovejo, I make provifion, &c. provemos. 
proves, . proveis. 

prove, pr&ve"" 

The conjugation of the auxiliary vcrb utzer ? to my. 
Indicative. 
Prefen * 



digo, 

dizes, 

diz, 


I fay, &c. dizemos 
dizeis. 
dizem. 




Preterimperfeft. 


dtzia, 
dizias, 


I did fay, Be. 




Preterperfefit definite. 


xifscjie 
difse, 


I faid, &c. dizemos. 

, difsefles. 

difser&o. 

o 



Ureter- 



S2 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfeft. 

tenho ditto, I have faid, Be. 
tens ditto, &c. 

Future. 

dirgj, I fhall or will fay, &c. 

dirts, &c. 

Imperative. 

dize tu, fay thou. 

digo file, let him fay. 

dig dm os nos, let us fay. 

•4$$$ &<«, fay you. 

digao elks, let them fay. 

Optative. 

que eu diga, that I may fay, Be 

dig as, Sec. 

Imperfect. 
que eu difsera or difsefse, that I might fay, Be. 

difstras or difsefses, 
difsera or difsefse, 
diferamos or difsefsemos, 
difsereis or difsefseis, 
difserdo or dijsejsem. 

Second Imperfect. 

*Wa, I fhould fay, 67c. 

diriur^ & c# 

future. 

quando eu dlfser; whe, x fhall fay, Be. 

di/seres, 
difser, &c. 

Infinitive. . 

dize'r, to fay. 

Gerund. 

dizendo, faying. 

Participles. 

ditto, ditta* faid, 

Obferv* 



GRAMMAR. 83 

Obferve, that the compounds defdizer, to unfay, 
and contradizer, to contradidl, are in all points* con- 
jugated Jike dizer._ 

The Conjugation of the irregular Verb querer, 
to be willing. 





Indicative Mood* 




Prefent. 


quero, I will, er am willing. 
queres, thou art willing. 
quer, he is willing, &c. 
queremos, 


quereis, 
querem, 


\ 


queria, 
querias, &c. 


Imperfect. 
I was willing, &c . 




Preterperfeft definite. 


quiz, I have been willing, &c. 

quizejle, 

quiz, 


quizemos, 
quizejies, 
quizerao, 






Future. 


quererei, 
quereras, &c 


I Ihall be willing, &c. 




Imperative. 


queiras tu % 
queira elle, 


be thou willing. 
let him be willing. 


qutiramos noS, let us be willing* 


queirai vos, 
queirao elles % 


be you willing, 
let them be willing. 



Optative and Subjunctive. 

que eu queira, that I may be willing, &c. 

queiras, &c. 

Q 2 linger- 



84 PORTUGUESE 

Imperfecl. 

que eu pvlzfra or quizefse, that I were willing. 

qnizeraS or qutze/ses, thou wert willing. 

quizera or quizefse, he were willing. 

qiiizeramos, or qui%efs trite s % we were willing. 
quizereis or quizefseis, you wera willing. 

quixirao or quizefsem, they were willing. 

Second Imperfeft. 

<?« qvereria, I fhould or would be willing, &c. 

que,eiias, &c. 

Future. 

quando eu quizer, when I fliall be "willing, 65V. 

qmzeres, &c. 

Infinitive. 
querer, to be willing. 

Gerunds. 
querendo, being willing. 

Participle. 
querido, been willing. 

Note, that quer is fometimes a conjunction, when 
repeated in a fentence, and that it is rendered into 
EnglifTi by zvhether and or ; as, quer vos o tenhais 
feito, quer nao, whether you have done that or no. 
But when.it is not repeated, and is joined to the 
particle fe 9 it is fometimes rendered into Englifli 
by at leqft ; as, hum fe guer, one at leaf! ; and fome- 
times by hozvever, when joined to the particle gue; 
as' como quer que feja, however it be. In all which 
cafes, it is not to be confounded with the third per- 
fon lingular of the indicative of the verb querer. 

Take notice that the verb guerer is fometimes 
ufed with the particle^ inftead of the verb dever $ 
as, as cbufas naofe quer em feitas a prejfa, things muft 
not be done in a" hurry. 

Of 



GRAMMAR. 85 

Of the irregular Verb valer, to be worth. 

I mall put no other tenfes of this verb than the 
prefent indicative, the imperative, and the prefent 
of the fubjun&ive, none but thefe beiug irregular. 

Indicative Mood, 
Prefent. 



veil ho, 
vales, 
vale or val, 


I am worth, &c. 


valemos, 




valeis, 
valem, 




vale tu, 
vdlha elle, 
valhamos nos 9 
valei vos. 
valhao elks, 


imperative. 

be thou worth, 
let him be worth, 
let ys be worth, 
be you worth. 
let them be worth. 




Subjunctive. 


que eu valha, 
vdlhas, 
vdlha , 
valhamos, 
valhais, 
valhao, 


that I may be worth, &c, 



Of the irregular Verb perder, to lofe. 

This verb changes the c before o of .'the prefent 
indicative into d in the other perfons of the fame 
tehfe, as well as in the other tenfes, if you except 
the imperative and prefent fubjunctive ; in which it 
is conjugated in the following manner : 



Indicative, 



Prefent. 



perco, 

perdes, 
perde t 



I lofe, &c. 



G3 



per demos. 

perdeis. 

perdem, 

Impera- 



86 PORTUGUESE 

Imperative. 

perde tu, lofe thou. 

perca elle, let him lofe. 

percamos nos, let us lofe. 

perda vos, lofe you. 

percao elks, let them lofe. 

Subjunctive. 

que eu pfoca, that I may lofe, (Be. 

percas, 
perca, &c. 

The compounds of the verb ter, as, contenho, I 
contain ; detenho, I detain, &c. are conjugated like 
it. 

Some verbs of this conjugation are only irregu- 
lar in the participle paffive ; as, efcrito, from efefe- 
ver ; abJbHo, from abfolver. 

Thofe that have the^' before o in the prefent in- 
dicative change the^' into^ in all tenfes and per- 
fons, iff which the^' would otherwife meet with the 
vowels / or e 5 as, eleger, to eleel: ; eu elejo> tu eleges, 
&c. I ele&, &c. 

Imperfect. Preter-def. 

elegia, &c. chgi, elegefte, &c. I elected, £3c. 

The verbs ending in eyo in the prefent indica- 
tive, change that termination into ia in the imper- 
fect, and into i in the preter-definite, and are fo con- 
jugated. 

Indicative. 

Prefent. 

eu leyo, I read, &c. lemos* 

les t ledes. 

l g i km. 

Imperfect. 



eu lia, I did read, &c. 

lias, &c. 



Prefer- 



GRAMMAR. 87 

Preter definite. 

iu li, I read, &c. 

lejle, &c. 

Imperative. 

leamos nos 9 let us read. 
le tu, read thou. ledeves, read you. 

lea elle, let him read, leaoelks, * let them read. 

Subjunctive. 

que tu lea, that I may read, &c. 

leas, 
lea, &c. 

You may obferve that they lofe the y through all 
the other moods and tenfes. The verb crer, to be- 
lieve, is conjugated in the fame manner. 

Oj the irregular Verbs in ir. 

Ir, to go. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent tenfe. 

vou, I go. vamos, we go. 

vas, thou goeft. ides, you go. 

vai 9 he goes. vao, they go. 

Preterimperfefh 

Ma, I did go, &c. hiamos, 

Mas, hieis. 

Ma, hiao, 

Preterperfec"l definite, 

Jui, I went, fomos, we went. 

fojte, thou wentcft. fojtes, you went. 
Joi, he went, jorao, they went, 

I Preterperfeft. 

G 4 Preter- 



88 PORTUGUESE ; 

Preterpluperfeft, 
thha, f u \ Ihadgonej &c. 

Future. 

irei, I {hall or will go, &c. 

iras, &c. 

Imperative. 

vamos nos, let us go. 
vai tu, go thou idt vos, go ye. 

vd elle, let him go, vdo files, let them go. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

que eu va, that I may go, &c. 

vds, 

va, 

vamos, 

vades, 

vao, 

Firft Pretenmperfe£t. 

que eufora oxfojfe, that I might go, &c. 

foras oi'Jofses, 
Jora ovfo/se, 
Joramos or fofsemos, 
foreis or fofseis, 
fordo or Jofsem, - 1 

Second Preterimperfe£t. 

iria, I fliould go, &c. 

irias, &c. 

Preterperfecl. 

It is compofed of the participle ido and the pre- 
fent fubjunciive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

Preterpluperfe£t. 

It is compofed of the participle ido and the firft 
preterimperfecl: fubjunciive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

Second 



GRAMMAR. 89 

Second Preterpluperfe£t. 
It is compofed of the participle ido and the fecond 
preterimperfect fubjuhciive of the auxiliary verb 
ter. 

Future. 

qudndo eufor, when I fnall go, &c. 

fores, 

form os 9 

Jordes, 

fortm, 

Second Future. 
quandoiu tiv'er f " "> when t ft allhave 

tiveras,8tc. \f. &c. " 

Infinitive. 

Prefent. - 
. * ir, to go. 
Gerunds. 
2W0, . going, 

Part. 
ido, done. 

r*r, to come. 

Indicative. 
Prefent. 
xi'enho, I come, &c. vimos, 
vtns, i . vindes, 

Imperfect; 
i/wzAa, I did come, &c. vinkamos. 
vinhas, vinheis. 

vinha, vmhao. 

Preter definite. 
vim, I came, &c. viemos. 

™jte,> viefles. 

v* 9 * visrao. 

Preter- 



go PORTUGUESE 

Preterper feci:. 

tenho vrndo, I have come, Sec. 
tens vindo, &c. 

Future. 

virei, I (hall come, Sec. 

virds, Sec. 

Imperative. 

venhamos nos, let us come. 
vem tu, come thou. vinde vos, come you. 

vinha elk) let him come. venhao elles t let them come. 

Optative. 

Prefent. 
que eu venha. 

Imperfe£l. 
que eu viera, or viefse. 

Second Imperfect. 
viria, virias, Sec. 

Infinitive. 

Prefent. 
vir, to come. 

Gerund. 
vindo, coming. 

Part. 
vindo, come. 

The compounds of vir; as convir y to be conve- 
nient; fobrevir % to come unlooked for, are con- 
jugated in the fame manner. 

Of the irregular Verhs> mentir, to lie> sentir, to feel; 
servir, toferve; ferir, to wound. 

Thefe verbs change the i of the firft person lin- 
gular of the present tense, indicative, into e in the . 

other 



GRAMMAR. 9 1 

other perfons of the same tense, as well as in the 
other tenses and moods, except in the imperative and 
the prefent conjunctive, in which they are conju- 
gated thus ; 

Indicative. 

Prefent. 

eu minto, tu mentes, elk inente, &c. 
eujinto , tufentes, elle fente, &c. 

eufirvo, tuferves, ellejcrve, &c. 

Imperative. 

mente tu,minta elle, mintamos nos, menti vos, mintao elks, 
fente tu, Jinta elle, fintamos ncs, fenti vos, fintao tiles, 
fervc tu, firva elle, firvamos nos, fervi vos, firvao elks.. 

Subjunctive. 

minta, mzntas, &c. 
Jinta, fintas, &c. 
firva, firvas, &c. 

The compounds, desmentir y ajfentir, confentfr, dif- 
fentir, prefent ir y are conjugated like mentir and fen- 
tir ; and also the verbs afferlr, refer'/r, conferir\ de- 
fer/^ dijferir, inferir. 

Of the irregular Verbs affligir, to afflift ; corrigir, to 
correcl, flngir, to' feign \ ungir, to^ ahoint; com- 
pungir, frigir, dirigir, tingir, cingir, &c. 

These verbs change the g of the infinitive mood 
into j in thofe tenfes where the g would otherwife 
meet with the vowels o, as in the firft perfon lingu- 
lar of the present indicative ajjlijo ; or a y as in the 
third perfon of the imperative in both numbers, in 
the firft plural of the same tenfe, and in the prefent 
Siibjunclive. 

Of the irregular Verb feguir, to follow. 

This verb changes the e of the infinitive mood 
into / in the firft person lingular of the present indi- 
cative. 



92 PORTUGUESE 

cative, eu figv y I follow : in the present subjunctive* 
que eufiga, that I may follow : and in the imperative, 
where it is conjugated thus : fegue tu, figa elle, figa- 
mos nos,fegui vos/f/gcio elles. 

Take notice that the u is lost in those tenses where 
it would otherwife meet with the vowels o and a, as 
you fee in the examples; and this obfervation alfo 
takes place in the verbs difiitiguir, to diftinguifn; 
extinguir, to extinguifh, &c. 

The compounds are perfeguir, to persecute; con- 
feguir, to obtain ; profegu/r, to pursue. 

Of the irregular Verb ouvir, to hear. " 

This verb changes the v of the infinitive mood 
into c in the firff person lingular of the present in- 
dicative, eu ouco, 1 hear, tit buves, &c. in the pre- 
sent subjunctive, and in the imperative mood, where 
it is conjugated thus: buve tu, ouca elle, oucames nos, 
ouvivos, bucao elles, hear thou, &c. 

Of the irregular Verb dor mi r, icfieep. 

This verb changes the o of the infinitive mood 
into u in the firft person lingular of the present 
indicative, thus : eu durmo, tu dormes, elle dorme, 
&c. I fleep, &c. In the present subjunctive, que 
eu dlirma, &c. that I may fleep ; and in the impe- 
rative mood, where it is conjugated thus; dbrme tu, 
durma elle, durmamos nbs, dormi vos, dkrmao elles, fleep 
thou, &c. 

Of the irregular Verb fugir, to fly away. 

This verb is irregular in the present indicative, 
and is thus conjugated : fujo, foges, fbge, fugimos, 
fugis,fbgem, I run away, &V. It is also irregular 
in the imperative mood, where it is conjugated 
thus : foge tu, fuja elle, fujamos nos, fugi vos, f'tjao 
elles. Finally, it is irregular in the present subjunc- 
tive; que eufujayfujas, &c. 

It 



G R A M M A R. 93 

It keeps the u in all other tenfes and moods, as 
also the g. 

The verb furglr, to arrive, or to come to an an- 
chor, has the fame irregularity, and makes fufto, in 
the participle paflive. 

The verbs fubir t cubrir, encubrir, defcubrir, acu- 
d/r, bullir i futriir i . confumir y cu/pir, con/iru/r, tuff'iv\ 
&c. have the same irregularity in regard to the let- 
ter //. 

Of the irregular Verb pedir, to afk. 

This verb is irregular in the firft perfon fingular 
of the prefent indicative and fubjunclive, as well as 
in the imperative, in which it changes the d into c. 

Indicative. 

tupdfo,. I afk, &c. nos pedimos. 

tu pedes, vos pedis, 

elle pede, elles pedem. 

Imperative. 

pegdmos nos, let us afk. 
pede tu, afk thou. pedi vos, afk you. 

' pefa elle, let him .afk. peg ao elles, let them afk. 

Subjunctive. 

que eupega, that I may afk, &c. pegamos. 

pegas, pegdis. 

pega, pegao. • 

In likemanner is conjugated the verb medir, to 
meafure : eu meco, tu ittedes % &c. 

Of the irregular Verb veftir, to drefs. 
Indicative. 
Prefent. - 
hi vijlo, I drefs, &c. vejlimos. 

ve/tes, . veftis. 

vejie, • vejlem. 

4 Imperative. 



U PORTUGUESE 

Imperative. 

vijiamos nos t let us drefs. 
vejletu, drefs thou. ve]livos\ drefs you. 

vi/ta elk, let him drefs. viftao elles, let them drefs. 

Subjunctive. 

Prefent. 

que hi vifla, that I may drefs, &c. vifiamos. 

vijias % vijisis. 

vijiuy v/tao. 

In all other tenses and moods it keeps the let- 
ter e\ and in like manner is conjugated the verb 

defpir. 

Of the irregular Verb sortir, to furnijb, ox flock. 

Feyjo says, that the oof this verb is to be changed 
into a, in those tenses where the / is followed by e 
or a, and that it is to be kept, when the / is followed 
by i ; but in the Fdbula dos planetas we read, Jurt'io 
eff'jyio, it took effect : and in Andrade 2 part. Apohget. 
we read, nao foritrao effeyio, where the verb forurtio 
is in the same tense, viz. in the preterperfect defi- 
nite; therefore nothing can be determined about 
the irregularity of this verb. 

Of the irregular Verb carpir, to weep. 
This verb is defective, and is only used in those 
tenses and persons where the/) is followed by i ; as 
carpimos, carp's, we weep, you weep. Preterimper- 
fect, carpia, carpias, &c. I did weep, &c. 

Of {he irregular Verb parir, to bring forth young as any 
female doth. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

eu pairo, I bring forth, &c. parimos. 

pares, parts, 

pare, par em. 

Imperfect. 
; paria, &c. 

Imperative, 



GRAMMAR, 95 

Imoerative Mood. 

i 
pairamos. 
pare tu, bring thou forth, &c. pari, 
paira tila, pairao. 

Subjunctive. 
Prefenh 
que eu pair a, that I may fay, &c. pairamos. 
pair as i pairdis. 

pair a, pairao. 

Of the irregular Verh repetir, to repeat. 

Indicative. 

Prefent. 

repito, I repeat, Sec. repetimos. 

repetes, repetis. 

repete, repetem. 

Imperfeft. 
repetia^repetias, &c, 
Preterperfeft definite. 
repeti, repetife, &c. 

Imperative. 

repete tu, repeat thou, &c. repitamos, &c. 

repita elk, 

Subjunctive. 
Prefent. 
jue eu repita, that I may repeat, Sec. 
repitas, &c. 

Imperfecl. 
repetira, or repetifse, that I might repeat. 

Of the irregular Verbs sahir, to go out, and cahir, to 

fall. 

Indicative. 
Prefent. 
fayo, I go out, 8cc fahimos. 

Jakes, fahis. 

fake, fa hem. 

Preterimperfecl. 
, fakia,fahias, &c. 

Preter- 



96 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfeft definite. 

JahUjahiJte* &c. 

Imperative. 

fahdmos nos. 
faht iu, fahivos. 

fdya et/e, fayao elks. 

Subjunctive. 

que tufty a, fay as, Sec. 

This is the common way of writing the irregular 
tenses of the verb fahir as well as those of the verb 
cahir, viz. eu cciyo, tn cahes, &c. I fall, &r. according 
to Feyjo. 

Of the irregular Verb, ordir, to warp in a loom. 

Feyft say? that this verb changes the o into //, in 
those persons where it would otherwise meet with the 
syllables da, de, do. 

Of the irregular Verb advertir, to warn. 

Advertir is irregular in the following tenses, only 
by changing vir into ver. 

Indicative. 
Prefent, 

advirto, I warn, See. adverthnos. 

advertes, advertis. 

advirte, advertem. 

Imperative. 

advirtchnos nos. 
adverte tu, warn thou, &c* advertz vos. 

advirta elle, advirtao dies, 

. Subjunctive. . 

Prefent. 

que eu advirta, that I may warn, &c. advirtdmos. 
advirtas, advirtais. 

advirta, advirtao. 

The 



GRAMMAR. 97 

The Conjugation vf the irregular Kerb por, to place* 
Indicative* 
Prefent. 
ponko, I put, &c. pernios* 

poens, pondes. 

poem, poem. 

Preterimperfe£h 

punka, 1 did put. punhamos* 

punkas, punkas, 

punka, punhao. 

Preterperfeft definite* 

puz, I put, &c. puzemos. 

puzejic, puzejies. 

poz, puzerao* 

Preteroerfeft. 

It is compofed of the prefent indicative of the 
auxiliary verb ter, and the participle pojto. 

Preterpluperfeft. 

|; It is compofed of the participle pofto, and the 
Imperfe6t of the auxiliary Verb ter. 

i Future. 

porei, I lhall or will put, &e. poremosk 
poras, poreis. 

pora, pordo. 

Imperative. 

ponhamos nos. 
poem, put thou, &c. ponde vos. 

ponha elle, ponkao elles. 

Optative and Subjun&ive, 

Prefent. 
que eu ponha, that I may put, &c. 
ponhas, &c. 

Firft Preterimperfect. 

que eupuzera or puzejje, that I might put, &c. 
puzeras or puzejfes, &c. 

H Second 



98 



P*G RTUGUESE 



Second Preterimperfect. 

tu porta, I fliould put, &c. 

porias, &c. 

Preterperfect. 
It is compofed of the participle pofto, and the 
prefent fubjunStive of the auxiliary verb ter. 
Preterpluperfect. 
It is eompofed of the participle pofio, and the flrft 
preterimperfeft fubjunclive of the auxiliary verb ter. 
Secon* Preterpluperfect. 
It is compofed of the participle pofio, and the 
fecond preterimperfeft fubjUiiQive of the auxiliary 
verb ter. 

futuie- 

qu'ando eu pufer, when I fhall put, £c. 

pujeres, &c. 

Second Future. 
It is compofed of the participle posto, and the fu- 
ture fubjunclive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

Infinitive. 
Prefent. 
per, to put. 
Gerund. 
pondoj puttings 
Participle paflive. 
pofto, put. 
After the lame manner are conjugated the verba 
derived from por ; as cbmpor, to cbmpofe y dispdr y 
to difpofe ; propor, to propofe, &c. 

Some verbs are irregular only in the participle 
paflive 3 as aberto, from abr'ir $ esmto, from ejere- 
ver, &c. 

Of Verbs . Neuter '. 

Verbs neuter are thofe which make a complete 
fenfe.of themfelves, and do not govern any cafe af- 

' - - tetf 



GRAMMA fo * 99 

ter them, like the verbs active ; as dormtr, to fleep ; 
andhr', to go ; iremer, to tremble, &c. But you 
muft take notice that we meet with ibme verbs neu- 
ter which may govern an accufative ; as dormir hum 
Jbno prof undo, to fleep foundly ; eu ful andando meiu 
cammho, e nao d'fse huma palavra, I went my -way, 
and faid not a word. We may alfo fay, that the 
verbs neuter are rhose which, in their compound 
tenfes, are feldom or never conjugated with the verb 
sir, to be ; as, I fleep, I tremble, I fpeak, &c. We 
may indeed fay, eu tenho dormido, I have flept ; M 
tenho tremido, I have trembled ; but not, I am flept, 
&c. I faid feldom, becaufe fometimes the verbs 
neuter' may be conjugated with the verb ser ; as, 
fer bem fal/ddo, to have a good name. 

It is neceflary to be acquainted with the nature 
of a verb neuter, to avoid miflakes in the partici- 
ple, as may be feen in the Syntax of Participles. 

Of Reciprocal Verbs. 

The name of Reciprocal Verbs is given to fuch 
as return the action upon the agent, and are conju- 
gated through all their tenfes with the pronouns 
tonjunftive me, te, se, &c. 

Example. 

Indicative. Prefent. 

cu me arrepindo, I repent, &c 
tu te arrtpendesy 
ellefe arrepende, &c. 

Imperfe£h 
eu me arrepehdia, I did repent, &c» 

and fo of the reft. 

Yet we are to take notice that the pronouns con= 
junctive me, te, &c. may be placed either before 
or after the Verb, in the indicative, and confequent- 
Jy we may fay, eu me lembro, or en lembro me, I re- 

H 2 member $ 



100 PORTUGUESE 

member ; me lembrei, or lembrei-me, I remembered* 
Sec. But in the imperative they ought to be placed 
after the verb, as in the following 



t> 



Example. 

kmhremo-nos noS. 
lemhra-it iu, remember thou, 8cc. lembrauvos vos. 
Umbre-fe elle x I embroil fe elks. 

In which example you muft obferve alfo, that the 
firft perfon plural, which in the other verbs is like 
the firft perfon plural of the prefent subjunctive, has 
the laft confonant, s, cut off -, and so from lembremo's 
we cut off the s to make lembremo-nos ; and from 
arrependamos w r e make arrependdmo-nos, &c. In re- 
gard to the infinitive, we may fay, he necefsario ar- 
repender-fe dos pecchdos, it is neceflary to repent fins; 
he necefsario lembrkr-fe, it is neceflary to remember; 
and not fe arrepender, or se lembrar. In like man- 
ner w r e may fav lembrando-mejemembeYmg, and not 
?ne lembrando. Yet you mull: take notice that the 
prefent infinitive may be preceded by the particle 
para, (which forms the Portuguefe fupine) and 
then the pronoun conjunctive may be placed either 
before or after it 3 and fo we fay, para lembrar* 
fe, or para fe lembrar, to remember, or in order to 
remember. 

As for the fubjuncfive mood, you, muft put the 
pronoun conjunctive before the prefent ; but yoti 
muft carefully observe, that the pronouns conjunc- 
tive muft be placed before it when preceded by the 
particles se, if, que, that ; and fo you may fay, que 
eu me lembrafse, se eu me lembrafse, that I might re- 
member, &c. but not que eu lembrafse me, &c. But 
when the firft preterimperfect is not preceded by any 
particle, then you muft place the pronoun conjunc- 
tive after it ; as, arrependerame eu d'tfso, I wifh I 
repented it. 

In the fecond preterm! perfect we may place the 
pronouns conjunctive either before or after it, there- 
fore 



GRAM M A R. ' ioi 

fore you may fay arrependeria me se, &c, or eu me 
arrependeria se, &c. I mould repent if, &c. 

In the future you mud always place the pronouns 
conjunctive before it ; and fo we may fay, quando eu 
me lembrdr, when I fhali remember ; but not quando 
eu lembrhr-me. 

Note 3 all the verbs active may become recipro- 
cals. 

Example. 
eu me amo y I love myfelf. 
tu te amas, thou loveft thyfelf. 
ellefe ama y he loves himfelf. 
nos nos amamos, we love ourfelves, &c. 

The Conjugation of the reciprocal Verb ir-fe, to go away. 

Indicative, 

Prefer*. 
eu me vou, I go away. 
tu te vas, &c. thou goeft away, &c. 

Preterimperfect. 
eu me hia, I did go away. 
tu te hias, &c. thou didft go away, &<* 

Preterperfeft definite. 
eu me fat, I went away. 

tu te fofte, &c. thou wenteft away, &c. 

Preterperfeft. 
eu me tenho ida, I am gone away, or I have gone away, 
tu te tens ido % &c. thou haft gone away, &c. 

Preterpluperfeft. 
eu me tinka ido. I was gone away, or I had gone away. 
tu te tinhas \do t &c. thou haft gone away, &c. 

Future. 
eu me irei, &c. I (hall or will go away, 
tu te iraj, &c. thou {halt go away. 

Imperative. 
vai-te, go thou away. 
vdfe t let him go away. 
vamo-nos t lei us go away. 
ide-VQS y go away, get away, or get you gone. 
vfo-fe^ let them go away. 

H 3 Sub- 



m PORTUGUES E 

Subjun&ive. 

Prefent. 

due eu me va, that I may go away. 

que tu te vas, Sec. that thou mayeft go away, &c«. 

Firft Preterimperfea. 

iu me faro, ox me Me, I went away. 

teforas, or tejojjes, *&c. thou wenteft away, &c 

Second Preterimperfeft. 

eu me iria, I would, &c. go away. 

tu te irias, thou wouldft, &c. 

Preterperfeft. 

que eu me tenha ido, that I have gone away, &c, 

PreterpluperfecT:. 

que eu r* tivfra, or me tivefe ido, that I had gone away. 

Second Pre-terplupetfe&. 

eu me teria ido, I mould have gone away, &c, 

Future. 
quando eu me for, when I mail go away, &c. 
Second Future. 
pidndo eu me tivfr. ido,, when I mail have gone away, &c, 
Infinitive. 
Prefent. 
ir.fe, to go away. 
Preterperfeft. 
Urfe ido, to have gone away. 
Participles. 
Prefent. 
; quejeva, that is gone away. 

Preterit, 



GRAMMAR. 103 

Preterit. 

ido, gone away. 

Future. 

.que ha de ir-fe, , that is to go away, I 

Gerunds. 

indo-fe, going away. 
tendo fe ido, having gone away* 

Supine. . 

parair-fe, to go, or in order to go away/ 

You muft obferve, that in the compound tenfes 
f be pronouns me, te, Szc. f are placed before the aux- 
iliary verb. 

2dly. This verb is alio faid of vefTels to fignify 
their being leaky ; as vai se a cuba, the tub leaks. 
It is alfo ufed before the gerunds; as, o inverno 
vai-fe ' acabando, the winter is drawing 1 towards an 
end; ellesvao-fepreparhido, they are preparing them- 
selves : in which examples and in the like, the verb is 
io be rendered into Englifh by r the verb to be itfelf, 
and without addition orthe adverb away, and some- 
times it is placed before the prefent infinitive 5 '-as, 
irfe deitar, to go to bed. 

Of the reciprocal Verb vir-fe, to rome away. 

This verb is to be conjugated like the verb vir % 
but you muft place the pronouns conjunctive, me, 
te, &c. according to the obfervations we have 
made above. 

Of the reciprocal Verb avir-fe, to-Ugree. 

This is a compound verb, which'; is tobe conju- 
gated by putting the particle a before the verb vir 
"m all its tenfes and moods • but you mull always 

II 4 make 



104 PORTUGUESE 

make life of the obfervations already made about 
the pronouns conjunctive ; and the fame care muft 
be had with the reciprocal verb haver-fe, to behave ; 
in the conjugation of which, you have nothing to 
dobut to add the pronouns conjunctive to the verb 
haver. 

Imperfonal Verbs. 

There are three forts of verbs Irrrperfonal, which 
have only the third perfon fingular, 

The firft are properly imperfonals of themfelves ^ 
as* 

Juccede, it happens. 

bafla, it is enough, or it fuffices. 

cko've, it rains. 

troveja t it thunders. 

The fecond are derived from verbs active, fol- 
lowed by the particle se, which renders them im- 
perfonal y as, ama-fe, they love ; diz-fe, they fay y 
nota-fe, it is noted. They are alfo called paffive 
imperfonals. 

The third, which have a great affinity with re- 
ciprocal verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns 
conjunctive, me, te, lhe> nos 3 vos, Ihes \ as, doe-mc* 
doe-ie, doe- 1 he, 8^c. 

The imperfonal verbs, of themfelves are^ 

convem, it is convenient. 
Juccede^ it happens, or it falls out. 
ejlame be?n, it becomes me. 
bajla, it is enough. 
ha-fe, it is neceflary. 
ckovifca, it mifles. 
ckove^ov cdhepedra i it hails.., 
gea, it freezes. 
neva, it fnows. 

fuzzla, or relampaguea, it lightens, 
importa* it matters, it concerns. 
parece, it feems. 

and 



GRAMMAR. 105 

and the like, which are conjugated with the third 
perfons lingular of each tenfe 5 as, 

Indicative. 

Prefent. 

ckove, it rains. 

Imperfect. 

chovia, it did rain. 

Preterperfecl: definite. 

chovco, it rained, 

Preterperfect. 

tern ckovzdo, it has rained, 

Preterpluperfeft. 

tinha chovido, it had rained. 

Future. 

choverd, it fliall or will rain. 

Imperative, 

chova, let it rain. 

Optative and Subjunctive. 

Prefent. 

que chova, that it may rain, 

Imperfecl. 

que chovera, or choveffe, that it might rain. 

Second Imperfect. 

: choverfa, it mould rain. 

Future. 
quando ckove'r, when it {hall rain. 

Second Future. 
qudndg tiver chovido, when it fhall have rained. 

Infinitive, 

ckover, to rain. 

The 



106 PORTUGUESE 

The particle se, which compofes the fecond fort 
of imperfonal verbs, may be placed either before or 
after them ; as, diz-fe, they fay ; "sabe-se, it is known ; 
s.ab'ia-se, it was known , logo fe Jbube> it was imme- 
diately known \^e diz , it is faid, feV. but fometimes 
they make no ule of the particle se, and only put 
the v verb in the third perfon plural; as, dlzem, in- 
ftead of se diz, they fay. 

In like manner all the verbs active may become 
imperfonal. 

In regard to thefe verbs, take notice, that when 
the noun that follows them is in the fingular num- 
ber, you muft put the verb in the fingular ; if the 
noun be in the plural, you put the verb in the plu- 
ral. 

Example. 

Louva-fe o capjtdp, they praife the captain. 
Louvdo-fe os capitals^ they .praife the captains. 
Ve-fe hum Id mem, they fee a man. 
Vem-fe homens, they fee men. 

When Ike is ufed after the word/*, then the is to be 
rendered into Engiifh by his or her : as lbuva-se-lhe 
o valor, they praife his or her courage. 

The third fort of imperfonal verbs are fuch as are 
conjugated with the pronouns perfonal, me, le, lhe % 
&c. with the third perfon fingular. 

Example. 

Indicative. k 

Prefent. . 

defagrada'-me, * I am difpleafed, <?r it difpleafes me, 

defagrdda-te, thou art difpleafed. 

dej'agrada-lke, he or fhe is difpleafed. 

dejagrada-nos, we are difpleafed. 

dejagrada-vos, you are difpleafed. 

rada-lkes t they are difpleafed, 

Imperfect." 

dcfagraddva-me, I was difpleafed. 

Preter- 



GRAMMA R.. 107 

Preterperfecl: definite, 

defagradou-pie. I was difpleafed, 

Future, 

defagradar-me-ha, I fliall becjifpleafed. 

Optative. 

que me defagrdde, that I may be difpleafed. 

Impeffe£L 

que me defagradara or me defagraddffe, that I were difpleafed. 

Second Imperfe£t. 
defagradar-me-hia, I mould be difpleafed. 

Conjugate after the fame manner, 

fuccede-me, it happens to me. 
doe-me, it grieves or it pains me. 
parece-me, it feems to me. 
jie-me-precifo, it behoves me. 
agrdda-me, it pleafes me. 
iembro-me, I remember, 

, Many of thofe imperfonal verbs have ,the third 
perfon fingular and plural } as, 

doe me a pema, my leg pains me. 
deem me os olkos, I have fore eyes. 

o vojfo vejiido pdrece-me novo, your coat appears new to me. 
os voffos fapatos me parecem miiito compriflos, your moes 
feem to me too long. 

Of the Verb str,- to be. 

The verb ser is alfo ufed as an imperfonal, as it 
appears in the following examples : he tempo de le- 
vantar se, it is time to get up \ era tempo de Mr, it 
was time to go, &c. and particularly when it is con- 
jugated with the adjectives precfo or necejsario ; as, he 
freafo or necessario fazir ifto, this muft be done ; era 
preafo or necefsario efcreve'r, it was neceflary to write ; 
hiiria > sefo/Je precfo, I would go, if it mould be ne- 

eeifary i 



108 PORTUGUESE 

ceflary ; he precifo que eu va, I muft go ; he precifo 
que eu ley a, I muft read ; he precifo que elle coma, he 
muft eat; seria precifo que eu fbjfe, I fhould go f 
You fee by the laft examples, that when the verb 
fer and the adje&ive are before the conjunctive 
mood, with the participle que, the conjunctive is ren- 
dered in Englifh by the infinitive ; but if the verb 
fer is followed by the relative or particle que, it 
muft then be rendered in Englifh in the following 
manner; as eu he que tenhofeito aquillo, 'tis I who 
have done that ; tu he que tens, &c. 'tis thou who 
haft, &c. elle he que tern, &c. 'tis he who, &c. nos 
he que temos, &c. 'tis we who have, &c. vos he que 
t hides, &c. 'tis you who have, &c. elles\ he que tern, 
&c. 'tis they have, &;c. a ley he que o manda, 'tis 
the law that prefcribes it ; ilia he que o ere, 'tis fhe 
who believes it f elles he que o fixer ao ? is it they 
have done it ? eu/ie que ofiz, 'twas I who did it ; en- 
tao he que eu tomo as minhas medidas, 'tis then I take 
my meafures ; entao he que eu vi, 'twas then I faw, 
or only then 1 faw. You may obferve that que is 
not relative in the laft examples, and that it is left 
out in Englifh. 

Of the Verb haver, when it is imperfunal. 

It is to be fo conjugated. 

Indicative. 

Prefent. 

ha, or nuo ha, there is, or there is not, or there are a ox 
there are not, 

Imperfeft. . 
havia, there was, or there were. 

Preterperfeft definite. 

heuve, there was, or there were. 

Preterm 



. GRAMMAR. l0S» 

Preterperfecl:. 
ttni havido, there has been or there have been,; 

Preterp!uperfe£h 
iinha havido, there had been; 

Future. 

haver a > there mall be; 

Imperative. 

kajd, let there be; 

Optative and Subjun&ive; 
que kajd, that there may bei 

; Imp^rfecT:. 

que houvera or houvejfe, that there were; 

Second Imperfect. 
haveria, there would be. 

Preterperfect. 
que tinha havido, if there had been, 

Preterpluperfecl. 

Je tivejfe havido, if there had been. 

Future. 

quando houvef, when there will or mall be; 

Second Future. 

fuafido tive'r havido, when there fhall have been. 

Infinitive. 

haver, there to be. 

Pret. 

ter havido, there to have been. 

Gerunds. 

■ 

havendo, there being. 

Undo havido, in there having been. 

TThofe who learn Portuguefe are greatly at a lots 
how to render, the following expreffions, there is not\ ■ 



110 PORTUGUESE 

is there t and though there is nothing fo eafy j bow- 



ing 



is there f ana inougu mcic i& uuumig *v ^«* 7 , «« 
ever, I have explained them at large in the follovfri 
conjugation. 

Conjugation of the Verb inrperfonal there is, ha, when 
it marks the place, through all its ienfes. 



There is of it, 

There is not of it, 

Is there of it ? 

Is there not of it ? 

There was of ir, 

There was not of it, 

Was there of it? - ■ 

Was there not of it ? 

There was of it, 

There was not of it, 

Was there of it ? 

Was there not of it ? 

There (hall be of it, 
There (hall not be of it, 
Shall there be of it? 
Shall there not be of it? 
That there may be'of it, - 
That there may not be of it, 
That there were of it, 
That there were not of it, 
There would be of it, 
There would not be of it, 
Would there not be of it ? 

Jf there had been of it, 
If there had not been of it, 
Had there been of it ? 
Had there not been of it ? 
There would have been of it, 
There would not have been 

of it, 
Would there have been of it, 
Would there not have been 

of it? 
When there will be of it, 
When there will not be of it, 



ha la dp. 
nao ha la di/fo. 
ha la diffo ? 
nao ha id dip ? 
havia la diffo. 
nao havia la dijfo, 
havia Id dijfo ? 
nao havia la dip ? 

ho uve la dijfo. 
nao houve la dijfo. 
huuve'ld dijfo? 
nao houve la dijfo? 

haver a Id dijfo. 
nao haver a la dip. 
haver a la dijfo ? 
nao haverd la diffo ? 

que hdja la diffo. 
nao haja la dijfo. / , [dj/fo^ 
que houvera ox' houve jfe la 
nao houvSra or houve ffe Id. 

haveria la dip.y &&'' 

nao haveria la diffo. 

nao haveria Id dijfo ? 
fe tiveffe havido Id diffo. ' 
fe new tiveffe havido Id dijfo* 

teria havido Id diffo f ^ 

nao teria havido Id diffo ? 

teria havido Id diffo. 

nuo teria havido la diffo* 

teria havido Id diffo ? 
nao teria havido 'Id diffo f 

qudndo houver la dip. 
intdndo n#o kouiir la dp, 
1 When 



GRAMMAR. ; III 

When there will have been qudndotivir havido Id difso, 

of it, 

When there will not have qud.ndo nao tivcr havido la 

been of it, ' difso. 

Will there have been of it ? terd havido Id difso f 

Will there not have been of nao Ufa havido Id difso ? 

it? 

For there havinf .been too por ter havido Id demafida- 

much of it, ' minte difso, 

In there having been too little tenho havido Idmuito pouca 

of it. - difso. 

Moft ways of fpeaking beginning with fome, and 
the Verb to be, are expreffed in Portuguefe by the 
imperfonal ha -, as, fome friends are falfe, ha ami". 
gos fdlfos ; some Chriflians are unworthy of that 
name, ha Christ iaos que nao sad dignos de tat nbme. 

Obferve, that ha comes before a fubftantive even 
of the plural number. 

The imperfonal ha± is befides ufed to denote a 
quantity of time, fpace, and number; as, ha de% 
annos que morreo, be has been dead thefe ten years ; 
or, he died ten years ago ; ha trinta milhoens d' almas 
em Franca, there are thirty millions of fouls in 
France; de Paris a Londres ha 120 legoas y Paris is 
120 leagues from London. 

The queilion of fpace is afked thus, qua tit o ha de 
Paris a Londres f how far is Paris from London ? 

Of the imperfonal Verb ha- fe, it is necefjary, or tnujl. 

This verb anfwers to the Italian bifogna, and to 
the French ilfaut, and always requires after it the 
particle de, and the infinitive. It denotes the ne* 
ceffity of doing fomethingj and is Engl-ifhed by>muf, 
and fometimes by the verb to ^through all its 
tenfes, with fome of thefe words, necefjary, recufiie, 
needful: and as it denotes the necejlity of doing 
something in general, without fpeeifying who mttjk 
therefore the fubjecl coming before mufi may be ei- 
ther / or we, he, or she, or any bod\\ according. to 
the fenfe of the fpeech ; as, 



Hah 



m PORTUGUESE 

Ha-fe de fazer aquillo, one, or we, or you, or he* 
or fomebody muft do that. 

Ha-fe de hir 3 I or you, or we, or fomebody muft 

go. 

Sometimes the verb coming after this imperfonal, 
is Englifhed by the paffive voice ; as, ka-fe de fazer 
tfto, this muft be done* 

It is very often joined with mister ; as, hafe di 
mlier dinheiro para demandas, one muft have money 
to go to law ; ha-fe de mifier hum bom amlgo para fa- 
zer fortuna no mhido, to pufh one's fortune in the 
world, one muft have a good friend. 

As for the conjugation of this verb, you mud 
make ufe of the verb to be with necefary, as I have 
already faid. 

Example. 

Prefent, hafe, it is: necefTary. Imperfect, havia- 
fe, it was necefTary ; and fo through all the tenfes 
and moods. 

You muft take notice, that fometimes the infmi-* 
tive that follows the particle de is placed between 
this imperfonal and its particle fe ; as, ha de achdr-se, 
it will be found, and fometimes the infinitive pre- 
cedes the imperfonal, and this follows the particle 
fe; as, acharfe ha, it will be found; and in this 
cafe you muft not join the particle de to it. Obferve, 
that the infinitive may be alfo placed between, 
the imperfect tenfe of this imperfonal verb and its 
particle se ; as, hav/a de ackar-se y it was to be 
found ; buf when the infinitive precedes both the 
imperfonal and its particle se, then you muft put the 
particle se before the imperfonal, and make ufe of 
the imperfect Ma, and not havta ; so you may fay, 
achhr~fe hia, and not achcir-se-havia. 



Of 



GRAMMAR. lis 

Of the defective Verbs carpir, to weep 9 dndio£v 9 to 
be wont. 

The verb carpir is ufed only in thofe tenfes and 
perfons where the p is followed by an ij as, carpi* 
mos> carphy we weep, you weep. Preterimp. carpia, 
carp/as, &c. I did weep, &c. 

The werbfoer is only ufed in the third perfons of 
the prefent indicative of the preterimperfedr, of the 
same mood, and in the gerund : as, elk J6e> he is 
wont; ellesfbem y they are wont. Imperf. ellefoia t hc 
was wont; elles foiao t they were wont. Gerund^ 
foendo, being wont. 



CHAP. V 



Of the Participles. 

HPHE participle is a tenfe of the infinitive, which 
ferves to form the preterperfecls and preter- 
pluperfects of all the verbs ; as, tenho amado, 1 have 
loved ; iinha amado, I had loved. 

Amado is a participle, and all the verbs in tfrforrn 
the participle in ado ; as, amado, cantado, &c. 

Amado is likewife a noun adjective. Example. 
Homem amado, molher amdda j Hvros amados, letras 
amddas. - 

Some participles are frequently abridged; as, en- 
vbltOy or envolvido, corruplo or corrompido y enxuto or 
exugado ; and feveral others, which the life of au- 
thors will point out to you. 

The regular verbs ending in er or in tr form the 
participle in ido >- as, vendido, recebidoy fazido, nutndo^ 
&c. 

I There 



114 PORTUGUESE 

There are three forts of participles ; namely, ac- 
tive, paflive, and abfolute. 

The active participles are compofe<i of the verb 
ter ; as, tenho amado, tinha amado, &c. 

The paffive participles are preceded by the verb 
fir, to be ; as, foil am ado, Jendo louvado, &c. 

The paflive participles are of the fame nature 
as thofe called abfolute in Latin ; and you mull ob- 
ferve, that having and being are often left out in 
Portuguefe. 

Example. 

Feito ifto, having done this. 

Dlto ifto> having faid fo. 

Acabada a cea> after he or they have fupped. 

The auxiliary and participle are not always im- 
mediately joined together in compound tenfes; as, 
Nos temoSy com a graca de Deos, vencido os nbjfos ini- 
migos^ we have, by the grace of God, overcome our 
enemies. 



CHAP. VI. 



Of the Adverbs. 



THE adverb is that which gives more or lefs 
force to the verb. 

The adverb has the fame effect with the verb as 
the adjective with the fubftantive : it explains the 
accidents and circumftances of the action of the 
verb. 

There are a great many forts s as, adverbs of 
time, place, quantity, &c, 

Adverbs of time; as, at prefenr, prefentemente, 
now, agora : yefterday, intern ; to day, hbje •> never, 

nunca ; 



GRAMMAR. 115 

nunca; always, fempre ; in the mean time; entre- 
tanto. 

Adverbs of place; as, where, 6nde\ here, aqui ; 
from whence, donde-, there, alt-, from hence, da- 
qui% above, em cima •> below, em baxo; far, longe-, 
near, perto. 

Adverbs of quantity ; as, how much, qudnto ; 
Jiow many, amnios ; or qudnias ; fo much, tdnto ; 
much, muito ; little, pbuco. 

A great many ajiverbs are formed from adjec- 
tives, changing into amente ; fdnto, fani 'amfoil '<?, ho!i- 
lv ; rico, ricamente, richly ; douto, dout amente > learned- 

From adjectives in e or / we likewife form adverbs, 
by adding mente to them ; as, 

Conjidnte, conftantemente, conftantly. 

Diligente, diligent emente, diligently. 

Prudente, prudentemente, prudenty. 

Fiei,fielmente, faithfully. 

In order to affift the memory of thofe who are 
learning the Portuguefe language, I have here col- 
lected a large number of adverbs, which, by fre- 
quent repetition, may be eafily retained, efpecially 
thofe terminated in mente. 

A Collection of Adverbs. 

Abundantemente, abundantly Adeos, farewell. 
Com razd'o,ju/ia?nente,ju{i\y 
ibfolut amente, absolutely. 
4 Ecachapernas, or a caval- 

leiro, a-ftraddle. AJlutdmente, cunningly. 

Agora, or por kira, now at Atreicoadamente, treacher- 

this time. oufly. 

jfapardja,novt, immediately De maravilha, very seldom. 

Com con die do ^on condition A miuao, often. 

De parte, afide. Ajfhn, so. 

J)e travez, afkew, asquint ; Tad, so. 

as, olhar detravez, to look Aprejfa, in hafte. 

afkew, or asquint. Facilmente, easily. 

Aclualmente, actually. A'o avejfo, or as avejfas, the 
De propofito, purposely. wrong side outward. 

I 2 De 




116 

Deimprovifo, or iinprovifa- 

mente, at unawares. 
Antigamente y anciently. " 
Quafi, pretty near, almoft. 
Entao, then. 

Defde entao, fince that time. 
Defde quando ? fince when ? 
De quando dca ? from what 

time ? how long? 
De quando em quando, now 

and then, ever and anon. 
Quando hem, or ain da quando, 

albert, although it fhould 

be. 

Quando muito, at the moll. 

Quando menos, at lead. 

Cd, here, or hither. 

La, there. 

AH, there, in that place. 

("there, expreffes the 

| place where ftands the 

AtiiyA, perfon fpoken to ; as, 

j a hi onde ejtas, there 

l^where you are. 

A col a, there. 

Trdz, or detraz, behind. 

Para trdz, backward. 

I'jlo he, to wit. 

Em vez, inftead. 

Tambcm, alfo. 

Tanto que, \ „„ r 

T , * . > as loon as* 

Logo que, J 

De pen/ado, wilfully. 

Acdfo, by chance. 

Fix a men te, ftedfaftly. 

Finahnente, finally. 

Livremcnte, freely. 

Muito, much. 

DeprcJJa, quickly. 

Aqm, here. 

Ate aqui, as far as here, or 
tillnow* or hitherto. 

D"aqui em diante, hencefor- 
ward, or hereafter. 

Bern, welL 



PORTUGUESE 



A'manhaa, to-morrow. 

A'manhaa pela manhaa, to- 
morrow morning. 

Defpois a" a manhaa, after to- 
morrow. 

Vltimamcnte, laftly. 

Como, as. 

Co mo ? how ? 

Cedo, soon. 

Tarde, late. 

Primeiro que, before that. • 

Primei.ro quctudo, before all. 
or in the firfl place. 

For a, abroad, out. 

Ja, already. 

Defdlto, at one jump. 

De quando em quando, from 
time to time. 

Antes, before. 

Defpois, afterwards. 

Juntamente, together. 

Enteiramente, entirely. 

A ' oredor, or emtorno, about, 

De balde, in vain. 

Loucamente, madly. 

Muito, very. 

Atrevidamente, boldly. 

Felicemente, happily. 

Vergonhofamente, (hameiuliy 

Nunc a, never. 

Nunca mais, never fince. 

Logo, immediately. 

Ainda, yet ; as* ainda nixo 
veto, he is not come yet. 

Ainda, even ; as Jeria ver- 
g'onha ainda ofalldr nijfo, 
it were a Ihame even to 
fpeak of it. 

Nemfe quer, even. 

Vilmen'e, bafely. 

Mai, ill, 

Muis, more. 

M'enos, less. 

Ate, until or even. 

Mm, yes. 

Nae>. 



GR A MM AR. II 

Nad, no, not. Oudndo, when. 

O'nde, where. Nxda, nothing. 

Dc cor, by heart. Per dadeiramemte, truly.. 

A's vexes, sometimes, from DJntro, within, 
time to time. Devagar, softly. 



CHAP. VII. 

Of the Prepofitiom. 

PRepofitions are a part of, fpeech indeclinable, 
..moft commonly fet before a noun, a pronoun,, 
or verb. 

Every prepofition requires some -case after it 3 as 
you will see in the following collection : 

Genitive* 
Antes do dia, before day-break. 
Didnte de Deos, before God. 
Dentro da igreja, within the church. 
De traz do palacio : , behind the palace. 
Debaxo da ?nefa, under the table. 
Km cima da me/a, upon the table. 
Alan, besides. 

Ahm dos mares, on that side of the seas. 
Alem dijfo, besides that, moreover. 
Alem de que, idem. 

Aquem, or ddquem dos mares, on this side of the seas- 
Ao redor, or em cpntirno da cidade, round about the city. 
Per to de Lcndres, near London. 
Accrca daqucllo neg-ocio, concerning that affair. 
F'ora da cd/a, out of the houfe. 
Fora de pcrigo, out of danger. 
For a deji, out of one's wiis. 

This prepofition governs a 1/6 a nominative ; as, fora feu 
irmao, except his brother, or, his brother excepted, 
De/ronte deminha cdfa, over-againft my house. 
De/ronte da igreja, facing the church. 
De/pois de cea, after supper. - 

Dative. 
Oudnto aqaillo, with respecl to that. 
Pegddo a muralha, close to the wall. 

I 3 Deft* 



118 PORTUGUESE 

Defde o Vico do pe ate a cabe$a, from top to toe. 

Accusative. 
Per ante o juiz, before the judge. 
E'ntre, between, among, or amongft. 
E'ntre os homens, among men. 
Sobre a mefa, upon the table. 
Conjorme, or fegundo a ley, according to the law. 
For amor de Dtos, for God's sake. 
Pelo mundo, through the world. 
Pela rua, through the Greets. 
p^hj terras, through the lands. 
Por grdnde quefeja, let it be never fo great. . 
Contra clles, againft them. 
Traz o templo, behind the temple. 
Durante, during ; as, durante o inverno, during the winter. 

We fhall be more particular about prepofitions 
when we examine their conftruction. 



CHAP. VIII. 

Of the Conjundiions. 

A Conjunction is an indeclinable part of fpeech, 
which ferves to join the members and parts of 
fpeech together, in (hewing the dependency of re- 
lation and coherency between the words and fen- 
tences. 

Some conjunctions are copulative, which join, 
and, as it were, couple two terms together ; as, e, 
and : Poxiuguefes e Ing/efes, Portuguefe and Englifh. 

Some are disjunctive, which fhew feparation or 
divifion ; as, nem, nor, neither; ou, either, or. 
Example ; nem efte, nem aquelle, neither this, nor 
that; on efte.ou aquelle, either this or that; nem 
mats, nem menos 9 neither more nor lefs ; quer o Jaga, 
quer nao, iudo para mim he o me/mo, it is all one to 
me whether he does it, or no; quer feja verdade, 
quer nao 9 whether it be true, or no ; nem fe quer hum> 
never a one. 

. The 



G R AMMAR. 119 

The adverfative denote reftri£iion, or contrariety ; 
as, mas, or porem, but ; comtudo, yet, however ; mas 
antes, or pello contrario, nay. 

The conjunctions conditional foppofe a condi- 
tion, and ferve to reftrain and limit what has juft 
been faid ; cL$,fe, if; com condicam que, com if to que, 
dado cdfo que, provided that, or upon condition that, 
or in cafe that, &c. 

The conceflive, which (hew the affent we give to 
a thing; as, embbra, ox feja embbra, well and good ; 
efta feko, done, agreed. 

The caufal mew the reafon of fomething ; as, 
pbrque, for, or becaufe, or why. 

The concluding denote a confequence drawn' 
from what is before ; as, logo or por confequhuia, 
therefore, then, or confequently. 

The tranfitive, which ferve to pafs from one fen- 
tence to another; as, diem dijfo, moreover, or be- 
fides that ; fibre tudo, or em fiumma, after all, upon 
the whole, in the main ; a propbfito, now I think 
on't, or now we are fpeaking of that. 

There are others of a different fort ; as, fe quer, 
or ao mhos, at leaf! ; aindaque, although ; de forte 
que,{o that; antes quero pedir que fur tar, I'll rather 
afk than Ileal ; antes morrerei que dizer volo, I'll ra- 
ther die than tell you ; ja que, fince, &c. 

To the above-mentioned parts of fpeech gramma- 
rians have added Interjeclions, which are particles 
ferving to denote fome paffion or emotion of the 
mind ; but there is another fort, which may be called 
demonftrative ; as, aqui and la ; Ex. efte hbmem aqtu, 
this man ; aquella. molher la, that woman, &;c. and 
fome others continuative, becaufe they denote con- 
tinuation in the fpeech ; as, com effeito, in effect ; 
alem d'iffo, befides > bra vejamos, now let us fee ; final- 
mente fbmonos embbra, and fo, fir, we went away. 
To which we may add thofe invented to imitate the 
founds of dumb creatures, and the noife which is 
occafioned by the claming of bodies againft one 
another ; as, zaz, tra% y thwick-thwack, &c. 

I 4 Inter- 



*3Q PORTUGUESE 

Interjeclive Particles. 

Of Joy. 

Ha,ka, ha ! Ha, ha, ha! a 

Ok que go/to ! Qh joy ! 

Of Grief. 
Ay I Alas ! ah X 
Ay de mlm ! Woe is me ! lack ! 
Meu Deos ! My God ! 

Of Pain. 
Ay ! Ay ! 
Oh ! Oh ! 

To encourage. 

~ f , f > Come, come on ! 
O ra vamos / $ 

To call. 

O, o/a, Ho, hey, hip ! 

Of admiration or furprife. 
O, O Ia,ahi\ Lack-a-day. 
Apre ! Heyday 1 

Of averfipn. 
Irra I "\ 

Ndda ! >Awav, away with, fye! 
Fora ! J 

For making people go out of the way, or Hand away. 
Guardem-Je, or arredem fe ! Have a care, plear the 
way, or (land away i 

For fhouting. 
Viva ! Huzza ! 

Of filence. 
Calaivos ! Hufh ! Peace ! 

Of curfing and threatening. 
Al, 'gutti / Woe ! 

For derifion. 
Ah! Ah! oh! oh! oh! 

Ofwifhing. 

O provera a Deos ! Would to God! 

v . ' .*.< Oxa/a ! 




GRAM M A R. 121 

Oxald ! or hah ! O that ! 
OJe! Would! 

The interjecYion O ferves for different emotions 
of the mind, as admiration, grief, wifh, &c. and 
fometimes is ufed ironically, but differently uttered, 
according to the emotion which it expresses. 

Some Abbreviations ufed in the Portuguefe Language. 



An t0 


Antonio 


Anthony 


Seb am 


Sebajtidm 


Sebaftian 


Boo pe 


BeatiJJimo Padre 


ThemoftblerledFath 


Cap m 


Capital 


Captain 


Comp* 


Companhia 


Companv 


Corr° 


Carreo 


Poft 


D. 


Dom 


Don v 


D r , D"- 


Doutsr 


Doaor 


D s 


D'cos 


God 


D°, D a 


Ditto, ditto. 


Said 


Ex mo , Ex ma 


ExcellentiJJimo, ma 


Mod excellent 


V. E. 


Voffa excellencia 
Vbjsafenhoria 


Your Excellence 


V. S. 


Your LordGiip 


V. A. 


Vofsa altefa 


Your Highness 


V. M. or V mce 


Vofsa merce 


You 


V. P. 


Vofsa paternidade 


Your Paternity 


Vmag de 


Vofsa magejidde 


Your Majefty 


S. 


Santo 


Saint 


Fran co 


Francifco 


Francis 


G d3 


Gudrde 


Save 


J. H. S. 


Jfcfus 


Jesus 


M s a s 


Muitos annos 


Many Years 


M c 


Meftre 


Matter 


S or , S Ta 


Senhor, or a 


Sir, Lady 


R mo 


Reverendijfimo 


Moll Reverend 


F a 


Para 


For 


Q! 


gut' 


That 


Q de 


Qudndo 


When 


O m 


Quern 


Who 


G t3 


Quanto 


How much 


Supp te 


Supp He ante 


Petitioner 


Gen al 


General 


General 


Tent e 


Tenente 


Lieutenant 


V. G. 


Verbi gratia 


For Example 



And many others, that mud be learned by ufe, 



A NEW 



PORTUGUESE 



GRAMMAR- 



part il 



CHAP I. 



Of the Divifion of Syntax. 

SYNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called 
conftmftion ; and it signifies the right placing and 
connecting of words in a sentence. It is divided 
into three sorts ; the firft, of Order or Arrangement ; 
the second, of Concordance; the third, of Govern- 
ment. The Syntax of Order or Arrangement, is the 
fit disposition of words in a sentence. The Syntax 
of Concordance, is when the parts of speech agree 
with one another, as the subftancive with the adjec- 
tive, or the nominative with the verb. The Syntax 
of Government, is when one part of speech governs 
another. 

For 



GRAMMAR. 123 

For the fake of thofe who, perhaps, have not a 
grammatical knowledge of their own language, I 
mail lay down fome general rules of Pdrtuguefe 
conftrudrion. 

I. Of the Order of Words. 

i. The nominative is that to which we attribute 
the action of the verb, and is generally ranged in 
the firft place ; it may be either a noun or pronoun, 
as, Franctfco efcreve> Francis writes; eufallo, I'fpeak. 

2. When the action of the verb is attributed to 
many perfonsor things, thefe all belong to the no- 
minative, and are ranged in the firft place, together 
with their conjunction ; as, Pedro e Paulo lem t Peter 
and Paul read. 

3. The adjectives belonging to the nominative 
fubftantive, to which the action of the verb is attri- 
buted, are put after the fubftantive, and before the 
verb ; as, os efludanies morigerados e diligentes eftudao, 
the obedient and diligent fcholars do ftudy- 

4. If the nominative has an article, this article 
always takes the firft place. 

5. Sometimes an infinitive is put for a noun, and 
flands for a nominative ; as dormir faz hem 
fleeping does one good : and fometimes a verb with 
its cafe ; as, be atto de bumamdade ter compaixao dos^af- 
fliftos, to have companion on the afflicted is an act 
of humanity. 

6. The nominative is fometimes underftood ; as, 
amo, where you underftand eu; and fo of the other 
perfons of the verb. 

7. After the nominative you put the verb ; and if 
there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately 
after the verb, whofe accidents and circumftances 
it explains ; as> Pedro ama por extremo a gloria, Peter 
is extremely fond of glory. 

8. The cafes governed by the verb are put after it / 
they may be one, or many, according to the na- 
ture of the action; as, eu amo a Pedro, I love Peter. 

Pago 



124 PORTUGUESE 

Fa go prefente de hum Irvro a Paulo , I make a prcfcnt 
of a book to Paul. 

9. The prepofition is always put before the cafe 
it governs; zs,perto de cafa> near the houfe. 

j q. The relative is always placed after the ante- 
cedent, as, Pedro qual eftuda ) Peter who ftudies. 

II. Of Concordance. 

i. The adjeclives agree with their fubftantives in 
gender, number, and cafe ; as, hbmem virtubfo> a 
virtuous man \ bella mother, a handfome woman ; 
fumptuSfos pa!acios y &c. fumptuous palaces, &c. 

2. When two or more fubftantives fingular come 
together, the adjeclive belonging to them mull: be 
put in the plural ; as, tanto el rey como a rainha 
monthdos a cavdllo parecem bem> both the king and 
the queen look well when they ride. 

3. If the fubftantives happen to be on^ in the 
fingular and the other in the plural, or to be of 
different genders, the adjeclive common to both, 
agrees in number and gender with the laft ; as, elle 
i'mha os clhos e a boca aberta, or elle tinha a boca e os 
olhos abertos y his eyes and mouth were opened. jfs 
lagcas e rios eftavao congelados > the ponds and rivers 
were frozen. 

4. But when there is one or many words between 
the laft noun and the adjeclive, that adjeclive (com- 
mon to all) agrees with the noun mafculine, though 
the laft noun be feminine ; and if the nouns are in 
the fingular, then the adjeclive common fhall be put 
in the plural number and mafculine gender; as, 
r'10 e a lagoa eftavao congelddos ; the pond and river 
were frozen. trabhlho, a induftria y e a for tuna 
unidos; pains, induftry, and fortune joined together. 

5. Every verb perional agrees with its nomina- 
tive,, exprefted or underftood, both in number and 
perfon. 

6. The relative oual with the article agrees en- 
tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article 

and 



GRAMMA R. 125 

and denoting an abfolute quality, it agrees with what 
follows ; as, aquelle coracao o qual> &c. that heart 
which, fcff. Confiderando quaes Jer'iao as condigoens t 
&c. conlidering which would be the conditions, 
tffc. 

7. The queftion and anfwer always agree in every 
thing ; as, a que Jenhbra pertence vm €e f ellerefpondeo, 
pertenco a rainha : To what lady do you belong, fir ? 
and he anfwered, I belong to the queen. 

III. Of the Dependence of the Parts of 
Speech on one another. 

1. The nominative being the bafis of the sentence, 
the verb depends on it, as the other cafes depend on 
the verb. The adjective depends on the fubftantive 
that fupports it; and the adverb on the verb whofe 
accidents it explains. 

2. The genitive depends on a fubflantive, ex- 
prefTed or underftood, by which it is governed. 

3. The accufative depends either on a verb ac- 
tive, or on a prepofition. 

4. The ablative depends on a prepofition by 
which it is governed ; as, parto de Roma, I go from 
Rome. 

5. The dative and vocative have, ftriclly fpeak- 
ing, no dependence on the other parts : the dative 
is common, as it were, to all nouns and verbs ; 
the vocative only points out the perfon to whom 
you fpeak. 

I now come to the Conftrudlion of the feveral 
parts of fpeech. 



126 PORTUGUESE 

CHAP. II. 

Of the Syntax of Articles. 

BEFORE we come to the fyntax of the articles, 
remember that o, a, os, as, are articles only 
when they precede the nouns or pronouns, but not 
when joined to the verbs. 

Thofe who underftand Latin will quickly per- 
ceive the difference, if they take notice that every 
time they render o, a, by ilium, Mam, Mud; or by 
eum, earn, id ; and os, as, by illos, Mas, ilia ; or by 
eos, eas, ea ; they are relative pronouns. 

1. The article is ufed before the names of the spe- 
cies or things which can be fpoken -of; therefore 
nouns of fubftances, arts, fciences, plays, metals, 
virtues, and vices, having no article before them in 
Englifh, require the article in Portuguefe ; as, 

O buro e a prata nab podem fazer feliz ao homem, 
gold and filver cannot make the happinefs of man. 

A virtude nod he compalhel com o vicio, virtue 
cannot agree with vice. 

A pkilofophia he huma fuencia mu'ito nobre, philo- 
fophy is a very noble fcience. 

Joguemos as cartas, let us play at cards. 

2. The article is not placed before a fubftantive 
which is followed by the adjective of number that 
Hands for a furname, or meets with a proper or 
Chriftian name; as, Jofeph Primeiro, Jofeph the 
Firft. 

3. When a book or fome part of it, as chapter, 
page, &c. is quoted, the adjective of number may 
come either before or after the fubftantive ; but if 
it comes after, the two words are conftrued without 
article ; as, livro primeiro, capitulo fegundo, &c. 
book i. chapter ii. If the adjective of number 

conies 



GRAMMAR. 127 

comes before the fubftantive, it takes the article ; 
as, o primeiro livro, the firft book. 

4. O placed before que fignifies what or which ; 
2LS,faga o que quifer, let him do what he likes 5 que 
eufiz % which 1 did. 

5. The article is never made ufe of before proper 
names of men, women, gods, goddeffes, faints. 

6. The article is not ufed in Portuguefe before 
the pronouns poffeffive relative ; as, de quern he efia 
cafa f he minha, he tua, &c. whofe houfe is this ? 
it is mine, it is thine, &c. 

7. When a mount's, mountain's or hill's name, 
is preceded by the word monte, it takes neither ar- 
ticle or prepofition; as, Monte At/ante, Mount 
Atlas -, os Monies Ptreneos, the Pirenean Moun- 
tains; but after the word Jena, a ridge of hills, it 
takes the article -> as, a Sena da Eflrella, Mount 
Strella 5 Serra do Potoji, Mount Potoii ; however^ 
they fay, alfo, Serra L'toa. 

8. The noun of the meafure, w r eight, and the 
number of the things that have been bought, re- 
quires the articles $ as, trigo vende-fe tanto al- 
quiere> wheat is fold fo much a peck, three quarts 
and one pint. 

A manteiga vende-Je tanto arrate/, butter cofl fo 
much a pound. 

Os ovos vendem-fe tanto a dlizia, eggs are fold fo 
much a dozen. 

9. No article is ufed with proper names of per- 
fons and planets, except a terra, the earth ; fo/, 
the fun ; aj.ua> the moon. 

10. When proper names are ufed in a determi- 
nate fenfe, that is, when they are applied to parti- 
cular objecls, then they take the article ; Deos 
dos Chrijidos, the God of Chriftians ; Archimedes 
de Inglaterra, the Archimedes of England. The 
proper names of renowned poets and painters keep 
alfo the article \ as, Camoens^ Pope, TafJo. x 
Ticiano, &c, 

11. The 



128 PORTUGUESE 

11. The indefinite article de is ufed before nouns 
following one of this, forte, fpecie, genero, and any 
other noun of which they exprefs the kind, charac- 
ter, quality, and nature : which fort of nouns are 
ufually Englifhed by an adjective, or even by the 
fubflantive itfelf placed adjeclivelv, and making to- 
gether, as it were, but a word compound ; as, Dor 
de cabega, the head ach ; huma forte de fruto y a fort 
of fruit ; f altar de tblo, a foolifh fpeech. 

Sometimes the Englifh adjective may be made by 
an adjective too in Portuguese, as in the laft example 
hum fallar tblo, a foolifh fpeech ; but fometimes too 
the Portuguefe exprefs the Englifh adjective by a 
fubflantive of the fame fignification with de before 
the other noun, though they have an adjective of 
the fame nature as the Englifh adjeclive ; as, o diabo 
de minha mother, my devilifh wife; and fometimes 
the adjective is ufed by them fubftantively, or the 
fubflantive is underflood ; as, o velhaco de men filho, 
mv ra fc ally fon ; a velhaca de fuel may, his or her 
rafcally mother. Finally they alfo make ufe of the 
definite article ; as, o diabo do hbmem, or da molhir, 
the devilifh man or woman ; a pbbre da mother, the 
poor woman, &c. 

J 2. Nouns are ufed without article in the follow- 
ing cafes : 

lft. At the title of a performance, and in the 
middle of fentences, where they characterise in a 
particular manner the perfon or thing fpoken of, in 
which cafe the Englifh ufe efpecially the particles; 
as. 

Difcurfo fibre as obrigacbens da reiigiao natural, a 
difcourfe concerning the obligations of natural reli- 
gion. 

Primeka parte, the flrft part. 

O conde de Clermont, principe do Sangue, morreo, &c. 
the count of Qlermont, a prince of the blood, died, 

O S. An- 



GRAMMAR. 129 

S. Antonio, nab de noventa pecas^ the St. Antho- 
ny; a ninety gun fhip. ■ 

2dly. Jn fentences of exclamation; as, 

As mais bttlas fibres fab as que mems durao ; qualquer 
chuva as defrnaia, o vsnto as mure ha, o fol as queima, 
e acaba de fecar ; [em fallar numa infinidade de infec- 
ios que as perfeguem e deitao a perder ; natural e verda- 
deira imagem da belle za das jenhoras ! the hand* 
forneft flowers laft but a very fhort time; the leaft 
ram tarniihes them, the wind withers them, the 
fun fcorehes them, and completes the drying of 
them ; without mentioning an infinite number of 
infects that fpoil and hurt them : a natural and true 
image of the ladies beauty ! 

3dly. When they meet with a noun of number 
in an indefinite fenfe ; as, mil foldados de cavallo 
contra cem infantes, a thoufand hoae againfl an hun* 
dred toot. 

Tenho lido dcus poet as, I have read two poets 3 that 
is, any pair out of all that ever exilled. 

But before a noun of number, in a definite fenfe, 
it would take the article ; as, 

Tenho lido os dbtis poetas, I have read both poets ; 
because this plainly indicates a definite pair, of 
whom fome mention has been made aiready. 

Os cem infantes que combaterao contra os mil de ca-* 
vallo, que, &c. the hundred foot that fought with 
the thoufand horfe, that, &c. 

4thly. Aftsr the verb fer, when it fignifies to be^ 
come, and after fer tornado por, to be accounted ; 
paffar por, to pafs for ; as, elle fer a doutbr com o tempo \ 
he will become a doctor in time ; elle pajfa por ma* 
rinheiro, he pafles for a failor. 

When the adjective is ufed fubftantively, then it 
mud have the neuter Portuguefe article o before it; 
as, .X- ■. 

O verde offende menos a vifta que o vermMo, green 
hurts the eye lefs than red. 

K There 



m PORTUGUESE 

There are alio fome adverbs preceded by the neu- 
tral article o ; as the following, o melkor que eu puder,- 
the bell I will be able 3 menos que for poffhel, the 
lefs it will be polTible. 

Article's are repeated in Portuguefe before as 
many nouns (requiring the article) as there are in 
the fentence ; as, 

O otiro, a prai fa , a f chide, as hour as, e os dele'ites na& 
pbdem faz'er fel/z ac homem que nao tem ciencia nem 
virtude, gold, fiiver, health, honours, and pleafures, 
cannot make a man happy without wisdom and 
virtue. 

The article is put before the word fenhr, fir, or 
my lord ; as, 

O ferJior duqv.e, my lord duke; feuhor pre/idente, 
my lord the president ; os fenhores, the gentlemen y 
dos fenhores, of the gentlemen. 

You mull obferve the fame rule for the feminine 
article a, which is to be prefixed to fenhor a , my lady, 
Or madam ; as, a fenhor a duqueza, or condejfa de, &c. 
my lady duchefs, or countefs of, &c. 

The article is never ufed in Portuguefe as it is in 
English, before mais more, or menos lefs r in the fol- 
lowing fentences, quanta mais vivemos; tanto mais 
aprendemos, the longer we live, the more we learn ; 
quant mais hum hydropic be be, mais fedt tern, the' 
more an hydropick drinks, the more thirfty he is^ 
quanio mats hum homem he pobre, quanta menos cuida- 
dos tern, the poorer people are, the *efs care they 
!iave,&;c. 

Sometimes the EnglHh particle to, before infini- 
tives, is rendered in Portuguefe by the article 0; 
as, he facil o- di'zer, ver, &c. it is eafy to fay, to fee, 
fej*. 

In a" word 5 tke natural ajbciatars with articles are 

thofe common appellatives, which denote the feveral 

genera and fpecies of beings, or thofe words which, 

though indefinite, sre yet capable, through the ar- 

, of becoming/ definite, - Therefore Apollonias 

make? 



GRAMMAR. m 

makes it part of the pronoun's definition, to refufe 
coalefcence with the article ; and it would be ab- 
furd to fay o eu, the I ; or o tu, the thou ; becaufe 
nothing can make' thofe pronouns more definite 
than they are. 

N. Bv When the adjective hum, Mma, is' ufed as 
an article in Portuguefe, it refpecls our primary- 
perception, and denotes individuals as unknown j 
but the articles o, a, refpeft our fecondary percep- 
tion, and denote individuals as known. To explain, 
by an example: I fee an obje£t pafs by which 
I never faw till then y what do Ifay ? Alt vai hum 
pobre com huma barba comprida, there goes a beggar 
with a long beard. The man departs and returns 
a week after; What do I fay then? Alt vai o pobre 
da barba compridM, there goes the beggar with the 
long beard. 



CHAP. III. 

Of the Syntax of Nouns \ and firfi, of the 
Siibftantives. 

WHEN two or more fubftantives come toge- 
ther without a comma between them, they 
all govern each the next in the genitive, the firrY 
governing the fecond, the fecond the third in the 
fame cafe, and fo on ; (that is, the fir ft is always 
followed by the prepofition de,'or by the article be- 
fore the next noun) but that genitive can never 
come in Portuguefe before the noun that governs 
It, as in Engliih : 

A philofophta de Newton, Newton's philofophy. 
As guardas doprtncipe, the prince's guards. 
A porta da cafa, the houfe-gate. 

K2 Eis 



132 PORTUGUESE 

Eis aqiit a cafa do companhe'iro do irmab de m'inha 
molher> here is my wife's brother's partner's houfe. 

When two fubftantives lingular are the nomina- 
tive of a verb, this mud be put in the plural ; as, 
men trmao e meu pal eflao no campo, my brother and 
my father are in the country. 

If the nominative is a collective name, the verb 
is always put in the lingular y as, tbda a cidade af- 
fiftio, all the city was prefent. 

Of the Syntax of Adje Stives. 

Of adjectives, fome are put before the noun, and 
fome after; and others may be put indifferently, 
either before or after. 

The pronouns adjective poffeffive, meu, teu, feu, 
&c. and adjectives of number, come before the 
fubftantive as in Englifh. Ex. Meu pai, my father; 
o fua cafa, his houfe ; duas pegoas, two people ; o 
primeiro hbmem, the fir ft man. 

But when the adjeclive of number ftands for a 
furname, or meets with a proper or Chriftian name, 
it comes after the fubftantive, without the article ; 
as, Jo'ao V. John the fifth. 

Thefe following Adje Stives come after the Sab- 
ftantive. 

1ft. Verbal adjectives and participles* as, hum 
hbmem divert! do, a comical or merry man ; huma mot- 
her ejlimada, a woman efteemed. 

2dly. Adjectives of names of nations ; as, hum 
mathematico Ing/e'z, an Englifh mathematician ; hum 
alfaiate Francez, a French taylor; mufica ltaliana, 
Italian mufick. 

3dly. Adjectives of colour ; as, hum veji'ido negro, 
a black fuit of cloaths > hum capote vermelho, a red 
cloak, {fee. 

4thlv, 



GRAMMAR. 133 

4thly. Adjectives of figure ; as, huma me fa redon- 
€$;a, a round table^ hum campo triangular, a triangular 
field, &c. 

5thly. AdjeCtives exprefting fome phyfical or na- 
tural quality ; fuch are quente, hot ; frto> cold ; hu- 
mido, wet; corcovdde, hunch backed, Sic. 

Moil other adjectives are placed before or after 
the fubftantive ; as,fanto> holy ; verdade/ro, true, &c. 

If the fubftantive has three or more adjeCtives be- 
longing to it, they muft abfoluteiy be put after it 
with the enclitic e before the laft, which muft like- 
wife be obferved, even when there be but two ad- 
jeCtives ; for the Portuguefe don't fay, huma def- 
agradavel enfadonha obra, &c. but huma bbra defagra- 
davel e enfandonha, &x. a difagreeable, tedious work* 

Of adjeCtives, fome always require after them 
either a noun or a verb, which they govern; as, 
digno de louvor, praife- worthy ; d'igno de fer amado* 
worthy to be loved; capaz de enjinar> capable to 
teach; and thefe have always the particle de after 
them. 

Some will be ufed abfoluteiy without being ever 
attended by any noun or verb ; as, prudent e y wife; 
' incur av el, incurable, &c. 

Others may be conftrued both with and without 
a noun, which they govern. ; as, ella he huma molher 
infenfively fhe is a woman without any fenfibility ; 
ella he infenpvel ao amor, fhe is infenfible and a ftran- 
ger to the paffion of love. 

The following adjeCtives, which require the pre- 
pofition de before the next infinitive, govern the 
genitive cafe. Obferve, that fome of them require 
in Englifh the prepofition at or with before the next 
noun. 

Digne, worthy: as, elle he d'igno de lwvor\ he is 
worthy of praife. This adjeCtive is fometimes fol- 
lowed by que-, as, dlgna que feu nbme fojje, &c; her 
name deferred to be, &:c. 

K 3. Ind/gna s 



134 PORTUGUESE 

Ind/gno, unworthy ; as, indigno da ejlimacao quefaca 
del/e, unworthy of tbe efteem which I have for him. 

Capaz, capable ; incapaz, incapable ; as, capaz, 
ou incapdz defervlr a propria patria, capable or inca- 
pable to ferve one's country. 

Not ado, charged ; as, no/ ado de avareza, charged 
with avarice. 

Content e-, glad 5 as, efiou^ content e do fuccejjo que elle 
teve, I am glad or overjoyed at his fuccefs. 

Cancado, tired; as,, cancado deejludar, tired of ftu- 
dying. 

Dezejofo, greedy; as, dezejofo de gloria, greedy of 
glory, &c. as likewife adjectives fignifying fullnefs, 
emptinefs, plenty, want, defire, knowledge, remem- 
brance, ignorance, or forgetting. 

All adjectives fignifying inclination, advantage 
and difadvantage, profit or difprofit, pleafure or 
displeafure, due, fubmiffion, refiftance, likenefs, 
govern the dative cafe ; as, infenj'ivel as affront as, 
infentible of affronts ; fer inc/inado a alguma coufa, to 
be inclined to fomething; nocivo a j'aude, hurtful to 
health. 

Thefe adjectives fignifying dimenfions, as, a/la, 
high, tall ; large, wide, broad ; and compr'ido, long, 
come after the words of the meafure of magnitude, 
"both in Englifh and Portuguefe; but they are pre- 
ceded by de in Portuguefe ; as, des pes de largo, ten 
feet broad ; Jets pes de compr'ido, fix feet long, ..&c. 
they alfo turn the adjective of the dimenfion into 
its fubftantive, with the word of the meafure before: 
hut the word of the dimenfion is always preceded 
by de ; a$fe/s pes de a/iura, fix feet high ; dez pes de 
largura, ten feet broad. 

The adjectives fignifying experience, knowledge, 
or fcience,, require em, or m, na, uos,nas, after them ; 
as v erf ado nos /ivros, verfed in books ; expert na me* 
dichia, expert in medicine.. 

The cardinal nouns require the genitive cafe aftes 
them 5 as, hum dos dons, one of the two. 

. The 



GRAMMAR. 135 

The ordinal nouns, as well as the collective and 
proportional, like wife require the genitive after 
them ; as, primeiro dos reys, the firft of the kings, 
Mma du%ia de 6vos> a dozen of eggs, &c. 

Of the Syntax of the Comparatives and Super- 
latives. 

The comparative :is not made, of the: poiitive in 
Portuguefe, as in Latin and Englifh, but by adding 
mdis more, or menos lefs, which govern -que, fignify- 
ing than ; as, to do he mayor que a parte, the whole 
is greater than the part ; feu amante he mdis -bello, 
mats mbco, emdis rico que ella, her lover is handfomer, 
younger, and richer than me is; eu acho-o agora 
s mencs hello do que qudndo comprei, I now find it lefs 
handfomethan when I brought it. 

The fimple comparatives mdis, and menos, meet- 
ing with a noun of number, are attended by de ; as, 
alnda que elle tivejje mdis de cem hbmens, though he 
had above an hundred men , elle tern mais de vinte 
mmos, he is above twenty. 

When the comparifon is made by fo as, as much 
tfj"/ they mud: be rendered by coma. 

Example. 

O men ttvro he -tad -hello cbmo vbjjb, my book is 
.as handfome as yours ; hum principe nao he tad pode- 
rbjb cbmo hum rey, a prince is not fo powerful as a 

king. . 

They put fometimes mu'ito and pouco before the 
fimple comparatives mais and maws ; as, elle he 
mmto mah grdnde, he is taller by much 5 elle he poucQ 
mais grande, he is taller by little, &c. 



14 



136 PORTUGUESE 

CHAP. IV. 

Of the Syntax of Pmiouns. 

WE have fufficiently explained the pronouns 
in the firft part ; and to avoid any further 
repetition, I fhall only obferre, that, 

lit. The Englifh make ufe of the verb to be, put 
imperfonally through all its tenfes in the third per- 
fon, before the pronouns perfonal, I, thou, he,JJie, we, 
you, thy ; it is I; it is. he, &c. In Portuguefe the- 
verb to be, on this occafion, is not imperfonal ; and 
they exprefs, it is I; bv feu e[u; it is thou, es tu\ 
it is he, he elle\ it is we,Jumo no* ; it is ye,fojszos , 
it is (he, he ella ; it is they, mkfe* Jao elles ; it is they, 
fern. Jab el las ; and in like manner through all the 
tenfes; as, it was I, era eu \ it was we^eramos nos, 
&c. 

2dly. The Portuguefe feldom .make ufe of the 
fecond perfon fingular or plural, hut when through 
2. great familiarity among friends, or fpeaking to 
God, or a father and mother to their children, or to 
fervants ; thus, you are in the right of it, is ex- 
preffed bv vm ct tern razao, inftead of tendes razao ; 
cbmo ejta vm ce ? how do you do ? In the plural they 
fay vm ce . 

Obfervehere, that when an adjeftive comes after 
vm ce y m $ t y £^ gr C j t does not agree j n gender 

with <vm cc K S. &c. but with the perfon we fpeak 
to or we fpeak of, therefore they fpeak to a lady or 
woman thus ; vm ce he muito bella, you are very 
beautiful ; and to a man they fay, vm ce he muito bom y 
you are very good. 

3dly. Not is generally ufed by the king, a gover- 
nor, or a bilhop, in their writings, and then it fig- 
nifles in Englifh we; as, nos mandamos, or mandamos y 
we command ; but nos before or after a verb in Por- 
tuguefe 



GRAMMAR. 1C7 

tuguefe fignifies us in Englifh ; as, (lie nos dijje, he 
told us; dai nos tempo, give us time. 

4thly. Vbs is alfo applied to a fingle perfon. but' 
onlv fpeaking to inferiors, or between familiar 
friends, to avoid the word thou, tu 3 which would be 
too grofs and unmannerly. 

■5tnly. The pronouns conjunctive are joined to 
verbs, and ftand for the dative and accufative cafes : 
as, deu-me, he gave me * ama-me, love me y but the 
pronouns perfonai are uied inftead of them when 
they are preceded by a prepofition, and not imme- 
diately followed by a verb ; elle fallen contra mini, 
he fpoke a gam ft me. 

6thly. When o,a, os, as, are joined to the pre- 
fect infinitive mood, they change the • laft r of it m- 
1 (a, la, &c. thus ; paraama-lo, to love him ; para ve- 
la >r, ve-ias, to fee her, or them, &c. and when 
xhey are joined to the preterperfefcl indicative of the 
xerbfazer, and fome others that have that tenfe end- 
ing in iz, they change the kfi z of them into lo, la y 
&c. 7\s,fi-Io, I did it; elle fe-lo he did, or made it, 
&c but when they are joined to the future indica- 
tive of any ve r b with the auxiliary verb haver, then 
they change the terminations ret, ras, &c. of the 
futures into lo, la, &e. as fd4o-hei> I'll do it ; ama- 
lo-hei, I'll Jove him, &c. 

Remarks on the Pronouns. 

Iff. Him, or it, which follow the verb in Englilh, 
mutt beexprefsed in Portuguefe, as in. the following 
examples: 

When Mm or it in Englifh follow the verb in the 
fir ft perfon of the fingular number, it mud: be ex- 
prefsed in Portuguefe by o before or after the verb. 
Exam. I call him or it, cu o chamo, or eu chamo-o. 

When him ox it in Englilh follow the verb in the 
flrfr. perfon of the lingular number, it may be ex- 
■prefled in Portuguefe either by o before the verb, or 
lo after it a making an elifion of the laft confonant 

of 



1SS PORTUGUESE 

of the verb. Exam. Thou called him or it, tu o 
chdmas, or iu chama fa. 

When him or it is joined with the third perfon 
fmgular of a verb, it may be expreffed by o before 
or after the verb. Ex. He calls him or it, elle o 
chama, or elle chama-o. 

When him or it is with a verb in the fir (1 perfon 
plural, it may be expreffed in Portuguefe either by 
o before the verb, or lo after it, making an elifion 
as in the fecond cafe. Ex. We call him or it, nos 
o chamamos, or nos chamdmo-lo. 

When him or it is after a verb in the fecond per- 
fon plural, it is expreffed in Portuguefe either byo 
before the verb, or lo after it, making an elifion, 
&c. Ex. You- call him or it, vos o chamais, or vos 
' chamai-lo. 

When Mm or it follows the verb in the third per- 
fon plural, it may be expreffed in Portuguefe either 
by o before the verb, or no after it. Examp. They 
call him or it, elles o chamao, or elles chamao-no. 

2dly. Her ox it after a verb in Englifh is express- 
ed in Portuguefe by a, according to the rules juft 
now propofed. 

3dly. Them after a verb is expreffed in Portu- 
guefe by os for the mafculine, and by as for the fe- 
minine, according to the gender and the rules pro- 
pofed. 

4th!y. The words 6, a, os, as, muff always be 
put after the gerunds, but not before the infinitives. 
Examp. Seeing him, we muff not fay, o vendo, but 
vendo-o, becaufe vendo is a gerund. To fee him, in- 
ffead of faying para ver-o, you muff fay para p ver, 
Is in the infinitive. 

5thly. The words lo, la, les, las, muff always be 
-put after the verbs. Examp. To fee him, you muff 
fay, para ve-lo, or para o ver, and not para lo ver. 
The fame words muff follow alfo 'the adverb eis ; 
and fo you muff fay, e'>4o aojii, here he is; ei-lo ali % 
there he is , ei-los aoui, here thev are ; ei la ali, there 

Die 



GR AM MAR. fj» 

flie h; ei-las all, there they are. They follow like- 
wife the perfons of the verbs; as, iu fi-lo ; tufizef- 
ie-lo ; ellefe-lo ; nosfizem-lo, &c. I made it, Sec. 

Note, that I have been fpeaking of the words 
o, a, os, as, lo, la, Us, las, and not of the articles 
o, a, 05, as ; becaufe when thofe words precede, and 
fometimes when they folio wjhe verbs, they are not 
articles, but pronouns relative. They are articles 
only when they precede the nouns or pronouns. 



CHAP. V. 

Of the Syntax of Verbs. 

THE verbs through every tenfe and mood 
( except the infinitive) ought to be preceded 
by a nominative cafe, either expreffed or under- 
flood, with which they rauii agree in number and 
perfon. The nominative is expreffed when, we fay, 
eu dmo, tu cant as i underftood when we h^;canlo^ 
digo, Sec. 

The Portuguefe, as .well as Englim, ufe the fe- 
cond perfon piural, though they addrefs themfelves 
but to, a fingle. perfon. 

* Example. 

Meu ar,i'go,vos nao tendes razJidj my friend, you 
are in the wrong. 

And if we would fpeak in the third perfon, we 
muft fay, pm ce {em razdo, fir, you are in the right. 

The verb active governs the accusative 5 as, dmc 
M virtiide 5 1 love virtue. 

The 



140 PORTUGUESE 

• The verb paflive requires an ablative after it ; as 
os doutos fad envejddos pellos ignorant es, the learned 
are envied by the ignorant. 

You mull obferve, that there is in Portuguefe 
another way of making the passive, by adding the 
relative fe to the third perfon fmgular or plural ; as 
hma fe a Decs, God is loved. 

When there are two nominatives lingular before 
a verb, it must be put in the plural number. 

When a noun is collective, the verb requires the 
lingular, not the plural ; as, a gente eft a olhando, the 
people are looking. 

Syntax of the auxiliary Verbs. 

The verb ter is made ufe of to conjugate all the 
compound tenfes of verbs ; as, tenho amado, tinha 
amado, i have loved, I had loved. 

Ter fignifies alfo to poffefs, to obtain ; v&tenko 
dinheiro, I have money ; tern mult a capacidade, he 
has a great deal of capacity. 

Haver, in account books and trade, expreffes 
credit or difcharge. 

Haver is aJfo taken imperfonally in Portuguefe, 
and it fignifies in Englifh there be ; as ha muho euro 
no Mexico, there is a great quantity of gold in Mex- 
ico. 

Haver fe, made reciprocal, is the fame as to be- 
Jiave, to acl ; as houve fe o governador com tal pru- 
dencia, que, &c. the governor behaved with fuch 
wifdom, that, &c. 

We have already obferved the difference betwixt 
fer and eflar. 

The verb eftdr is alfo ufed to conjugate the other 
verbs, chiefly exprefling action ; as efibu lendo, eftpit 
ejerevendo, I am reading, 1 am writing. 

hftlv', with the prepofition em, in, or with no, na, 
nos, nas, fignifies to be prefent in a place $ as, ejlou no 
tempo, I am in the country. 

Efldr, 



GRAMMAR. 141 

Ejlar, with the prepofition para, denotes the in- 
clination of doing what the following verb expref- 
fes, but without a fall determination ; as, eftou para 
ir-me em Lbndres, I have a mind to go and live in 
London. 

Efiar, with the prepofition por, and the infinitive 
of the verb following, means, that the thing expref- 
fed by the verb is not yet done ; as /JIo efta por 
efcrever, this is not yet written; ifte efta por alimpar, 
this is not yet cleaned; cjlar 'por alguem fignifies to 
agree with one, or to be of his opinion. 

N. B. See in the Third Part the different fignifi- 
cations of the verbs efiar and haver. 

When fer fignifies the poffeffive of one thing, it 
governs the genitive ; as, a rua lie a el-rey, the ftreet 
belongs to the king; efla cdja he de men pay, this 
houfe belongs to my father. 

Em fer is taken for a thing to be whole or entire, 
without any alteration or mutilation ; as, as fazai- 
das ejldo em fer, the goods are not fold. 

Of the Syntax of Verbs adtive, pajjive, &c. 

When two verbs come together, with or without 
any nominative cafe, then the latter muft be in the 
infinitive mood ; as, quer vm CG aprender a fallar hi- 
glex f will you learn to fpeak Engliih i 

All verbs aclive govern the accusative ; but if 
they are followed by a proper name of God, man, 
or woman, or any noun expreffing their qualities or 
title, then it governs the dative cafe ; as, conhcco a 
jeu pay, I know his father ; AchdruO a Jqaq no cn~ 
m'inho, they found John in the road. 

All verbs of gefture, moving, going, reding, or 
doing, as alfo all the verb's that have the word that 
goes before, and the word that comes after, both be- 
longing to one thing, require the nominative after 
them ; as, Pedro vai err a do > Peter goes on wrong ; 

o poire 



M2 PORTUGUESE 

opobre dbrme defcancado, the poor deep without care* 
Alfo the verb of the infinitive mood has the fame 
cafe, when verbs of wifning and the like come after 
them ; as, tbdos dezejao fer rices, every body wifhes 
to be rich ; antes quifera fer douto que parecelo, I had 
rather be learned than be accounted fo. 

After verbs the Portuguefe exprefs yes and no by 
que Jim and que ndo, Example, creyo" que Jim, I be- 
lieve yes ; creyo que new, I believe not ; d/go que Jim, 
I fay yes ; cu'ido que nao, I think not ; apefio que Jim 9 
I 'lay yes ; qUereis apojidr qice ndo f have you a mind 
to lay not ? 

Verbs fignifying^ grief, conipajfion, zvant, remem- 
brance, forgetting, &c. will have the genitive ; as, 
pfame' mu/to da mirte cle feuirmao, I am very forry 
for the death of your brother ; elle mbrre de fame, he 
perifhes by hunger ; Umbre-fe do que me diffe, remem- 
ber what you faid to me 5 compadeci-me das fuas dif 
grocas, I pitied him for his misfortunes; efqiteci-me 
de tudo /Jio, z\\ this I forgot. 

The reciprocals of jeering, boafting, and diftruft- 
ing, govern alfo the genitive ; as, jacldr-fe, gloriar- 
J'e, picarfe, envergonhar-fe, &c. 

All the verbs active govern the dative only when 
the fubftantive reprefents a perfon ; as, eu conheco a 
vm ce , &c. L know you, eke. 

The following verbs belong to this rule of the 
dative : 

Jogar, to play ; as, jogdr as cartas, to play at 
cards ; jogdr acs centos, to play- at picquet 5 jogdr do 
xadrez, to play at chefs, &c. 

Obedece'r, defobedecer; agradar, empraz'h", as, eu 
obedeco a Deos e el rey, I obey God and the king ; 
comprazh era tudo-'cjps foldadcs, in all he pleafed tile 
foldiers. 

Manddr, when it fignifies to command an army, 
company, &c. requires the accufative, but when 
other things, the dative ;■ as tile manddva a caval/a- 
rt&i he commanded ft^ 'htirfe | J goveriiador man- 

doik 



GRAMMAR. - 14^ 

dou a tbdos os mor adores que fe retirdjfem para fuas cd- 
fas, the governor ordered all the inhabitants to re- 
tire into their houfes. 

It, to go ; as, vou a Paris, I go to Paris. 

Affiftir, ajudar, focorrer, to help 5 -as, affiftir do of- 
ficio divino, to affifVat divine ferviee. 

Satiddr, to falute, or greet ; as, elle fduda a todos, 
he falutes every body. 

Falldr, to fpeab ; fatizfazsr, to fatisfy ; ftrvir, to 
ferve -, favor ecef, to favour y ameacdr, to threaten. 
• The verbs of pleaiing, difpleaiing, granting, de- 
nying, pardoning, will have the perfon in the da- 
tive cafe. 

The imperfonals acmiiecer.Jticceder, hnportar, per-- 
fencer, and the like to thefe, will have often two 
datives, of perfon ; as, a mhnme juccedeo, it happen- 
ed to me ; a elk' Ihe* convent, it fuits him', or it is 
convenient for him 5 a elk mo Hie importa, it does 
not concern him, &c. 

All the active verbs reauire an^accufatlve ; and 
the Latin verbs which govern the accufative'of the 
things, and the dative' of the perfon, govern gene 
rally the fame in Portuguefe y as, efcrevei que d/go 
u vojjb irmab, write to yoar brother what I do fay. 

Verbs of afking, teaching arraving, will have an 

O 7 <-> JO 

accufative of the doer or fufterer, and fometimes 
verbs neuter will have an accufative of the thing ; 
as, gozdrfdude, to enjoy health ; peco ejle favor, I aik 
this favour ; elk tica muito hem fthuta, he plays 
very well on the flute ; curar hmd doenr.a^ to cure a 
ficknefs. 

Verbs pafTive, and the greateft part of the reci- 
procals, require the ablative, with de, do, da, dos, 
das, p'or, or pello, pella, pellos, pel/as ; as, fui cha- 
madopor el rey, I was called by the king ; retirei me. 
da cidade, I retired from the" city ; elk foi am a do do 
p6vc,hz was loved by the people. But you mult 
except acoflar fe, which requires a dative preceded 
bf a; encofidr fcl which 1 fometimes will have a da- 

live.. 



144 PORTUGUESE 

tive, and fometimes an ablative preceded by em, no, 
no, nos, or nas ; meter fe, which requires an ablative ; 
fentarfe, introduzirfe, &c. which mnfr have the 
ablative with the prepofition em; no, na, now nas. 

The verbs joined with a noun which they govern, 
jnuft have the infinitive with de ; as, tenho vontade 
derh, I am near laughing. 

The price of any thing bought or fold, or bar- 
tered, will have the accufative with por. 

The verb por fe, when it iignifies to begin, mull 
have the infinitive, with the particle a ; as, por fe a 
chorar, to begin to cry. 

Verbs of plenty, filling, emptying, loading, un- 
loading, will have the ablative ; as, efia terra ab un- 
do, de tr'igo ; this countrv abounds with corn ; elle 
efta carregddo de mifcrias, he is loaded with calami- 
ties. 

Verbs denoting c'uftom, help, beginning, exhorta- 
tion, invitation, require the infinitive with the par- 
ticle a ; as, ajudar a [em ear, to help (owing ; convidou 
me a cear, he invited me to fuuper. 

Verbs that figni'ry diftance, receiving, or taking 
away, will have the ablative ; as, a Madeira d'tfta de 
Marrbcos 320 mi I has, Madera lies 320 miles from 
Morocco. 

Note, that the verbs fignifying receiving, or taking 
away, generally require the ablative of the perfon ; 
but they fometimes require an accufative : particu- 
larly the verb receber, when it fignifies to welcome, or 
to entertain ; as, elle recebe tcdos com mu'iio agrado, he 
gives his company a hearty reception, he makes 
them very welcome. 

Verbs denoting obligation, govern the following 
infinitive vyith the prepofition a ; as, en o obrigareia 
fazcr iflo, I will oblige him to do it. 

Verbs of arguing, quarrelling, fighting, &.c. will 
have the ablative w r ith com ; as pelejcu mat's de huma 
hira com feu irmdc, he quarrelled more than one hour 
with his brother* 

After 



GRAMMAR. 145 

After the v«rb fubftantive fer, to be, para is made 
life of as well as a : the firft is employed to denote 
the ufe or deftination of any thing ; as, eft a penna 
he para efcrever, this pen is to write with. But the 
particle a is ufed to denote only the action ; as, elle 
fit o primelro a fugir, he was the firft to run away. 

The verbs of motion to a place always govern 
the dative ; as, von a comedia, I go to the play. 
Though the verb voltar, to return, may alfo have 
an accufative, with the prepofition para. But the 
verbs of motion from a place govern the ablative 
with de, do,, da, dos, das ; zi^vehnd do campo, I come 
from the country. If the motion is through a place, 
then the verbs govern the accufative, with por ; 
as, paffarei por Londres, 1 will come by the way of 
London. 

Of the Ufe arid Conflruction of the Tenfes. 

Though we have fpoken at large upon the tenfes 
in the Firft Part, you rauft, however, take notice, 

i. That they make ufe of the infinitive and the 
auxiliary verb haver, together with the pro-jjouns lo, 
/a, los, las, inftead of the future indicative ; as, 
ouvir-lo hei,\ will hear him ; and then the r of the 
infinitive is changed into lo, la, los, las ; and fome- 
times they make use of the infinitive mood and the 
auxiliary verb haver, with' the pronouns conjunctive 
me, te, fe, &c. inftead of the fame future : as, 
dar-lhe hei, I will give him ; agaftar fe-ha, he will 
be angry. 

2. That when w T e find the particle if, which in 
Portuguefe isexpreffed by fe, before the imperfect: 
indicative, we must generally ufe the imperfect fub- 
jun£tive in Portuguefe ; example, fe eu tlveffe, if I 
had ;fe eu pudeffe, if I coiild. But fometimes they 
ufe the imperfect, indicative ; as, dijje-lhe que fe 
mwla, Sec. ; he told him that if he was willing, &c. 

L 3, That 



146 PORTUGUESE 

3. That the firft imperfect fubjunctive in Portu- 
guefe is alfo ufed in a fenfe that denotes the prefent, 
efpecially in fentences of wifhing ; as, quizera que 
Domingo fizeffe bom tempo, I wifh it would be fine 
weather on Sunday. But if the fame tenfe is pre- 
ceded by alnda que, although, then it mud be ren- 
dered into Englifli by the fecond imperfect fubjunc- 
tive, or by the im perfect indicative ; as, eu nab a 
quizera, a'mda que tivefe milhoens de feu, though (he 
was worth feveral millions, I w T ould not have her; 
a'mda que Hie confent/J]e n'/Jfo, nab fe podia fazer, al- 
though he would confent to it, that could not be 
done- Laftly, when the firft imperfect fubjunctive 
is preceded by fe, it is fometimes rendered into 
Englifh by the fecond imperfect fubjunctive ; as,^ 
elle I'ieffe, if he fliould come. 

The Englifh are apt to put the firft imperfect of 
the fubjunctive where the Portuguefe make ufe of 
the fecond -, as, I had been in the wrong, nab teria, 
tido razab-, and though they may fay nab tivera tido 
razab, they may not fay nab tivefse tido razab, to 
exprefs the Englifh of, / fhould have been in the 
wrong, or / had been in the wrong. 

Note, that to exprefs in Portuguefe, though that 
Jhould be, we muft fay, quando ijjo foffe, and not feria. 

The Portuguefe ufe the future tenfe fubjunctive 
after the conjunction if, when they fpeak of a future 
action, but the Englifh, the prefent indicative : ex- 
ample, to morrow, if 1 have time, amanhaa fe tivir 
tempo, and no\.fe tenho ; if he comes, we mall fee 
him, ms o veremos,fe elle vier. 

A conj unci ion between two verbs obliges the laff. 
to be of the fame number, perfon, and tenfe as the 
firft : example, the king w r ills and commands, el rci 
quer e ordena ; I fee and I know, eu vejo e conhe'$o. 

Sometimes the prefent is made use of, inftead of 
the preter definite in narrations, as, no mefmo tempo 
wit hia andando, o encontra, o defpe, e o ata a huma 

urvore > 



GRAMMAR. 147 

drvort y as he was going, he meets him, ftrips him, 
and ties him to a tree. 

When the Portuguefe ufe the infinitive with a 
third perfon in the plural, they add em to it, and it 
is generally preceded by por, for, and parti, in order 
to, that, or to the end that ; as elks for ad enforcados 
por furtarem, they were hanged for robbing ; pard 
ferem enformados, that, to the end that they may be 
informed ; para poderem dizer, that they may be 
able to fay. 

. Obferve, that when the Portuguefe put por before 
the firft future fubjun&ive, they fpeak of a time 
pad ; as, por fallardes, becaufe you have fpoken. 
But when they put para before it, then they fpeak 
of a time to come; as para fallarmos, that, or to 
the end that we may fpeak, in order to fpeak. 

Of Moods. 

All the tenfes of the indicative mood may be em- 
ployed without any conjunction before them > but 
they admit alfo of fome. Befides the conjunction 
que, thofe that may be made ufe of are fe, como, and 
quando ; with fome diftin£tion in refpecl: toy*, be- 
caufe this conjunction is feldom ufed before the fu- 
ture tenfe, and then it is governed by a verb iigni- 
fying ignorance, doubt, or interrogation ; as, nab 
fei Je hob de v/r, I do not know if they fhall come; 
ejlou em duvidafe os inimigos pafsarao o rw, I doubt 
if the enemies will pafs the river ; nab pergunto Je 
partira, I do not alk if he will fet out. 

The optative or fubjunctive in Portuguefe has al- 
ways fome fign annexed ; as, oxala, prouvera a De* 
os, bfe ! would to God, I pray God, God grant ! 
&c. ; que, para, que, &c. that, &c. 

The particle que is not expreffed in the prefent 
of this mood ; but it is underflood in fentences of 
wifliing or praying ; as, Deos o fdca bom, let God 
amend him. 

L 2 When 



146. PORTUGUESE 

When que is between two verbs, the laft is not 
always put in the: fubjunciive, becaufe, though fome 
fay creyo que venha, I believe he comes ; I think it is 
better to fay creyo que vem ; but when there is a ne- 
gation, the verb following que muft be put in the 
fubjunctive ; as, nao creyo que venha, I do not believe 
he will come, nao creyo que venha tab cedo, I do not 
believe he will come fo foon. 

When the verbs crer, to believe, faber^ to know, 
are ufed interrogatively, and followed by the par- 
ticle que, the next verb is put in the indicative, 
when the perfon that afked the queftion makes no 
doubt of the thing which is the object in queftion ; 
as, if knowing that peace is made, I want to know 
if the people whom I converfe with know it too, I 
will exprefs myfelf thus, fabeis vos que ejld feita a 
paz f do you know that peace is made ? But if I 
have it only by a report, and doubt of it, and want 
to be informed of it, I mutt afk the queftion thus, 
fabeis vos que a pas ejieja feita f and by no means 
fabeis vos que efaje'ta a paz ? 

You muft obferve alfo, that the prefent fubjunc- 
tive of fabsr is elegantly ufed when it is attended by 
a negative, and the particle que in this phrafe, nao 
que eufa'ha, not that I know of. 

All the verbs ufed imperfonally with the particle 
que require the fubjunclive j as, he prec'fo que elle 
venha, he muft come ; convem que ifio fe faca, it is 
convenient that this be done. You muft only ex- 
cept fuch fentences as exprefs any pofitive affurance, 
or certainty ; as, he ccrto que vem. it is certain that 
he comes ; ft que ejla em chfa, 1 know he is at home. 

From thefe -obfervations it follows, that all the 
verbs not expreffing a pofitive affurance, or believ- 
ing, but only denoting ignorance, doubt, fear, afto- 
nifkment, admiration, wifiing, praying, pretenfion, 
or defire, govern the fubjunclive mood after que ; 
as, duv'ido que poffa, I doubt it is in his power y 
temo que morra, 1 am afraid he will die ; admiro me 

que 



GRAMMAR. 149 

pie conj/nta, niffb, I wonder he agrees to it, &:c. ; to 
all which they add oxala, an Arabic word, fignify- 
ing God grants which is ufed in Portuguefe before 
all the tenfes of the. optative or conjunctive, as well 
as prdza a Deos, may it pleafe God ; or, prouvera a 
Deos, might it pleafe God. 

When que is relative, and there is a verb in the 
imperative or in the indicative, with a negative or 
interrogation before it, it governs likewife the fub- 
junctive ; as nab ha cbufa que man me inquiete, there is 
nothing that difturbs me more ; ha coufa no mundo 
que me poffa dar tdnto go/to ? is there any thing in the 
world that may give me more pleafure ? allegal-lhe 
t ant as razoens que pojfao perfuadir, give him To 
many reafons that he may be perfuaded. 

The prefent fubjanftive is fometimes rendered in- 
to Englim by the fecond preterimperfeft fubjunctive, 
when it is followed by a verb in the future tenfe ; as, 
arnda que eu trabalhe, nunc a. hei de cancar, though I 
iliould work, I never would be tired. 

The Portuguefe ufe fpecially the fame prefent 
fubjunctive for the future ; as in thefe fentences,, 
and others like : 

Nad duvido que venha, I do not doubt but he will 
come. 

Duvido que faca, I doubt that, or whether he 
will do it. 

Therefore avoid carefully thofe faults which fo- 
reigners are fo apt to make, in confidering rather 
the tenfe which they' want to turn into Portuguefe, 
than the mood which the genius of the language 
requires. 

The prefent indicative is alfo ufed for the future, 
as well as in Englifh : example, jantazs hcje em cafa { 
do you dine at home to-day ? 



L 3 Of 



150 PORTUGUESE 

Of the Particks governing the Optative or Sub- 
jundlive. 

The conjunction que, that, generally requires the 
fubjunctive after it ; but antes que, primeiro que, be- 
fore that, always requires it. 

Take notice, that que makes all the words to which 
it is joined become conjunctives, as, para que, to 
the end that ; bem que, a'.nda que, &c. Pbjlo que, 
although ; ate que, till ; quando, cbmo querque, which 
commonly govern the fubjunctive. But com que 
ajjim governs the indicative ; as, com que, or com que 
affzmvira amanhaa, fo he will come to-morrow. 

In Portuguefe you muft take care how you exprefs 
though, or although-, if it is by ainda que, you may 
put either the fubjunctive or indicative after it : ex- 
ample ; ainda quejeja hbmem honrado, though he is an 
honeft man ; ainda que elle faz aqui/lo, though he 
does that. But if you render a/though or though 
by nab obftante, then you muft ufe the infinitive : 
example, though he is an honeft man ; nab obftante 
Jer elle homem honrado-, though he does this, nab ob- 
ftante fazer elle ifto. 

The imperfonal verbs generally govern the fub- 
junctive with que ; but with this diftinction, when 
the imperfonal is in the prefent renfe or future, of 
the indicative mood, then it requires the prefent 
fubjunctive mood ; but when the imperfonal, or any 
other verb taken imperfonally, is in any of the pre- 
terites indicative, then it governs the imperfect, per- 
fect, or pluperfect of the fubjunctive, according to 
the meaning of fpeech ; as, tmporta muito que el rey 
veja tbdo, it is of great moment that the king may 
fee all ; Jot conveniente que o principe fbj'je com elle, it 
was convenient thaj the prince fhould go with him. 

The prefent fubjunctive is likewife conftrued, 
when the particle por is separated from que, by an 
adjective ; as, por grande, por admiravel, por dbuta 
que ftja, though he be great, admirable, learned. 

An 



GRAMMAR. 151 

An imperative oft$$l Hquires the future of the 
fubjun£tive ; as, fucceda o que fucceder, or feja o que 
for, happen what (hall happen, at all events. 

The imperfect fubjun£tive is repeated in this 
phrafe, and others like, fuccedeje, o que fuccedejfe, let 
happen what would. 

The future of the fubjundtive mood follow gene- 
rally thefe, logo que, quando, fe, cbmo, &c. ; as, logo 
que chegar iremos a pajfear, as foon as he comes, we 
will go and take a walk; quando vier, efiaremos 
promptos, when he comes we will be ready. 

Obferve, that quando and logo que may alfo be 

conftrued with the indicative mood ; as, quando el 

, rey ve tudo, nao o enganao, when the king fees every 

thing, he is not deceived ; logo que chegbu,fallei com 

Me, as foon as he came, I fpoke with him. 

Of the Infinitive Mood. 

In Portuguefe there is not a general flgn before 
the infinitive, as in Englifh the particle to; but 
there are feveral particles ufed before the infinitive, 
denoting the fame as to does in Englifh, and they 
are governed by the preceding verbs or nouns. 
Thefe particles are the following: a, para, de,com, 
em, por, ate, dejpois de ; and the article o, when the 
infinitive ferves as a nominative to another verb ; as, 
o dizer e o faz'er Jad duas coufas, faying and doing 
are two different things. 

A coming between two verbs, notes the fecond 
as the object of the firft ; as, a tardanca das noffas 
efperangas nos enfina a mortificar os nbjjos dezejos, the 
delay of our hopes teaches us to mortify our de- 
fires ; ille comeca a difcorrer, he begins to reafon. 

Para notes the intention or ufefulnefs ; as, a ad- 
verfiddde ferve para experiment ar a paciencia, adver- 
fity ferves to try one's patience. Para after an ad- 
jective denotes its object ; as, ejla prompt o para obe- 
decer, he is ready to obey. 

L 4 De 



132 PORTUGUESE 

De is put between two verbs, if the in ft go- 
verns the genitive or ablative ; and when the fub- 
ilantive or adjective governs either of thefe two 
cafes, de mud go before the following verbs, or in- 
flr.itive ; as, venho de ver a men pay, I have juft feen 
my father ; he tempo de hir-fe, it is time to go away $ 
el rey foi ferv/do de mandar, the king has been pleaf- 
ed to order. 

The infinitive is on feveral occafions governed by 
prepofitions or conjunctions; SiS,fem dizer palavra, 
without fpeaking a word : where you may obferve 
it is exprefTed in Englifli by the participle prefent ; 
as nunca fe canca de jugar, he is never weary of 
playing ; divertefe em cacar, he delights in hunting; 
tile ejla dohite por trabalhdr demafiadamente, by work- 
ing too much he is lick ; perde ofeu tempo em pajjedr y 
he lofes his time in walking ; hei-de ir-me fern me def 
■pedir f {hall I go away without taking my leave ? 

The infinitive is alfo ufed pafiively ;* as, nao ha 
que dizer, que ver, &c. ; there is nothing to be faid, 
feen, &c. 

The gerund of any verb active may be conjugated 
with the verb ejlar, to be, after the fame manner as 
in Englifh ; as, eji ; Ai efcrevendo, I am writing; elle 
ejlava dormindo 3 he was afleep, &c. 



CHAP. vr. 



Of the Syntax of Participles and Gerunds. 

THE participle in the Portuguefe language 
generally ends in do, or to; as, amado, vlfio y 
dito, &c. 

The active participles that follow the verb ter y 
to have, muft end in o ; as, 

Tenho vtfto el rey, I have feen the king. 

Tenhe 



GRAMMAR. 153 

Tt-nho v'ifto a rainha, I have feen the queen, 

Eu tinha am a do os livros,! had loved books. 

Eu t'tnha levado as cartas, I had carried the letters. 

We meet with authors who fometimes make the 
participles agree with the thing of which they are 
fpeaking; as, in Camoens, Canto 1, Stanza xxix. 

E per que cbmo viftes, tern pa dados, 

Na viagem tad dfperos per/gps, 

Taut os climas, e ceos exprimentados, l$c. 

And Canto 2, Stan, lxxvi. 

Sad offer ecimentos verdadeiros, 

E palter -as fine 'eras , nab dobrddas, 

As que o rey manda a os nbbres cavaleiros, 

Que idnto mar e 'terras tern paffadas. 

If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always 
to terminate in o: example, 

El rey tern jantddo, the king has dined ; a rainha 
tern ceddo, the queen has flipped ; os vojfos am'tgos 
tern ridoy your friends have-laughed ; minhas irmdas 
tern dormido, my fitters have flept. 

When the aclive participle happens to precede an 
infinitive, it muft be terminated in o ; as o juez Ihe 
tinha feito cortdr a cabJca, the judge has caufed his 
head to be cut oft. 

The paffive participles which are joined with the 
tenfes of the verb fer, to be, agree with the fubftan* 
tive that precedes the verb fer ; o capitdb foi lou- 
vado, the captain was praifed ; a virtude he eftimada, 
virtue is efteemed; os preguicofos Jab cenfurados, the 
lazy are blamed ; as wjjas joyas fordo vendidas, your 
jewels were fold. 

The Portuguefe generally fupprefs the gerunds 
having and being before the participles ; as, d'lto ifto, 
having faid fo ; acahado o i fexmap, the fermon. being 
ended. This manner of fpeaking is called by gram- 
marians ablatives abfolute. 

The participle of the prefent tenfe in Portuguefe 
has Angular and plural, but one termination ferves 
for both genders ; as hum homem (entente a Deos, a 

man 



154 PORTUGUESE 

man fearing God ; huma mblher temente a Deos, a 
woman fearing God \ homens tementes a Deos, peo- 
ple fearing God. 

There are in Portuguese a great many participles 
which are ufed fubftantively; as, ignorante, amante, 
ouvinte, eftudante, &.c. ; an ignorant, a lover, an au- 
ditor or nearer, a fcholar, &c. 

It is better to place the nominative after the ge- 
rund than before ; as, eftando el rey na comedia, the 
king being at the play. 



CHAP. VII. 

Of Prepositions. 

A Prepofition is a part of fpeech which is put 
fore nouns, and fometimes before verbs, to 
explain fome particular circumftance. 

Prepofitions may be divided into feparable and 
infeparable. An infeparable prepofition is never 
found but in compound words, and fignifies nothing 
of itfelf. A feparable prepofition is generally fepa- 
rated from other words, and fignifies fomething of 
itfelf. 

The infeparable prepofitions are, 

Ab and abs ; as abrogar, to abrogate ; abfter-fe, to 
abftain. 

Arce, or arc hi ; as, arceb'ifpo, an arch bi (hop ; #r- 
chiduque, an archduke. 

Ad-, as, adventicio, adventitious. 

Am j as, ambiguo, ambiguous ; amparo, protection, 
fhelter. 

Circum -, a s circumfia ncia, circumftance. 

Co, as, cohabit ar, to live together, to cohabit. 

Des, ferves to exprefs the contrary of the word it 
is joined to; as, defacerto, miitake; des/aze^, to un- 
do ; 



GRAMMAR. 355 

do ; defenganar, to undeceive ; are the contrary of 
acerto,fazer, and enganar. 

Dis; as, difpor, to difpofe; diflinguir, to diftin- 
guifh ; dijiribwr, to diftribute. 

Ex; as, extrahir, to extract. 

In, has commonly a negative or privative fenfe, 
denoting the contrary of the meaning of the word 
it precedes; as, incapaz, unable; infeliz, unhappy; 
inac^ao, inaction, &c. ; but fometimes it is affirma- 
tive, as in Latin. 

Obferve, that in before r is changed into ir ; as, 
irregular, irregular; irrational, irrational: before /, 
into //; as illegitimo, illegitimate; before m, in is 
changed into im \ as immaterial, immaterial. 

Ob, as,Qfrviar; to obviate. 

Pos ; as, pofpor, to poftpofe, or to poftpone. 

Pre; as, preceder, to go before; predecejjor, an an-, 
ceftor. 

Pro; as, propor, to propofe ; prometer, to pro- 
mife. 

Re, is a borrowed particle from the Latins, which 
generally denotes iteration, or backward aclion; 
as, reedificar, to rebuild ; repercutir, to repercute, or 
ftrike back. 

So; a$,focorrer, to help, to fuccour. 

Ser; as,forrir, to fmile. 

Sos ; as, fofter, to fupport. 

Soto ; as, foiopor, to put or lay under. 

Sttb, or fob; as, fubalterno, fubaltern ; fubfcrever, 
to fubfcribe ; fobpena, fob color > &e. \ 

The Arabic article V, which is common to all 
genders and both numbers, is found in the begin- 
ning of almoft all the words that remain in the For- 
tuguefe language from the Arabic, and it is the 
fureft way to diftinguifh them. But the Portu- 
guefe articles are added to the Arabic nouns, with- 
out taking off their article, al, as a almofada, the 
cuihion ; o Alcarab, the Coran, &c. 

The 



156 PORTUGUESE 

The Greek prepofition hnli enters into the com- 
pofition of a great many Portuguefe words, which 
cannot be fet down here. It is enough to obferve, 
that it fignifies generally oppoiite ; as in Antipbdas, 
Antipodes; amipapa> ant i pope; and fometimes it 
fignifies before; as in antilvaiiio, a preface, a fpeak- 
ing firft; bat in this latt fenfe it is derived from the 
Latin prepofition ante. 

Of fep arable Prepofitions. 

It is abfolutely impoflible ever to attain to the 
knowledge of any language whatever, without tho- 
roughly underftanding the divers relations denoted 
by the prepofitions, and the feveral cafes of nouns 
which they govern ; both which relations and cafes 
being arbitrary, vary and differ much in all lan- 
guages. This only inftance will evince it : the 
Englifh fay, to think of a thing ; the French, to 
think to a things the Germans and Dutch, to think 
on, or upon a thing; the Spaniards and Portuguefe, 
to think tn a thing, &c. Now it will avaii an E; >glifh- 
man but little to know that of\s expreffed in Portu^ 
guefe by de, if he does not know whichrelations em 
and de denote in that language ; fince the Portu- 
guefe fay, to think in a thing, and not of a thing ; 
therefore we will treat here of each of them., and of 
their confiru&ion feparateiy. 

lft. A, or rather ao, as, aos, (at, in, on, &c.) de- 
note the place whither one is going; as, 

Euvcua Londres, I go to London. 

Voltar a Portuga/, to return, or go back to Portu- 

S al ' 

J y in this fenfe, is a prepofition, but in the next 

obfervations, it is a particle. 

2dly. ^denotes time; as, chegdr a tempo, to ar- 
rive in time ; a tbdo o tJmpo, at all times. 

Sdly. A denotes the way of being, or of doing of 
people ; as alfo their poflure, geflure, or aclion ; as 

Ejiar 



GRA M M AR. 157 

Efiar a fua vontade, to be at one's eafe. 

A direka> on the right hand ; a efquerda, on the 
left hand. 

Fiver a fua vontade, to live to one's mind, as one 
likes. 

Andar a pi ou a cavallo, to go on foot, or a horfe- 
back. 

Montlir a cavallo, to ride a horfeback. 

CorrerJ reds a foil a t to ride full fpeed. 

Trajar a Francefa, to drefs after the French way. 

Fiver a Ingleza, to live after the Englifh fafhion. 

Andar a grandes paffos, to walk at a great rate. 

Andar a paffos Isntos, to walk very flowly. 

4thly. ^denotes the price of things; as, a oito 
xelins, at eight millings. It denotes alfo the weight: 
but as the nouns fignif\ ing weight are generally ufed 
in the plural number, hence it is that they add s to 
a, when it is placed before nouns of the feminine 
gender, and os when it precedes nouns of the mas- 
culine gender : fo they fay, as cncas, by the ounce ; 
aos arrateiS) by the pound, &c. A denotes alfo the 
meafure .; as, med'r a palmos, to'fpan or meafure by 
the hand extended. 

When a is preceded by daqui^ and followed by a 
noun of time, it denotes the fpace of time after 
which fome thing is to be done: as, el rey partira 
daqui a tres d/as, the king, will fet out three days 
hence. 

5thly. A denotes the tools ufed in working, as 
likewise the games one plays at ; as, abr'rr aobitril, 
to grave; ..wherein you fee they add o to a ; trabal- 
heir d candea, to do any thing by candle-light; a 
gulha, with the needle. 

Andar a vela, to fail, or to be under fail.- 

Jogjr a pe'a, to play at tennis. 

Jogar as cartas, to play at cards ; wherein you fee 
they add J to a when the noun is of the feminine 
gender, and placed in the plural number. 

Jogar 



158 PORTUGUESE 

Jogar ads centos, to play at piquet ; wherein yoii 
fee they add os to a when it precedes nouns fignify- 
ing games, when they are of the mafculine gend er 
and put in the plural number. 

6lh\v. A fignifies fometimes as. Examp. EJld 
tjio a flu go/to ? is this as you like it ? And fome- 
times it fignifies after ; as, a feu mbdo, after his or 
her way. It fignifies alfo in; as, ho prinapio, in the 
beginning ; but then they add o to it. 

7thly. A is alfo put before the infinitives, pre- 
ceded by another verb ; as, enfinar a canthr, to teach 
to fing. It is alfo placed between two equal num- 
bers, to denote order ; as, dbus a dcus, two by two ; 
qtilitro a qudtro, four by four : and fometimes it is 
preceded by a participle or adjective, and followed 
by an infinitive mood. 

8th!y. A is a particle of compofition, ferving to 
many nouns, verbs, and adverbs, of which it often 
increafes the meaning ; as, adinheirado, very rich, 
that has a great deal ot money ; but it generally ex- 
preffes in verbs the action of the nouns they are 
compofed of; as, ajoelhar^ to kneel down, which 
is formed from a and joe/ho, knee ; abrandhr, to ap- 
peafe ; alargdr, to enlarge ; from brhndo, foft ; 
largo, wide, 6?r. 

9thly. A, when it is preceded by the verb fer, and 
followed by the pronouns perfonal, fignifies in the 
ft e ad of ; as,yj? eufbfse a vos,faria aauUo, if I was you 
(in your place) 1 would do that. 

lOthly. When a is placed before cafa, and thefenfe 
implies going to, it is Englifhed by to, but the word 
cafa is left out ; as, elle fo'i h cafa do governador, he 
went to the governor's. You muft obferve, that a 
in this fenfe is a prepofition. 

11. A'o pe fignifies near; as, pbnde hum ho pi do 
butro, place, put, or fet them near one another. 
Sometimes mefmo comes before ho pe, to exprefs 
ftill more the nearnefs of a thing, and mefmo ho pe 

is 



GRAMMAR. 159 

is Englifhed by hard by, just by, &c. ; as, a fua cafa 
efta me/mo do pe da minha, his houfe is juft by mine. 
12th. When the noun refpeito is preceded by a, 
it is ufed in the fame fenfe as em comparand, but re- 
quires one of thefe particles, do, da, dos, das, after 
it, and fignifles in comparifon of, in regard to, in re/pecl 
of; as, ijlo he nhda a refpeito do que pbffo dizer, this is 
nothing to other things that I can fay. 

13th. When a comes before a verb neuter, it 
marks a dative; and after a verb active, an accufa- 
tive cafe. 

A before the verb propbfi 'to is ufed in familiar dif- 
courfes ; as, a propbfto, efquecime de dizer vos o butro 
dia ; now I think on't, 1 forgot to tell you t'other 
day. 

14th. Ab revez, or as avefsas, are alfo ufed as 
prepofitions, attended by, de,do, da, &c. ; and it fig- 
nifles quite the reverfe, or, contrary; as elle faz tudo . 
do revez , or as avefsas do que houvera defer, ou do que 
Ihe dizem, he does every thing quite the reverfe of 
right, or contrary to what he is bid. 

15th. A before irbco fignifies provided that. It 
is alfo ufed before the word tiro, as, a tiro de pica, 
within cannon (hot. 

i 6th. Car a a car a, cbrpo a cbrpo, fignify face to face, 
body to body. Tomar 'huma cbufa a boa ou a ma 
parte, fignifies to take a thing well or ill. 

Such are the chief relations denoted by the parti* 
cle a. The others muft be learned in conftruing 
and reading good Portuguefe books. 

lft. De, or rather do, da, dos, das, /of, from, 
&c.) denote, firft, the place one comes from; as, 
fahir de Lbndres, to go out of London ; vir de Fran- 
ca, dos l'ndias, &c. j to come from France, from the 
indies, &c. 

2d. De between two nouns denotes the quality of 
the perfon expreffed by the firft noun ; as, hum ho- 
mem de hbnra, a man of honour : or the matter which 
the thing of the firft noun is made of; as, 

Huma 



160 PORTUGUESE 

Huma eftatua de mar more, a ftatue of marble. 

Huma pome de madeira on de pedra, a wood or (lone 
bridge. 

Note, that two nouns fo joined with de are com- 
monly Englilhed by two nouns like wife, bat with- 
out a prepofition, or rather by a compound word, 
whofe fird noun (whether fubftartfive or adjective) 
exprefles the matter and quality, manner, form, and 
life of the other , as a (tone-bridge, huma pbnte de 
pedra ; a dancing-mafter, hum meftre de danca. 

3d. De, do, da, dos, das, are ufed in Portuguefe 
after the participles of the preterite, wither ; as,fer, 
amado, ou hem vifio do povo, dos fabios, £sV. ; to be be- 
loved by the people, by the learned, &c. 

Note, that do ferves for the mafculine, da for the 
feminine, and de for both. 

4th. De fometimes iignifies by; as, de noite, by 
night ; de dia, by day. 

5th. Be before em, and many nouns of time de- 
notes the regular interval of the time after which 
fbmething begins again ; as, eu vou velo de dous em 
dous d'/as, I go to fee him every other day ; and be- 
fore nouns of place and adverbs repeated with em or 
para between, fife denotes the paffmgfrom one place 
or condition to another ; as, corfer derua em rua, to 
run from flreet to ftreet; de mal para peor, worfe and 
worfe. 

6th. De after fome verbs, iignifies after or in ; 
as, elk port kt-fe d'eftaferte^he behaved in or after this 
manner. 

7th. De is ufed before an infinitive, and is then 
governed by fome preceding noun or verb ; as, ca- 
paz de enjinar, capable to teach ; digno defer amado, 
worthy to be loved, &c. ; procurer defazer, to endea- 
vour to do ; authoridade de pregar, the power or au- 
thority of preaching, &c:, 

8th. De is fometimes Englifhed by on'\ as, por-fe 
dejoWios, to kheel down tone's knees. 

9. De 






GRAMMAR. 16i 

9. De between two nouns denotes the ufe which 
& thing is defigned for ; as, aze'ite de candSa y la.mp-oi]^ 
iirma de fogo } a fire-arm ; "moinko de vento, a wind- 
mill. 

Note, that this relation is expreffed in Englifn by 
two nouns, making a compound word : the firft of 
which fignifles the manner, form, and ufe, denoted 
by the Portuguefe prepofition ; as, cadetra de bracos, 
an arm-chair, or elbow-chair ; vela de cera, a wax- 
candle, &c. 

10. De denotes fometimes the quality of things ; 
as, meyas de ir-es f/os, (lockings w 7 ith three threads. 
Sometimes it denotes alfo the price ; as, panno de 
dezoito xeltys, eighteen (hillings cloth. 

1 1. De is fometimes Engiimed by upon ; as, viver 
oufuftentarfe de pe/'xe, to live upon rim. Sometimes 
it is Engiimed by zmth ; as, morrer de frio, to ftarve 
with cold. 

12. De fometimes fignifies/br or out of-, zs,fa!tar 
de alegria, to leap for joy , de mode/Io, out of mo- 
deity. . 

13. De (ignifies fometimes at; as, zombdr de al- 
guem, laugh at one. 

14. De is fometimes left out in Englifli ; as, go-, 
zar de huma eoufa, to enjoy a thing. 

15. De followed by two riouns of number and the 
prepofition ate between them, is Englifhed by be- 
tween -, as, hum homem de quarinta ate cincoenta-annos % 
a man between forty and fifty. _ 

16. De, preceded by the prepofition didnte, is left 
out in Englifh.; as, dihnte de mim, before me 3 di- 
ante de Deos, before God. 

17. De when it is placed before cafa, and the 
fenfe implies coming from, is Englifhed by from ; but 
the word cafa fometimes is left out in Englifh, and 
fometimes not; as, venho' de cafa (meaning my 
houfe) 1 come from home, from my houfe : but 
when they fay,, venho da cafa de Senkora C, we mud 

M rendef 



163 PORTUGUESE 

render it in Englifh thus, I am returning from Mrs- 
Cs. 

Finally, de is ufed before feveral words ; as, de 
brucos, lying aM along on the ground ; de madruga- 
da, foon in the morning ; de veras, in earneft, feri- 
ously ; de verao, in fummer ; hbmem de palavra, a 
man as good as his word ; de cbftas, backwards, or 
on one's back ; andar de pe> to be fickly without 
being bed-rid : and many others which muft be 
learnt by ufe. 

Antes. 

III. Antes, before, fhews a relation of time, of 
which it denotes priority ; and is always oppofite to 
depois, after ; as, antes da criagad do mundo, before the 
creation of the world. 

Primeiro is alfo a prepofition ; as, elle chegbu pri- 
metro que eu, he arrived before me. 

Diante. 

IV. Diante, before, fhews a relation of place, 
and it is always oppofite to detraz, behind. It fig- 
nifies alfo fometimes em y or na prefenga ; as, ha ar- 
vores diante de fica cafa, there are trees before his 
houfe ; pbnde aouillo diante do fbgo, set or put that 
before the fire ; pregar diante del rei, to preach be- 
fore the king. 

Diante is alfo fometimes an adverb, and may be 
ufed inftead of adiante ; as, ir diante or adiante, to 
go before : but in the following phrafe you muft 
fay, nab vades tanto adiante, and not diante, don't go 
fo far ; por diante is to be Englifhed by on in the fol- 
lowing phrafe, ide por diante, go on. 

Depots. 

V. Depots, after, denotes pofteriority of time, and 
it is ufed in oppofition to antes -, as, depots do diluvio, 
after the deluge : depots do meio dia, after noon. 

Depois alfo is ufed with an infinitive ; as, feito 
aquilh, or iendofetto aauillo, or depois defazer aquillo, 

after 



GRAMMAR. 163 

after having done that ; and it is alfo made a con- 
junction with que, governing the indicative ; as, de- 
pots que tevejeito aquillo, after he had done that. 

Detraz. 

VI. Detraz, behind, denotes pofteriority both ol 
place and order, and it is faid in oppofition to diante ; 
as, a fua caja eft a detraz de vojja, his houfe is behind 
yours ; ilk vinha detraz de mim ; he walked after 
me. 

Em. 

VII. Em, or no, na, nos, nas, (in, into, within, 
&c.) denote a relation both of time and place. The 
many various fignifications in which thefe prepofi- 
tions are ufed, muft be accurately obferved,.and 
much regard had to them in the practice. 

No and na are fometimes rendered into Englifh by 
a ; as, duas vezes no dia> nafemana, &c. twice a day, 
a week, &c. 

No, na, Sic. are always ufed before nouns de- 
noting the place wherein fomething is kept ; as, ejla 
no gabinete, it is in the clofet ; na papeleha, in the 
bureau ; nas gavetas, in the drawers ; na rua, in the 
ftreet, &c. but fometimes they are Englifhed by 
upon ; as, cahir no chad, to fall upon the grbund. 

Em, no, na, &c. fignifies commonly in ; as, em 
Londres, in London ; ejla na graga del rey, he is in 
favour with the king; but in feme cafes it has a 
very particular meaning 3 as, ejlar em cbrpo, which 
fignifies literally to be in body ; but the .true fenfe of 
it is to be without a cloak ; fo that the body is more 
expofed to view without an upper garment. Eft at 
em pernas, literally, to be in legs, fignifies to be bare- 
legged; that is, the legs expofed without ftockings. 
Eftar em camija is faid of one that has only the fliirt 
on his back. 

When this prepofkion em is before an infinitive 
in Portuguefe, then it is an Englifh gerund ; as, 
conffte em fallat bem y it confifts in fpeaking well ; 

M 2 but 



164 PORTUGUESE 

but when it is found before a gerund, it fignifies as 
foon ds\ as, em acabando irei, as foon as I have done, 
I will go. 

Nos nqjpjs tempos is Englifhed by now a-days. 

Em is ufed in fentences that imply a general fenfe ; 
as, Elle ejla em miferavel eft ado, he is in a wretched 
condition; and not no miferavel: but if the fentences 
imply a particular fenfe, you muft make ufe of no, 
nas, &c. as, no miferavel eft ado em que elle efta, in the 
wretched condition wherein he is ; and not em mife- 
ravel. You rnuft obferve in this laft example and 
the like, that you ought to make ufe of em before 
que, and not of no, na, &;c. which are to be placed 
only before qual; therefore you muft not fay, no 
miferavel eflado no que elle ejld ; but you may fay, no 
miferavel eflado no qual elle eft a. 

Note, that em conftrued with pronouns without 
an article, makes a sort of adverb, rendered into 
Engliib by a prepofition and a noun; thus in this 
fentence, nos ire mo s em coche, we fhall go in a coach, 
em cbche is an adverb of manner, which fliews how 
we fhall go: but #0^0^ denotes fomething befides - 
as if a company were confidering how they fhall ride 
to a place, fomebody would fay, vos ircis na cadei- 
rinha, e nos no cbche, you fhall go in the chair, and 
we in the coach ; no coche would be faid in oppofi-- 
tion to na cadeirinha, and both refpeclively to fome 
fpecified chair and coach ; or elfe they fliould fay, 
vos ircis em cadeirinha, enos em coche. But in this 
other fentence, eu deixei men chapeo no cache, I left 
ray hat in the coach, it would be improper to fay 
em ecekei becaufe fome particular coach is meant, 
to wit, that which has drove me here or there, or 
which has been fpoken of. 

We fay de verab, no verab or em verab ; de inver- 
no, no inverno, &c. in fummer, in winter, &c. 

Em is alfo rendered into ' Englifh by at; as, em 
to do tempo, at all times. 

Mm 



GRAMMAR. I6S 

Em is ufed, and never no, na, &c. before proper 
names of cities and authors ; as, elle ejla em L6ndres y 
lie is in London; nbs lemos em Cicero, we read in 
Tully. But they fay no Porto, in Oporto. 

Em, and no, na, &e. are conftrued with the names 
of kingdoms; as, em or na, Inglaterra, in England : 
bat no, na, is moil commonly conftrued with names 
of provinces ; as, no Alentejo, na Beira, &c. in Alen- 
tejo, in Beira, &c. 

Em is fome times rendered into Englifh by into : 
as, Narc/fo foi transformado em Jlor, Narcifsus was 
rhetamorphofed into a flower : and fometimes by 
to ; as de rua em rua, from flreet to flreet. 

No, na, are fometimes rendered into Englifh by 
againfti as, dar cb a cabega na pdrede, to dafli one's 
head againft the wall. 

No, na, &c. are alfo rendered into Englifh by in, 
and fometimes by into-, as, ter hum menino nos brdgos> 
to hold a child in one's arms ; entregar alguma coufa 
nas mlm, de alguem, to deliver a thing into fome- 
body's hands. 

Em is ufed before the word travez, as in this 
phrafe, por-fe de mar em travez com alguem, to fall out 
together. 

Em before a noun of time, denotes the fpace of 
time that Hides away in doing fomething ; as, el rey 
foi a Hanover, em tres dias, the king went to Hanover 
in three days ; that is, he was no longer than three 
days in going. 

'Em is fometimes ufed after the verb Mr, to go ; as, 
vai em quatro mefes que eu aqui cheguei, it is now go- 
ing on four months since I came hither. 

Em before quanto, and fometimes without it, is 
rendered into Englifh by zvliile or whilfl ; .as, em 
quanto vos fazeis aquillo, eu farei tjto, while you do 
that, I fhall do this : but if they are followed by a 
noun of time with an interrogation, then they mud 
be rendered into Englifh by in how much, or many, 
as, em quanto temp $ in how much .time P You muft 

M 3 obferve 



166 PORTUGUESE 

obferve, that em quant o a mim, a ti, a elle, &c. arc 
rendered into Englifh by for what concerns me, thee, 
him, &c. 

You mud: obferve that no ferves for the mafcu- 
line, na for the feminine, and em for both. 

Em Signifies as ; as, em final da fua amizade, as a 
token of his friendfhip; ewpremio, as a reward. 

The prepofiticns em, no, na, &c. and dentro, have 
very often the fame fignification, therefore they may 
fometimes be ufed one inftead of the other ; as ef- 
id na gave/a, or dentro da gaveta, it is in the 
drawer; eft a na cidade, or dentro da ciddde, he is in 
town. 

Em before the words favor, iitiliddde y confidera- ■ 
cam, razcw, and the like, fignifies in behalf of, for 
the fake of, on account of, &c. as, em razdo das bellas 
accbens que die temfeUo, in confideration of the great 
things he has performed. 

Obferve, that they very often make an elifion of 
the laft vowels, o, a, of the prepofition no, na> 
-when there is a vowel in the beginning of the next 
word ; n'agoa, inftead of na agoa; they alfo cut 
off the e of the prepofition em, and change the m 
into n, as you may fee in Camoens, Canto 2. Stanza 
xxxii. n'algum porto, inftead of em algumporto, where- 
in you muft obferve that n' is to be Englifhed by 
to, or into. 

Com. 

VII. This prepofition fignifies with, and it denotes 
conjunction, union, mixing, afTembling, keeping 
company ; as, cafdr huma donzella com hum hbmem 
honrddo, to marry a maid with an honeft man ; hir 
€om dlguem, to go with one ; com a ajuda de JDeos, 
by God's help, &c. , 

Obferve that moft of the adverbs formed of the 
adjectives are turned in Portugucfe by the pre- 
pofition com and the fubftantive ; as, atrevidamente, 
boldly, com atrevimento, with boldnefs ; elegante- 

mente % 



GRAMMAR. 167 

mhite, elegantly ; com elegdncia, with elegance ; cor- 
tezmente, politely, com cortez'ta, with pohtenefs, &c. 

You rauft obferve, that the laft confon-ant m is 
very often cut off, even before the noun of number 
hum, one ; and fo they fay cum> inftead of com hum, 
as you may fee in Camoens, Cant. i. Stanza xxxvu. 

Note, that with me, with thee, with himfclf, &c. 
are rendered into Portuguefe by commigo, comtigo, 
or comvqfco, comf/go, comnofco, comvofco, comfigo. 

When com is preceded by para, it fignifies to- 
wards, and fometimes over, in Englifh ; as, fcjdmos 
piedofos para com os pbhres, let us be merciful towards 
the poor. Ter grdnde podir para com dlguem, to 
have a great influence over fome. body's mind. 

Com before the word capa is ufed metaphorically, 
and then it fignifies under colour, or pretext. 

Para. 

VIII. Para is rendered into Englifh by fori but it 
fignifies alfo to, when it is found before the infinitive, 
and denotes the intention, or purpofe in doing 
fomething ; as, efte livro he para meu irmdo, this 
book is for my brother ; ifia pinna he para efcrcvir, 
this pen is to write ; Deos nos fez para amdlo, God 
made us for to love him ; o comer he necejjdrio parti 
confervdr a vida, eating is neceflary for preferving 
life. 

Para que is rendered into Englifh by for what \ 
as, para que he iflo? for what is this ? and fometimes 
by that, or in order that ; as, par a que venha verme, 
that he may come and fee me. But porque fignifies 
why, for what, upon what account, as, porque ndo 
vmdes? why don't you come? but when it is not 
followed by an interrogation, it fignifies becaufe. 

Para ferves likewife before the verbs, to denote 
what one is able to do in confequence of his prefent 
dispofition; as, elle he baf ant emente forte parii anddr 
a cavdllo, he is ftrong enough to ride ; elle tern ba- 

M 4 flante 



468 PORTUGUESE 

fidnte cabedal para fujlentdr fe y he has means enough 
to maintain him felt"; a occafad he mu/to favordve! 
far a nos ndo fervfr-mos della, the occafion is too fa- 
vourable.to let it (lip. 

Para expreffes alfo the capacity or incapacity of 
doing any thing ; as, elle he hbmem para ifio y he is 
the proper man wanted for this • hehdmem para pbu- 
co y he is good for little ; he hbmem para Jidda, he is 
good for nothing. 

This prepcliiion is alfo ufed to denote the end or 
motive of. company thing; as, trabdlho para o hem 



r 



dblicO) I work for the public good ; hum hofpitdl 
para os pbbres y an hospital for the poor. 

Pardk a prepoiinon of time ; as if to me baft a para 

iodo o dnno-y this is iufficient to me for all the year; 

.eft do unidos para Jem pre, they are united for ever; 

far a dcus mefes era muilo pouco y for two months it 

was too little. 

Para is fometimes preceded by the adverb la, and 
followed by a noun of time, and then it is Enghfh- 
ed by again ft or towards; as, la para o Jim dafema- 
na, againft the end of the week, or towards the end 
of the week. 

Para is fometimes Englifhed by confidering y or 
with refpeel %0; as, efte menino eft a mm to adianiddo 
-para a idade que tern, or para o pbuco tempo que 
aprende, this child is very forward for his age, or 
confidering the little time he has learned ; para Inglez 
fdlla demajiadamente, he talks too much confidering 
that he is an Engliihman. 

'Para ifigniiks fometimes juft or ready to ; as, elle 
cfid para part/r, he is juft going away, he is ready 
to go. 

Para is alfo ufed before the word grdcas ; as, elle 
nab he paid grdcas, he takes no jeft; elle ndo eft a 
para grdcas, he is out of humour, or he is in an ill 
humour. 

Para onde f fignifies whither f to what place f 

Para 



G RAIMA R. 169 

Para que? or -para que fim f fignifies /^ what end 
or purpofe ?■ Para c'rma iignifies upward. 
- Para hhna e oitira parte, iignifies to both fides, places, 
or parts. 

Para is alfo Englifhed by tozvards, and Is laid of 
places ; 2LS,para o oriente, towards, or to the Call. 

Para ,6nde quer que, iignifies whether, or to what 
place thou wilt, any whither. 

Para outra parte, {ignifies towards another place. 

Para comigo, towards me. 

Para o dUinte, fignifies/or the time to coivL 

De fnjm\ para mim, fignlfies for what concerns me. 

Para is ufed by Cainoens. Cant. 2, Stanza xxiv. 
before the p reposition detraz, and iignifies back- 
wards. . 

Para between two nouns of number is Englifhed 
by or, and fometimes by and -,as, hum homem de 
quarenta para cincoenta annos, a man between forty 
and fifty ; difla quatro para cinco legoas, it is about 
four or five leagues difta'nt. 

Por. 

IX. Por,pello,pella, p silos, or peU as, fignify for ; as 
por amor de vos, for your fake ; por feh fern anas, for 
iix weeks; palavra por paliivra, word for word. 

Polo and pola in Head of pello and pel/a, are out of 
ufe. 

Por fometimes denotes that the thing is not 'yet 
done ; as, eft a Sbra eft a por acahar, this work is not 
yet finiihed. 

Par, by, for, over, or through ; as, a J cance?-o por 
empenho, I obtained it by protection ; eu vou por 
dinheko, I am going for money ; pafeo pellos carnpos, 
I walk through the fields ; pot iodo o re/no, ail over 
the kingdom. 

When por is before an infinitive, and followed by 
a negative, in the latter part of the fentence, it is 
Englifhed by although or though ; as, por fer devota^ 
or por devota que fejafnao de'xa de fer mother, though 

jhe 



170 PORTUGUESE 

fhe is a religious woman, yet me is a woman ; por fer 
pbbre, or por poire que feja, nab deixa de fer foberba, 
though fhe has no fortune, fhe is neverthelefs, or for 
all that, proud. Wherein you fee, that the negative 
with the verb deixdr, are rendered into Englifh by 
the verb to be, and the particles never thelefs, yel % &c. 
You muft obferve that they fometimes put the words 
item por iffo before the verb deixdr, but the fenfe is 
the fame, and you may as well fay, por fer pbbre y 
item por (/Jo de'ixa, &c. 

Por followed by an adjective and the particle que 
with a verb in the fubjunctive mood, is rendered 
into Englifh by never fo ; as, por grande que elle feja, 
let him be never fo great; por pouco que feja, ne- 
ver fo little. 

Por, before menos y fignifies far lefs than, or under ; 
as vm ce nab o terd pormenos de v'mte libras, you lhall 
not have it under twenty pounds. 

Por before qudnto, with an interrogation, fignifies 
for bow mueby at what rate? But if there is no in- 
terrogation, as in the following and the like fen- 
tences, then it is to be Englifhed by for never fo 
much-, as, nab o faria por qudnto me dJJJem, I would 
not do it for never fo much. 

Por before cima fignifies upwards, and before bdxo 
is Englifhed by downwards; as, o remedio bbra por 
cima e por bdxo, the medicine operates, or works, up- 
wards and downwards. 

Por before pouco, muito, bem, &c. and followed by 
que, makes a fort of conjunction governing the fub- 
junctive, and is Englifhed by if, followed by ever 
or never fo little, much, well, &c. as, por pouco que 
erreis, if you do amifs never fo little ; por bem que 
eu faca, if I do never fo well, &c. 

Por before mim fignifies fometimes as for, or for 
all; as, por mim eftou prbmpto, as for me, or, for my 
part 1 am ready ; por mim podeis dormirfe quizerdes, 
you may fleep for all me. 

Por 



GRAMMAR. 171 

Por, pello, pella, &c. denote the efficient caufe of a 
thing, as alio the motive and means, or ways of do- 
ing ; in all which fignifications they are Englifhed 
by by, through y out of, at, &c. as, • 

A Afia fol conquftiada por Alexandre, Afia was con- 
quered by Alexander. 

Fos fallals nijjo Jo por enveja, it is out of envy only 
you fpeak of it. 

Elk entrbu pella porta, mas Jahio pella janella, he 
got in at the door, but he got out at the window., 
&c. 

Por denotes place, after the verbs ir and pajfar ; 
as, por onde ireis vos ? which way mall you go ? 

En pajfarei por Franca, I'll go through France ; 
por onde pajfou elk ? which way did he go? 

Por conftrued with nouns without an article, de- 
notes moil times diftribution of people, time, and placet 
and it is Englifhed by a, or every, before the noun; 
as, 

Elk deu tanto por cabe$a,he gave so much a head. 
Tanto por foldddo % por anno, por mes, por femdna, &c. 
fo much a foldier, a year, a month, a week ; a razad 
de vint e por cento, at the rate of twenty per cent. s 

Elk pede tanto porlegoa, he afks fo much a league, 
or every league. 

Por, between two nouns without an article, or 
between two infinitives without a prepolition, de- 
notes the choice which one makes between two 
things, alike in their nature, but different/in their 
circumftances ; as, 

Cdfa por cdfa, antes quero eft a que aquella, fince I 
mud have one of thefe two houses, I like this better 
than that; morrerpor mbrrer, melhor,he morrer comba- 
tendo quefugindo y when a man mufl die, it is better 
to die in fighting than in running away. 

Pello meyo is rendered into Englifh by through ; 
as, pello meyo dos cdmpos, through the fields. 

Por meyo is rendered into Englifh by by ; as, elk 
alcangou ofeu intento por meyo de aftucias t he has com- 
pafled his ends by devices. For 



173 PORTUGUESE 

'P&Hififnd fig nifties in one s s turn. 

Per bcfoie the infinitives is ufed inftead of \ pard 
by -the beiV Portuguese writers j and porque ihftead 
of para que ; as you may fee particularly in Camcens, 
Canto 2: Stanza vn. and viir. and in the following 
example, por ncid, or para Had repctir que ja tenios 
dito,- not to repeat -what we have already faid. 

Por is fometimes Englifhed by for, upon the ac- 
cmni of y for fake \ &c. as, Idle far a if 10 por amor de vos, 
he will do this upon your account, cr for your fake ; 
deixaraoo por morto\ he was. left for dead ; eu thiho-o 
for vi;H an' go, I take him to be my friend; tcdos os 
homers de hem fab, or ejlao por elle, all honefl: people 
are for him, -or are on his fide; por quern me tomdis 
<vos? who do you take me for? 

We have already obferved, that porque without an 
interrogation fignifies brcaufe; but it has the fame 
iignification in thefoliowing fentence, and the like ; 
porque elle he mentirofo fegue-fe que tdmbem eu feja f 
becaufc he is : a liar, does it follow therefore that I 
am one ? 

Par if to, or por-efla razao, fignifies therefore. 

porque- fignifies the reafon, the caufe, or the 
fubjecft; as,fabe-fe pirquef is it known upon what 
account ? 

Por nwdo de dizer fignifies as one may fay \ if 1, or 
we, may fay, &c. 

Por diante fignifies before } and por detrdz fignifies 
behind. 

Per ventura fignifies perhaps. 

P "el 'lo paffado fignifies formerly > in time paft y hereto* 
fore. 

Por fienhum cafo, by no means. 

Por mar e por terra, by fea and land. 

Hum por hum fignifies one by one. 

Por is fometimes Englifhed by in ; as, e lies fad 
vinte,por t6dos,&\ty are twenty in all 

When the verb paffdr is followed by dor, then the 
word alto signifies to forget ; as, pajjou I be apdllo por 

alio % 



GRAMMAR in 

alto, he forgot that; but fpeaking of goods itiignU 
ties to fmuggle. ... 

Por joined with the verb ir flgnifies to fetch, and 
feek after ; as, vai for vinho, go /etch fome wine ; vat 
fello medico, go fee for the phyfician. 

Por is commonly ufed before th-efubftamives; as, 
for exemplo, for example; por commodiddde, for con- 
venient y ; por co ft urne, for cud cm fake ; and many- 
others, that may be learned by ufe. 

You mud obferve, t\ia.t fello ferves for the mafcu'- 
line, fella for the feminine, and por for both.' 



Contra. \ 

X. Contra, (againft, contrary to), denotes dp por- 
tion ; as que d/z vm ce contra ffto f what do you fay 
againft this? It Signifies aifo over againft, oppcfite tol 

Pro e contra flgnifies in EiiglKh pro and con. 

Befde. . 

XI. Befde, denotes both time and place, and enu- 
meration of things, and is commonly followed in the 
fentence by the prepofition ate (to) ; then defde de- 
notes the term from whence, and ate that of hitherto - 
as, 

Befde o pnncipio ate o Jim, from thQ beginning to 
the end. 

• Elle for a pe defde Windfor ate Londres, he walked 
from Windfor to London. 

Eu ienho vifto tedos defde o ' primeiro ate o 'ultifrio, I 
have feen them -all from firft to 'laft ; fordo iodos ?nbr- 
tos defde \o primeiro ate o ultima, they were all flain to a 
man. 

Befde a criacao do. m undo y from or finc'e the crea- 
tion. 

Befde o bh-Qo % ou infancia, from the cradle, from a 
child. 



174 PORTUGUESE 

Defde ja, even now ; as, defde ja prevejo,' I even 
now forefee. 

Defde agora, from this time forward. 

Defde entdo, from that time ever fince. 

Defde que, as foon as, when. 

Defde quando ? how long fince, or ago ? 

Rio navegavel defde o feu nacimento • a river naviga- 
ble at its very rife. 

Ate. 

XII. Ate fignifies till, even, to, &c. as you may fee 
in the following examples. 

Ate bnde ? how far ? 

Ate Roma, as far as Rome. 
• Ate quando ? till when, or how long ? 

Ate que eu viva, as long as I live. 

He hum hbmem de tanta bondade, que ate os feus ini- 
migos fad obrigados a eftimalo, he is fo good a man 
that even his enemies have a value for him. 

Ate os mats vis hcmens tomavdo a liberdade de, &c. 
the very worft of men took fuch a liberty as to 
&e. 

Ate que, until, till. 

Ate as orelhas, up to the ears. 

Elle vendeo ate a camifa, he has fold the very fhirt 
off his back. 

Ate agora, or ate aqui, till now, or hitherto. 

Ateaqui, (fpeaking of a place) to this place, hither, 
fo far. 

Ate Id, to that place, fo far. 

Ate tanto que ifiofe faga, till it be done. 

Ate entdo, till then, till that time. 

Ate is alfo ufed before an infinitive ; as, gritar ate 
enrouquecer, to bawl one's felf hoarfe. 

Rir ate arrebentar pellas ilhargas, to fplit one's fides 
with laughing. 

Dar de comer a alguem ate arrebentar', to fill, or 
cram one with victuals till he burfts. 

Ate 



GRAMMAR. 175 

Ate a primeira, till our next meeting, till we meet 



again. 



Por cima. 



XIII. Por cima (above, over), denotes fuperiority 
of place ; as, 

Mordr por cima da alguem, to live or lodge above 
fomebody. 

A balla /he pajjou por cima da cabeca, the ball went 
over his head. 

Por cima de tudo, upon the whole. 

Para cima. 

XV. Para cima (above) denotes fuperiority of age, 
and is fometimes put at the end of the fentence; as, 

Elles aliftarao tbdos que tinhao de dez annos para 
cima, they enlifted every body above ten. 

A cima. 

XV. A cima, (above) denotes rank, and fome 
moral fubjecls \ as, 

A cima delle, above him, or fuperior to him. 

Eftar a cima de tudo, to be above the world. 

Huma molh'er que ejla a cima de tudo, nem fe the da 
do que o mundo diz della, a woman who is above the 
public's cenfure, who don't care what people fay of 
her. 

Em cima. 

XVI. Em cima (upon) ; as em cima de mefa, upon 
the table. 

Em cima de tudo ijlo, or only em cima, fignifies and 
bejides all that, over and above all that. 



De 



cima. 



XVII. De cima, when it is an adverb, fignifies 
from above ; but when a prepofition, it is Englifhed 
by from, off, ox from off -, as, 

Tirai 



176 PORTUGUESE 

fired aquillo de ctma da me/a, take that from off the 
table. 

Elle nunca- tirbu osfeus ollios de ctma delha, he never 
turned his eyes from her. 

Cahtr de ctma das arv'ores, to fall off the trees. 
Debaxo. 

XVII I. The prepofition debaxo, (under, below, or 
from under) denotes the time and place; I fay the 

time of a denomination of a reign, or government ; 
as, debaxo do imphio de Augufio, under the empire of 
Auguftus. 

Debaxo, as a prepofition of place, marks out in- 
feriority of pofition ; as, 

Tudo o que ha debaxo dos ceos, all there is under 
heaven. 

Ter huma almofada debaxo dos joelhos, to have a 
-cufhion under the knees. 

Eftar debaxo da chkve, to be under lock and key. 

Debaxo is fometimes rendered into Englifh by up- 
on ; as, affirmar huma cLufa debaxo de juramenio, to 
fwear a thing, to- declare upon oath. 

Abaxo. 

XIX. This prepofition is rendered into Englifh by 
under, inferior, or next ; as, affentou fe abaxo delles, he 
fat inferior, or under them; as, affentou-fe logo de mini; 
he fat next, inferior to me, or he was next man to 
me : abaxo del ret elle he o primelro, he is the next man 
to the king. 

This prepofition is fometimes put at the end of the 
next' prafes, de telhas abaxo, herebelow,- in this lower 
worlds de cabeca abaxo, headlong. 

For a, 

XX. Fbra, (out, without, except, but,) denotes ex- 
cluiion, and exception. It requires generally a ge- 
nitive before a noun of time, or place; but it go- 
verns alfo the nominative ; as, 

Fbra ' 



GRAMMAR. 177 

Fora do reyno, out of the kingdom. 

Fora da cidade, out of town. 

For a de tempo, out of feafon. 

Procurdi-o fora de cdfa, look for him without doors. 

Files fahirao todos, fora dous on /res, they all went 
out except, or but two or three. 

Elle Ihe permete tudo, fora o ir as ajfembleas, he 
indulges her in every thing, but in going to alTem- 
blies. 

Elle tem todos os poderes, fora o de conclulr, he has 
full powers, except of concluding; 

Fora is fometimes preceded by tad, and then it is 
to be rendered into Englifh by fo far% as, elle efia 
i do fora de focorrer os feus aUlddos, que fe declara con- 
tra elles, he is fo far from aflifting his allies, that he 
declares himfelf againft them. 

Fora is fometimes rendered into Englifh by be- 
fides .; as, fora daquelles que, &c. befides thofe that, 
&c. and fometimes by beyond ' ; as, fora de medida, 
beyond meafure. 

Fora de boras 'fignines beyond the hour, or very late.. 

For Mguem fora da porta, or mandar dlguem pella 
porta fora, to turn one out o( doors. / 

De f route, or front e. 

This prepofition governs the genitive, and figni- 
fies over-againjl. It is followed by de, do^ da, &c, 

De frbnie da fua cafa ejla hum outeiro, over againft 
his hotife is a hill. 

Eu eftdva de front e dell e, I was over againft him ? 

Sem. 

Sem Signifies without ; as, 
Sem dinheiro, without money. 
Sem duv'ida, without doubt. 
Sem fim, without end. 

Sem dar a entender, or fern fazer conhecer, with* 
t>ut giving to understand. 

• N Sem 



17S r PORTUGUESE 

Sem mais, nem menos, without any reafon or pro- 
vocation. 

E liar fern amo, to be out of place. 

Sem que a/gum aclo precedente poffa derrogar o pre- 
fente, any former act to the contrary of the prefent 
notwithftanding. 

Sem governs alfo the infinitive, which is render- 
ed into Englifh with the participle ; as, fallar fern 
faber, to fpeak without knowing. 

It is alfo a conjunction with que, governing the 
fubjunctive; as, 

Enfada-fefem que Ihe digao nada, he is angry with- 
out any body faying any thing to him. 

Nad era euja bajtantamente infeliz,femque procuraf- 
feis de acrecentar a minha infelicidade? was I not 
miferable enough before, but you mull ftill labour 
to make me more fo? 

Lembro-me fern que mo digais, I remember with- 
out your telling. 

E'lle vird fern que mdndem por elle, he will come 
without fending for. 

Confbrme, or fegundo. 

XXIII. Confbrme or fegundo (according to, con- 
formable to), govern the nominative, and never 
the dative as in Englifh } as, 

Elle Jot trathdo confbrme ofe'u merecimento, he was 
treated according to his deferts. 

Conforme o men parecer, in my judgment, in my 
opinion. 

In common converfation conforme is ufed adver- 
bially, and Englifhed as follows: 

Tffo he confbrme, or only confbrme, it is as it hap- 
pens ; may be yes ; may be not ; that is according. 

Confbrme a occafiao o pedir, according as there fhall 
be need. 

Sbhfe. 

XXIV. Sbbre fignifies upon; 2.%, fibre a mefa, upon 
the table ; fibre o rio % upon the riven 

Sbbre 



G R A M M A ft, i79 

Sbbre tudo, or fibre ibdas as cbufas, over all* above 
all, above all things, above any thing, efpecially; 
as, fibre tudo tende cuidado na faude, but howfoever 
the matter be, mind your health. 

P6r alguem fibre fi, or dar Ihe o primeho lugdr> td 
place one above himfelf. 

Ir fibre kutna cidade, to befiege a town. 

Ir fibre alguem, to fall, or to rufh upon one* 

Ir fbbre feguro, to go upon fure grounds. 

Sbbre a no'ite, about or towards the evening. 

Sbbre o verde, fomewhat green. 

Sabre a minha palavra, upon my word. 

Sbbre palavra, upon parole. 

Mandar carta fbbre carta, to fend letter upon letter* 

E'lle recebeo a carta fibre jantar, he had juft dined 
when he received the letter. 

Elle dbrme fibre jantar, he fleeps prefently after 
dinner; 

Sobre ifto, or fibre J/tas coufas, is fometimes Eng- 
lilhed by more than that, or be fides that j as, 

Elle roubbu-o, e fbbre ifto matbu-o, he robbed him, 
and more than that, he killed him. 

Sobre que, is rendered into Englim by though 
or although; as, 

Efte negbcio fibre que he difficultbfo, nao he impoffivei, 
altho' this is a hard affair, yet it is not impoflible* 

Sbbre is Englifhed fometimes by befides : as, 

Sbbre as miferias da guerra, elle t eve a dif grata, &c« 
befides the miferies of the war> he had the misfor- 
tune of, &V. 

Eftar fibre fi, or andar fibre ft, fignifies to Hand 
Upon one's guard. 

Eu vos efcreverei fbbre efta materia, I will write 
to you about this matter. 4 

Acerca. 

XXV. Acerca fignifies about; as, acerca dtfto Ihe 
dzffe, about this I told him; acerca de la ir Ihe re-> 
fpondi, about going there I anfwered him, 

N 2 . Perto, 



180 PORTUGUESE 

Per to, junto, do pe, pegado. 

XXVI. Perto (near by, about) denotes proximity 
of place and time, and governs the genitive cafe; as 
aqnillo efia muito perto do lume, that is too near the 
fire; per to das oho hbras, about eight o'clock. 

Perto do rio, near the river. 

F/tdmos perto do Natal, we are near Chriftmas. 

Ao pe requires alfo the genitive cafe; as, 

Afjentaivos ao pe de mini, fit down by me, or near 
me ; to pe do rio, near the river, &c. 

Note, that junto (near or by) and pegado (hard by) 
require the dative cafe; as, 

Junto a ridhde, near the town. 

Pegado do paldcio, hard by the palace. 

•Longe. 

Longe, far, a great way off, governs the genitive, 
and the particle, de, or do, da, ckc. as, 
Longe de cafa, far from home. . 
Longe daqui, far from hence. 

De longo, or do longo. 

This prepofition requires the genitive cafe; as, 

Ab longo da pray a, along the fhore. 
Ao longo da cbfta, do prddo, &c. along the coaft, the 
meadow, &c. 

Of further Particles. 

Ainda, ainda que, pbf toque or quando hem, ainda ajjim 
or com iudo. 

Ainda fignifies yet; as, Hie ainda ndo veyo, he is not 
come yet. It fignifies alfo even ; as, feria vergbnha 
ainda o foliar niffo, it were a fhame even to fpeak of 
it ; nem ainda por cem Ytbras, no not for a hundred 
pounds. 

Ainda que fignifies, though, or although ; as, ainda 
que vos fbis mais velho do -que elle, though you be 
older than he ; ainda que ajjim fbffe, though it were 
io. 

At fid* 




GRAMMAR. til 

Ainda que, is very often followed by com tudo, 
yet foralJ that; as, ainda que elle nadtivejjenecejfidade 
d/ffo com tudo, &c. though he had no need of it, yet, 

Ainda affrm, or com tudo, is fometimes Englifhed 
by neverihelefs, or for all that \ as, ainda ajjim fempre 
elle foi louvavely.hz was praife- worthy for ail that. 

J a defde, j a que zndja por que. 

Ja defde is rendered into Engiifh by even from ; 
as, ja defde o principle, even from the beginning. 

Ja que, fignifiesyf//^ ; as, 

Ja que iffo ajjim he, fince it is fo. 

The particle que fometimes is not placed imme- 
diately after ja-, as, ja ha dous annos que morreo,\\o. 
died' two years fince or ago. 

Ja ha muitb tempo que fahijles de cdfa, it is a long 
time fince you went from home. 

Ja por que, is repeated in the fame fentence, and 
then the firft is rendered into Engiifh by firft, be- 
caufe ; and the fecond by fecondly, becaufe-, 3.s,japor 
que era cego, ja por que era coxo, firft becaufe he was 
blind, and fecondly becaufe he was lame. 

Depois que. 

Depots que is rendered into Engiifh by after -^ as, 
Depois que eu tlnha entrado, after I was gone in. 

Com que. 

Com que is only a note either of introduction, or 
connexion ; as, 

Com que havia hum hbmera enfermo, &c. now a cer- 
tain man was fick; fometimes they add to it the 
particle aff'im, and then it is to be rendered into Eng- 
iifh by and fo. 

Ou. 

Ou fignifies or, or either ; as, ou bom^ ou mao, either 
good or bad > mais ou menos, more or lefs j ou elle 
queha > ou nao, whether he will, or no, 

N 3 Qner, 



182 PORTUGUESE 

Quer. 

Quer, when a .partible, rn uft be repeated, and the 
firft is ren^er^d^inio; J&gjiftl by either or whether, 
and the \fe& J fi'd : By^';^as, ^*r ?//? 2#*/ra quer nho 9 
whether he will or no -, quer vos o tenhciisfeito, quer 
nao, whether you have done that, or no. 

Se quer, or ho menos. 

Se quer or ho menos, &c. fignifies at leafl, how- 
ever; as,fe vos nao quer Sis fer por elle nao fejhisfe quer 
contra elle, if you don't chufe to be for him, at lead 
don't opppfe him ; dai-lhe fe quer com que fufle?ithr-fe, 
give him at leaft a fubfiftence -, o noffo prime'irofim he 
de livrhrnqs de todos os males, ho menos dos mayores, 
our chief end is to be freed from all, however the 
greateft evils. 

Nem fe quer hum, is rendered into Englifh by 
never a one, Jo much, or in the following manner ; as, 
fordo todos mbrtos, e nem fe quer hum efcapou, they were 
all (lain to a man. 

Qtihndo muito. 

Qudndo muito, (at mod, at farther!, at long run), is 
generally ufed before the nouns of time and price; 
as, elle eflarh aqui dentro em hum mez quando muito, he 
will be here in a month at farther!: ; dez libras quando 
muito, ten pounds at moil. 

. Tanto, 

Tanio, fo much, is fometimes followed by como,, 
and then it is rendered into Englifh by as well as 9 
as much as, &c. 

A' mo te tanto como a mim mefmo, I love thee as well 
as myfelf. 

Elle teme tanto como qualquer de vos, que Ihe refulte- 
$lguvi dam, he is afraid ot a harm as much as, any 
of you, 

Cuidei 



GRAMMAR. 183 

Cuidti que a eflimaffe tanto cbmo afimefmo, I thought 
he made as high account of her, as of himfelf. 

Elles vem tanto de dm cbmo de noite, they can fee as 
well by day as by night. 

Eu the tanto cbmo vos, I had as much as you. 

O'utro tanto is rendered into English by the double, 
twice as much, or as much ; as, 

Eualcancei buiro tanto maispor iffo , I had as much 
more for it ; eu pbffo fazer butro tanto, I can do as , 
much. 

Tanto followed by affim, is a particle merely ex- 
pletive; as, 

Tanto affim que Ihe -pbffo eu fazer ■? how can I help 
it; v hite, tanto affm nab ha nada parq, ti, go away, 
here is nothing for you. 

Tanto affim followed by que without an interro- 
gation, is fometimes rendered by fo that, in fo much 
that ; as, tanto a/Jim que elle nab quer ouvir maisfallar 
niffo, fo that he will hear no more of it. 

Tanto mafs is followed by que, and Englifhed by 
and the more fo as, as, 

Eu eftbu prbmpto para ir com vm ce hum dia defies a 
comedia,fe vm ce quizer. Tanto mats que fe deve repre- 
sent ar huma nova, I am at your fervice to wait on 
you fome day or other to the play, if you'll give me 
leave ; and the more fo, as a new one is to be acted. 

Tanto que, or logo que, is rendered into Englifh by 
asfoon as; as, tanto que eu o vi, as foon as I faw him. 

Tanto melhbr is rendered into Engliih by fo much 
the better. 

Tanto is fometimes preceded by com, and followed 
by que, and is Englifhed by fo, provided that h ; as com 
tanto que ofacais, provided that you do it ; com tanto 
que me nabfdga mal> fo he do me no hurt. 

Tanto quanto is Englifhed by as much as-, as, 

Tanto quanto pbffo> as much as I can, 

Tad. 
Tad, to, is generally followed by cbmo; as, 

n i Ejn 



184 PORTUGUESE 

- Efle nab lie tab bom cbmo o butro, this is not fo good 
as the other ; eujei 'ijjo tabbem cbmo vos, I know it as 
well as you. 

Td*b is fometimes followed by que, and Englifhed 
hyfo,fuch, to that degree ; as, 

Elle he t ho prudent e que nao I em igulil, he is fo wife 
that he has not his match ; nab fbu tab louco que o 
creya, I am not fo fimple, or I am not fuch a fool as 
to believe it ; fax tab grande vento que, &c. the wind 
is fo high that, &c. or the wind blows to that de- 
gree, &c. 

Como. 

Cbmo, is Englifhed by as, like, how, &c. as you 
may fee in the following expreffions. 

Como f how ? 

Dizeime cbmo Ihe hei de fallar ? tell me how I may 
fpeak to him. 

Comb affm P how fo ? 

Cbmo! what ! 

Como quer que, whereas. 

Cbmo quer que feja, howfoever, in what manner, or 
fafhion foever. 

Seja como for, be it as it will. 

Como if to aJJ/m he, fince it is fo. 

Cbmo, as it were, or almoft. 

Cbmo fe, as if, or even as if; as, cbmo fe elles ti- 
vejfem ja vencido, as if they had already over-. 
come. 

Cbmo tambem, as w T ell as. 

Rico cbmo elle he, as rich as he is. 

Cbmofbis men amigo, quero, &c. as (erbecaufejyou 
are my friend, I'll, &c. 

Dizeime o cbmo, tell me how. 

E'u fei cbmo fazer para que elle venha, I know the 
way I fhall take to make him come. 

Cbmo elle la nab efieja^ eu irh'> provided he is not 
there, I will come. 



GRAMMAR. $M 

Affim. 

Affim, io, thus, is rendered into Englifh as you 
may fee in the following expreffions, 

Pols he a] Jim de veras .1 de veras que affim he, is it 
even fo .? it is even fo. 

Affmfeja, or feja affim, fo be it, or be it fo. 

Affki he, it is fo. 

Para affim dizer, as it were. 

Affim fbu eu louco, que, &c. I am not fo foolifli as 
to, &c. 

Affim Deos me falve, as I hope to be faved. 

Tamo affim, fo ,that. 

Affim he que vos, &c. is this your way, &c. 

Affim cbmo affim, after all, neverthelefs, or for all 
that ; as, em vad dilatdis a vbffa Jornada, affim cbmo 
affim he pre c if o que vades, it is in vain for you to put 
off your journey, you muft go thither neverthelefs, 
or for all that, you mufl go after all. 

Affim cbmo, as well as, or as foon as. 

Bafia affim por agora, thus much for this time. 

Affim na paz, cbmo na guerra, both in time of peace 
and war. 

Affim affm, fo Ho, indifferent. 

Affim queira elle cbmopbde, he can if he will. 

Affim is fometimes preceded by e ; as, e affm que. 
quer ifto dizer ? how now? what do you mean by 
this ? And fometimes affim is followed by cono-, as, 
affim cbmo ofol eclipfa os but r as planet as, da mefma 
forte, &c. as the fun eclipfes the other planets, fo, 
&c. . 

Se. 

Se, if; zsfe Hie vier, if he comes; fe me amafses, 
mould you love ine ; fe elle fiffe hbmem de Lnra, 
were he but an honeft man; fe foubffem quern iu fu % 
tbdos diriao, &c. were it told who I am, every one 
would fay, &c. fe he verddde que, &c. if fo be that, 
&c. 

The 



186 PORTUGUESE 

The reciprocal verbs, as well as thofe that arc 
ufed imperfonally, may have two fe y s joined toge- 
ther ; asyfefe for, if he goes away ; fe fe falla n/ffo, 
if they fpeak of it. 

Se is fometimes rendered into Englifh by whether; 
and when it is repeated, the fecond is Englifhed by 
or-, as, 

Quifera faber fe a culpa he nqffa, fe voffa, I would 
know whether it is your fault, or ours. 

Alias. 

Alias, is fometimes rendered into Englifh by elfe \ 
as, entrai, porque alias fecharei a porta, come in, or 
eife I'll (hut the door; porque alilts feriao os voffos 
filhos immundos, elfe were your children unclean. 
And fometimes it is rendered into Englifh by other- 
wife, in other things, or* ref peels, 

Embora. 

Embora is fometimes rendered into Englifh by 
prof per oujly, aufpicioufly ; but fometimes it is a par- 
ticle merely expletive, and anfwers to the Italian 
pure ; as, dizei muito embora que quizerdes, fay what 
you pleafe : the Italian fays, dite pur quel chevi place. 

Muito embora, /eja affini, well, let it be fo. 

Embora is fometimes Englifhed by away - 3 as, 
vkite embora, go away. 

Senao. 

Sen/id fignifies if not, did not, were it not that, buf 
that ; as, 

Senao tiveffe me do de meu pay, but that I fear my 
father. 

Se elle nao tiveffe vergbnha de confeffar, but that he 
was afhamed to eonfefs. 

Note, that the following expreffions, in which 
they make ufe of this particle, may be Englifhed by 
but, for, and fome other variations. 

Se naafoffepor elle, but for him, or had it not been 
for him, or had he not been. 

Senao 



GRAMMAR. 187 

Senad foffe por vos, had you not been, or had it 
not been for you, without you, without your help, 
hindrance, &c. 

Senad foffe por mim, elk morreria defame, were it not 
for me, he would ftarve. 

Senad is fometimes Englifhed by but , as, nem elks 
tern outro inthito, fenao, &c. nor do they aim at any 
thing elfe but, &c. 

Ninguem djfse afsim fenao Cicero, nobody faid fo 
but Cicero. 

Senad may be alfo exprefled in Portuguefe by 
man que in the following fentence, and the like. 

Elk nao faz fenao, jogar, or elk nddfaz mats que 
jogar, he does nothing but play. 

Nao, nab por que. 

Nad, not, or no, when followed by porque, is 
Englifhed by not that, not but that ; as, nao porque 
Ihefaltaffe engenho, not but that he had wit ; nao par- 
que nao foffe juflo, mas porque, &c. not but that it 
was right, but becaufe, &c. nao porque a cdufa feja 
impofshel, mas porque, &c. not that the thing is poi- 
f;ble, bi^t becaufe, &V, 

Tamhem, or outroji. 

Tamhem, or. butrof, fjgnifies alfo, too, likewife ; as* 
vos afsim 6 quereis e eu t limb em, you'll have it fo, and 
I too. 

Para que, porque. 

See the prepofitions para and por.. 

Pots. 

This particle is very much ufed by the Portu- 
guefe, and it is rendered into Engli(h feveral ways P 
as you may fee in the following examples : 

% Pots ide, e vmde logo, go then and come back pre^ 
fentiy. 

Pop nao fou Hi capliz de fazella ? what, am I not 
capable to dp it ? 

fois t 



IS8 PORTUG UES'E 

Pols, or pots cntad que quer dizer ijlo ? Well-, and 
what of all this. 

Pols, or pots entab que hei de fazer f What (ball 
I do then ? 

Pels eu dlgo que elle eft a dentro, why, he is here 
within, I fay. 

Pols purque me vigiliis I Why then do you watch 
me ? 

Elle tern cabeca ; pots tambem hum alfinete a tern, he 
has got a head, and fo has a pin. 

Pols before nab, and preceded by an interroga- 
tion, denotes a ftrong affertion, and is Engliilied by 
without doubt, yes,furely, to be [we, &c. as, vira elle ? 
pols nab I will he come ? yes to be fure. 

Antes, or mats deprefsa. 

Thefe particles are fometimes rendered into Eng- 
lifli by rather or fooner ; as, antes or mals deprefsa 
quizera morrer, I would rather die ; antes quizera 
viverfb que na vofsa companhla, I would fooner live 
alone than be in your company. Sometimes antes 
is Engliihed by before ; as, Yde r Jos antes que elle venha, 
go away before he comes ; antes que eu morra, 
before I die. 

Mas antes, pelo contrario, mas pelo contrario. 

Thefe particles are "rendered into Englifh by on 

the contrary, on the other hand, nay ; as, mas antes, 
mas pelo contrario, or pelo contrario iflo he multo dif- 
ferente, nay it is quite another thing, mas antes, pelo 
contrario, &x. elle he avarento, nay, or on the contrary, 
he is a covetous man. 

Para melhor dizer. 

This phrafe is rendered into Englifh by nay ; as, 

elle tern ja bafiante, ou para melhor dizer, mals do 
necefsario, he has already enough, nay too much ; 
A Iflo he que nos chamamos dire'ito das gentes, ou para 
melhor dizer, da razao, this is what we call the law of 

nations, 



GRAMMAR. 189 

nations, which may be called more properly the law 
of reafon. 

Que. 

We have already obferved that que is a particle 
which mod conjunctions are compofed of; as, a'mda 
que, although ; de forte que, fo that, &c. 

The particle que fometinles is the fign of the third 
perfons of the imperative, as let in Englifh ;• as, que 
fulle, let him fpeak ; que riao, let them laugh. 

Que is ufed between two verbs, to determine and 
fpecify the fenfe of the firft, as eu vos afseguro que 
afiim he, I a flu re you that it is fo ; duvido que affim 
feja, I doubt whether it is fo or no. 

Que is ufed alfo after hbra in the beginning of a 
fentence, and followed by a verb in the fubjun&ive, 
to denote by exclamation one's furprize, averiion, 
and reluctance -of fomething ; in which cafe there is 
a verb grammatically nnderfiood before que \ as, 
hbra que fe efquecefse elle de ft mejmo ! I wonder, or is 
it poifrble for him to have forgot himfelf ! 

The exclamation, or admiration, is foraetimes 
expreffed without any verb; as, que gbfio ; e no 
me/mo tempo, que pena ! how much pleafure and 
trouble at once ! 

Que is fometimes repeated ; as, , 

Que bellos l/vros que tendes ; what fine books you 
have got ! que bella que he a virtude ! how beautiful 
is virtue ! 

Que is fometimes followed by de ; as, que de Ibucos 
ha no mundo ! how many fools there are in the world 1 

Que is ufed after nouns denoting time, and is 
fometimes Englifhed by when or fince y &c. and 
fometimes left out ; as 

O dia que elle partio, the day when he fat out. 

Quanto tempo ha que eflais em Londres f how long 
have you lived in London ? How long is it fince 
you lived in London ? 

Ha dez annos que faz a m^fma coufa, he has done 
the fame thing thefe ten years. 

m 



190 PORTUGUESE 

Ha dez annos que morreo, he died ten years ago. 

Que is fometimes rendered into Englifh by becaufe, 
as you may fee in Camoens, canto 2. ftanza xvL 
que hvemenie hum animo, and fometimes by thai, to the 
end that, in order to ; as you may fee ibid, ftanza xvn. 
que cbmo vifsem, que no r'10, &c. 

Que before fe in the beginning of a fentence, is a 
redundancy not exprelfed in Englifli ; as que fe vos 
dizeis que, if you fay that, &c. 

Que is ufed after the conjunction a penas (fcarce 
or hardly), and is Englifhed by but ; as, a penas aca- 
bbu de fall ar que logo morreo , he had hardly done 
fpeaking but he expired. 

Que fometimes is preceded by define, de maneird, 
de geito, and then it is Englifhed by fo that , in fuck 
a manner, infomuch that ; as eu o farei de forte que fi- 
queis contente, I will do it fo that, or in that manner 
that, you (hall be contented. 

De veras. 

De veras fignifies in earneft ; but fometimes it is 
Englifhed by no fure -, de veras ! ndo o pbfso crer % 
no fure ! 

Hora. 

Hora, or 6ra, is an interjection that ferves to en- 
courage, as we have feen above ; but when it is re- 
peated, it is Englifhed by fometimes, one while, another 
while ; as, ora efta bem, 6ra eft a mal, fometimes he is 
well, fometimes ill, elk bra efta de hum parecer, e ora 
de outro, he is now of one opinion, and next moment 
of another. Por bra, fignifies now, for the present. 



GRAMMAR/ ' 192 

CHAP. VIII. 

Of the Portuguefe Orthography ; and first of 
Capitals and Stops. 

I. t I ^HE proper names, as well as the furnames, 
JL always begin with a capital. 

II. The names of nations, kingdoms, and pro- 
vinces, alfo begin with, a capital; as, Frauce'z, 
French ; Ing/ez, Englifh, &c. 

III. All names of dignities, degrees, and ho- 
nours, require a capital ; as Rey, B/spo, &c. King, 
Bifhop, &c. 

IV. At the beginning of a period, as well as of 
a verfe, the fir(r. letter is always a capital. 

V. The names of arts and Jfciences, as well as 
thofe of kindred, begin with a capital. 

Of Stops. 
The ufe of flops, or points, is to diftinguifh words 
and fentences. 

The Portuguefe have fix flops, or paufes, viz. 

1. The ponto finals the fame as our period or full 
ftop (.), and is ufed at the end of a period, to fhew 
that the fentence is completely finifhed. 

2. The dons pantos^ which is our colon (:), and 
is the paufe made between two members of a pe- 
riod -, that is, when the fenfe is complete, but the 
fentence not ended. 

3. The potilo e virgula, our femicolon (;), and 
denotes that fhort paufe which is made in the fub~ 
divifion of the members or parts of a fentence. 

4. The pbnto e interroga$am, the point of interroga 
tion thus (?). 

5. Ponto e admirachm> the point of admiration 
thus(!). 

6. The virgula, the fame with our comma (,; 
and is the fhorteft paufe or refting, in fpeech, be- 
ing ufed chiefly to diftinguifh nouns, verbs, and 
adverbs, as alfo the parts ^f a fhorter fentence. 

The 



192 PORTUGUESE 

The conjunction e> the, relative qual, and the dis- 
junctions ou and nem> require a comma before them. 

The Portuguefe make ufe alfo of a parentbefis, 
thus ( ) ; but they do not make ufe of the diasrefis, 
called by the printers crema {") ; they make ufe 
alfo of the angu/o, thus a, called by the printers 
caret. 

The apoflrophe, or, as they call it, viracento, like- 
wife takes place in this as in other languages, being 
defigned only for the more pleafant and eafy pro- 
nunciation of words, by cutting off an antecedent 
vowel ; as, d y armas, d y elvas, and not ddrmas, de/vas, 
&c. But this is fomewhat excufable in cafes where- 
in, by ufe, they feem to be one word ; as nefta, 
neste> desta, deste, nalgum y daquelle, nello, nella, 
daqu't, dali, ateqw, ategcra ; and not em elle y de 
elle, &c. 

Of the Accents. 

The accent, which is the very foul of articulated 
words, is a found of the voice by which we pro- 
nounce fome fyllables fhorter, others longer. 

I intend to fpeak here only of the accents the 
Portuguefe ought to make ufe of, according to Ma- 
dureira, in his Portuguese Orthography. 

The Portuguefe indeed are acquainted with three 
accents, but they ought to make ufe of two only, 
namely, the acute, which defcends from the right 
to the left ('), and the circumflex, thus (*). 

1. The acute ferves to prolong the pronuncia,- 
tion, and is put, according to Madure/'ra, on the 
third perfon lingular of the future tenfe y as amara, 
I era, &c. 

2. On the penultima of the preterpluperfe£r. tenfe 
of the indicative mood ; as, amdra, enjinara, &c. 

3. The acute accent ought to-be put alfo on 
the penultima of the third perfons of the prefent 
tenfe of the verb renunciar, pronuncidr, duvidar, &c, 
thus renuncia, profunda, duvida, &c. that they may 

ba 



GRAMMAR. i 93 

he distinguished from the nouns renuncia> pronuncia> 
duvida, &c. The same accent is also put on esta, 
no, to distinguish them from esta, this, and 7\o y in the* 

The vowel o has two sounds, according to the two 
accents that may be put on it ; one open, when it is 
marked with the acute accent, and is pronounced 
like o in store ; the other close, when it is marked 
with the circumflex accent, and then is pronounced 
like u in stumble. 

There are many nouns> both substantive and ad^ 
jective, which are accented in the singular with the 
circumflex, and in the plural with the acute; and 
the adjectives that have two terminations, particu- 
larly those ending in ofo, o/a 9 must be accented (in 
the singular) with the circumflex in the masculine, 
and with the acute in the feminine; a% 

Fogo] fire ; plural, fogos. 

Fornoy oven ; plural, fomos^ 

olhoy eye; plural, olhos. 

ovoy egg ; plural, ovos. 

vsso y bone ; plural, 6ssos> 

Poco t well ; plural, p6c.os. 

PorcOy hog ; plural, porcos. 

RogOy prayer ; plural, rogos. And so fojo y tSrno t 
formSfby fequiofo, JuppdstOy povo t tdrto % torta, copiqfo, 
cop i 6 fa y &c. 

The following keep the circumflex accent in both, 
numbers: bolo> bolos ; bdjo, bSjos ; bdto, botos ; coco, 
okos ; chorOy cboros ; colo, cotos; forrOy firros ; gordo % 
gordos ; gostOy go st os f gozo, goZos ; loboy lobos'y mdfo, 
'mCgos i nojoy nojos ; potro, potros ; i6lo> tolos >• ferrolho, 
ferrdlhos ; raposv, raposos ; arrdZy arrozes / algoz, al- 
gozesy &c. 

On the contrary, the following keep the acute ac- 
cent in both numbers : c6po y to'pos ; nwdo, modes ; noffo, 

vbjjQS ; VqffOy VoffoSy &C. 

When the accent circumflex is put on the e, then 
the e is pronounced , like the French mafculine<? 5 
but when e is accented with the acute. accent, then 

O the 



i 94 PORTUGUESE 

the e is to be pronounced like the e open in French, 
and it is exceeding sonorous and long. See the 
pronunciation of the vowel e. 

Nouns ending in az> iz> oz t uz, muft have the 
acute a'ccent on the vowel before rhe z ; as, rapdz, 
a boy; ndz % a walnut; ahacuz, liquorish: but you 
must except am-z, rice ; algoz, a hang- man. 

Nouns ending in ez generally have the circumflex 
accent ; as mez, a month; marquiz, a marquis ; &c. 
except the surnames ; as, Alvarez, Antunez, Lopez, 
Henriquez, Goncalvez, Rodriguez, Perez, Nunez, 
TelUz, &c. 

Some Obfervations upon the Portuguefe 
Orthography . 

Both the Portuguese orthographers and best au- 
thors vary so much in their rules and ways of writ- 
ing, that it is a hard matter, and quite out of any 
grammarian's way, to clear up thi: part of the Por- 
tuguese grammar : since it requires no less authority 
than that of the Royal Portuguese Academy. How- 
ever, not to omit such a material part of the Gram- 
mar, I shall present the learners with the following 
observations. 

I. When the Latin words from which the Portu- 
guese are derived, begin with a b, the Portuguese 
likewise must begin with it ; therefore you must 
write and pronounce the b, in the following words, 
bom, bondade, hem, bento, &c. because they are derived 
from bonus, bonitas, &c. But you must except bainha, 
bex'iga, bairro, which begin with a b, though they are 
derived from vagina, vefica, vicus. 

II. Likewise if the Latin words begin with a v, 
the Portuguese words derived from them must also 
begin with it ; as vida, viver, varrer, ver, vinho, &c. 
from vita, vivere, verrere, videre, vinum, &c. 

Though b ought to be pronounced only by closing 
the lips, and v by touching the superior teeth with 
the inferior lips ; yet, by a certain affinity between 

these 



I 



GRAMMAR. 195 

these two letters, in speaking there is a great confu- 
sion in the pronunciation of them in the province 
of E'ntre Dburo e Minho: and this confusion has not 
been peculiar to the Portuguese language, because 
Nebrixa says, in his Casiilian Orthography, that in his 
time some Spaniards could hardly make any distinc- 
tion between these two letters. 

III. The/> found in some words originally Latin, 
is changed in Portuguese into a b ; as, cdbra, cabello, 
cabega, &c. from capra, capillus, caput, &c. 

IV. The Portuguese generally make use of thejyin 
the following words : ay, rey,.frey,Iey % may, pay, mayo, 
meyo, and some others. 

Bluteau says, than we must make use of the y in 
words having a Greek origin ; z<$,,fy'llaba, Chryfopeia, 
pyr amide, polygbno, hydrographia, hydropico, phy'fica, 
hyperbole, hypbcrita, Apocrypha, &c. 

V. The ph are used by the Portuguese in some 
words taken from the Greek ; as, phiiofophia, philo- 
logia, Philadelphia, epitdphio, &c. 

VI. The r in Portuguese has two pronunciations, 
one soft, expressed by a single r, as in arddo, a 
plough ; and after the consonants b, c, d, f, g, p, t ; 
and another hard, in which two rr are used 5 as in 
bdrro,cdrro, &c. But you must observe, 

1. That in the beginning of a word two rr must 
never be used, because then the r is always pro- 
nounced hard in Portuguese ; as in the words remo, 
rko, rbda, &c. 

2. When the consonants /, n, s, are before the r, 
either in a single word, or a compound one, this 
letter must never be doubled, because then its sound 
is always strong ; as in abalrodr, enriquecer, hbnra, 
defregrddo, Henrique, Ifraeliia, &c. 

3. The r after a b, is also pronounced hard in 
compounds with the prepositions ab, ob, fub, and 
yet is not doubled ; as in abrogdr, obrepcao, fub- 
repcao. 

VII. The s is never doubled in the beginning 
of words, nor after the consonants ; therefore you 

O 2 must 



196 PORTUGUESE 

must y;?he fardr, faber, fa!famente y falfo, manfo, &c* 

The $ is pronounced like 2 between two vowels, 
in words derived from the Latin, as well as in those 
that end in osa, and oso ; as mufa, cafo, rifo, amoroso, 
cuidadbfo, cafa, &c. You must also observe, that 
cofcr signifies to fezv, but cozer signifies to boil or 
bake. 

VTIL Tb are generally used in words derived from 
the Greek ; as, ampbitbedtro, atbeifta, tbeblogo, letbdr- 
go, melbodo, &c. * 

Tb is also used in the Fortuguese preposition atbe ; 
though some write it thus.^'. 

IX. When pt is found in Latin words, it must be 
kept in the Portuguese derived from them ; as, ap- 
to y inepto, optimo, &c. from apt us, inept us, optimus,fkc. 
You must make the same observation about ct. 

X. Cb is sounded like k\ in words derived from the 
Greek; as, orcbanjo, arcbiduqiie y Chrysosiomo, cbryfol, 
cbrifologo, Cbriftovab, monarcbia, &c. These words 
must be written with cb t in order to preserve to the 
eye the etymology of words. 

Note, that cb in words that are not derived from 
the Greek is pronounced like cb in the English 
words cburcb, chin, rnucb, &c. but as fome confound 
the cb with the x, and begin with x thofe words 
that should begin with cb, 1 thought it necefTary to 
make a collection of them. 

Words beginning with 



CM A 


Chamalete 


Chanconeta 




Chamar 


Chanqueta 


Chi 


Chamariz 


Chantagem 


Chaa 


Chambao 


Chantmdo 


Chaca 
Chacina 


Chamejar 
Chami^a 


Chant re 
Chao 


Cha^o. 
Chacota 


Chaminc 
Chamufcar 


Ghapa 

Chapado 


Chafariz 

Chaga 

Chalupa 


Chanca 

Chancela 

Chancelaria 


Chapeado 

Chalpeleta 

Chapeo 


Cbaraa 


Chanceler 


Chapim 



GRAMMAR. 



197 



Chapim 


Chibarro 


Chofrao.o 


Chapinhar 


Chibo 


Chofre 


Chapuz 


Chicharos 


Choldabolda 


Charamela 


Chicharro 


Choque 


Charameleiro 


Chichelos 


Chorar 


Charco 


Chicoria 


Chorrilho 


Charneca 


Chic6te 


Chorro 


Charneira 


Chifra 


Cbovor 


Charola 


Chifrar 


Choupa 


Charpa 


Chi he 


Choupana 


Charro 


Chilindrao 


Choupo, or Chop© 


Charrua 


Chilrar 


Chounco 


Chafco 


Chimbeo 


Choutar. 


Chafona 


Chinear 




Chatim 


Chincheiro 


CHU. 


Chato 


Chinchorro 


Chuea 


Chavao 


Chinela 


Chupamel 


Chavafcal 


Chiqueiro 


Chupar 


Chave 


Chifpa 


Chuchurriar 


Chavalha 


Chifpar 


Chuco 


Chaveta 


Chifte 


Chufa 


Chavinha. 


Chita. 


Chumaco 
Chumbar 


CHE. 


CHO. 


Chumbo 


Chea, or Cheya 


Ch6ca 


Churriao 


Chefe 


Choca 


Churiime 


Chegar 


Chocalhar 


Chiifma 


Cheriar, and its 


</e-Chocalho 


Chuva 


rivatives 


Chocar 


Chuveiro 


Cherivia 


Chocarrear 


CHY. 


Cherne. 


Chocarrice 



Chiar 



CHI. Choco and Chocos Chy'pre. 

Chocolate 



The following words begin with ce and noiy£. 



C£a 

Ceado 

Cear 

CEB. 

Cebola 
Cebolal 
Cebolinho. 

ced. 
Cedavim 



Cedela 

Cedenho 

Ceder 

Cedilho 

Cedo 

Cedro 

Cedula. 

CEG. 

Cega 

3 



Cegar 

Cego 

Cegonha 

Cegude 

Cegueira. 

CEI. 

Ceifa 

Ceilao 

Ceirao 

C^irinba 



rgS 



PORTUGUESE 



Ceirinha 


Centefimo 


Cerra!" 


Ceivar. 


Centeyo 


Cerralheiro 




Cento 


Cerralho 


CEL. 


Centoculo 


Cerrarfe 


Celada 


Centopea 


Cerro 


Celebracao 


Central 


Certa 


Celebrar 


Centro 


Certo 


Celebre 


Centuplo 


Certaa 


Celefto 


Centuria 


Certeza 


Celeftial 


Centuriao 


Certida 


Celdhina 


Ceo 


Certificar 


Celeusma 




Cerva 


Celga 


CEP. 


Cerval 


Celha 


Cepa 


Cerveja 


Celho 


Cepilbo 


Cerviibas 


Celibado 


Cepo 


Cerviz 


Celibato 


Ceptro. 


Ceruda 


Celicola 
Celidonia 


CER. 


Ceruleo 
Cervo 


Cella 


Cera 


Cerzir. 


Celleiro 


Ceraferario 


CES, 


Celleireiro 


Cerbero 




Celtas. 


Cerca 


Cefar 




Cercado 


Cefarea 


CEM. 


Cercar 


Cefma 


Cem 


Cercador 


Cefmaria 


Cemiterio. 


Cercadura 


Cefmeiro 




C6rce 


Cefsao 


CEN. 


Cerceado 


Ce Macao 


Cenaculo 


Cercear 


Cellar 


Ceno 


Cercillo 


Cefta 


Cenobio 
Cenobitico 


Cerco 

Cerdofo 


Ceftinha 
Ceftinho 


Cenotapbia 
Cenoura 


Cerebro 
Cereijas 


Cefteiro 
Cefto 


Cenrada 


Cercijal 


Cefura 


Cenreira 


Ceremonia 


CEV 


Cenfo 


Ceremonial 




Cenfor 


Cerieiro 


CeVa 


Cenfura 


Cerne 


Cevada 


Cenfurado 


Cernelha 


Cevadal 


Cenfurar 


Cerol 


• Cevadeira 


Centauro 


Ceroulas 


Cevadouro 


Centena 


Cerqueiro 


Cevar 


Genteal 


Cerra^ao 





Cezao 



Cezao 



GRAMMA R. 

CEZ^ 

Cezimbar. 



K 



99 



N. B. Cerrd, fignifies to jhut >ox Jhut up ; but forrdr 
fignifies to faw, to cut timber or other matter with 
a faw. 

The following words muft have ei, and not fi > in 
their beginning. 



CIA. 


Cigano 


Cintura 


Ciarfe 


Cigarra 


Cinza 


Ciatica. 


Cigude 


Cinzerito 


CIB. 


Cigurelha. 


Cinzeiro. 


Ciba 


CIL. 


CIO. 


Cibalho 


Cilada 


Cio 


Ciborio. 


Cilhas 


Ciofo 




Cilhar 


Cio fa. 


cic. 


Cilicia 




Cicatrix 


Cilicio 


ClP. 


Cicero 


Cilladas. 


Cipo 


Ciciofo. 

CID. 


CIM. 

Cima 


Ciprefte 
Cipriano. 






Cidadao 


Cimalha 


cm. 


Cidadabs 


Cimbalo 


Ciranda 


Cidade 


Cimeyra 


Cirandagem 


Cidadoa 


Cimento 


Cirandar 


Cidra 


Cimitarra 


Circo 


Cidrada 


Cimo. 


Circula^ao 


Cidrao 




Circular 


Cidreira. 


CIN. 


Circulo 




Cinca 


Circuito 


CIE. 


Cincar 


Circumcidar 


Ciencia. 


Cincho 


Circumcifao 




Cinco 


Circumferencia 


CIF. 


i Cincoenta 


Circumfpec"to 


Cifar 


Cingidouro 


Circumfpeccjiio 


Cifra 


Cingir 


Circumftancia 


Cifrar. 


Cingulo 


Circumftantes 


CIG. 


Cinnarnorno 
Cinta 


Cirio 

Cirurgia 


Cigana 


Cintillar . , 


Cirurgiao 




o 4 


Cirzir 



200 


PORTUGUESE 




Cirzir. 


Citacao 

Cit^o CIU " 




CIS. 


Citar Ciume 




Cifcar 


Citerior Ciumes. 




Cffco 


Cithara 




Cifma 


Citharedo CIZ ' 




Gifmatico 


Citnno Cizania 




Cifne 


Civel Cizhao. 




Ciftercianfe 


Civil 




Ciiterna 


Civiiidade. 





XI. No Portuguefe word begins with go ; but ac- 
cording to MadureJra, there are fome that begin 
with ga 9 and g u ; as gapate s gapeteiro y gargdgo, gitja, 
gugiddde y gumo y gurra, gurrdr, and fome others. 

The g is ufed after p in thofe Portuguefe words 
that have in their Latin root pt ; as dcscripgao y ac- 
cepcao y &c. from defcriptio, accept io, &c. 

Of Double Letters. 

It is to be generally obferved, that the confonants 
are doubled in thofe Portuguefe words, whofe Latin 
roots have likewife the Tame double confonants ; as 
accelerar y hccenio y occidente> &c. from accttero y accentus, 
Occident^ &c. affligir y affiuencia, ejjirmacao, &c. from 
affligo> affluentia, affir?natjo y &c. as you will fee in the 
following collections. 

B. 

B is to be doubled in abbdde y abbacidl y abbddia y ab T 
hades sa y abbreviature abbreviai\ and fome others. 



C is to be doubled in the following words, and 
fome of their derivatives. 



A. 


Accento 


Acceita 


Abftraccao 


Accentuar 


Acceitacao 


Accao 


Accep^ao 


Acceitad6r 



Accietar 



GRAMMAR. 



201 



Acceitar 


D. 


Obftrucgao 


Acceflao 


Decocgao 


Occafiao 


Accefsivel 


Deduccao 


Occasionar 


Accefib 


Desjeccao 


Occafo 


Acceflorio 


Desoccupacao 


Occidental 


Accidental 


Defoccupado 


Occidente 


Accidente 


Defoccupar 


Occiduo 


Accelerada 


Detracgao 


Occifao 


Accelerado 


Diccao 


Occqrrer 


Accelerar 


Diccionario 


Occultamente 


Acclamagao 


Direccao. 


Occultado 


Acclamar 


Diftracgao. 


Occultar 


Accomrnodacao 


E. 


Occtilto 


Accomodado 


Eccentrico 


Occupacao 


Accomrnodar 


Ecclefiaftico 


Occupado 


Accumulacao 


Erecgao 


Occupar 


Accumulado 


Evicgao 


Occurrencia 


Accumular 


Exaccao 


Occurrente. 


Accufac,ao 


Extracga? 


P. 


Accufado 


F. 


Peccado 


Accufador 


Fa^cao 


Peccador 


Accufar 


Ficgao 


Peccadora 


Accufativo 


Fracgao 


Peccante 


Adftnccao 


I. 


Peccar 


Afflicgao 


Prediccao 


Attraccao 


Impeccabilidade 


Preoccapar 


B. 


Impeccavel 


Produccao 


Inaccefsivel 


Projeccao 


Baccho 


Indiccao 


Profecc^o 


Bocca 


Induc^ao 


Putretaccao. > 


Boccaga 


Infecgao 


R. 


Boccadinho 


Infracgao 


Rarefac<;ao 


Boccado 


Inspeccao 


Reconduccao 


Boccal. 


Inftruccao 


Refeccao 


c. 


Intellecgao 


Refraccao 


Interjecgao 


Refeccayao 


Circumfpecgao 


v Interfecgao 


Reftnccao. 


Coaccao 


Introdiicgao. 


s. 


Coccao 


M. 




Collecgao 


Satisfaccao. 


Conftricc,ao 


Manuduccao. 


Seccar 


Conftruccao 


O. 


Secco 


Contracgao 


Sec^ao 


Correccao 


Objeceao 





Secun 



202 



PORTUGUESE 



Seccura 


Succcffivo 


T< 


Socco 


SuccefTivel 


Tianfaccao 


Soccorrer 


Succeffor 


. Tradilccao 


Soccorro 


Succintamente 


V. 


Subtraccao 


Succinto 


Succeder 


Succo 


Vacca 


SuccefFao 


Succofo 


Vaccada 


SucceiFo 


Succubo. 


Vac cum. 



D. 

This letter is doubled in the following words 
addicao, addicionado, addicionar, additamento, additar. 



F. 



JFis to be doubled in 



Affabilidade 
Affayel 

AfFidigado 

AfFidigar 

AfFagado 

A ffagar 

Affagos 

Affamado 

Affamarfe 

Affaftado 

AfFaMr 

Affazendado 

AfFazerfe. 

AFFE. 

Affeado 

Affear 

■ AfFeamento 

Affe&adamente 

Affeaado 

Affeftar 

Affefto 

AfFeftuofo 

Affeicao 

AfFeicoado 

Affeicoar 

Affeite 

AfFekar 



AfFeminado 

AfFeminarfe 

Afferradamente 

AfFerrado 

Afferrar 

Afferretoado 

Afferretoar 

AfFerrolhado 

AfFerrolhar 

Afferventado 

AfFerventar 

Affervorado 

AfFervorar 

AFFI. 

Affiado 

Affiar 

Affidalgado 

Affidalgarfe 

Affigurado 

Affigurar 

Affilhada 

Affilador 

Affilar 

Affinado 

Affinar 

Affincado 

Affincar 



Affirmadamentc 

Affirmador 

Affirmar 

Affiftularfe 

Affixar. 

AFFL. 

Afflamarfe 

Affliccao 

Affliao 

Affligir_ 

Affluencia 

AFFO. 

AfFocinliar 

Affogado 

AfFogador 

AfFogar 

AfFogamento 

AfFogueado 

AfFoguear 

AfForado 

Afforador 

Afforar 

Afforamento 

AfFormentar 

AfFormofeado , 

Afrormofear 

AfFouwdo 



Affoutado 
Affoutar 
AfFouteza 
AfFouto. 

AFFR. 

Affracar 

AfFramengado 

AfFreguefado 

Affreguesarfe 

Affronta 

Affrontado 

AfFrontamento 

AfFrontar 

AfFrontofamente 

AfFrontofo 

Affroxadamente 

AfFroxado 

AfFroxar. 

AFFU. 

AfFug-entado 
AfFugentar 



GRAMMAR, 

AfFumado 

Affumar 

Affundado 

AfFundarfe. 

AfFundirFe 

Affuzillar. 

DI. 

DifFamado 

Diffamar 

DifFeren9a 

Differen^ar 

Diffcren^as 

DifFerentc 

DifFerentemente 

Difficil 

Difficuldade 

Difficultar 

DifficultoFame'nte 

Difficult6fo 

Diffusao 

Diffufamente 

DifFiifo 

G. 



203, 



Effe&ivamente 

Effe&ivo 

EfFeito 

Effeituar 

Efficazmente 

Efficacia 

Efficaz 

Efficiente 

EfFigie. 



OfFender 
OfFerec^r 
OfFuFcar. 



Suffocar 

Suffragio, and fome 
others* 



This letter is to be doubled in 



Aggravante 


Aggreflor 


Exaggerar 


Aggravar 


Exaggera^ao 


Suggerir 


Aggravado 


Exaggerador 


Suggeiiao 


Aggravo 


Exaggerado 

L. 


Suggendo. 


L is to be 


doubled in 




AB. 


Acafelladura 


AL. 


Aballado 


Acafellar 


Allega^ao 


Aballador 


Acallentado 


Allegado 


AballaV ( 


Acallentar 


Allegar 


Aballo 


Acapellado. 


Allegoria 


AballiFado 




Allegorico 


Abilifador 


AF. 


Allegorifar 


AballiFar. 


Affillado 


Alleluia 


AC. 


Affillador 


Alliviar 


Acafellad6r 


AffiUar. 


Allucinayao 

Allucinar 



204 J 


\T U K X UIj U 


r-Mi 


Allucinar 


BA. 


Cavallem* 


Alludir 


Bacellada 


Cavalla. 


AHumiar 


Bacello 


CE» 


Allufao. 


Barbella 






Barrella. 


Cebolla 


AM. 




Cebolial 


Amentellado 


BE. 


Cebollinho 


Amarello 


Bella 


Charfceller 


Amarellecerfe 


Beilamente 


Chancellaria 


Amerellidao 


Bello 


Cella 


Amoliado 


Belleza 


Ceileiro. 


Amollar 


Belleguira 


CL. 


Amollecer 


Bellico 




Amollecido 


Bellicofo 


Clavellina 


Amollentar 


Belligero 


CO, 


Ampoila. 


Belluino. 


Codicillo 


AN. 


BU. 


Colla 


Annullacao 


Bulla 


Collado 


Annurlar. 


Bullario. 


Collar 
Colleira 


AP. 


CA. 


Collapao 


Appellacao 


Calliope 


Collateral ' 


Appellante 


Camillo 


Coll£ccao 


Appellar 


Cavillacao 


Collefta 


Appellidar 


Cavillofamente 


Colleftivo 


Appellido. 


Caballina 


Colleaor 




Cadella 


Collega 


AS- 


Cadellmha 


Collegiada 


Aquella 


Callo 


Collecrial 


Aquelle 


Camartello 


Collegio 


Aquelloutro 


Cambadella 


Colligar 


Aqufllo. 


Cancella 


Colligir 




Capella 


Colly'rio 


AR. 


Capellao 


Collo 


Armellas 


Capellada 


Collocacao 


Arrepellado 


Capellania 


Collocar 


Arrepeilao 


Capello 


Colloquio 


Arrepellar. 


Capillar 


COM. 




Caftella 




AT. 


Caflello 


Compellir 


Atropellado 


Cafullo 


Coinpoftella 


Atropellar. 


Cafulla 


Conftellacao 


AV. 


Cavalla 


Corroll&rio 


Avillanado. 


Cavallaria 


Covello 



Courella 



, 


gramma: 


&. 205 


Courella 


Encelleirar. 


GA. 

Gabella 


DE. 


E$. 


Gallado 


Delia 


Equipollencia 


Galladura 


Delias 


Equipollente. 


Gallar 


DeHe 
Delles 


ES. 


Gal lego 
Gallia 


Degollado 


Efcabellado 


Gallicado 


Degollacao 


Efcabello 


Gal Hear 


Degollar 


Efcudella 


Gallico 


Degolladouro. 


Efcudell^o 


Gallfnlia 




Eftillacao 


Gallinha'co 


DI. 


Eftillado 


Gallinheira 


DilKUacao 


EOillar . . 


Qallinheiro 


Diftillador 


Eftillicidio 


Gallinholla 


Diftillar. 


Eftrella 


Galliopoli 




Eftrellaclo. 


Galliota 
Galliza 


DO. 




Donzella 


EX. 


Gallo 




Excellencia 


Gamella 


0U. 


Excellence 


Gazella. 


Duello 


Expellfr. 


GO, 


£B, 


FA, 


G6IIa. 


Ebull'^ao 


Falla 






Fallacha 


HE* 


EIX. 


Fallacia 


Hellefponto 


Ma 


Fallador 


Hendecafy'llabo 


E'llas 


Fallar 


Hollanda 


E'lle 


Fallecer 


Hypallage. 


E'lies 


Fallecido 




Elleboro 


Fallencia 


JA- 


Ellipfe 


Fallido. - 


Janella 


Elliptico. 




Janelleira 




FE. 


Janellinha 
Jarmello. 


EM. 


Ferdizello 


Emolliente 




J. 


Emollfr . 


FL„ 


EN« 


Flagellante 


Illacao 




FJagello. 


Illaquear 


Enallage 




Illativo 


Encapellado 


FO» 


Illegitimo 


Encapeflar 


F6ile 


Ille'tof 


Encaftellado 


Folliculo 


Illicar 


Encaftellar 


Fontello. 


Illiciador 

lilknamente 



206 

Illicitamente 

lllicito 

Illocavel 

Illudido 

Illudir f 

Illuminacao 

Illuminado 

Illuminar 

Illuminativo 

Ilhifao 

Ilhifo 

Illuftra9ao 

Illuftrar 

Illuftre 

Illuftriffimo 

Illy'rio 

Imbella 

Impellir 

Incapillato 

Infallivel 

Inintelligivel 

Intervallo. 

L. 

Libello 
Lordello 
Lou fella. 

M. 

Marcella 

Marcellina 

Marcello 

Martellada 

Martellar 

Martello 

Martellinho 

Malfallante 

Mallogrado 

Mamiliar 

Medulla 

Mellifluo 

Mello 

Metallico 

Millenario 

MilTefiino 



PORTUGUESE 



Mitandella 
Mifcellania 
M611e 
Molleira 
Molleza 
Mollice 
*Mollidao 
Mollificante 
Mollificar 
Mollinar 
Monofy'llabo. 

N. 

Nella 

Nellas 

Nelle 

Ne'lles 

Nigella 

Novella 

Noveileiro 

Nulla 

Nulliade 

Niilio 

Nuzellos. 

O. 

Odivellas 
Ollana 
Olleiro 
Ou^uella. 

p. 

Palla 

Palladio 

Pallante 

Pallas 

Pailiado 

Palliar 

Pallid6z 

Pallido 

Pallio 

^aradella 

Parallaxe 

Parallelo 

Parallelogramo 



Pelle 
Peliefinha 

Pellica 

Pellicula 

Panella 

Pimpinella 

Phillis 

Poll egad a 

Pollegar 

Pollez 

Poll 119a o 

Polluto 

PoiyiVllabo 

Portacollo 

Portella 

Poftilla 

Foufafolles 

Prunelle 

Pulmella 

Pupilla 

Pupillo 

Pufillanimidade 

Pufillanime. 



Quartella 

R. 

Rabadella 

Rebel lado 

Rebel lao 

Rebel larfe 

Rebtlliao 

Rella 

Rodofolle 

Rodopello 

RoJclIa 

Ruella. 



Sella 
Sellado ' 
Sellador 
Sellagao 
Sellar 



Selleira 



GRAMMA R. 



207 



Selleiro 

Sello 

Sentinella 

Sibylla 

Sigillo 

Sigillado 

Sobrepclliz 

Sugillacao 

Sy'llaba 

Syllabatic© 

Syllabico 

Syllogifar 

Syllogifmo. 

T. 

Tabella 
Tabelliao 
Tabellioa- 
Titillacao 

Tidilar 



Tolla 

Tollice 

Tollo 

Torcicollo 

Tranquillidade 

Tranquillo 

Trelia 

Trify'llabo 

Tuniceila 

Tiii Ho 

V. 

Vacillaeao 

Vaciilante 

Vaallar 

Valla 

VailaHo 

Vallar 

Valle 

Vaifaliagem 



Vaffdllo 

VE. 

Velleidade 

Vellicicao 

Vetlioar : 

Velio 

Vell6fd 

Velkl [0 

Verderelfa 

• VI. 

Villa 

Villoma 

Vilfeameate 

Villao 
Viliaa 
'Vit&la 
Vitelline 



N. B. Annullar iignifies to annul; but annular 'is an 
adjective, and lignifies annular, or in the form of a 
ring. L is doubled by fome in the words pelo, pela, 



(for) thus pello, pella. 



M. 



M is to be doubled in 



Accommodar 

Commeraoracao 

Commenda 

Commenfurar 

Commentar 

Commercial* 

-Commettar 

Comminacao 

Commiferacao 

CommifTao 

CommirTario 

Commocao 

Commodo 

Commover 



Commum 

Commungar 

Communicar 

Communidade 

Commutar 

Confummar 

Defaccommedar 

Defcommodo 

Dilemma 

Emmadeirar 

Emmadeixar 

Emmagrecer 

EmmanqueceY 

E m mafia r 



Emmudecer 

En?6mrnar 

"EpioTarnraa 

r I am ma 

Flammante 

Flammula. 

Gemma 

Gomma 
. Grammatica 

Immaculada 
. Im.manente 

Immarceflivel 

Immaterial 

Immature) 

Immediata- 



208 



PORTUGUESE 



Immediatam£nte 

Immemoravel 

Immenfo 

Immenfuravel 

Immobilidade 

Immoderadamente 

Immodefto 

Immodico 

Immolar 

Immortalifar 



Immortificado 

Immovel 

Immudavel 

Immundo 

Immunidade 

Immutavel 

Incommodo 

Incommunicavel 

Incommutavel 

Inflammar 



Mamma 
Mammar 
Recommendar 
Somma 
Sommar 
Summa 
Summario 
Summidade 
Symmetria, and 
fame others. 



N. B. M, and not n, is always made ufe of before 

b, m, p. 

N. 

Nis likewife doubled in feveral verbs compound, 
ed with an, en, in, con, as annelar, annexa, annao, 
anndta, annel, Anna, anno, annular, connexdo, connexo, 
depenndr, empennar, ennaftrdr, ennegrecer, inndto, 
innavegavel, innocencia, manna, Maridnna, pan no, 
pinna, when it fignifies a pen, iyrdnno, and fome 
others. 

P. 

This letter is to be doubled in words beginning 
with p compounded with the Latin prepofitions ad, 

eb> fub ; as apparato, apparecer, oppor, opprimir, fnppor, 
Philippe, poppa, 8zc. 

N. B. Pdppa fignifies pap, or a fort of fpoon- 
meat for children; but papa fignifies the Pope. 

R. 

The r is doubled in fuch words as are ftrongly 
pronounced in the middle; as guerra, arrancar, ar- 
reddr, arrimdr, arruindr, carregar, edrro, &c. 

S. 
The s is to be doubled in the Portuguefe fuperla- 
tives, becaufe it is doubled in the Latin roots ; it is 
alfu doubled in the following words : 

AbbadSffa 



GRAMMAR. 



209 



AbbatlefTa 
Baroneifd 
CondefiTa 
Priorefla 

Afllr 

Affanhar 

Aflegurar 

Aflignar 

AfTolar 

Acceflb 

Aggreffor 

A p pre (far 

Amaflar 



ArremefTar 


Noflo 




Affaltar 


Nofla 




AfTeVo 


E'ffa 




Afleffor 


E'ffe 




Afsim 


I'flb 




Afliftir 


O'ffo 




AfTombrar 


Paffear 




AfToprar 


Paflar 




Aflbbiar 


Remeffa 




Affuftar 


Ingreffo, 


and many 


Atraveflar 


others. 




Neceflitar 






NifTo 







T. 



Attribuir 


Permittir 


Attributo 


Jrometter 


Attricio 


Remetter- 


Attrito 


Remettir 


Commetter 


Setta 


Demittir 


Settenta 


Ennttar 


Settee entos 


Fitta 


Tranfmittir 


Intrommetter 




Omittir 





T is doubled in the following words and their 

derivatives : 

Attemperar 

Atterjvao 

Attender 

Attentar 

Attenuacao 

Attenuar 

Attonito 

Attracc,ao 

Attraftivo 

Attrahk 

Of the Qiiantity of Syllables and their Sound. 
Of Words that make their Pennltima in a. 

N. B. You muft remember what we have faid 
above about the accents. 

Ail words ending in abo, aba, aco, aca, acbo, acba, 
aco, aca, ado, ada, dfo, afa, ago, aga, agem, agre, alho, 
alba, alo, ala, have the penultimas long ; as diabo, 
m'angaba, macaco, maciica, cavaca, mingkbo> garnacha* 
madraco, linbaca, amado, punbcida, (except reldwpago, 
antropofago, levado, and cagado, which are fhort in the 
penultima), abafo, abafa, faramago, adaga, (except 
ftameago or tftbmago,ama'go, amaraco, which are fhort), 

P trabalho, 



2io PORTUGUESE 

trabdlbOy todlha y baddlo y (except anomalo, bufali), efcan- 
dalo t which are short), tanchagem, vindgte. , 

Words ending in dmo y dma y dnbo y anha\ ano % dna 9 
have their penultimas long; as, ifcamOy courdma, 
cafianhoy ardnbdy engdno, pejldna ; except pampano, 
ty'mpano, bigamo. 

Words ending in dpo, dpa y &que s dro, dra y have 
their penultimas long; as, guardandpo y foldpa y baf- 
bdqne> empdro y fear a ; except cdntaro, pucaro\ Idparo, 
bdfaro, litparo y p'ifaro y picaro y camera, tdmara, pdjffaro, 
LdzarOy bdrbarOy cofdras, &c. 

Words ending in drro, drra, dtOy dta y dvo y dva y 
dxOy dxaSy make the penultima long ; as, bizarre, 
bizdrra] bifcdlo, patardta y efcrdvo, efcrdva y (except 
concava y and bzfavo), cartaxo y tarrdxa. 

Of Words that make their Penultima in e. 

AU words ending in ebo, eba, edo y eda t efa y have 
their penultima long ; as, mancebo> manceba y azedo, 
azeda y fanefa. 

Words ending in efe are long; as, magarefe : as 
well as thofe ending in eco y eca y eco, eca ; as bonecoy 
honecay c aire go y cab eca. 

Words ending in ego y e'ga, are long ; as, morcego, 
JaccgOy relegOy entrega, alUga } except conego y . trdfego, 
c6rrego y fcfrego y pecego y folego y biUega, cbcegas. 

Words ending in efo y efa y elo y ela y are long ; as, 
caranguejOy bocijOy igreja, Alentejo y enveja, mart e to, 
querela. 

Words ending in emo y ema y eno y eua y are long ; as, 
fupri}ih y prficma y aceno y ague en a ; except ap6z?wa. 
. N. B. The penultima is short in the word ingreme. 

Words ending in epo y epa y e r pe, eqSe 3 ero y era y are 
long ; as, decipo y caripa y julepe y mole que >fevero, fevera y 
tempero, (when a noun) : and iempero. (when a verb) 
except l\fpero y profpero. 

Words ending m~e/b y efa y ezo y eza y eto y ela y ete y 
evo y eva> eve, are long ;. as, acefo y ace/a y defprezOy 

gran* 



GRAMMAR. sir 

grandeza and defprefo, (when a verb) entremeto, gale± 
beta, ramatbite, bofite, atrevo, atreva, atreve. 

Of Words that ryiake their Penuliima in i. 

Words ending in ibo, iba, ibe y uho y icha, iebe y zee, 
tca y ico, zcciy zee, zdo, ida, ifo,ifa, zfe, have the pe- 
nultima long ; as, efiribo, arriba, arri.be, efguiebo, 
efgutcba, azeviche, panico, (a sort of stuff) botica ; 
except mecdnico, erumenico, critieo, politico, pdnico, 
(panick), and some others borrowed from the Greek 
and Latin. In I'go, iga, &c. as, roligj, pregu'ga, vel- 
bice, m art do y medi da ;. except humido, pdllido, borrido, 
and some others derived from the Latin. In ifo, 
if a, &c. as borrifo, ale at /fa, pat'/fe. 

Words-ending in igo and iga, are long ; as, am/go, 
amiga, except>prdd/go y prodiga. . 

Words ending in ijo, and ija, are long ; as, affiJjo, 
artemija. 

Words ending in ilbo, ilha, are long; &%,atilho, 
beatilha. Others ending in its, ila, as, gorgomtlo, 
^perfila, desfila. 

Words ending in zmo, ima, have the penultima 
long; as opimo y cadi mo, efgrima, lafiima, (when a 
verb) ; except lafiima (when a noun), Jeronimo, pef- 
fimo y and all the superlatives, anonimo, and some 
others. 

Words ending in inho y inha, ino y ina, ipo, ipa, ipe, 
have the penultima long; as, conflipo, confiipa y EurJpo, 
acipipe. Others in /quo, /qua, ique, iro, ira, ire ; as ? 
iniquo, in/qua, lamhique, ret iro, ment}ra y fufpire. . 

Words ending in iso, if a, i%o y iza % ito, it a, ivo, iva, 
ixo, ixa, are long in the penultima ; as, avifo, c'amisa, 
juizo, ajuiza, allivo, altiva, prolixo % prolixa, ap/to, 
cabrito ; except pulpito, vomilo, decrepito, efpirilo, 
debit o, and some others. 

Rules for fuch zvordsas make their fenaltima ino. 

Words ending in 6bo, oba, obe, bar a, obro, obre, 
3nave their penultima long ; as, lobo, loba, arrvba, 

P 2 affofc 



2i2 PORTUGUESE 

qrrobe, gib bo, alc6va % 6bro, 6 bra, cbbre, cbbro, d6- 
bro. 

Words ending in echo, bcha, bco, oca, bco, 6ca, 6do, 
bda, ode, 6fo 9 cfa, 6fe 9 have the penultima long ; as, 
agarrbcho, garrbcha > carbcha, bioco, except alliloco) 
maffarbca, minhbea, ahnbco, moca, (a girl) mbca, or 
mbjja, (a notch), almbgo (when a verb), carrbga, lb- 
do, boda, bode, pbde, (the third person lingular of the 
present indicative of the verb pbder), pbde (the third 
person singular of the preterperfeel: definite of the 
same verb), galhbfa, bbfe. 

Words ending in bfro, bfra, bfre, are long; as, 
ale ax bfra, cbfre, enxbfre. 

Words ending in bgo, bga, ague, are long.; as, af- 
fogo, affbga y affugue, defafbgo, when a verb, and def- 
qfogo, when a noun. 

Words ending in ojo, bja, have the penultima long • 
as, d('jpbjo y when a verb, nojo, defpojo when a noun. 

Words ending in bio, bla, ble, are long; as, *u8h 
la\ gaVmhofa, bo/a, engble, miblo, boh, rebolo,~ tolo, 
cebo'a ; except perola,frivolo, benevolo, malevolo. 

Words ending in cmo, bma, bme, have the penul- 
tima long ; as, mordbmo, redbma, fbme, except Thome. 

Words ending in bnho, bnha, bno, bna, have the 
penultima long ; as, bifonho, rifonha, ddno, atafona, 
dona ; except alitsono, and unifono. 

Words ending in op la, bpo, op a, ope, bpro, bpra, 
cpre, bque,~have the penultima long; as, manbpla, 
tbpo, tbpa, galbpe, afjbpro, when a verb, ajjbpra, af- 
fopre, ajjbpro, when a noun:, botoqne. 

Words ending in ore, bra, ore, are long in the 
penultima ; as, perMro, penhbra, penhbre, choro when 
a noun ; choro when a verb ; except bacorot remora, 
polvora, arvore. 

Vwrds ending in brro, brra, are long; as foe- 
corro, morro, cathorra ; and some others ending in 
ofo, bfc, bfa, bzo, ■ bza, as, prhnorbfo, primorbfa, induf- 
iribfo, indufirlbfa, a'bzo, cibza, defebfe. 

■ Words 



GRAMMAR. .213 

Words ending in oto, 6ta y 0/^, have their penulti- 
ma long ; ' as goto, gola y bbta, devoto, frbta y capote, 
garrote. 

Words ending in 6vo, ova, 6ve, are long in the 
penultima ; as 6vo, corcova, aprove. 

Words ending in 6x0, 6xa y are long in the pe- 
nultima ; as, roxo, roxa, fintarroxo. 

Rules for fuch Words as make their Penultima 

in>u. 

Words ending in iibo, uba, ubro, ubra^ ucbo, ucha, 
iico, uca, uco, itca, make the penultima long; as, 
adubo, aduba ; except juccubo, incubo, and fome others; 
incubro, incubra, machucho, embucha, caduco, caduca, re- 
buco, embuca. 

Words ending in udo, uda, ude, ufo, ufa,, ufe, ugo, 
iiga, ujo, uja, have the penultima long; as, felpudo, 
felpuda, almude, pant ufo, adufa, adufe, finguefuga, 
caramtjO) azambuja. 

Words ending in ulho, ulha, Uhe, uh, ula, ule, umo, 
uma, ume, unho, unha, unhe ,• as, bagulho, borbulha, 
eniulhe, engufo, ewgula, bulebule ; except vocdbulo, vef. 
iibulo, dngulo, regulo, opujeulo, tremulo, patibulo, ihirt- 
bulo, and fome others; confumo, confuma, cardume, 
tefiemmhr^ teftemunha, emp'mhe. 

Words ending m uno y una, une, upo y upa, upe i uque^ 
uro y ura, ure, are long in the penultima ; as, dejuno, 
fori 'ma, defunc, apiipo, apupa, apupe, eliuque, ?naduro, 
mad'ira. apute. 

Words ending in ufo, if a, ufe, uzo, uza, u%e„ uto y 
tea, ule, uxo y uxa, uxe, have the penultima long; as, 
parafa/b, parafufa, par af ufe, reduzo, reduza, reduze, con- 
dido y tabula, enxuta, lab ule ; except computo w\\zt\ a 
noun ; repuxo, empuxa, ampuxe ; and forae others end- 
ing in uvo, uva y uve ; as, viuvo, viuva, enviuve. 

N. B. When the penultima is immediately foU 
lowed by another vowel, you niuft make the follow- 
ing observations ; - 

P3 A before 



jfr* PORTUGUESE 

A before e must be accented with the acute ac- 
cent, and pronounced accordingly ; as, fae y cde: 
but before i h has no accent. 

A before o must be pronounced and accented 
thus, bacalhao ; but when the relative o is added to 
the third person singular of the prefent indicative, 
then a has no accent ; as, ama-o. 

E before a is a<. cented thus, balea ; and some- 
times with the acute, as aj}emblea y idea, and some 
others; and sometimes has no accent at ail, as in 
gdvea, femea y and some others. 

E before o is exceeding sonorous and long, as in 
chape o y cor it eh eo ; except fateo y ferreo, plumbeo, ait- 
reOy argent 'eo. 

1 before a y e y o, is long'J as dizta y faz'-a t almo- 
folia ; except such as are borrowed from the Latin .- 
as nifda % comhlia y jevia y ciencia, prudencia 9 and fa- 
Ma when an adjective, &c. / before o and e y is 
long ; as, defvie y defv'io ; except v/cio and some 
others. 

O before a is accented thus, covoa y toa y moa y 
efvioa. 

before e is long in the words doe y moe y roe, and 
in the verb Joe when it iigmfies to be wont; but 
when it signifies to found, it is to be accented thus, 

yfe. 

U before a is long ; as rua, charrua ; except mel- 
liflua, infua. 

U before e and o is long ; as, concluo y recuo y con- 
clue, recite ; except meWfiiw y and. some others derived 
from the Latin. 



GRAMMAR. 21 



CHAP. IX. 



Etymology of the Portuguefe Tongue from the 
Lathi. 

THE Portuguefe retains fo great an affinity to 
the Latin, that feveral words of the latter are 
preferved in the former, by only allowing a fmall 
alteration ; as may eaiily be feen in the following 
obfervations. 

I. The of the Latin words is preferved in fome 
Portuguefe ones; nay, fome Latin words are entire- 
ly preferved in the Portuguefe; v as, bofpede, corda, 
porta> &c. 

II. The u is changed into o ; as, forca % golofo, 
eftbpa> mofca i amdmos, &c. from.y^raz, gulofuSyJlupa, 
miifcci) amamuSy &c. 

III. The diphthong, au, r is frequently changed into 
cu ; as, louvavely Suro, couve y mduro, &c. from lauda- 
bilis^ auruniy caulis, maurus> &c. 

IV. The e is preferved in feveral Portuguefe 
Tvords; as, cerio y Jervo, erva, terra , ferro, &c. from 
certuSyfervuSy berba y terra y ferruw, &c. 

V. The e takes the place of i; as, enfermo, feco, 
&c. from infirmus y ficus y &c. ; and the i is fometimes 
preferved, as in tnd/gno, ben/gno, Sec. from indignus, 
benignus^ &c. 

VI. The b is alfo changed into v ; as, drvore y du- 
vidafy dever, tftdva y amdva> &c. from arbor > aubitare t 
debere y flabat y amabat y &c. V 

VII. The c is very often changed into g ; as, digo y 
agudoy amigOy migdlba y &c. from dico y acutus y amicus > 
mica y &c. 

VIII. CI is changed into ch ; as, cbamdr y chave t 
from clamare y clavis y &c. 

IX. When the c in Latin is followed by /, this 
letter is changed into c ; as> drciio, dJccao, &c. from 
cflic, dicliOy &c, ; and fometimes the e before / is 

P 4 changed 



2i6 PORTUGUESE 

changed into (• as, fe/to, leito, noiie, kite, peiio, &c. 
from faclus, leClum, nocle, lacle, peelus, &c. Finally, 
both the c and / are preferved in a great number of 
words ; as, df/o, affl/tJo, diftiv.51:, &c. from aftus, af- 
fiftus, diftjp&us 9 fkc. 

X. The d is feveral times loft ; as, roer, excluir 9 
rah, &x. from rodere, excludere, radius, &c. 

XL The / is frequently preferved ,- as in filbo, 
fazer, fervor, formqfo, &c. from filius, facere, fervor % 
formofus, &c. 

XII. The g is changed into /; as, re'ino, from 
tegnum. Sometimes it is quite loft, as in dedo, frw, 
jell a, final, ba'mha, &c. from digitus, frigus, fagitta, 
fignum, vagina, &c. 

XIII The b is placed inftead of the /; as, dlbo, 
from allium. Sometimes it is added ; as, arttlbo, 
albeo, fblha, conf'lho, &c. from articulus, aliemis, fo- 
lium, confilium,&c. 

XIV. The n is fometimes added, and fometimes 
taken off; as, mancha, ilba, Salhre, efpofo, from 
macula, infula, fal nilrum, fponfus, &c 

XV. The mn is preferved by many Portuguefe 
writers in the words alumna, calumma, columna, dam- 
no, folemne, fomno, from alumnus, calumnm, columna y 
damnum, &c. 

XVI. The double mi of the Latin is preserved 
in feveral words : as in anno* innoceniia ) innocuo, inna- 
vegdvel, innovhr, connexo, &c from annus, innccen- 
*iia, innocuus, mnavigabilis, innovare, connexus, &c. 

XVII. The £7z and gm are preferved in feveral 
Portuguefe words; as in augment o, fragment 'o, en/g- 
pia, benigno, d'gno, indigno, igmmiwa, &c. from dug- 
mentum, fragmenium, ^enigma, benignus, dignus, &c. 

XVIII. The e and the i after n are fometimes 
changed into /;; as in ardnha, v/nba, Hefpdnba, ca- 

fianha, &c. from aranea i vinea^ Hifpama, caftanea % &c. 

XIX. The/) is changed into b; as in cabra, ca- 
$ello % cabeca, &c. from capra, c a pill us, caput, &c. 

Some-? 



GRAMMAR. 217 

Sometimes pi is changed into ch\ as, chdga, chufo, 
chuva, &c. from plaga, ploro, pluvia, &c. 

XX. The q is changed into g • as, *£««/, alguem, 
ant'igOy agoa, aguza, &c. from equus, aliquis i antiquus, 
aqua, aquila, &c. 

XXI. The / is likewife changed into */; as, r^z- 
dea,fddo, lado, nadar, pieddde, &c. from catena, fatum, 
latus, natare, pietas, &c. The /Y of the Latin is 
fometimes changed into oz, and fometimes into ci ; 
as in grdga, dementia, paciencia, &c. from gratia, de- 
mentia, patient ia, &c. 

JV. Z?. All thefe alterations are not general in all 
the words, but are ufed in feveral ; and on fome oc- 
cafions the Latin word is preferved without any mu- 
tilation or variation. And as it would be endlefs to 
pretend to (hew all the affinity between the Portu- 
guefe and the Latin, I (hall only obferve, that they 
fometimes add, and fometimes take off letters from 
the Latin roots ; as in faal, deb'd, final, material \ 
eftrepilo, eftomago, expeciadur, efpecular, &c. fromy#— 
cilis, debilis > jittaliSyftrepilus % fpe5lator i ^ T Q m 



END OF THE SECOND PART, 



ANEW 



PORTUGUESE 



G R A M M A R. 



_ 



PART III. 



CONTAINING 

I. The mqji elegant Phrafes of the Portuguese 

Language. 

II. Such Words as are mojl ufed in Difcourfe. 

III. A Collection of the choicefl Portuguefe 

Proverbs. 

IV. Familiar Dialogues. 



The different Significations ofanda.Y,togo. 



A NDAR a pe, 
•*■* Andar a cavallo, 
Andar pella pojta, 
Andar em coche, 
Andar a vela, 
Andar pella bolina, 
Andar para diante, 
Andar para traz, 
Andar a tras de alguem, 



TO go on foot. 
To ride on horfeback. 
To ride, or go poft. 
To ride in a coach. 
To fail. 

To fail with a fide wind. 
To go forward. 
To go backward. 
To go behind, or after one; 
alfo to follow, to prefs, to 
fplicit a perfon. 

Andar 






GRAMMAR 

Anddr as apalpadellos, 



Andar com o tempo, 
Anddr pejada, 

Andar fahida-, 

Andar per dido ', 

Anddr de pe, 

Andar com honra, 

An da, 

A'nda para didnte, 

Anddr de ejguclha, 

Anddr de mal para pear, 

Andar de reixa com dlguem, 



Com o anddr do tempt 
Andar de galope, 
Anddr em corpo, 



A'nda o mundo as avejfas, 

Anddr efpalhados, 

Andar trabalhando nalguma 

obra, 
Andar de gatinhas, 
Andar de cocoras, 
Anddr dizendo, 



219 

To grope along, to grope, or 

feel one's way. 
To go according toth&times. 
To be with child, or b'w with 

child. 
{/peaking of a bitch J To be 

proud. 
To go aflrav. 

To be fickifh, but not bed-rid. 
To act like an honeft man. 
Go. 
Go on. 

To go fi deling. 
To fall out or' the frying-pan 

into the fire. 
To bear one a grudge, to 

have a fpleen againft him, 

to owe him a fpite. 
At long run. 
To gallop. 
To be in cuerpo, or to be 

without the upper coat cr 

cloak, fo as to difcover 

the true fhape of the cuerpo 

or body. 
The world is come about. . 
To lie about. 
To be about fome piece of 

work. 
To go crawling. 
To go on one's breech. 
To pubhfh or report. 



The different Significations of dar an d dar-fe. 



Dar, 

Dar a en tender, 
Darfe, 



Dar or vender jia do, 
Dar a luz, 
Dar fenhoria, 

Dar tu, or Jdllar a alguzm 
poj tu, 



To give, to ftrike. 

To make one believe. 

To credit, to believe, alfo to 
perceive, to defcry, to take 
notice, to fmell out. 

To fell upon credit. 

To publilh. 

To call one a gentleman. 

To thee and -thou one. 

Dra- 



22C- 



P O R T'-U G U E S-E 



Darje, a partido, or langar- 

fe ao partido de dlguem, 
Dar palavra, 
Dar huma Jalva, 



Darjiador, 

Dar principle, or fim, 

Dar conta, 

Darje ao ejtudo, 

Dar em quejallar, 

Dar intra da, 

Dar cduja, 

Dar tm que entendtr, 

Dar de beher, 

Dar duces, 

Dar hum cofcorrao, 

Dar pancadas, 

Dar murros, 

Dar marradas, 

Dar ojdro ajilguem de algu- 

?na ccufa, 
Dar huma estocada, 
Dar os bons dias, 
Dar a guar dar y 
Dar a cbjta, 
Dar com dlguem^ 

Dar em alguem, 

Dar cartas, 

Dar Job re oinim'.go, 

Dar os parabens, 

Dar os ■parabens a alguem 
dajua c keg a da, 
1&. Dar a 111^0 ajuddndo, 
' Dar a eje other, 

Dar enjado a digue n, 

Dar no alvo, 

Dar as cojtas, 



To fide with one, to be for 

him. 
To promife. 
To give a volley of fhot, or 

to make a difcharge of 

guns in honour of fome 

perfons of quality. 
To bail. 

To begin, or end. 
To give an account. 
To applv. one's felf to ffudy. 
To make one fpeak, to give 

an occaf.on to be talked of. 
To give accefs to. 
To give caufe. 
To vex one fadly, to trouble 

one. 
To give drink. 
To kick. 

To give a box on the ear. 
To beat with a cudgel. 
To cuff. 

To butt, as rams do. 
To fmell out a matter. 

To give a thruff. 

To bid one good-morrow. 

To give in keeping. 

To run a-ground. 

To meet with one by chance, 

to light upon a perfon 
To flrike one, aljo to accufe 

one. 
To deal, or give the cards. 
To fall upon the enemy, 
To congratulate. 
To bid one welcome. 

To give a helping hand. 

To let one take his choice. 

To moleft one. 

To hit the mark. 

To run away, to betake one's 



felf to flignt. 



len to tiignt. 
Dar parte de hum negqcio, To impart a bufmefs 



Dar 



GRAMMA R. 



221 



Dar pello amor de Decs, 
Dar huma furra, 
Dar huma volt a em redondo, 
Dar huma vijta de Jjlhos, 
Dar alcance ao queje dezeja, 



Dar fufpiros, 
Dar oiwidos, 
Dar em rojlo, 

Da ca t 

Deu-me huma dor, 
Dar que fazer a at 
occupar aiguem. 



•uem, or 



Dar horas, 

relogio da haras, 

Dar a alma a Deos, 

Dar comsigo em algumaparte, 

Dar leite, 
Dar gar rote, 
Dar vozes, 
OJbl da nos olhos, 

Dar razoens, 

Dar comfi'go no chao, 

Danfruto, 

Dar as maos, 

Dar com a porta na cdra de 

aiguem. 
Dar com a porta nos olhos a 

alguma cou/a, (metaph.) 
Dar prc/Ja, 

Dar tregoas, (metaph.) 
EJla travejfa vai dar a rua 

largj, 
Dei no penfamento de, &c. 
Qiiem me derd ejlar em cafa ! 
Nao fabe aonde ha de dar com 

a cabega, 
I'Jlo vos ha de dar na cabega, 



Dar com h, cat 

rede r, 



>ca pellas pa- 



To give for God's sake. 

To beat one foundly. 

To walk a turn. 

To caft an eye on. 

To obtain, or compafs one's 

wifb. * 
To figh. 
To give hearing. 
To upbraid, to cafl in the 

teeth. 
Give hither. 
I was taken with a pain. 
To employ one, to fet him -at 

work, to fet him upon fome 

bufmefs. 
To ftrike. 
The clock ftrikes. 
To give up the ghoft. to die. 
To caft one's felt into a place, 

or to go to a place. 
To fuckle. 
To ftrangle. 
To cry out, to bawl. 
The fun mines in oneV 

eyes. 
To debate, or contend. 
To fall upon the ground. 
To bear fruit. 
To (hake hands. 
Tp fhut the door upon one. 

To flight, to defpife a thing, 

To press, or haften. 

To refpite, to give fome rofpite 

This lane ftrikes, or goes into 

the broad ftrect. 
It came into my head to, 0c r 
How fain would I be at home: 
He does not know which way 

to turn himfelf. 
The mifchief will light upon 

your own head. 
To beat one's head again ft 

the wall, 

Dar 



■i 



a! 

! 



222 



PORTUGUESE 



Dar em t'odos, or dizer mal 

de tbdos, 
Dar boa conta deji t 

Dar a conta, 

E'u dare i conta diffo, 
E'lle deu emir a que lie lugcir, 
Dar em droga, 
Dar em ridicularias, 

Dar humajiga a qlgue?n y 

Dar-Je por culpado, 

De nenhuma forte vos deispor 

entendido, or ackado, 
Dar-je por aggravado, 
Dar-Je por fatisjato, 
Dar-Je por vend do, 



Dar-Je por dejentendido, 



Ouandofe der a occasiao, 

Dar-Je prejfa, 

Elk dcu-fe a tcda a forte de 

vicios, 
Kao-fe me da dijfo, 
Oueje vos da a vos diffo ? 
Pouco Je me da, 
Nao fe Ike da morrer, 
E'lles daofe muito bem t 

Efla came nao fe da hem co- 
migo t 



To have a fatirical virulent 
tongue, to (pare nobody. 

To give a good account of 
himfelf, to behave cleverly. 

To pay an account. 

I'll be anfwerable for it. 

Ke began to ufe that place- 
To grow a very drug. 

To grow, or become ridicu- 
lous. 

To flirt at one, to fig, to give 
the fico. 

To acknowledge one's felf 
guilty. 

Take no notice of any thing. 

To make a {hew of anger. 

To reft fatisfied. 

To fubmit, to furrender one's 
felf a prifoner, or to yield 
a point. 

To feign one's felf. ignorant, 
to take no notice of any 
thing, to make as if one faw 
nor knew not. ~ 

When occafion {hall require it 

To be in hafte, to make haft e. 

He gave himfelf over to all 
manner of vices. 

I mind it not. 

What have you to do with it? 

I care but little. 

He does not fear death. 

They agree mighty well to- 
gether. 

This meat does not agree 
with me. 



Of the different Significations of the Verb eftar. 

We ufe the verb estar to make an action of re- 
pofe, by putting the verb that follows in the ge- 
rund ; as, efle efta efcrevtndo y he is writing,. 

Eftar has feveral other fignifications ; as, 

Eftar 



GRAM MA R. 



Efldr empe, 

Rftdr bem, ou mal, 

EJidr afsentddo, 

EJiar para fakir para flora, 

EJidr comofentidoemFranga, 

or ejiar com o fentido em 

outra parity 
EJid muito bem, 
Eft a para chover, 
Efldr para cahir, 
Ejiar para morver, 
Efldr em duvida, 
EJiaremos a ver, 
EJidr com huma mao fibre a 

outra, 
Efldr em cdfla, 
I'Jio vos ejtd bem, 
Aquilo ndo me ejid hem, 

EJiar dormindo, 
Eftar fazen do, 
EJidr de nojo, 
Eflar dleria, 
EJidr dejtntinella, 
Eflar alejrre, 
E'lle efta como quer, 
EJidr em perigo, 
Eftar encqj'iado, 
Eflar efperdndo, 
EJidr muito tempo, 
EJiar caludo, 

EJiar ow'vwer coin outros, 
EJidr de cima, 
Ejlar debdxo, 
Eftar bem aviddo, 
EJiar a efpera, 
Eftar enamorddo, 
EJiar na cdma, 
Efldr de cdma, 
EJiar no campo, 
EJiar com [dude, or defaude, 
Ejiar quiet o, 
EJiar neutral, 

EJiar ei por tudo o que vos 
par eta mats convemente* . 



223 

To ftand upright. 
To be well, or ill. 
To be fitting. 
To be juft going out. 
To have one's wits a wool- 
gathering. 

It is well, it is very well. 

It is going to rain. 

To be ready to fall. 

To be like to die. 

To be in doubt. 

We will expect the iftiie, 

To Hand idle. 

To flay at home. 

This becomes you very well. 

That does not become me 

well. 
To lie fleeping. 
To be a doing. 
To be in mourning. . 
To look heed fully about. 
To ftand centry. 
To be merry. 
He lives in clover. 
To be in danger. 
To lean upon. 
To expect. 
To Hay a good while. 
To be huftied. 
To dwell with others. 
To lie over. 
To lie under. 
To be in an ill taking. 
To lie in wait. 
To be in love. 
To be a-bed. 
To be bed-rid. 
To live in the country. 
To be in health. 
To ftand ftill, or to be qnieu 
To ftand neuter. 
I (ball ftand to whatever you 

ill ail think fitting. CI 

Adif* 'l 



PORTUGUESE 



224 

A difficulddde eftd e?n 9 &c. 
Eftar per algue?n, 

Eftar por, or em lugdrde, &c. 
E'lle eftava na altura do Cabo 

da Boa Esperanga, 
Eu nao quero eftar as razoens 

comvofco, 
Efta quanto quizcres, 
Aonde eftais de cafa ? 
Eftar ei pello que difser a pef- 

foa que for de vofsa mdyor 

agrado, 
Nao podemos eftar por if so, 
Nan quero eftar pella vofsa 

fentenca, 
C<Jmo efta vm c ? ? 



The difficulty confifls in, &c. 
To (tend for one, to be of his 

fide. 
To ftand for, or fignify. 
He flood offthe Cape of Good 

Hope. M 

I wont ftand, or difpute, with 

you. 
Stay as long as you pleafe. 
Where do you live ? 
I'll refer it to whom you 

please. 

We can't ftand to that. 

I won't take your judgment. 

How do vou do, fir. 






Estar, joined with the infinitive of a verb and the 
particle /wr^fignifies to be ready, or about doing a 
thing, which has always reference to the fignification 
of the verb ; as, 



Eftou para ir, 

Ejtcu para comprdr hum ca- 

v.dlo, 
Eftou para cazarme, 
Efta cafa efta para cahir, 
Eftou para dizer, 
Nao eftd no meu poder, 
Eftar com a b'oca aberta (me- 

taph.) 
Eftar de reghncnto, 
Eft dr fa do em dlguem, 

Eftar no find o, 
Eftar def rente, 
Eftar cm competenaa, 
Eftar ao lume r 
EJ tar ck Icnge, 
Eftar an ai\ 
Eftar alto, 

Eftar a mao diretta de al- 
s'uenu 



I am going, I am ready to go. 
I am about buying a borfe. 

I am going to be married. 

This houfe is ready to fall. 

I dare fay. 

It is not in my power. 

To flare, to look, to hearken 

attentively. 
To keep to a diet. 
To tsuft to, to rely or depend 

upon one. 
To lie at the bottom. 
To lie over-agairjft. 
To ftand in competition. 
To ftand by the fire. 
To fland at a diftance. 
To (land in the air. 
To it and high, or in a high 

place. 
To be at one's right hand, to 

have the fir ft place. 

Elk 



Elle eft eve an perigo de afo- 

garfe^ 
Nao ejtdr no cafe de, &c. 

Ejldr a ordem de alguem^ 
I'ffo nao efta nos termos, 
Nao ejlou no cafo, 
Ejiar as razoens, 

Eflar bem com alguem, 

EJldr bem, 

Bemavida'o e/iaria eu,fe,8cc. 

Eftar em conciito de komem 

honrddo. 
EJldr nafe, 

EJlar depoffe, 

Deixai ejidr fjo,_ 
E/idr emji, 
E/iar fora defi, 
Deixaivos eftar (a fort of 
threatening.) 



G R.A M M A R. 225 

He was like to be drowned. 



Not to be able, or in the cafe 

of, &c. 
To be at" one's difpofal. 
That is not right, it won't do. 
I don't underitand the cafe. 
To contend, to flrive, or 

quarrel. 
To be in favour with one, to 

live in friendship with him, 
To be well, to be at one's eafe. 
It would be very bad for me, 

indeed, if, &c. 
To be looked upon as an 

honed man* 
To believe, to think, or fup- 

pofe. 
To po fiefs, to have the poffef* 

fion of a thing. 
Let that alone. 
To be in one's right wits. 
To be out of one's wits. 
I'll be revenged on you, you. 

fhall pay for it. 



We have already obferved the difference between 
fer and Jlct. See page 55. 

Of the different Significations of fazer and fazer se. 



Fazir fignifies to do, to make, to create ; also to form 
of materials s also to feign, to feem, to make as if 

E 'lie fez que nao via, He made as if he did not fee it » 

Fazer humafaude, To drink, or to toaft a health. 

Elle the fez cortdr a cabi$a t He caufed his head to be cut 

oft 
Fazir pi atraz (metaph.) Tofail,<?r drawback, to give 

ground; alfo yield, to fub- 

mit. 

£«<? tendes vqs que fazir com What have you to do with it ? 
ijtd. * or what is tbat to you ? 

O Fazir 



226 PORTUGUESE 

<% 

Fazer brio de alguma coif a 

a 
Fazer fm oe d'zejo, 

. Fazer por alguma ccufa, 



Ftfo por yfo f 

Fazcr do vegbcio ,or ao cafo t 

Fazer e/hiflas, 

Fazer gafto % 

Fazer go/to, 

Fazer o gc/io, or a vontade 

a dlguem. 
Fazir par allele, 
Faz't de comer \ 
, Fazer fiano, 
Fazer auzente a alguem, 
Faz frio, 
razer gente, 
Fazer em. pedafos, 
Fazer zombaria dt alguem, 

Naofagais cafo d'ffo, 

Fazer agoado, 

I'Jlo me faz vir a agaa a bo- 

ca, 
Fazer dltt\ 
Fazer cdfa fin playing at 

backgammon.) 
razer a cea, 
Fazer car as, 
Fazer tnrtdos, 

Fazer carrancas, 
Fazer ca/b t > 

Fazer de tripas coragao, 
Fazer mutto cafo de alguma 

covfa, 
Naojdfo cafo delle % 
Fazh ' Jtjta, 
Fazer kuwafefa t 



To make a pride of a thing, 

to fake g'ory in it. 
To farisfy one's defire, er 

longing. ' 

To take pains, to endeavour, 

to labour to a certain pur- 

pofe, to work for a certain 

end. 
I endeavour after it. 
To come to the purpofe. 
To give alms. 
To fpend. 

To like, to be pleafed with. 
To pleafe one, to complywith 

one's defire. 
To para i lei, to compare. 
To drefs the meat. 
To f in oak.- 

To believe one abfent. 
It is cold. 

To raife men, foldiers. 
To pull into pieces. 
To mock, or to laugh at a 

perfon. 
Do not mind that. 
To take in frefh water. 
This makes my teeth, or 

mouth, water. 
To halt in a march. 
To put two men on the fame 

point. 
To get fupper ready. 
To make mouths. 
To form a fee ret defign 

again ft another. 
To pout. 
To make account of, or 

efteem. 
To make one's utmofl efforts. 
To make great account of a 

thing, to make much of it. 
I don't mind him. 
To endear, to fondle. 
To give an entertainment, to 

feaft. 

Fazer 



GRAMMA R 

Fazer as vezes de aiguem, 
Fazer trapa$as 9 



227 
a\y bufinefs for 



Fazer lugdr, 

Fazer merce, 

Fazer ouvidos de mercador^ 

Ter que fazer, 

Fazer exerczcio, 

Fazer exercicio (a military- 
word. 

Os foldddos ej 
exercicio, 

Quefazeis aqui ? 

Fazer hum ve/tido, 

Fazer huma ley, hum difcur- 

A > 

razer guerra, 

Fazer faber alguma coufa a 

alguem, 
Faztr enraivecer dlguem, 
Fazer huma conta, 
Fazer conta, 
E'lle fazia huma conta, efa- 

hio-lhe outra, 
Fazer contas com alguem, 

TJfo 'nab mefaz nada, 

Fazer paufa, 

Fazer de algtiem tolo, v 

Fazer dinheiro de alguma 

-coufa, 
Tomar a fazer, 
Fazer a razao, 
Ter que fazer com alguem, 

Fazer a alguem hum gUvaz 

na c&ra, 
Fazer honra t 
Fazer fe, 

Fazer f hie, 



To majce 

another. 
To chicane, to cavil, to ufe 

tricks. 
To make room. 
To grant a favour. 
To make as if one were deaf* 
To be bufy. 
To ufe exercife* 
To exercife. 



fazsndo The foldiers exercife. 



What make you here ? 
To make a fuit of clothes. 
To make a law, a fpeech. 

To make war. 

To make one acquainted with 

a thing. 
To make one mad. 
To caft up an account. 
To intend, or to propofe. 
He was much difappointed. 

To fettle the accounts with 

one. 
It makes nothing to me, that 

does not concern me* 
To make ,a ftarid. 
To make a fool of one. 
To make money of a thing, 

to fell it. 
To make again. 
To pledge one. 
To deal with one, or to have 

to do with one. 
To mark one in the face. 

To honour. 

To make known, to teftify, 

to witnefs. 
To fortify, or ftrengthen. 



Fazer 



Q a 



228 



PORTUGUESE 



Fazer mencao, 

Fazer mal, 

Fazer de alguem o que huma 

peffoa quer, 
Fazer huma apofla t 
Faz vento, 
Faz hoje outo dtas, 



Fazer vida com alguem, 
Fazer a fua vontade, 
Fazer o pojfivd, 

Nao fareis ndda com iffb, 
Ndo fucais nu.is aJTim, 
Se tornardes a fazer affim, 
Dezejo que fa fa a fuafortuna, 
Cufiou-me miuto afazello vir, 

Fazer a outrem o quequizerd- 

mos que outrem nes fizcffe 

a nos. 
Ndo ten ho que- fazer com ijfo, 
Fazer o que alguem iiu.nda, 
Faze de mim o que vos pa- 

recerd y 
Fazer hum grande ejlrondo, 
E'lltfoi b que fez tudo na quelle 

negocw, 
Que fareis hoje ? 



Fazer o feu curfo, 

Fazer huma boa cdfa-, 
Fazer a bdrba, 
Fazer a cam a, 
Nao /fa que Ihe fazer ,. 
Fazer grande negouo, 
Fazer of u officio, 
Fazer pro fiJJ do, 
Todos ofazido morta^ 

Fazer vir, 



To mention. 

To hurt . 

To, difpofe of one; 

To lay a wager. 

The wind blows. 

This day fe'nnight, or a 
week aao. 

To cohabit, tfrdwell together. 

To do as one pleafes, 

To do one's heft, or endea- 
vour, to do one's utmoft. 

You will do no good in it. 

Do fo no more. 

If ever you do fo again. 

I wifh he may do well. 

I had much to du to get him 
to come. 

To do by others a"s you would 
be done by. 

I have nothing to do with it. 

To do as one is bid. 

Do with me as you fhall think 

fit. 
To make a great noise., 
He was the do-all in that 

bu fmefs. 
What will you do to-day ? or 

how do you employ your- 

felf to-day. 
To finifh its course, as a ftar 

does. 
To raise,to fet up one's familjt- 
To (have. 
To make the bed. 
I can't help it. 
To drive a great trade. 
To exercife, or difcharge. * 
Toprofefs. 
They gave out that he was 

dead. 
To call, or fend f©r.. 



Fazer 



GRAMMAR 



Fazer entrar, ou fakir £1- 

guern, 
I'Jto nao faz nada, 
Nao fei que faze r diffo, 
fa nao tenhoquejazer comllle 
Fazer hum livro, 
Fazer amizude com a/guem, 

Fazer exemplo em atguem,or 
cafiigatlo para dar exem- 
plo, - \v 

Fa^cr huma coufa muito do 
defentcndido, 



Fazer dasfuas, 

E'lle fempre ejldfazendo das 

fuas, 
Fazer f of c as t . 



Fazer de pejfoa, 
Fazer ju ra r cdgutm^ 

Fazer faltdr, or voar pellos 

ares-, 
Fazer boa vezinhdn$a> 

Fazer Ie?ika, 
Fazer a rbnda t 
Fazer dividas, 

Fdz lua, 

Fazer violencia, 

Fazer fe ao trabalko, 

Fazer fe toio, 
Fa z erfe vetko, 

Fazerfe feo, 
Fazer fe job erbo^ 
Fazfe tarde, 



229 

To call in, or out, to bid one 
come in, or out. 

It is no matter, 

I have no need of it, 

I have done with him. 

To write a book. 

To make friendfhip, to get 
into friendfhip with one. 

To make one a public exam- 
ple. 

To do a thing very covertly, 
fo that people can't appre- 
hend that it is done on kt 
purpofe, and with a defign. 

To play the fool, to dodge, 
to play tricks. 

He is always playing his fool- 
llh tricks. 

To bully, to. provoke, to ex- 
cite by words, or a£lions of 
contempt; alfo to elude, or 
deceive by lalfe (how. 

To behave courageously. 

To tender the oaths to one, 
to put one to his oaths. 

To blow up. 

To keep fair with one's 
neighbours. 

To fell wood. 

To walk the pounds. 

To run into debt, to con- 
tract debts. 

The moon mines. 

To offer violence. 

To inure one's-ielf to hard^ 
fhips. 

To play the ninny. 

To grow old, or to grow in 
years. 

To grow ugly. 

To grow proud. 

It grows late. 



Q3 



Faze?' 



n° 



PORTUGUESE 



Fazer-fe fignifies also tofeign y to pretend^ tofeem, to 
make as if 



Faz-fe mouco, 



He won't hear. 



The different Significations of ter and ter-se. 



Ter que faze r, 

Ter odw, 

Ter por co/iume, 

Ter ulguem por ignorante^ 

Ter cuidado de, 

Ter cm dados, 

Ter faflio % 

Ter dnimo, 

Ter bcafuma, 

Ter cdra d\i$o^ 

Ter nece/fidade, 

Ter prejfa, 

Ter muitos fumos, 

Ter grande prejumpcac % 

Ter razao, 
Nao tvr rdzao, 
Ter alguma coufa debdxo da 
h ngua, 






To be bufy. 

To hate. 

To be wont. 

To believe one ignorant. 

To be careful of. 

To be full of care, or 

thoughtful. 
To loath, to see food with 

diflike. 
To have courage. 
To be well fpoken of. 
To have a brazen face. 
To be in want. 
To be in hafte. 
To be very proud. 
To Drefume much on one's 

felf. 
To be in the right. 
To be in the wrong. 
To have a thing at one's 

tongue's end. 



Ter alguma coufa na ponia da Ungua y we fay, to 
have a thing at one's fingers ends, to have it perfect. 
They alfo fay , faber alguma coufa nas pontas dos dedas x 
which exactly anfwers to our Englifh phrafe. 



Ter feifoens feiiiceiras, 

Ter ma f onia, 

Ter ciumes, 

Ter meyos, 

Ter no penfamento, 

ler obrigagao. 

Ter medo, 

Ter razac, e mods que razac. 



To have a taking look. 

To be ill fpoken of. 

To be jealous of. 

To be able, or have means< 

To bear in mind. 

To be obliged. 

To be fearful. 

To have reafon to fpare. 

Que 




GRAMMAR 



Que tcndes vos com ijfo 9 
Ter carrudge, e criddos, 
Ter a dlguem fufpenfo, 
Homem que tern bona feicdo, 

Ter me/a franc a, 



Ter f no, 

Ter as coftas quentes em dl- 
guem, 

Ter p or bem, 

Tenho o por doudo, 

Ter m.o na fua refolucao, 

Ter com que, 

Nao tenaes do que vos que- 
ixdr, 

Nao t endes que, &c. 

Vjlo nao tern ndda quefazer, 

com o que eu digo, 
Ter entre maos, 

Tenho ijfo por certo, 

Ir ter com dlguem, 

Venho ter com vm Ci parafaber 
como pdfja a fenhor a Julia- 
na, 

Ir ter a algu?n lugar, 

EJia rua vdi ter ao mtrcado, 

Ter alguem porji, 

Temos por nos a authoridade 

x dos mais prudentes, 
Ter par'aji^ 

Ter em muito, 
Ter em pouco, 
Ser tido em boa conta, 



Ter mao, 

Ter mao nalguma coufa, 



231 

What is that to you ? 

To keep a coach and fervants. 

To hold one in fufpence. 

A man of good addrefs, a po- 
lite man. 

To keep open table, to keep 
a table where a man may 
come without bidding. 

To be cold. 

1*0 be backed, or fupported 
by one. 

To approve of, or oonfent. 

1 take him to be mad. 

To be frill in one mind. 

To have wherewith. 

You have no reafon of com- 
plaint. 

It is ufelefs, or it will be to no 
purpofe for you to, £?c. 

That is nothing to the pur- 
pofe. 

To have in hand, or in one' 
pofleffion. 

I hold that for a certainty. 

To addrefs one's felf to one. 

I .addrefs, or apply my felt to 
you to know howmifs fuch 
a one does. 

To go to a place. 

This ffreet ftrikes, or goes 
into the market. 

To be fupported, or protected 
by one. 

We have the wifeft men of 
our fide, or of our opinion. 

To think, or imagine, to 
reckon. 

To fet much by. 

To value but little. 

To be efteemed, regarded, or 
valued, to be in great 

► efteem. 

Tohold tfrkeep in, to reftrain. 

To bear up, to fupp.ort, to 
prop, to keep up, to hold up. 

Q 4 Ato- 



PORTUGUESE 

Atoms that (lick together. 



233 

Atomos que tern mdohuns nos 

outros, 
Tenha mao, or tern mao, 
Ter, 

Ter-fe empe, 
Ter-fe bem a cavallo, 

Ter-fe em cafa, 
Ter-fe com alguem, 



Nao me poffo ter com rizo, 
Naofe pode ter, que naofdlle, 



Hold, flop. 

To contain. 

To ftand, to ftand up. 

To fit fail, or well, on hoife- 

back. 
To keep at home. 
To hold out, to refift, to (land 

againil one, to cope with 

one, to oppofe, or refill 

him. 
I can't forbear laughing. 
He can't forbear fpeaking. 



'The different Significations 0/querer. 

§>uerer fignifies to willy to be willing, and to be- 
lieve ; as, 

Querent alguns, 
Querer bem, 
Querer vial, 
Jtntes quercr, : 
Queira Deos, 

Mas quero que ajfimfeja, 
Qut quer dizer aq'uellc homem f 
Que quer dizer ijio ? 

J'flo quer dizer que, &c. 
,£'u quero abfolutamente que % 
E'u ajfim quero, 
E'lle quer que vos obedecais, 
Nao quero, 
E'lle ofara quando quher, 

E'lle qiier partir amanhao, 

mat que en Ike quero me 
vsnha a mim, 



Some believe. 

To love. 

To hate. 

To have rather. 

God grant it, God fend it 

may be fo. 
I arain it, fuppofe it were fo, 
What does that man mean ? 
What means this ? what's the 

meaning of that ? 
The meaning is that, &.c. 
I pofitively refolve that, &c, 
I'll have it fo." 
He will have you obey. 
I will not, I won't. 
He will do it when he pleafes, 
' or when he has a mind to it. 
He intends, tfrhas a mind, to 

fet out to-morrow. 
I with him . no more harm 

than I do ray fell. 



Haver > to have. 



Tu has dekir, 
E'lle ha da vir hoje. 



You mull go. 
He is come to dav 



» I 



GRAMMAR 



Se eu houver de Mr, 
Aindaque iffo me houveffe de 

cujiar a^vida, 
E'lle ejia todo nu, e ha de ter 

invito fr lo, 
Haveis vos de e/iar em cdfa, 
Eu hci de achdrme la, 
E'lle ha de fer enforcado, 
Eu hei de receber dinheiro, 
Vos he que haveis de jugdr, 
AquiUo he que vos havieis de 

fazer, 
Haver por bem, 
Haver p or mal, 
Que ha de fer, 
Aquillo nunca ha de fer, 
Eu hti defer a cdufa dafua.' 

matte, on ruina, 
Para haver de fa liar, o'uvir, 

&c. 
Que ha de fer de ?nim ? 
Haver filhos, • 

Lwros do deve, e ha de haver, 

Haver mifter, 

Ha mifier apreffdr-fe, 



233 

If I fhall be obliged to go. 
Though I were to lofe my 

lifefor't. 
He is all naked, he muft 

needs be very eold. 
Shall you be at borne ? 
I muff be there. 
He is tc be hanged. 
I am to receive money. 
You are to play. 
You mould do that. 

To take in good part. 

To take in ill part. 

That is to be hereafter. 

That will never be. 

I (hall be the death, or ruin 

of him. 
In order to fpeak, hear, &c. 

What is to become of me. 
To beget, to become the 

father of children. 
Books of debtor and creditor. 
To want. 
It is necefiary to hade, or to 

make hade. 



Haver, when imperfonal, is rendered into Englidi 
by the verb to be, preceded by there ; as. 



m 

Ha komems tao malvddos, 

Havia huma mclher, 

Ha alguns bons e outros maos 

Ha muitas cdfas, 

Ha alguma coufa de ncvo f 

Hd mais he huma hcra, 

Ha muito tempo, 

Ha perto de huma hora que, 

Ulejahio, 
Ha hum anno. 



There is, or there are. 
There are men fo wicked. 
There was a woman. 
There are fome good, and 

fome bad. 
There are feveral houfes. 
Is there any news ? 
It is above an hour firvce. 
Long fince. 
It is almoil an hour fince he 

wejit out. 
A year ago . 

m 



P O RJT UGUESE 



234 

Ha outo dias, 

Ha per to die. 20 legoas daqu-i 

la, 
Nao hd, 
E'lle cuida que nao ha ?ndis 

que purgdr, 



Haver Je, v. r. 

E'lle fa be porno fe ha de ha- 
ver, or tile jdbe como ha de 
haver Je, 

E'lle ho live- fe Je maneira que, 



Eight days ago. 

It is near upon 20 leagues 

thither. 
There is not. 
He believes that purging is 

all in all, or that purging 

is the only remedy in fuch 

a cafe. 
To carry, to behave one's 

felf. 
He knows how to behave 

himfelr. 

He behaved himfelf in fuch a 
manner that, &c. 



N. B. When this verb is ufed imperfonally, it is 
always followed by the particle de ; as 



Ha-fe de mijier dinheiro, 
Ha-Je de jazer, ou dizer iJlo 7 
Ha-fe dejazlr que elle qui- 



Money is wanted. 
This mult be done, or faid. 
People muft do what he 
zer, pleafes. , 

Hir, a neuter and irregular verb, to go, to walk, to 
march ; alfo, to grow, to reach any estate gradually, 
to be going* 



Hir por mar e por terra, 
Come vao os vcjfos negocios ? 
Tudo vdi bem, 
As fuas coujas vao muitQ mat, 



Hi 



r a mao, 



Hir pajfando, 
Hir anaando, 



Hir andando, or pajfando^ 



Que vca de n:vo ? 
Que vdi n'JIo ? or ondt vdi 
ijlo a dar comfigo ? 



To travel by fea and land. 
How go voirr concerns ? 
All is well, all goes well. 
Things go very ill (or very 

hard) with him. 
To hinder, to obftrufr, to 

obviate. 
To grow out of fafhion or ufe. 
To go on or forward, to keep 

or hold on his way ; alj'o 

to proceed, to continue on, 

to profecute. 
To mi ft, to pafs life not 

quite well, to live though 

with difficulty. 
Is there any thing new ? 
What of all this I 

, Hir 



GRAMMAR. 



Hir debdxo, 

Hir para, 

Quanta mais vamos para, a 

primavcra,mai$ compnaos ■ 

fad 0} dias, 
Hir de mal para peer, 
Hir diante, 
Hir por diante, 
Hir ao encontro, 
Hir aojundo, 

Hir e vir, 

Nao fa go mais do que hir e 

voltar, 
I'ffo ja la vai, 
Eilo la vai, 
Eilo vai, 
Que vos par he daquella moU 

her? eilo vai, ella naokefea, 

Eilo vdifolgo que ajfimfeja, 
Como as coujas' agora vao, 

Por que parte ides, 
Deos va comvofco, 

Hir a roda do ?nundo, 

Hir com alguem, 

Eft a t rave/fa vai ter a rua 

larga, 
E'u irei ver de caminko, 

Hir continuando ofeu caminko 
Hirfora do feu caminko, 
Hir hum de huma banda, e 

outro da iutra, 
Hir para trdz, 
Hir detraz, 
Hir atraz de alguem, 
Hir em alcance de alguem, 

Hir bufcar, 
Hir para dentro, 
Jiirparafora, 



235 

To come by the worft. 
To approach, to go near. 
The nearer the fpring, the 
longer the days. 

To grow worfe and worfe. 

To go before. 

To go on, or forward. 

To go to meet. 

To i'mk, or fall to the bot- 
tom. 

To go to and fro, to go and 
come. 

I will nofeftay, I mail be back 
prefently. 

5 Tis a thing paft and done. 

There he goes. 

So fo, pretty well. 

Kow do you like that wo- 
man ? She is fo fo, me 
may pafs. 

Well, weli, I am glad on't 

As things go now, as the 
world goes. 

Which way d'ye go? 

The Lord of heaven go with 
you. 

To go about the world. 

To go along with one. 

This lane goes into the broad 
flreet. 

I will call upon him as I go 
along. 

To go along. 

To go out of one's way. 

To go afunder. 

To go backward. 

To go behind. 

To purfue, to go after one. 

To go alter one, in order t» 

overtake him. 
To go far, or fetch, 
To go in. 
To go out, 

Hir 



23 6 



PORTUGUESE 



Hir peregrin an do, 
Hirjazer huma embaxada^ 
Hir ver, cantar^ &c. 
Vamos, 

Hir faze r hum negocio, 
Hir com a mare, 
Hir par a par com alguem, 
Vai para q u:\tro mefs que eu 
aqui cheguei, 

Ide em pa*, 

tempo vui abrandando, 
Hir (at cards), 
Hirfe, v. r. ) 



Hirfe a olha, ou a panclla, 

Hirfe o enfenno, 

A quarefna vaife acabjndo, 

Hirfe, 

Nada fe vai mdis deprcffa 

que o tempo, 
Aquclies monies vdo fe ojlen- 

dcndo, 
Hir-fe embora, 
Efperai ale qtie a cdlma fe va 

embora, 
Vdi-le embora ; que naofdbes 

engoddr a gente, 
Hir-jedehuma cdrta[u cards) 
Vaife Jaztndo tarde, 
V^.-Je c began do a noijte, 
Vai fe ckegdndo o tempo da 

Vaife acabdndo o meu confl- 
ict do, 
Hir-fe efcapulindo, 
Hir -ft a mas, 



To go a pilgrimage. 

To go on an embaffy. 

To go to fee, !o Ting, &c 

Come, come on. 

To go upon a bufiness. 

„To go with the tide. 

To go cheek by jole with one. 

It is now going on four 
months fince I came hi- 
ther. 

Depart in peace. 

The weather grows mild. 

To go, to lay, to itake, to fet. 

To go, to go away, to go 
one's way, to depart, alfo 
to run, or leak. 

Is for the pot to boil over. 

Is for a Tick man to die. 

Lent draws to an end. 

To flip, or pafs away (as 
time)7 

Nothing goes fafter than 

time. 
Thofe mountains extend, or 

ftretch themfelves. t 
To go away, alfo to be over. 
Stay till the heat be over. 

Away, or go, you know not 

how to wheedle people. 
To throw away a card. 
It grows late. 
The night draws on. 
It grows near harveir. 

My confulfhip is almoft at 

an end. 
To fneak away. 
To refrain, to forbear, to ab- 

ilain. 



Hir-fi imperfonal ; as, vai-fe, they go ; joi-fe > 
they are gone ; hir- ft ha y they fhall. go. 



Of 



GRAMMAR. 



237 



To pray. 



Senkor, como atnigo, Jaqame 

ojavor, 
Eu vos pefo, or pecavos, 
Pegolhe em cortesia, 
Pecolhe encarecidamente, 

Peco Ike por favor que, &c. 
Fa fame a fineza, 
Pecolhe perdao, 



Dear fir, do me the favour. 

I pray you. 

I befeech vou. 

I intreat, or conjure, you to 

do it. 
I beg of you that, &c. 
Do me the kindnefs. 
I beg your pardon. 



Expreflions of Kindnefs. 



Minha vida, 

Minha alma, 

Meu amor, 

Meu querido, minhaquerida, 

Meu coracao, 

Filko do meu coracao, 

Filha da minha alma, 



My life. 

My degr foul. 

My love. 

My little darling. 

My dear love, my love. 

My dear child. 

'My little honey. 



To fhew Civility. 



Agradego a vm ce , 
Doua vm ce os agradecimentos 
Beijb as maos de vm u , 
Falo-hei com todo gojlo, 
Com todo meu coracdo, 
De muito boa vontdde, 
Veja vm"fe opojjofervir nal- 

guma causa, 
Difponha vm ct como Ike pare- 

cer d eft e feu criado, 
Eficu esperando pellas or dens 

de vm ce , 
J a que vm ce afsim crdena, 
As or dens de vm ce , 
Fico muito obrigado a vm ce , 
Quer vm" que eufdga alguma 

coufa, 
Sem ceremonia, 
Nao tern c vm cs mdis quefallar, 
Facame a honra de vie per 

aes pes da for* 



I thank you. 

I give you thanks, 

I kifs your hand. 

I will do it chear fully. 

With all my heart. 

Heartily, willingly. 

See if it is in my power t© 
ferve you. 

Do v/hat you pleafe with 
your fervant. 

I wait for your commands'. 

Since you will have it fo. 

At your fervice. 

I am very much obliged to 
you. v 

Have you any thing to com- 
mand me. 

Without ceremony. 

You need but to fpeak. 

Prefent my refpects, or duty, 
to my lady. 



2 3 8 



PORTUGUESE 



h'ao fei c'omo aeradec'er a I know not how to make a 
vitT tdntosfavores, proper return tor fo many 

favours. 
Nao fiu de comprimintos, I am not for ceremonies. ' 

Deix-mos eftes comprimintos Away with thefe ceremonies, 

or compliments. 
IJfo he o melh'or, That is the beft way. 

To give tokens of Affirmation, Confent, Belief, 
and Refufai. 



He verddde, 
He ijfo verddde ? 
He muito verddde ', 
Para dizjrvos n verddde, 
Com effeito he ajfim, 
Quern duvida dijfo ? 
Nao ha duvida nijjo, 
Par heme que fern, que nao, 
Apojlo que Jim, 
Apojlo que nao, 
Creame vm"? 
EJIdvm" xombando? 

Falla vm u , de viras ? 

Fallo de veras, 

Pois, ejiafeito, 

Pbuco a p uco, 

TJfo nao he verdade, 

Nao ha tat cbufa, 

He mentira, 

Eftava zombdndo, 

Seja miato embora, 

Nao queio, 



It is true. 

Is it true ? 

It is but too true. 

To tell you the truth. 

Really it is fo. 

Who doubts it? 

There is no doubt of it. 

I think fo, not. 

I lay it is. 

I lay it is not. 

Do 'believe me? 

Don't you jeft ? 

Are you in earneft. 

I am in earned ? 

Well, let it be fo. 

Softly, fair and foftly. 

It is not true. 

There is no fuch thing, 

It is a lie, 

I did but jeft. 

Let it be fo. 

I won't, I will not. 



To confult. 



Quefe ha dejazer? 

Que far em os ? 

Que Ike par he a vm* que 

faga ? 
Que rsmedia tern ijfo ? 
Fa$6;>>os cjfim, 
FafSmos huma couja, 
Strfa elhor ;ue, 
Stria :\u'U que, 



What is to be done ? 

What fhall we do ? 

What do you advife me to 

do? 
What remedy is there for it ; 
Let us do fo, and fo. 
Let us do one thing. 
It will be better that. 
It would be better that. 

BJpcrti 



GRAMMAR. 



239 



Esperdi hum pouco, 
Deixaime com ffo, 
Antes quizera, 
Se iffofoffe comigo, 
Tudo he mis?no' 



Stay a little. 

Let me alone. 

I had rather. 

Were I in your place. 

It is all one. 



Of Eating and Drinking. 



Tenho fome, 

Morro defame, 

Coma vm" alguma c'ousa, 

Que quer vm Ci comer ? 

Quer vm" comer mais ? 

Tenho side, 

"fa mate 1 afme, 

Tenho muita side, 

Mirro de scde, 

Dime de bebir, 

Viva vm" muitos annos, 

Eu beberia hum copo de vinho 

Pois beba vm", 

Tihno be.bido bafldnlc, 

Nao poffo bebir mais, 

J a matii a fide, 



I am hungry. 
I am almoft ftarved. 
Eat fomething. 
What will you eat ? 
Will you eat any more ? 
I am dry, or thidty. 
I have no more ftomach. 
I am very dry. 
I am almoft dead with thirrr, 
Give me ibme drink. 
I thank you. 

I could drink a glafs of wine. 
Drink then. 
I have drank enough. 
I can drink no more. > 
I am no more thirfly, or my 
thirft is quenched. 



Of Going, Coming, Stirring, &a. 



Donde vem vm" ? 
Para onde vai vm" ? 
Vinho de ; v'ou para, or a, 
Quer vm" subir, ou descir ? 

E'ntre vm ce , say a vm", 
Nao se biila daqui, 
Chigue-se para mim, 
Va-se vm", 
Vem ca, 

Espire por mim, 
Nao va tao depriffa, 
Tire-fe de diante de mim, 
$Jao me toque, 
Deixe eftar iffo, 
Efl'ou bem aqui, 
A' bra v?n" a porta. 



From whence do you come r 
Where do.vou go ? 
I come from ; I am going to. 
Will you come up, or come 

down ? 
Come in, go out. 
Do not itir from hence. 
Come near to me. 

00 your way, be gone. 
Come hither. 

Stay for me. 
Do not go lb Fall. 
Get you out. of my way, 
T>o not touch me. 
Let that alone. 

1 am well here. 
Open the door. 

Fecke 



240 



PORTUGUESE 



Feche a porta, 

A' bra, ou feche a janella, 

Venha vm" par a qui, 
Pa/fe por la, 
Que procura vm c '? 
Queperdio v?n ce ? 



Shut the door. 

Open the window, or fhut 

the window. 
Come this way. 
Pafs that way. 
What do you look for ? 
What have you loft ? 



To wifh well to a Perfon. 



Ceo vos guarde, 
Deos vos de boa f or tuna t 
Dezejo-vos to do o bem, 

Deos vos ajude, 

Bios vos per doe i 

1'de com Deos, 

Ate ver nos, 

Bom proveitofaga a v?n ef , 



Heavens preferve you. 
God fend you good luck. 
I wifh you every thing that 

is good. 
God affift you. 
God forgive you. 
God be with you. 
Till I fee you again. 
Much good may do you. 



To wifh ill. 



diabo te live, 
Maid it o Jejas tu, 
Vaipara os quintos infernos, 
Vaite en for car, 
Enforcado Jejas tu) 



The devil take thee. 
A curfe on thee. 
Away, go to hell. 
Go and be hanged. 
Would thou wert hanged. 



To fwear. 



AJJim Deos me Jalve, 



Arrebentado feja eu, 
Em concicncia, 



As God mail help me, 
- fhall fave me. 
May I burft. 
In my confcienee. 



To threaten and infult. 



Take care, I will beat thee. 
Thou wilt pay it me. 



O'lka que He hei de dar, 
Deixa te ejidr, or cala te que 

me has de pagar, 
Jura que tejarei arrepender 

dijo, 
Se me enfadares, 
Co it a do de ti, 
Poucas razo'ens, or cala efsa -Holdyourtongue,don'tfpeak 

boca, to me. 

I'Jh bafta, It is enough, it is fufficient. 

To 



I fwear thou (halt repent of it. 

If you put me into a paffion. 
Woe be to thee." 



GRAMMAR. 



241 



To mock, to blame, and to call one names, 



Ofyue belofocinho ! 

Que cdra de mono ! 

Trapaceiro, 

EmbuJieirOy 

MexeriqueirOy 

Que belojogeito ! 

Velhdco % 

MarotOy 

Ma cajta, 

Ton to, 

AfneirdOy 



O the fine fnout ! 

What an ape's face ! 

A chicaner. 

A cheat, an impoftor. 

A tale bearer, a tell-tale. 

O the dull thing. 

A knave. 

A rogue, a rafcal. 

Curfed race. 

Giddy-brains, blunderbufs. 

A great beaft, a thick-fkulL 



To admire. 



DSos ! 

He pojfwell 

Quern term imagine do , crido t 

dito ! 
Que animal! 
Que maravilka ! or que mi* 

lag re ! 
Nao memaravilho ! 
Como pode fer ijlo ! or Como 

he pojivel! 
Eis aqui como fad as coufas 

dejle mtindo ! 



OGod! 

Is it poffible ! 

Who would have thought, 

believed, faid ! 
What a beaft it is ! 

ftrange ! 

1 don't wonder. 
How can that be ! 

So goes the world ! 



To (hew Joy and Difpleafure. 



Que goflo ! 

Que gloria J 

Que alegria ! 

Oque coritentamento he meu! 

Quefelic'idade ! 

Sinto ijfoy 

Sinto ijfo na alma t 

Sinto ijfo no corafaOy 

que defgra$a he a minha ! 



What pleafure \ 

What glory ! 

What joy ! 

How pleafed I am 1 

What happinefs ! 

I am forry for it. 

That touches my very foul. 

It pierces me to the heart, 

O how uiihappy am I ! 



R 



To 



PORTUGUESE 



242 

Affrontar-me defla forte ! 

Affim he que ft trata ? 

V'lha marotol 

Que be I la, cortefia ! 

Nao deveria tratar comigo 
deftaforte, 

Parece-te ban? 

Aprendt, peddgo d'dfno, 

O'lha como me trata este ani- 
mal, 

Olhdique velhdco he este, 

Que diabo tern ellejeito ? 

P'eis, ainda teimais ? 



To affront me thus ! 

Do you deal thus ? 

You rogue ! 

O what fine manners ! 

Thou oughteft not to treat 

me thus. 
Doft thou think that it will ? 
Learn, bead as thou art. 
See the brute, how he ufes 

me. 
Do you behold that rafcal. 
What the devil has he done? 
What, are you obftinate ftill ? 



To call. 



O'uve ! 

O'nde estas ? 

Huma palavra, 

Duas palavrasjbmente, 



Hark! 

Where art thou ? 
A word. 

I'll fpeak but two words to 
you. 



To fhew Uneafiness, Trouble, and Sorrow. 



Sinto or pefime, 
Deixa?ne, 

Pefo te que me deixes, 
Nao mi qucbres a cabe$a t 
O'ra vamos, deixame, 
Deixame, voi com Deos, 
Vdite daqui, or vaite embora, 
Vai tratar da tua vida, 
Vaite na ma hora, or vdite 

co diabo, 
Nao mejdgas a cabeca tonta, 
yd me Jens dito ijjo hum cen- 
to de vkes, 



I am forry. 
Let me be quiet. 
Prithee get thee gone. 
Do not break my head. 
Away, away. 

Go, go, God be with you. 
Get thee gone from hence. 
Go mind your own bufinefs. 
Go to the devil. 

Do not make me giddy. 
You have told it me a hun- 
dred times already. 



Toafk. 



Que novas ha ? 
Que he isto? que ha? 



What news ? 
What is this, 
matter ? 



what is the 
O'nde 



GRAMMAR, 



M3 



tide ides ? 

Donde vindes ? 

Que quer dizer ? 

De- que ferve ? 

Que vos parece ? 

Quern teve tal atrevimento? 

Que dizem ? que ft diz ? 

Como diz vm (e ? 

For que nao me refponde ? 

To 

Deixdi efldr ijfo, 
Nao toqueis, 
Nao dig ah ndda t 
Guarddivos, 



Where are you a-going ? 

Whence come you ? 

What do you mean ? 

To what purpofe ? 

What do you think ? 

Who is that has been fo bold? 

What do they fay ? 

How do you fay ? 

Why don't you anfwer ? 

forbid. 

Let that alone. 
Do not touch. 
. Say not a word. 
Have a care. 



Of fpeaking, faying, doing, &c. 



Fdlle vm" alto, 

Falle vm ce mdnfo, 

Com quern f alia vm ct ? 

Falle vm ce comigo ? 

Fall?- 1 he, 

Falla 1 vm te Portuguez ? 

Que diz vm" ? 

Nao digo nada, 

Ella nao quer caldr-fe, 

Ouvi dizer que—~ 

Affim mo differ ao, 

AJfim dizem, 

AJfim dizem todos, 

Quern Iho dijfe a vm"? 

Dijfemo o Sr. A. 

Pdis elle he que Iho dijfe ? 

Pois el la he que o difje ? 

Quando o ouvio vm. dizer ? 

Dijfefdo mo hoje, 

Nao p'ojfo cre-lo, 

Que diz elle ? 

Que vos dijfe elle ? 

Elle nao me dijfe nada, 

Nao- Iho dig a vm. 

Eu Iho direi, 

Nao dig a nada, 

Dijfe vm. aquillo ? 



Speak loud. 

Speak low. 

Who do you fpeak to ? 

Bo you fpeak to me ? 

Speak to him, or to her. 

Do you fpeak Portuguefe ? 

What do you fay ? 

I fay nothing. 

She will not hold her tongue. 

I was told that ■ 

I was told fo. 

They fay fo. 

Every one fays fo. 

Who told it you ? 

Mr. A. told it me. 

Did he tell you fo ? 

Did (he tell it? 

When did you hear it ? 

I heard it to day. 

I can't believe it, 

What does he fay ? 

What did he fay to you ? 

He faid nothing to me 

Do not tell him that. 

I'll tell him, or her of it. 

Say not a word. 

Did you fay that ? 

K s Mo 



244 

Nad o dijfe, 

Nao difle vm. aj/im ? 

Que ejtd vmfazendo? 

Cue tern vm.feito ? 

Naofd^o ndda, 

Nao t'enho jtito ndda, 

Tern vm. acabddo ? 

®hie ejid elle fazendo ? 

QjLiejuz, ell a ? ' . 

Que quer, or que ordina vm 

Que Ihe/alta ? 



PORTUGUESE 



I did not fay it. 
Did you not fay fo ? 
What are you doing ? 
What have you done ! 
I do nothing; 
I have done nothing. 
Have you done ? 
W T hat is he doitig ? 
What- does fhe do ? 
What is your pleafure ? 
What do you want ? 



Of underftanding or apprehending. 



Entende-o, or percebe-o vm, 

bem ? 
Perce be vm. o que elle dijfe ? 

Percebe vm. o que elle diz ? 

Entcndeme,ov percibeme vm?. 
Entendo avm. muito bem, 
Nao entendo a vm. 
Sube vm. a lingua Portu~ 

guexa ? 
Nao afei^ 

Tern -me vm. percebido? 
Agora o percebo, 
Nao fe percebe o que ellediz, 

Par ece gdgo, 



Do you underfland him well ? 

Did you underfland what he 

faid? 
Do you underfland what he 

fays? 
Do you underfland me ? 
I underfland you very well. 
I do not underfland you. 
Do you underfland Fortu- 

guefe ? 
I do not underfland it. 
Did you underfland me ? 
Now 1 underfland you. 
One cannot underfland what 

he utters. 
He fpeaks like a flamrserer. 



Or knowing, or having Knowledge of. 



Sd be vm.ijfo ? 
Nao a /Si, 
Nao fei ndda dijfo, 
E'lla bem o/abia, 
Porventura nao fakia elleijfo? 
Demos que cu ou foubeffe, 
E'Ue nao fabtra ndda dj/o, 
Elle nuncajoube ndda dijlo, 

E'ufoube-o primeiro, or antes 
que vm, ojcubej/e, 



Do you know that ? 

I do not know it. 

I knew nothing of it ? 

She knew well of it. 

Did he not know of it ? 

Suppofe I knew it. 

He fhall know nothing of it. 

He never knew any thing 

about this. 
I kn«w it before you. 

He 



GRAMMAR. 



m 



He ijlo assim ou nao ? 
Nao que eufaiba, 



Is it fo, or not ? 
Not that I know of. 



Of knowing or being acquainted with, forgetting, 
and remembering. 



Conhece -o vm.? 

Conhece-a vm. ? 

Conhece-os vm. ? 

Conheco-o muito bem, 

Nao os conheco, 

Nos nao nos conhecemhs, 

Conhego-o de vijla, ' 

Conheco-a de name, 

E'lle conheceo-me muito bem, 

Conhece -me vm. ? 

Tenho-me ejquecido do feu nbme 

Tem-fevm. efquec ido de, m i m ? 

Conkece-vos ell a. ? 

Conhece o Sr. a vm. ? 

Pdrece que nao me conhece, 

Sr. bem me conhece, * 

E'lle ja me nao conhece, 
Tenho a honra dejajiu con- 

hecido, 
Lembra-fe vm. dijfo ? 
Nao me lembro dijfo, 
Lembro me muito bem dijfo, 



Do you know him ? 

Do you know her ? 

Do you know them ? 

I know him very well. 

I do not know them. 

We do not know one another. 

I know him by fight. 

I have heard of her. 

He knew me very well. 

Do you know me ? 

I have forgot your name. 

Did you forget me ? 

Does (lie know you? 

Does the gentleman know 

you ? 
It appears he does not know 

me. 
The gentleman knows me 

well. 
He knows me no more. 
I have the honour to be 

known to him. 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember it. 
I do remember it very well. 



Of Age, Life, Death, &c. 



Que iddde tern vm. ? 

Cue idade tern feu irmao ? 

Tenho vinte e cinco annos, 

Tern vinte e dous annos, 

Vm, tern mais annos do que eu > 

Que idade tera vm. ? 

He vm. cafddo r 

Qudntas ve%es tern vm. ca- 

Jado> 
Quant as molheres tern Vm. 

tidol 



How old are you ? 

How old is your brother. 

I am five and twenty. 

He is twenty-two years old. 

You are older than I. 

How old may you be ? 

Are you married ? 

How often have you been 

married ? 
How many wives have you 

had. 

Tern 



146 



PORTUGUESE 



Tern vm. ainda pay, c may ? 

Mcu p&y mgrreo % 

Minha may morreo, 
Ha <L 

Mink, J ou outra icz t 

::osfilhos tern vm. ? 
qvutro, 

.. i:lhas ? 

Tcnho-h u mfuho,c t resji 

ntos irmaos tern : »;:. ? 

Nao ten he 

s 77icri erao, 

s dc morrer. 



you father and mother 
1 .il alive ? 
Mv father is dead. 
Y mother is*. cad. 
My uthe. has been dead thefe 

t\\ v t .,lS. 

My morh 1 is married 

Kown.mv children ha* t 

I have four. 

Sons or daughters? 

I have one Ton and three 

daughters. 
How many brothers have 

you ? 
I have none alive. 
Thev are all dead. 
We'muft all die. 



Of th hora, as a A wdl as an InU 

Hera, 



E'u eft a denire dc huma 

-a, 

r ab ? 
Sao fete, haras, 
A que floras r. s la ? 

As hcras qucforprccifo^ 

Hot as defocewpadas, 

A ultima hora ou a Jura da, 

mi- 
Cad a hora, 
Dc hora cmhcra 9 

r-to dc hora, 

1 hora e mcya, 
Per to das n$pt horas, 
J Id huma 
For a dc horas, 

ras, 
Rccolhcr-fc a boas lures, 

her-fefora dc horas, 

s dc ja Mar ou dc cca r, 
Ferto das horas dc jaiii^r, 



An hour, alfo a particular 

time. 
I will be there wkhin an 

hour. 
What's o'clock. 
It is feven o'clock. 
At what hour or time will 

you be there ? 
In due or good time, at the 

time appointed. 
Leifure hours. 
The lafl hour, or the dying 

hour. 
Every hour. 
Hourly, every hour. 
Half an hour. 
A quarter of an hour. 
An hour and a half. 
About the ninth hour. 
An hour ago, or an hour fince, 
Bey end the hour, or very late. 
In time. 

To keep pood hours. 
To keep bad hours. 
Dinner, or frjpper time. 
About dinner time. 

Ainda 



GRAMMAR 



Ainda ejlais na came, a ejlas 

floras ? 
religio da horas, 
Ja dcrao onze horas, 
Relogio de hora, 
Muito a boat haras, 
A boas floras, 



Na ma flora, 

Vai-te na ma flora, 

To da a hora que, 

Toda a flora que quizerdes, 

Hora, 

Mother que anda para cada 

flora, 
Horas defazer ordgao, 
Horas de hir'a tgrega, 
Horas de hir para a cdma, 
Horas de comer, 
J a nao fab floras, 
Che gar a hora, 

EJtdr efperandopellafua hora 
Nao ver a hora, 



Sad horas de, &c. 
Horas canonicas, 



Hvras, 



As quarenta horas, 



Qonta das horas, 
Arte de dividir o tempo cm 
horas, 



247 

Are you a-bed at this time of 
the day ? 

The clock flrikes. 

It ftruck eleven o'clock. 

Hour-glafs. 

Early, betimes. 

In good time, in time, at the 
time appointed, in the very 
nick of time. 

In an ill hour, unluckily, un- 
fortunately. 

Go to the devil, go and be 
hanged. 

Whenfoever, at what time 
foever. 

At what time you will. 

Time or hour of child-birth. 

A woman near her time. 

Prayer-time. 

Church-time. 

Bed-time. 

Times of eating. 

The time is paft, it is too late. 

Is for a perfon to die. 

To wait for God's time. 

To long, to defire earneftly, 
to wifli with eagernefs 
continued, with em, ox de 
before the thing defired. 

Is it time to, &c. 

The fet time for the clergy to 
fay their office ; alfo thofe 
parts of the office itfelf, 
called Prime, Tierce, Sixths 
None, &c. 

Any little prayer book, but 
particularly that in which 
is the office of the BUJfed 
Virgin. 

So they call the fpace of three 
days, in which the confe- 
crated Hoftis expofed and 
laid to public view. 

Horography, account of hours 

Horometry. 

Hora 



248 PORTUGUESE 

Hora as an Adverb and Interjection. 



Hora deixa-o-hir, 
Horadeixate dcjiasparvoices, 
Hora,deixhno-nos defies com- 

primentoSy 
Hora vamos, defpaxate, 
Hora vamos, nap ha perigo, 
Hora vamos, tira daquiijh, 
Hora vamos, tern vergonha, 
Hera, eu nao piffo fqfrer 

aquillo, 
Hora hum, hora outro, 

E'Ues hora tfl^d fbre humpe, 
hora fob re outro, 

Hora, quequer dizer ijfo ? 

Tudo o que he bom, deve fer 
amddo ; hora, Deos he i?ifi- 
nitamente bem, logo, Sec. 

Hora, havia hum enfermo, 

Por hora, 



Pray let him go. 
Away with thefc fopperies. 
Away with thefe compli- 
ments. 
Come, come, make haile. 
Away, there is no danger. 
Away with this. 
Away for {hame. 
I cannot away with it. 

Sometimes one, fometimes 

another. 
They Hand now on one foot, 

and then on another. 
How now ? 
All that is good to be loved, 

now God is infinitely good, 

therefore, &c. 
Now there was a lick man. 
At prefent, for the prefent, 

now, at this time. 



A VOCABULARY 



VOCABULARY 



o f 



WORDS moft ufed in DISCOURSE, 



Do Ceo e dos Elementos, 

r%ios k 

1J JefusChrip, 

E/pirito Santo, 

A Trindade, 

A Virgem\ 

Os anjos, 

Os archanjos, 

Osfdntos, 

Os bemaventurddoSj, 

ceo, 

pardifo i 

Inferno, 

Purgatdrioi 

Os dittos* , 

Of'ogo, 

Oar, 

A tirrcii \ 

mar, 

Ofol, 

A lua, 

As eftrellas % 

Os raits, 



Of the Heaven and the Ele* 
ments, 

GOD. 
Jefd Chrift: 
The Holy Ghoft. 
The Trinity. 
The Virgin. 
The angels. 
The arch-angels* 
The faints. 
The bleffed. 
Heaven. 
Paradife.- 
Hell. 

Purgatory. 
The devils 8 
The lire. 
The air. 
The earth. 
The fea. 
The fun. 
The moon. 
Theftars. 
The rays, 
* A As 



PORTUGUESE 



As nuvens, 
vento, 
Achava, 
6 trovdo, 
reldmpago, 
Sardiva, 
raycf v 
A neve, 
A gedda, 
caramclo, 
orvdlho, 
Nevoa, 
NevOeiro, 
terr emote, 
diluvio, 
callr, 
Ofrio, 



The clouds. 

The wind. 

The rain. 

Thunder. 

The lightning. 

Hail. 

The thundeibob. 

The fnow. 

The froft. 

The ice. • 

The dew. 

A fog, or mi ft. 

A thick fog. 

The earthquake. 

The deluge, or flood. 

The heat. 

The cold. 



Do Tempo. 

dia, 

A nate, 

Meyo dta, 

Meya noite, 

A mdnhaa, 

Defpois do meyo dia, 

Huma hora, 

'Hum quarto de kora, 

Huma meya hora, 

Tres quartos de hora, 

H'oje, 

O'ntem, 

Amanhda, 

Antes d'ontem, 

Depots de a?nankaa r 

Depots dejantar, 

Depots de cea, 

Humafemdna, 

Hum ?nes, 

Hu?ndnno, 

Dia f ant o, 

Dia detrabdlho, 

nacer dofol, 

por dclfol, 



Of the Time* 

The day. 

The night. 

Noon. 

Midnight. 

The morning. 

The afternoon. 

An hour. 

A quarter of an hour. 

Half an hour. 

Three-quarters of ah hour. 

To-day. 

Ye Me r day. 

To-morrow. 

The day before yefferday* 

After to-morrow. 

After dinner. 

After fupper. 

A week. 

A month. 

A year. 

A holy- day. 

A working day. 

The fun-rif»*g. 

The fun-fet. 



Tempe 



GRAMMAR. 

Tempo dejega, or da aceifa % The harvefh 
Tempo de vindima, The vintage. 



Das Eftacoens do Tempo. 


Of the Seafons. 


A primavera^ 


The fpring. 


verao, 


The fummer. 


outono, 


Autumn. 


inverno, 


Winter. 


Os Dias da S v emana 5 


The Days of the Week. 


Domingo, 


Sunday. 


Segu n dafeira , ' 
Te'rfafeira, 


Monday. 


Tuefday. 


Quart a feira, 


Wednefday. 


Quintajeira, 


Thurfdayi 


Sefia feira, 


Friday. 


Sab a do, 


Saturday, 


Dos Mefes, 


Of the Months, 


Janeiro, 


January. 


Fever tiro, 


February . 


Mar go, 


March, 


Abr'il, 


April. 


Mayo, 


May. 


Junho, 


June. 


Julho, 


>iy. 


Ag'ojlo 


Auguft. 


Setembro, 


September, 


Outubro, 


Oaober. , 


Novembro-t 


November. 


Dezembro, 


December. 



Dias Santos. 



Holy -Days of the Year, 



Dia de Anno bom, New Year's Day. 

Dia de Reys, a Epipkama, Twelfth Day. 
A Candeldria, Candlemas Day, 

*Aa 



PORTUGUESE 



PurificafS, 
O Entrudo, 

Qucirtafeira de Ci?izas, 
A Quarefma, 
Annunciagad, 
AsQudtro Tcmporas, 
A Semanafanta, 
Domingo dt Ramos, 
Oudrtajhra dc Trevbas, 
{hiintafeira de Endoenfas, 

Sejla feira da Paixdo, 

Pafcba da Re/urreycdo, 

AJfumpcdo dc N. 5". 

As Rogacoens,, or Ladainhas, 

Afcenfdo, 

Pentecofle, 

Dia do Corbo de Deos, 
Dia de S. Jodo, 
Dia de S. Pedro, . 
Dia de tbdos os Santos, 
Dia dos Finddos, 
Dia de S. Marti?iko t 
Dia de Natal, 
Vigilia, or vejpera, 



The Purification. 

The Carnival, or Shrovetide. 

Afti Wednefday. 

The Lent. 

Lady Day in March. 

The Ember Weeks. 

The Holy Week. 

Palm Sunday. 

Wednefday before Eafter. 

Maunday Thurfday, the laft 

Thurfday in Lent. 
Good Friday. 
Eafter Day. 
Lady Day in harveft. 
Rogation Week. 
The Afcenfion. 
The Pentecoft, or Whitfun- 

tide. 
Corpus Chrifti Day. 
Midfummer Day. 
Lammas Day. 
All Saints Day. 
All Souls. 
Martinmas. 
Ch'riflmas Day, 
The eve. 



Da Igreja e Dignidades Ec- Of the Church and Ecclefias- 
clefiafticas, tical Dignities. 



A nave, 

Zimborio, 

Pindculo, 

C6ro, 

Capella, 

E/idnte t 

Sacrijlin, 

Co mpandrio,OMt$rre dosjinos 

Sino, 

Baddloi 

Pia, 

Hyfope, 

Qonfefliondrioi 



The aifle of the church. 

The dome. 

Pinnacle. 

The choir. 

The chapel. 

A reading defk, or chorifter's 

defk. 
The veftry. 
The belfry. 
The bell. 

The clapper of the bell. 
The font. 
A fprinkler. 
A confeflion feat. 

Tribuna* 



GRAMMAR. 



Wribuna, 


A tribune, orgallery. 


Cemiterio, 


A church-yard, a burying- 




place. 


Harneiro, 


A charnel. 


Altar, 


. An altar, 


Frontal* 


An antipendiurn. 


Pdllio, 


A canopy. 


Toalha do altar* 


The altar cloeh. 


Mifdl, 


A miffal, a mafs-book. 


Sotdna, 


A caffock. 


Siobrepelliz, 


A furplice. 


Roquete, 


A fhort furplice, a bifhop's 




furplice. 


pdpa t 
Hum car deal, 


The pope. 
A cardinal. 


Hum patriarch 


A patriarch. 


Hum arcebifpo., 


An archbifhop* 


Hum bifpo, 


A biftiop. 


Hum legddo, 


A legate. 


Vice Icgddo* 


A vice- legate. 


Hum nuncio, 


A nuncio* 


Hum prelddo, 


A prelate. 


Hum commendador^ 


A commander. 


Hum abbdde, 


An abbot. 


Huma abbadijfa* 


An abbefs. 


Hum prior* 


A prior. 


Hum reitor* 


A re&or. 


Beneficiddo, . 


Beneficed clergyman, or in- 




cumbent. 


Frdde, or religiofo^ 


A friar. 


Cor da, 


A (haven crown. 


Hum guar dido, 


A guard ian a 


Hum dejinidor, 


A definitor. 


Hum provincial, 


A provincial. 


Humgeral, 


A general. 


Hum vigdrio, 


A vicar. 


Hum vigdrio gerdl, 


A vicar-general, 


Hum dead, 


A dean. 


Hum arcedidgo, 


Archdeacon, 


Didcono, 


Deacon. 


Subdidcono, 


A fub-deacon. 


Hum conego, 


A canon. 


Arciprefie, 


Arch-prieft* 


Hum clerigo 9 


Aprieft, 


Captlldo, 


A chaplain. 
* A 3 Hu, 



6 



PORTUGUESE 



Hum efmoler t 
Hum pdrroco, 
" Ben eficio fimples, 
Freira, 

Hum pregador, 
Sacrijido, or Jane r ij 'I do, 
Menino do coro, 



An almoner. 

A curate. 

Sinecure. 

A nun. 

A preacher, or lecturer. 

A fexton, a veftry- keeper* 

A finging boy, 



Nomes das cou 


fas que geral- 


Names of things mojiufually 


mente fe 


comem. 


eaten. 


Pad, 




Bread. 


Agoa, 




Water. 


Vinho, 




Wine. 


Came, 




Meat,orflefh. 


Pezxe, 




Fifh. 


Cdrne cozida, 




Boiled meat. 


Cdrn- a$dda, 




Roaft meat. 


Hum boeddc dt 


pad, 


A mouthful of bread. 


Humpa/lel, 




A pye. ^ 


Humafopa, 




Soup. 


Hum cdldo, 




Broth. 


Hum a fa la 'da , 




A fallad. 


Hum molho, 




.Any.-Jki«4s*f faufe to<»d*p in, 


Fritta, 


- - 


Fruit. 


Que'ijo, 




Cieefe. 


Manteiga, 




Butter. 



T)o Servico de huma Mefa, Of the Covering of the Tabic, 



A mefa, 
Huma cadeira, 
A todlha da ?nefa, 
Todlha de mads, 
Hum guardandpo, 
Humafdca, 
Hum gdrfo, 
Huma colher^ 
Hum prdto, 
Humfaleiro, 
Galheta do vindgrc, 
Galheta do azeite,' 



The table. 

A chair. 

The table cloth. 

A towel. 

A napkin. 

A knife. 

A fork. 

A fpoon, 

A plate. 

A fait feller. 

A vinegar a@ttle r »r cruet. 

A cruet, o$ vial Jm oil. 

Talker 






GRAMMA R. 



Talker, 

Bay xe I la oujervifo deprdta, 
Huma cuberta^ 
Prato, guardandpo, faca, 
gdrfo, colher [tudo junto) 
O gornil, 
Hdma batia^ 
Hum copo, 
Huma garrafa, 
Huma td$a^ I 
Cajiifdly 
VUa, 

Tefouras de e/pevitdr, 
Huma s diva. 
Huma escudella, 
Cejio par a por a pad, 
Donzella, 
Faquetro, 
I/ouga de Bdrro, 
Lou fa de ejidnho, 



A cruet-ftand. 

Sugar- box. 

A let of filver plate. 

A courfe. 

A cover. 

The ewer 

A bafin. 

A glafs. 

A bottle. 

A cup, 

A candleilick., 

A candle. 

Snuffers. 

A falver. 

A porringer. 

A bread-bafket. 

A dumb-waiter. 

A cafe for knives. 

Earthen ware. 

Pewter. 



Do Comer, e Beber. 

Vdca, 

Ca metro, 

Vitella, ■ 

Cordeiro, 

Gallinha, 

Gdllo, 

Peru, 

Almondegas % 

Ojantdr, 

Almogo, 

Cea, 

Merenda, 



Confodda, 

Banquete, 
Feme, 
SZde, 
Fa/Ho, 

Pad, • 



Of Eating and Drinking. 

Beef. 

Mutton. 

Veal. 

Lamb. 

Hen. 

Cock. 

A turkey. 

Puddings. 

The dinner. 

Breakfaft. 

Supper. 

Luncheon, or*ke=a$fe§*soon y s 

luncheon. 
A light fupper, as upon a c 

faft-dayl 
An entertainment. 
Hunger. 
Thirft. _ 
A loathin 
Bread. 



Pad 



$ 



PORTUGUESE 



Pddfrefco, or pad molle, 

Pad quente, 

Pad de todafarinha, 

Pad brdncd, or pad alvo, 

Arroz, 

Pad de rata, 

Pad de cevdda, 

Pad de centeo, 

Pad de avea, 

Pad de mi I ho miudo, 

Pad de milho grdnde, ou de 

maiz, 
Pad I eve do, 
Pal dfmo, 
Bificuto, 
Migdlha de pad, 
Falia de pad, 
Codea de pad, 
Mdffa, 

Tdrta, 
Rofca, 
Eft of ado, 

Fi-etm&nr, 

Came ajfdda fobre grelhas, 

Came jrita, 

Picddo, or came picdda, 

y avali, or pdrco montez, 

Pre/unto, £Cfvn\l£i'*£'. ^ 

Pdrco, " 

Cabrito, 

Toucinho, 

Hum lo??ibo, 

JMfdds de carneiro, 

Freffura, ox for cur a, 

Cachola de porco, 

Linguiga, or lingciga, 

Ckourico defdngue de porco, 

Pdyo, 

Fricafje, 

Fig a do,' 

Leite, 

Nat a, 

Sdro, 

Requeijdd, • 

Coalhdda, 



New bread. 
A hot loaf. 
Wheaten bread . 
White bread. 
Rice. 

Brown bread. 
Barley bread. 
Rye bread. 
Oaten bread. 
Millet bread. 
Indian corn bread. 

Leavened bread. 

Unleavened bread. 

Bifcuit. 

A crumb of bread. 

A (lice of bread. 

A cruft of bread. 

Dough. 

A tart. 

Bread made like a roll. 

Stewed meat. 

Guld-mcat. 

Broiled meat. 

Fried meat. 

A hafh. 

A wild boar. 

Ham, gammon of bacon. 

Pork. 

Kid. 

Bacon. 

A loin. 

Sheep's trotters. 

A pluck. , r , 

A faufage. 

Black-pudding. 

A thick and (hort faufage. 

A fricaffee. 

Liver. 

Milk. 

Cream. 

Whey. 

A kind of new cheefe. c^vr 

Curdled milk. 

Ovo, 



A 



GRAMMAR. 



O'vo, 

Gemma do ovo, 
Clara do ovo, 
O'vo frefco, 
O'vo molle, 
O'vo duro, 
O'vo ajfddo, 
O'vo gallddq, 
O'vos redes, 

O'vos ef calf ados, 

O'vos jritos, 

O'vos mexidos, eJr%tos y 

Bolinholo, 

O'vos de pHxe, 

Daces, 

Confeitos, 

Marmeldda t 



An egg. 

The yolk of an egg. 

The white of an egg, 

A new laid egg. 

A foft egg, 

A hard egg. 

A roafted egg. 

An egg with a chicken in it. 

Sweet eggs fpun out like 

hairs. % 

Poached eggs. 
Fried eggs. ... , 
An amlet. 
A fritter. 
The roes of fifli. 
Sweetmeats. 
Comfits. 
Marmalade. 



O que fe A'fla. 

Hum cap do, 
Hu majrdnga , 
Hum J rang o, 
fombos, 
Pombq trocdz, 

Gallinhola, 

Humaefpecie de gallinhola pc- 
quena a qual osCajllehdnos 
chamao gallinita ciega, 

Perdiz, 

Tordo, 

Faifdo, 

Faisdosinho, 

Hum leitdo, \ 

Veddo, 

Hum Coelho* 

Ldparo, 

.Lebre, 

A'dem, 

Gdnfo, or o macho da ddem, 

Pdta, 

Pdto, 



What is roajed, 

A capon, 
A pullet. 
A chicken. 
Pigeons. 

A wood culver, or wood- 
pigeon. 
A woodcock. 
A fnipe. 



A partridge. 
A thrum. 
A pheafant. 
A pheafant-powt. 
A roafling-pig. 
A flag. 
A rabbit. 
A young coney. 
A hare. 
A duck. 
A drake. 
Goofe. 

Gander, the rnaleof the goofe 
Calhdndra, 



10 PORTUGUESE 

Calhdndra, A fky-lark. 

Codornh, A quail. 



Deoutros Paffaros. 

Aguia, 

Aguia nova, 

Abutre, 

Abejirics, 

Efmerilhdby 

Gav'ido^jeniea., 

Macho , (iiogavui») 

Falcdo, 

Falcdd que ainda nao voa, 

Gerifalte, 

Sdcre, 

Gkrca, 

Mechanic o t 

Gar cot a, 

Milhdno, or mi 

Co'rvo, 

Grrilka, 

Grdlho, 

Alveloa or rabe'ta, 

Canario, 

Fintaftfgo, 

Me'rlo, 

Ten til had, 

Rouxinol, 

Verdelhdo, 

Papagdyo, 



Ihdfre, 



EJtorninho, or zorzdi, 

Fran eel ho, 

Mocho, 

Coruja, 

Morcego, 

Ave noclurna, come melra, 

que mama as cdbras, 
Ofrancolim, 
Bufo, 
Cerceta, 
Corvo martnho. 



Of other Birds. 

An eagle. 
An eaglet. 
A vulture. 
An oftrich. 
A merlin. 
A fparrow-hawk. 
A taffel, the taffel of a fpar- 
row-hawk. 
A falcon. 
A jafs-hawk. . 
A ger- falcon. 
A faker, a faker-hawk. 
A heron. 
Tomtit. 
A little heron. 
A kite. 

A crow, or raven. 
A rook. 
A jack-daw. 
A wag-tail. - 
A canary-bird. 
A gold-finch. 
A black-bird. 
A chaffinch. 
A nightingale. 
A green-bird. 
A parrot. 
A magpie. 
A ftarling. 
A hobby, a mufket. 
Owl. 

A fcreech owl. 
A bat. 
A goat milker. 

A god wit, a moor- cock. 
A night crow, or raven. 
A teal. 
A cormorant. 

Gaivota,- 



GRAMMA R. 



11 



Oaivota, 


A moor-hen, ^rgull. 


s Gaivdd, 


A martlet, or martin, a kind 




offwallow. 


Andor4?ika, 


A f wallow. 


Mergulkdo, 


A dive, or didapper. 


Marreca, 


A wild-duck. » 


Picdnfo, 


A wren, a little bird. 


Taralkdo, 


A kind of ortolan. 


Pavdo, 


A peacock. 


Pavoa, 


A pea-hen. 


Ardra, 


A macaw. 


Parddl, 


A fparrow. 


Rola, 


A turtle-dove. 


Ale yon, 


A king's fifher. 


Cegonha, 


A ftork. 


CUCO, y 


A cuckow. 


Cifne, 


A fwan. 


Pintarrbxo^ 


A red robin. 


Grbu, 


A crane. 


Pavoncino, 


A lapwing. 


Pelicdno, 


A pelican. 


Tarambola, 


A plover. 


Pifco, 


A bullfinch, or red-tail. 


Para os Dias de Peixe, ou de 


For Fijh Days, or Faji Days. 


Jejum. 




Sopa de e'rvas, &c. 


Soup meagre, or lenten pot- 




tage. 


Peixe, 


Fifh. 


Peixe do mar, 


Sea-fifh. 


Peixe do rio, ou da agoa dace 


Frefh-water fHh. 


Sdvet, 


A (had. 


Anckova, 


An anchovy. 


Anguia, or Enguza, 


An eel. 


Bdrboy 


A barbel. 


Lucia, .. 


A pike, or jack. 


Cdrpe, 


A carp. 


Szba, 


A cuttle. 


Lula, 


A calamary. 


Cdbra, 


The miller's thumb. 


Gordz, 


A rochet, or roach. 


Congro, 


A conger. [the gilt head. 


Dourdda^ 


Dorado, St. Peter's fifh, or 


s 


Lin- 



12 



PORTUGUESE 



Linguddo, 

Lagbjta % 

Boradlo, 

Mugem, 

Rodovdlho, 

Sdrda, 

Cavdl 'l'a , 

Sardinha, 

Bacalhdo, 

Arenque, 

Voador, 

drrenque defumo t 

Arrtnque com 6vas y 

Pefcdda, . 

Cadoz, 

O'Jira, 

Lamprea, 

Lamprea pequena, 

Porco marinho, 

Polvo, 

Perca, 

Tinea, 

Truta, 

A turn, 

Salmdo, 

Camarao, 

Caranguejo, 

Ameijoa, 

Ervilhas, 

Favas, 

EJpinafres, 

AlcdchofraSi 

E/pdrgo, 

Couve, 

Repolho, 

Ndbos, 

Grelos de ccuve, 

C'ouve crefpa, 

Coliflor, or coulijlor i 

Beldroegas, 

CenturaSy 

Celgas, or AettgaSy 

Tomdtesy 



A fole. 

A lobfter. 

A fturgeon ; fome call it 

fhad-fifh. 
A mullet. 
A byrt or turbot. 
A fort of little mackarel. 
A mackerel. 
A pilchard. 
Dry cod. 
A herring. 
A flying-fifh. 
A red herring. 
A hard-rowed herring. 
A kind of cod-fifh. 
A gudgeon. 
A.n oyiier. 
A lamprey, 
A lampern. 
A porpoife. 

Pourcontrell, or many-feet. 
Perch. 
A tench. 
A trout. 
A tunny-fifh. 
A falmon. 
A ihrimp, 
A crab. 
A cockle. 
Peafe. 
Beans. 
Spinage. 
Artichokes. 
Afparagus. 
Cabbage, colewort. 
Cabbage. 
Turnips. 
Sprouts. 

Curled colewort. 
Cauliflower. 
Purflane. 
Carrots. 
Beets. 
Apples of love. 

Para 



GRAMMAR. 



13 



Park temperar o Comer. 

Sal, 

Pimtnta, 

Pimentao, 

Azeite, 

Vinagre, 

Mojldrda, 

Crdvos, 

Cane la, 

Loureiro, 

Alcapdrras, 

Cogumelos, 

Tubard da terra, 

Cebolas, 

Our egad, 

Funcho, 

Ctbolinhas, 

A'lho, 

Laranjas, 

Limoens, 

Pinhoens, 

Perrexil, 

Sdlfa, 

Orteldd, 

Aipo hortenfe, 

A'lho porro, 

Coentro, 

Agafrdm, 

Cominhos, 



Tofeason meat witk* 

Salt. 
Pepper. 
Cayan peppers- 
Oil. 

Vinegar. 
Muftard. 
Cloves. 
Cinnamon. 
Laurel. 
Capers. 
Mufh rooms. 
Truffles. 
Onions. 
Organy. 
Jennel. 
Young onions. 
Garlick. 
Oranges. 
Lemons. 

The kernels of a pine apple; 
Wild parfley. 
Garden parfley. 
Mint. 
Cellery. 
Leek. 
Coriander. 
Saffron. 
Cummins. 



Para Salada. 



For a Sal lad. 



Almeirdo, Wild fuccory. 

Almeird~ohortenje,QX tndivia, Endive. 



Alfdce, 

Chicoria, 

Agrioens, 

Majlrugos, or majlurqot, 

Ctrefolxo, 

Ral do. 



Lettuce. 
Succory. 
Water crefes, 
Creffes. 
Chervil. 
Raddifh root, 



Para 



14 PORTUGUESE 

Para Sombre mifa. For the Dejfert. 



Macdds, 

Peras, 

Pera bergamota, 

Pecegos, 

Camocza, 

Albricoquc, 

Cerejas, 

Cerejas defdco, 

Ginjas, 

Ginja garrafal, 



Lardnja da China, " 

U'vas, 

Pdjfas de uva, 

U'va efpim, 

Figos, 

Figos Idmpos, 

Amcixas, 

Pdfsas de ameixas, 
Amcrasde gdr$a, ox defy Iv a, 
Amor as que ndcem de huma 

forte defylva tinra, 
Amor as que ndcem da amo- 

reira, 
Mar me I os, 
Romdds, 
Luna, 
Azeitonas, 
Amendhas, 
Nefperas, 
Meldo, 

Meldnciv, ox baldncia, 
Cafidnhas, 
Nozes, 
Aveldns, 
Mordngos s 
Medronho, 



Apples. 

Pears. 

A bergamot pear. 

Peaches. 

A pippin. 

Apricot. 

Cherries. 

Hard cherries. 

Sour cherries. 

A very large fort of cherry, 

the fruit or the dwarf 

cherry-tree. 
China-orange. 
GraDes. 
Raifins. 
Goofebcrries. 
Figs. 
The firft figs that come m 

May. 
Plums. 
Prunes. 
Blackberries. 
Rafpberries. 

Mulberries. 

Quinces. 

Pomegranates . 

A lime. 

Olives. 

Almonds. 

Medlars. 

A melon. 

Water-melon. 

Chefnuts. 

Walnuts. 

Hazelnuts. 

Strawberries 

A fort of fruit they have in 
Portugal like a ftrawberry, 
eating whereof, they fay, 
makes people drunk". 

Tamara, 



* 



GRAMMA R. 



lamdra, 

Fijtico, 

Alfarroba, 

Bolota, 

Sorva, 

Agofeifd) or magda denafega, 

Do ccs, 



A date. 

A piftache*nut. 

A carob. 

A fweet acorn. 

Service. 

A jubub. 

Sweet-meats. 



15 



Das A'rvores e Arbuftos. 



Damajqueire, 
Amendoeira^ 
Cerejeira, 
Cajianheiro, 
Cidreira, 
Sorvcira, 
'Palmeira, 
Figueira, 
MarmeUiro, 
Mace Ira, 

Maceira da nafega, 
Romeira, 
Limoeira, 
Amoreira, 
Oliveira, 
Nefpereira, 
Laranjeira, 
Murta, 
Nogueira, 
Zambujeirq, 
Era, 

Pecegueiro, 
Rofeira, 
Ameixieira, 
Pereira, 
Rofmaninho, 
Pinheiro, 
Giejia, 



Of Trees and Shrubs, 

An apricot-tree. 

An almond-tree. 

A cherry-tree. 

A chefnut-tree, 

A citron -tree. 

A fervice-tree. 

A palm-tree. 

A fig-tree. 

A quince-tree. 

An apple-tree. 

A jubub-tree. 

A pomegranate-tree,, 

A lemon-tree. 

A mulberry-tree. 

An olive-tree. 

A medlar-tree. , 

An orange-tree. 

Myrtle. . 

A walnut-tree. 

A wild olive-tree, 

Ivy. 

A peach-tree. 

A rofe-bufh. 

A plum-tree. 

A pear-tree. 

Rofemary. x 

A pine-tree. 

Broom. 



Dos Reptiles, e Anim&is 
amphibios. 



Minkoca, 
Serpente, 



Of Reptiles and Amphibioi 
Creatures, 



An earth- worm, 
A ferpent. 



Serpente 



16 



PORTUGUESE 



Serpente com azas, 

A'fpide, 

Cobra, 

Cobra de cafcavd % 

fib or a, 

Lagdrto, 

0'fg«, _ 
Alacrao, 
Crocodilo, 

Jacare, or crocodilo da Ame- 
rica, 
Ca/lor, 
Cdgado, 
Lontra, 



A flying ferpent* 

An afp. 

A fnake. 

A rattle- fnake. 

A viper. 

A lizard. 

An evet, eft, or newt. 

A fcorpion. 

A crocodile. 

An alligator. 

A beaver. 

A land tortoife; 

An otter. 



Dos Inferos. 

Ardnha, 

Formiga, 

Caracal, 

Rda, 

Sdpo, 

Oucdo, 

Efcaravelho, 

Caruncho, 

Pi6tho,oxlagdrtadakortaliga 

Cigdrra, 

Borboleta, 

Grillo, 

Piolho, 

Piolho lddro t 

Le'ndea, 

Pulga, 

Mojca, 

Pcrfovejo, 

Carrapdto, 

GafanhbtOj 

Polilha, or trdpa, 

Vefpa, or abefpora, 

Abelha, 

Zdngo, or ZangOQj 

Tavad, 

Boyde Deos, y 

Me/quite, 



Of the Insecls. 



A fpider. 

A pifmire or ant. 

A fnail. 

A frog. 

A toad. 

Hand-worm. 

A beetle. 

Wood-worm. 

Caterpillar. 

Grafshopper. 

A butterfly. 

A cricket. 

A loufe. 

Crab-loufe^ 

A nit. 

A flea. . 

A fly. 

A bug. 

A tick. 

A locufh 

Moth. 

A wafp. 

A bee. 

A drone. 

An ox fly. 

A lady-bird* 

A gnat* 



GRAMMAR. 17 

Graos de Parentefco, Degrees of Kindred. 



My, 


Father. 


Mdy, 


Mother. 


AVO, 


Grandfather. 


Avd, 


Grandmother. 


Bifavb, 


Great grandfather.- 


Bifavd, 


Great grandmother. 


Fit ho, 


Son. 


Filha, 


Daughter. 


Irmdo, 


Brother. 


Irmda, 


Sifter. 


Primogenitor 


The eldeft Ton. 


Ofilko mais mcgo, 


The youngeft fon. 


Tio, 


Uncle. 


Tia, 


Aunt. 


Sobrinho, 


Nephew. 


Sobrinka, 


Niece. 


Primo, 


Coufin. 


Prima, 


A female coufin. 


Primo com irmdo, 


The male firfl coufin. 


Prima com irmao, ■ 


The female firft coufin. 


Cunhddo, 


Brother-in-law. 


Cunhdda, 


Sifter-in-law. 


Meyo irmdo, 


Half-brother. 


Sogro, , 


Father-in-law. 


Segra, 


Mother-in-law. 


Padrdjlo, 


A ftep-father. 


Madrajia, 


A ftep-mother. 


Enteddo, 


A ftep-fon. 


Entedda, 


A ftep-daughter. 


Genro, 


A fon -in-law. 


Mra, 


A daughter-in-law. 


Neta, 


A grand-daughter. 


Ntto, 


A grand-fon. 


Bifneto, 


A great grand-fon. 


Bifneta, 


A great grand-daughter. 


Con/or te, mafc. and fem. 


A confort. 


Marido, 


Hufband. 


Mother, 


Wife. 


Irmdo gemeo, 


A twin-brother. 


Coldco, or irmdo de ieite, 


A fofter- brother. 


Bafidrdo, 


A baftard. 


Compddrs, 


A male goflip. 




* B Comadre 



18 

Comddrr, 
Jfilhddoy 
A fit had a, 
P a drink o, 
Madrznha 
par cute, 
A parente, 
Pa rente por 



PORTUGU E-SE 



; nfa ngui n i ddde 



afjin: 



or 



Dos differentes Gtncros de 
Eftado de hum Homem, 
on de huma M H) er, e das 
fiias qualidades, 

Homem, 

A ?nolher, 

Hum homem de idddt\ 

Huma molh'er de iddde, 

Hum velho, 

Huma vclha, ■ 

Hum ??iofo, ou mancebo, 

Huma rapariga\ 

Hum amr^e, 

Huma qmiga, 

Huma cridn$a, ou menifio, 

Hum rapdz, 

Humrapazinho,- 

Huma meriina., 

Huma donzella, 

Huma virgem % 

A'mo i 

A'?na, 

Criddo, 

Cridda, 

Cidaddo, 

Rujfoco, 

Hum efirangciro, 

Hum viuvo, 

Huma viuvdy 

Hum kerdeiro, 

Huma herdcira, 

Solteiro, 

FJiado defoltciro, 



A female go flip. 
A god-fon. 
A god-daughter. 
A god- father. 
A god -mother. 
A male relation. 
A female relation. 
A kin, a relation either of 
affinity or confanguinity. 



Of the conditions of Man and ' 
Woman, as well as oj their 
qualities-. 



A man. 

A woman. 

An aged man. 

An aged woman. 

An old man. 

An old woman. 

A young mam 

A girl. 

A fpark. 

A miflrefs. 

A child, a little child. 

A boy. 

A little boy. 

A little girl. 

A maiden. 

A virgin. 

A mailer. 

A miflrefs. 

A male-fervant. 

A feraale-fervant. 

A citizen. 

A countryman. 

A ftranger. 

A widower. 

A widow. 

An heir. 

An heirefs. 

A bachelor. 

Bachelorfhip. 

Homem. 



GRAMMAR. 



IS 



Homem cafado, 

■Molher cafada, 

Mother que ejld de pdrto^ 

Deftro, 

Agudo, 

Recatzido, 

Ajluto, or velhdco, 

Esperto, ©r vivo, 

DSudo, 

MaliciosOy 

Umido, 

ValerosOi 

TontOt 

Embujleiro, 

Groffeiro, 

Bern criddo, 

Cortez, 

Jufto, 

DesavergonhddOy 

Impertinente, 

Importuno, 

Dtscuiddda^ 

Te?nerdrio i 

Conjtdnte, 

Devoto, 

Diligente, [sivo, 

Mijeric or diofo, or compos- 

Paciente, 

A?nbici6fo^ 

Cobigbfo, 

S-oberbo t 

Cobdrde, 

Lifonjeiro, 

Golojo, 

Defied^ 

Defagradeado, 

Inhumane , 

Infolente, 

Luxur'ibfo.^ 

Ttimofo y 

Pregui^'ofii 

Prbdigo, 

Molherengo^ 

Atrevido^ 

A'Ugre, 



A married marl. 

A married woman. 

A lying-in-woman. 

Dexterous. 

Sharp. 

Cautious. 

Cunning, fly, crafty. 
■ Sprightly. 

Mad. 

Malicious. 

Fearful. 

Brave* 

Stupid. 

Deceitful. 

ClownifK. 

Well-bred. 

Courteous. 

Jult. 

Impudent. 

Impertinent. 

Troublefome, 

Carelefs. 

Kafh. 

Conflant. 

Devout. 

Diligent*, 

Merciful. 

Patient. ' 

Ambitious*, 

Covetous. 

Prond. 

Coward, v 
, A flatterer. 

Glutton. 

Treacherous. 

Ungrateful. 

Inhumane, 

Infolent. 

Lewd. 

Pofnive, Itubbora, 

Slothful. 

Prodigal. 

Given to women. 

Bold. 

Merry. 
B s 



dut 



20 



PORTUGUESE 



Que tern ciumes, 

Adultero, 

Salteadcr, 

Matador ■, 

Murmurador y 

Calumniadbr \ 

FeitidirOy 

*Trahidor t 

Ma had a, 

Rebelde, 

Perfido, 

Bo'bo, 

Mentirofo, 

Altivo> 

Coxo, 

E/tropeddo das mads, 

Cigo, 

Jhouco, ovfurdo, 

Canho'to, or efquerdo t 

Mudo, 



Jealous. 

Adulterer. 

A highwayman, 

A murderer. 

A cenfurer. 

A calumniator. 

A forcerer. 

A traitor. 

Wicked. 

A rebel. 

Perfidious. 

A buffoon. 

A lyar. 

Haughty. 

Lame of the legs. 

Lame of the hands. 

Blind. 

Deaf. 

Left-handed. 

Dumb. 



Dos 



Morad6res de 
Cidade. 



huma 



N'obre, 

Fiddlgo, 

Mecdmco, 

Tendeiro, 

Mercador or he ?n em de nego- 

ao, 
vulgo, or a plebe, 
Candlha, or a mdis vil gente 

da plebe, 
Official, 

Jornaleire, 

Prathro, 

rives do cure, 

Livreiro, 

hnprejfor, 

Barbeiro, 

Mercadbr defeda, 

Mercadir de pdnno, 



Of the Inhabitants of a 
City. 

A nobleman. 
A gentleman. 
A mechanic. 
A fhop-keeper. 
Merchant, or trader. 

The mob. 
The rabble. 

A work-man, a man that 

labours with his hands. 
A journeyman. 
A filver-fmith. 
Agold-fmith. 
A book-feller. 
A printer. 
A barber. 
A mercer. 
A woollen-draper. 

Mercadar 



GRAMMAR; 



31 



Mercador de pdnno, delinho, 
e roup as da India, or fan- 

queire, 
Aljayate, 

Aljayate r emend do, 
Cojlureira, 
Sombreireiro, 
Sapateiro, 

Remenddd, [sapateiro), 
Ferreiro, 
Alveitar, 
Cerralheiro, 
Parteira, 
Medico, 
Charlatdo, 

Cirurgiam, or furgiao, 
Sacamolas, 
Selleiro, 
Carpinteiro, 
Gajtador, (in an army) 
Padeiro, 
Carniceiro, 
Fruteiro, 
Mother que vende verduras 

ou or tali gas, 
Pajleleiro, 

Taverneiro, or v-endeiro, 
Cervejeir o,oxo quefaz cerveja 
Eftaiaja-deiro, \ 

Bofarinkeiro, or mercador de 

merceria, 
Relogeiro, 
Pregoeiro, 

Joyeiro, or joy a their o> 
Boticdrio, 
Vidraceiro, 
Carvoeiro, 
Jardineiro, 
Letrddo, 
Procurador, 
Advogddo, 
Juiz, 
Ca rcereiro, 
Verdugo, or algoz, 
Mario I . 



A linen-draper. 



A taylor. 

Botcher. 

A fempftrefs. 

A hatter. 

Shoemaker. 

A cobler. 

A blackfmith. 

Farrier. 

A lockfmith. 

A midwife. 

A phyfician. 

A quack. 

A furgeon. 

A tooth-drawer. 

A fadler. 

A carpenter. 

A pioneer. 

A baker. 

A butcher. 

A fruiterer. 

An herb woman. 

A paftry-cook. 
A vintner. 
A brewer. 
An inn-keeper. 
A pedlar. 

A watch-maker. 
A crier. 
A jeweller. 
An apothecary. 
A glazier. 
A collier. 
A gardener. 
A lawyer. 
A folicitor. 

An advocate, or a pleader. 
A judge. 
A goaler. 
A hangman. 
A porter. 
B 3 0$ 



PORTUGUESE 



Os cinco Sentidos. 



The five Sei 






A vi/la, 
ouvido, 
olfdclo, 
gofto, 
taclo, 



The fight. 
The hearing. 
The smell. 
The tafte. 
The feeling. 



As Partes do CorpoHumano. The Parts of the Human Body. 



Catena, 

Micios, or clrebro, 

ToutifOy 

Te/ta, 

Molkira, 

pontes, 

Orelha, 

Cartildgtm, 

T'impano, 

Sobiancelha, 

Pdlpebras, or CapelLs do.s 

ethos, 
PeJIanas, 
Ldgrimal, 
Alva do 61 ho, 
Meninas dos olhos, 
Nariz, 

Mac da do r'oflo, 
Veritas, 
Septo, or diaphragm a do 

nariz, 
A pint a do nariz , 
A bdca > 
Os denies, 
-Agenglva, 
A tinged, 
Paddr, paladar, or ccodd 

boca, 
Queixdda, 
A bar be , 



The head. 

The brains. 

The hinder part of the head. 

The fprehead. 

The mould of the head. 

The temples. 

The ear. 

The griftle. 

The drum of the ear. 

Eye-brow. 

The eye-lid. 

The eye-lames. 

The corner of the eye. 

The white of the eye. 

The eye-balls. 

The nofe. 

The ball of the cheeks. 

The noftrils. 

The griftle of the nofe. 

The tip of the nofe. 

The mouth. 

The teeth. 

The gum. 

Tongue. 

The roof, or palate of the 

month. 
The jaw. 
The chin. 

As barb as, 



G'RAMMA R. • 



23 



'As barhas, 

B?goder, 

O pescofo, 

A nuca, 

A gargdnta, 

Seyo, 

Teta, 

Pez'to, 

Bico de peito, 

EJiomago, 

Co/Mas, 

E'mbigo, 

Barriga, * 

Verilha, 

brago, 

cotovilo, 

Scbaco, or Jovaco, 

A mad , 

Munhcca, 

A pa I ma da mad, 

Os dedos, 

dido polegar, 

do do mojtrador, 

Dedo do miyo, 

Dido annular, 

Dido meninho, or \mi nimo, 

Pontas dcs dedos, 

Juntas, € n:s dos aides, 

Dido do pe, 

A unha, 

As cojias, 

Os ombroS) 

llhargas, 

As nddegas, 

Coxa, 

yoilko, 

Barriga da pirna } 

E/pinhafo, 

Tornozelo, 

pe, 

Sola do pe, 

c or a f rid, 

Os bofes, 



The beard. 

Whiikers. 

The neck. 

The nape of the neck. 

The throat. 

The bofom. 

The pap. 

fhebreaft. 

The nipple. 

The ftomach. 

The ribs. 

The navel. 

The belly. 

The groin. 

The arm. 

The elbow. 

The arm-pit. 

The hand. 

The wrift,. 

The palm of the hand. 

The fingers. 

The thumb. 

The fore-finger. 

The middle -finger. - 

The ring-finger. 

The little-finger. 

The tips, or tops of the 

fingers. 
The joints, and knuckles of 

the fingers. 
A toe. 
The nail. 
The back. 
The fhculders. 
The fides. 
The buttocks. 
The thigh. 
The knee. 
The calf of i.he leg. 
The ridge-bone of the back. 
The ancle. 
The foot. 

The fole of the foot. 
The heart. 
The lungs. 
>'B 4 Ofigadc, 



24 . 



PORTUGUESE 



bdpo, 

Os rins, 

Aboca do cflomago. 

As tripaSy ■ 

Ofel, 

A madre, 

Bexiga, 

Sangue, 

Cufpo, 

Ourina, 

Exeremento, 

Suor, 

Monco or rariho, 

Lagrima, 

Carepa y or cdfpa, 



The liver. 

The fpleen. 

The kidneys. 

The pit of the ftomaeh. 

The guts. 

The gall. 

The womb. 

The bladder. 

The blood. 

Spittle. 

Urine. 

Dung. 

Sweat. 

Snot. 

Tear. 

Scurf. 



Dos Veftidos, 

Hum veflido, 

Cabdltira, 

Cravat a, 

Chape o, 

Abas do chape o t \_peo> 

Cor dad, owjita^pard o cha- 

Barrete, 

Cdpa y 

Gib do, 

Vejiia, 

Camija, 

Cofaca, 

Cafacdo, 

Calfoens, 

Ceroulas, 

Meas, or meyas, 

Meas de cabrejiilho, 

Ligas, 

Sapatos, 

CJunelas, 

Botas, 

Five las, 

Efporas, 

Bunkos, 

Talim, or taly, 



OfCloaths. 



A fuit of cloaths. 

A wig. 

A cravat or neckcloth. 

A hat. 

The brims. 

A hatband. 

A cap. 

A cloak. 

A doublet. 

A waiftcoat. 

A fhirt. 

A clofe coat. 

A great coat. 

Breeches. 

Drawers. 

Stockings. 

Stirrup {lockings. 

Garters. 

Shoes. 

Slippers. 

Boots. 

Buckles. 

Spurs. 

Ruffles. 

Aihoulder-belL. ? 

Baldric, 



GRAMMAR. 



Boldrie, 

£ spa da, 

Luvas, 

Cinta, 

JLenfO, 

Lenco para o pescogo, 

Samarra, oxpelLote do cdmpo, 



A waift-belt. 

A fword. 

Gloves. 

A girdle. 

Handkerchief. 

A neck handkerchief. 

A fhepherd's jacket. 



Para Molheres. 

Camisa dt molkeres, 
Toucado, 
Say a, 
Mantilha, 

Manto, 



Avental, 

Bracelets, 

Anel, : 

Arrecadas, 

Leque, 

Penteador, 

Toucador, 

Sindes, 

Espelho, 

Regalo, 

Espartilhq, 

Pen, 

Alfinetes, 

Tesoura, 

Dedal, 

Agulha, 

Fzo, 

Fio de perolas, 

Pofoilhos, 

Joy as, 

Cor, 

Palito, 

Roca, 

Fuso, 

Almofadinka para atfinctes, 



For Women, 

A (hi ft, or fmock. 

A head drefs. , 

A petticoat. 

A little cloak women wear on 
their heads. 

A mantle, a kind of cloak 
women wear in Portugal, 
covering their head and the 
upper part of their body- 

An apron, 

bracelets. 

Ring. 

Ear-rings. 

A fan. 

A combing cloth. 

A toilet, a drefling table. 

Patches to wear on one's face. 

A looking-glafs. 

A muff, 

S%s. 

A comb. 

Pins. 

A pair of fciffars. 

A thimble. 

A needle. 

Thread. 

A necklace of pearls. 

Powder. 

Jewels. 

Paint. 

A tooth-pick. 

A diitaff. 

The fpindle. 

Small pincufhion. 

Agulha 



26 



PORTUGUESE 



Agulha de toucdr, 

Fitas, 

Fichu (s'ortt de lenco para o 
p es xo co , 

Tenazinhas, 

Pendcntes, 

Pa'atina, 

Guar da inf ante t ot Guard in- 
fante, 

Veo, 

Ren da, 

Bilros, 

Bilrbs feitos de hjfo, 

Ag'ua da rdinha de Vngria, 

Agoa de cheiro, 

Juftlho, 



Bodkin. 
Ribbon;. ' 
A necklace. 

Nippers. 

Bob, or pendant.": 

Tippet 

Farthingale, or hoop. 

Veil. 

Lace. 

Bobbins. 

Bones. 

Hungary water. 

Seemed water. 

Bodice. 



Os doze Signos Celeries. The twelve Celeflial Signs. 



Aries, 

Touro, 

Gemini or Gemini/, 

Cancer, 

Lead, 

Virgem, 

Libra, 

Escorpiao, 

Sagitario, 

Capri cor mo, 

Aqudrio, 

Peixes, 



Aries, or the ram. 
The bull. 
The twins. 
The crab. 
The lion. 
The virgin. 
The balance. 
The fcorpion. 
The archer. 
The goat. 
The water-bearer. 
The fifties. 



De hiima Cafa e do que lhe 
pertence. 

Cdsa, 

Alichse, 

Parede, 

Tabique, 

Pdteo, or Patio., 

Andur, or sobrddo^ 

Pacha da, 

Jane I la, 



Of a House, and all that be- 
longs to it* 

A houfe. 

Foundation. 

A wall. 

A light brick-wall. 

A court, or yard. 

A floor. 

The front. 

A window. 



Abobada* 



GRAMMAR. 



27 



Abobada, 

As escddas, 

I) eg r a os, 

Tel ha do, 

Tel has, 

Ladrilhos, or tijoles, 

Aposento, 

Antecamara, 

Sdla, 

Ticto, 

Ale ova, 

Bale do, 

Gabinete, 

Almario, 

Gudrda-rcupa, 



Cozinha, 

Despensa, 

Chemine, 

Cava liar z^a, 

Gallinheiro, or casa das gal- 

linhas, 
Pole fro, 
Jar din ) 
Necejfarias, 
Casa bnde se junta, 
Cdmara, or casa em que se 

dorme, 
Sdla da vifitas nos baixos de 

huma casa, 
P6rta, 
Pofigo, 

Liminar, or lumidr, 
Vidrdcas que se poem no tecto 
de huma casa para a alumiar 
Alger oz, 

Beiras, oxdbas do telhddo, 
A couceira da porta, 
Fechadiira, 
Cadeddo, 
Ferrblho, 
Tranca da porta 9 
Ccmo da chdve, 
Chdve mcjlra, 
Guar das dajechadura, 



A vault. 
The flairs. 
Steps. 

A tiled roof. 
Tiles. 
Bricks. 
A room. 
Antichamber. 
A hall. 
A roof. 
An alcove. 
A balcony. 
Clofet. • 
A cupboard. 
Wardrobe. 
A cellar. 
A kitchen. 
A pantry. 
A chimney. 
The liable: 
A hen-houfe, 

A hen-rood. 

A garden. 

The neceiTary-houfe* 

A dining-room. 

Bed-chamber, 

A parlour. 

The door. 
A wicket. 
The threshold. 
Sky-lights. 

The gutter. 

The caves. 

The hinges. 

A lock. 

A padlock. 

The bolt. 

The bar of a door.' 

The pipe of a key. 

A mafter-key. 

The wards of a lock. 



Palhefdd, 



Co* 

Palhttao da chavc, 
Vidraca, 

Escddafeita a carraccl, 
Escdda secreta, 

Viga, 

Parede mejlra, 

Paredes meyas, 

Area, 

Cdma, 

Sobreceo da cama\ 

Cortinas da cdma, 

Lenfoes, 

Cabeceira da cdma, 

Pes da cama, 

Cole ha j 

Colchdo, 

Cobertor, 

Cob er tor de felpa, 

Cdtre pes taboas, &c. de que 

se compem o leito, 
Travesseho, 
Tapete, 
Tap eg aria, 
Pederneira, 
I' sea, 
Mecha, 
Enxergao, 
EJleira, 

Cdens da che?nine, 
F 6 lies, 
TenazeSi 
Ferra, 

Abaho or abanador, 
P an ell a , 
Tefto, 

ji'za da panella,^ 
Ferro para aticar o lume, 
Escumadeira, 
Collier grdnde, 
Caldeira* 

Sertaa, or frigideira, 
Co ad or, 
Grelhas, 
Ralo, 



PORTUGUESE 






flair- 



Key bit. 

The glass of a window. 
A winding flair-case. 
Back-flairs, a private 

case. 
A beam. 
The main wall. 
The party walls. 
Cheft. 
Bed. 

The bed's teller. 
Bed curtains. 
Sheets. 

The bed's head. 
Bed's feet. 

Counterpane, a quilt. 
A matrafs. 
A blanket. 
A rug. 
Bedftead. 



A pillow. 

A carpet. 

Tapeftry. 

A flint. 

Tinder. 

Match. 

A flraw-bed. 

A mat. 

Hand-irons. 

Bellows. 

Tongs. 

A (hovel. 

Fire-fan. 

A pipkin. 

The pot-lid. 

The ear of a pot, er pipkin, 

A poker. 

A fkimmer. 

A ladle, 

A kettle. 

A frying pan. 

A cullender, or ftrainer. 

Gridiron. 

A grater. 



Espctc, 



GRAMMAR. 



29 



Espho, 

Almofariz, 



Mao do almofariz, 

Redoma, 

Balde % 

Sabdd, 

Rod ilka, 

Esfregdo, 

For no, 

Pa do for no y 

Pasculho para alimpar ojo'r- 

no, 
Farinha, 
Trinchante, 
Mordomo, 
Camareiro, 
Camareiro ?nor ) 
Escova, 
Vassoura, 
Despenseiro, 

Pagem, 

Lacdyo, 

Cocke tro, 

Co c heir a, 

Mogo dos cavallos, ou da es- 

trebaria> 
Copeiro, 

Escudeiro de huma Jiddlga, 
A'mo, ou senhor da casa, 
A'ma, ou senkora da casa, 
Grimpa, 

Cores. 

Branco, 

Azuly 

Aziil celeste, or turqui> 

Azulferrete, 

Azul claro, 

Cor de • camurca, 

Amarelo, 

Cor de rosa, 

Cor de palha, 



A fpit. 

A mortar of metal wherein 

things are pounded. 
A peftle. 
A vial. 

A bucket, Or pail. 
Soap. 

A coarfe cloth. 
A difh-clout. 
Oven. 

The peel of the oven. 
A maukin, a coal-rake to 

make clean an oven. 
Meal-flour. 
A carver. 
A fie ward. 
A valet-de-chambre. 
A chamberlain. 
A brufh. 
A broom. 
A butler, a yeoman of the 

larder, a fieward. 
A page. 
A footman. 
A coachman. 
A coach-houie. 
A groom. 

A cup-bearer. 

A lady's gentleman ufher. 

Landlord. 

Landlady. 

Weather-cock. 



Colours, 



White. 
Blue. 

Sky-colour. 
Dark blue. 
Light blue. 
Light yellow. 
Yellow. 
Rofy colour. 
Straw colour. 



Vi 



erae t 



30 



PORTUGUESE 



Verde, 

Cor de verde mar, or verde 

cldro, 
Cor vermclha, 
Cor vermclha muUo viva, or 

c arm in, 
Cor incarnada, 
Cor de came, 
Cor car me sin, 
Cor nfgra, o r p rcta , 
Cor de mel, 

Fiirta cores, or cambidntes, 
Cor viva, 
Cer trijle, 
Cor escura, 
Cor carregdda, 
Cor defogo, 
Par do, 
Cor de<in%a, 
Escarlata, 
Leonddo, 
Cor de laranja, 
Cor de azeitona, 
Roxo, 
Roxo, or cor de aurora', 



Green. 

Plunket colour or fea-green. 

Red colour. 

Carmine, a bright re J colour. 

Carnation colour. 

Flefn colour. 

Crimfon red. 

Black colour. 

A dark yellow. 

A deep changeable colour. 

A lively and gay colour. 

A dull colour. 

A dark colour. 

A deep colour. 

Fire colour. 

Grey. 

Afh colour. 

Scarlet. 

Tawney. 

Orange colour. 

Olive colour. 

Purple, violet. 

Aurora colour. 



Roxo fometimes fignifies red or rosy colour ; particularly 
in poetry, as in Camoens, Canto L Stanza 82. 

Para que ao Portuguez se Ihe tornasse, 
Km roxo sdngiie a dgoa, que bebesse, 



Bellas. 




— - 1 — j> 

Beajls. 


Befta dow'jlica, 




Tame beaft. 


Bejla brdva, 




A wild beaft. 


Befta de rdrga, 




A beaft of burthen . 


Be ft a de sella, 




A beaft for the faddle. • 


Gado, 




Cattle. 


Gado grojfo, 




Great cattle. 


Gado miudo 9 




Small cattle. 


Rtbdnho, 




A flock. 


Manada de gado g 


ro/Jo, 


A herd of big cattle. 


Tcuro, 




, A bull. 


Bezerra, 




Heifer. 



Bezerro, 



GRAMMAR. 



Si 



Bezerro, 

Boy, 

Burro, 

Burra, 

Per co t 

Porca, 

Fdca, 

Eg 6a, 

Cria, 

Potra, 

Cavallo, 

'Cavdllo anao, 

Cavdllo de pojla, 

Garranh&o, or cavdllo de 

Ian g anient o, 
'Cavdllo de aluguel, 
Cavdllo de coche, 
Cavallo que anda de chouto, 
Cavdllo* pequeno que serve 

para senhoras, 
Cavallo que to ma ofreio entre 

denies, 
Cavallo rijo da bora, 
Cavallo doce defreio, 

Cavdllo que tern bra boca, 
Cavdllo que trope/fa, 
Cavdllo espantadico, 
Cavdllo ardente, or fogdzo, 
Cavdllo quemorde e da couces, 
Cavallo rebelldo, 
Cavdllo que ndo sbjfrc dncas, 

Cavdllo mat mandado, 
Cavdllo de albdrda, 
Cavdllo de cdrro, 
Cavdllo de sella, 
Cavdllo de correr, 
Cavallo de guerra, 
Cavdllo ajaezada-y 
Cavdllo de Barb aria, 
Cavallo capddo., 
Cavallo sem ser capado, 
^Cavdllo que da dos folles, 



A calf, a {leer, a young bul- 
lock. 
An ox. 
An afs. 
A flie-afs. 
A hog. 
A fow. 

A young mare, alfo a nag, 
A mare. 
A foal, a filly. 
A colt, or young horfe. 
A horfe. 
A nag. 
A poit horfe. 
A ftailion. 

A hackney -horfe. 
A coach-horfe. 
A jolting- horfe. 
A palfrey. 

A horfe that champs the bit. 

A hard-mouthed horfe. 
A tender mouthed horfe, one 
that eafily fubmits to the curb. 
A horfe that will eat any thing. 
A (fumbling horfe. 
A ftartling-horfe. 
A Irately horfe. 
A biting and kicking horfe. 
A untamed horfe. 
A horfe that will not carry 

double. 
A refKve horfe. 
A pack-horfe. 
A cart-horfe. 
A faddle-horfe. 
A race-horfe. 
A war-horfe. 

A horfe with all his frrniture. 
A Mooriih horfe, a barb. 
A gelding. 
A iione-horfe. 
A broken- winded horfe. 

Cavdllo, 



32 



POR TUGUESE 



Cavdllo quatrdlvo, 

Cavdllo alazad, 
Cavdllo baio, 
C avail o caJldnho % 
Cavallo bdio e cajldnho, 
Cavdllo rocim, 
Cavdllo rcmendado, 
Cavdllo rudo or rujfo porxeU 

lano, 
Cavallo quefcffre ancas, 
Cavdllo trota'o, 
Cavdllo que ferve para anddr 

a caga, 
Cavdllo que an da defurtapdjfo 
Cdo, 

Cao de quinta, 
Cad de caca, 
Cad de dgoa, 
Cao de gddo, 
Cdo de m6Jlra % podengo, or 

perdigueirOy 
Cdo dejila, 
Cdo facador, 
Cho de bufca t 
A lady 
GdlgOy 
Cad para cacdr rapozas e Ion- 

tras, 
Cachorrinho, 
Cachorrinko defralda, 
Cachorro, 

Mu mdcho, or mula t 
Mula, 
Cor fa, 

Cdrfa de tres dnnos, 
Corco de dous annos, 
Corco, 

Corco ou com de hum £nno, 
Gdmo t 
Veado* 

CaBra montez, 

Veado grdnde de cinco bnnos, 
Doninha, 
Teixugo t or texugo, 



A horfe that has four white 

feet. 
A forrel horfe. 
A bay horfe. 

A chefnut-coloured horfe. 
A chefnut bay. 
A worthlefs nag, a poor jade. 
A dapple horfe. 
A dapple-grey horfe. 

A double horfe. 
A trotting-horfe. 
A italking-horfe. 

A pad, an easy-paced horfe. 

A dog. 

A houfe dog. 

A hound. 

A water fpaniel. 

A (hepherd's dog. „ 

A fetting dog. 

A great cur, a maftifF dog. 

A dog tumbler. 

A finder. 

A bull-dog. 

A greyhound* 

A terrier. 

A little puppy* a whelp= 
A lap-dog. 
A little dog. 
A he-mule. 
A (he-mule. 
A (he-deer, a doe. 
A fpade. 
A pricket. 
A wild buck. 
A fawn. 
A fallow deer* 
A (lag. 

A wild (he-goat. 
Ahart. 
A weafel. 
A badger, 

Gatff, 



GRAMMA R. 



33 



"Gato de a/gdlza, 

Doninha de rabo muifclpudo, 
a mo do de rapcfa, 

Elephdnte, 
t Foinka,fuinha 9 or marta, 

Arminho^ 

Ourifo cackeiro, 

ArganaZ) 

Rdto, 
' Rapbfa, 
Lobo, 
Rata da I'ndia^ 

For ad, 

Toupeira^ 

Lead, 

Leoa, 

Rdto cheirofo^ 

Leopardo, 

U'rfo, * 

Uwfa % 

U'rfo pequeno, 

Tigre, 

Poco montez, 



A civet cat, 
A fquirrel. 



An elephant. 

A marten, or inartern. 

An ermin. 

An hedge- hog. 

A .dormoufe. 

A rat, 

A fox. 

A wolf. 

A rat of India of the bignefs 

of a cat. 
A ferret. 

A mole. 
A lion. 
A lionefs. 
A mu/k cat, 
A leopard* 
A he-bear, 
A (he bear. 
A bear's cub, 
A tiger. 
A wild bear. 



Das coufas do Campo, 

Cdfa do campo, or quinta, 
Cdfa de lavrador^ 
■Quintetra, 
Boyeiro, 

Vaqueiro, 

Porqueiro i 

Pajtor, 

Surrdo, 

Cajado, 

Pajiora, 

Herddde ) 

Hcrto/do, 
Hortalica, 
Cava do r, 
Vinhateiro, 



*c 



Of country affairs. 

A country houfe. 

A farm-houfe. 

A hulbandman, a farmer. 

A herdfman, he that ploughs 

with oxen, or tends them. 
A cow-keeper. 
A fwine-herd. 
A fhepherd. 
A fcrip, or fmall bag. 
A fheep-book. 
A fhepherdefs. 
A great or large field, a wide 

arable ground, 
A gardener. 
All forts of herbage. 
A ditcher. 
A vine drefler. 

Lavrador, 



PORTUGUESE 



34 

Lav r ad or, 

Pdjlos, 



Arddo, 

Ferro do arrddo, 

Rdbo do arrddo, 

Abegad, or official que fa% 

arados* 
Aguilhdda, 
Enfinho, 
Grade, 
Semeador, 

Rofador, 

Fouce rogadoura, 

Fouce, 

Poddo, 

Sega dor, 

Mangodl t - 
F ore ado, 

Cacad6r i 

Fife a dor, 

Rego, 

Terra quefica levantdda en- 

ire dous regos, 
Outeiro, 

Monte, or montdnha, ■ 
Vdlle ; 
ha go a, 



Ldgo, 
Ribeiro, 



Ribein'nho, 
Piano, or planecie, 
Penha, or rOcka, 
Penhdfco, 
Deferto, 



A farmer, one who cultivates 
ground, whether his own 
or another's. 

Feeding ground, pafture, 
fheep-walk. 

A plough. 

The plough-fhare. 

The plough-handle. 

A plough-wright. 

A goad. 
A rake. 
A harrow. 
A fower. 
_JY weeder. 
A weeding-hook. 
A fcythe, or fickle. 
A pruning-knife. 
A reaper, or mower, harveft 

man. 
A flail. 
A prong to call up {heaves of 

corn with. 
A huntfman. ■ 
A fiflierman. 
A furrow. 
. A balk, or ridge of land be- 
tween two furrows. 
A bill. 
A mountain. 
A valley. 

A- moor, fen, or marfh, a 
Handing water, but fome- 
times dry. 
A lake or itanding pool, but 

always full of water. 
A brook, a ftream of water, 
with a gentle or natural 
current. 
A rivulet, a flreamlet. 
A plain. 
A rock. 
A great rock. 
A defert or wildernefs. 

Despen- 



GRAMMAR, 



33 



Despenhadezro, 


A precipice. 


Bosque, 


A wood. 


Bosque pequeno, ' 


A grove, or thicket. 


Peddgo de chad sem drvores, 


A glade in a wood. 


dentro de ku?n bosque, 




Pomdr, or vergel, 


An orchard. 


Prddo, 


A meadow. 


Ramdda, 


A bower. 


Fonte, 


A fountain. 


Trigo, 


Wheat. 


Trigo can dial, 


The beft wheat. 


Trigo bretdnha, 


Red wheat. 


Cente'o, 


Rye. 


Ferdd, 


Meflin, mixed corn, as wheat 




and rye, &c. 


Treme'z, 


The corn of three months 




growth. 


Espelta, 


Spelt. 


Espiga, 


Ear of corn. 


Cabfga da espiga, 


The grain at the top of the 




ear of corn. 


Bainha, donde sdbe a espiga 


The cod, or hulk in which 


depots de formdda, 


the ear of corn is lodged. 


Legumes ', 


Pulfe. 


G rats, * 


Spamfli peafe. 


Lentil ha, 


A lentil. 


Tramsgo, or tremogo, 


A lupine. 


Feij:ens, 


French-beans. 


Feijd) sap at a, or bdjes, 


Kidney-beans. 


Feijdo jradinho, 


A fort of fmall French beans 




with a black fpot. 


Ckichdro, 


Chichlings. 


Car ret a , 


A waggon. 


Cdrro, 


A cart. 


Rod-i, 


A wheel. 


Caimbas, 


The felloes of the wheel. 


E'ixo, 


The axle-tree. 


Rdyo da roda, 


The fpoke of a wheel. 


Currdl de boys, 


An ox-ftall. 


Currdl de ovelhas, 


A fheep-fold. . 


Currdl de cdbras, 


A houfe for goats. 


Chiquciro de porcQS^ 


Ahog's-fty/ 


E'rva, 


Grafs. 


Trigo ern e'rva, 


Green corn. 




* C 2 Seara 



So 



PORTUGUESE 



Sear a, 


i 


Standing corn. 


Tdrro, 




A milk-pail. 


Cine ho, 




A cheefe-vat, to make cheefe 


E nx a da, 




in. 
A mattock, a hoe. 


Enxaddo, or alvido, 


A two pronged fork. 


Cdnga, 




A yoke for oxen. 


Cangalhos, 




The arms of the yoke ufed 
for oxen. 


Sebe, 




A hedge or fence. 


quefaz se'bes, 




Hedger. 


Fbuce rogadbura 


de que uzdo 


Hedging, bill. 



pardfazir sebes, 
Tempo de iosqina c afe'fta que 

nellefdzem cs rujlicos, 
Cantiga dos segadores despots, 
de a cab a do o tempo da siga, 
fdrca, 
Mat a, 
Mdto, 

Leira, or taboleiro, 

Chbrro de ago a, 

V ere da, 

Rd/io, 

Qejla, 

Cabdz, 

Cabana, or choupdna, 

Cabdco, 



The flieep -{hearing, the time 

of (hearing fheep. 
Harveft home. 

A bramble. 

A thicket, a foreft. 

A place where many fhrubs 

grow. 
A bed in a garden. 
A water-fpout. 
A path. 
The track. 
A bafket. 
A frail, a pannier. 
A cottage, a hut. 
A dry hollow ground ufed to 

keep feeds in. 



Coufas pertencentes a. 
Guerra. 

Servigo, ou vida militdr, 
Militdr, ou servir na guerra, 
Artilharia,artelharia, Ou ar- 

tilheria, 
Canhdo, oupe'g a de ar tilth aria, 
Canhdo defirro, 
Canhdo de bronze, 
Alma do canhdo, 
Fogdo do canhdo^ 
Culdtra^do canhdo* 



Things relating to War. 



Warfare. 

To go a warfaring. 

Artillery. 

A cannon. 

Iron cannon. 

Brafs cannon. - 

The mouth of a cannon. 

The touch-hole of a cannon* 

The breech of a cannon. 

Botaa, 



GRAM M A R. 



37 



Botao, ou extremidade da The pummel 

culdtra, 
Balas encadeadas, 
Bala de canhao, 



Car r eta do canhao, 

P 6 Ivor a, 

Meyho canhao, 

Canhao dobrddo, 

Canhao para hater huma 

prafd, 
Canhao de vinte e quutro, 
Calibre, 
Car re gar, 
Escorvar, 
Fazer pontaria, 
Petrechos, or municoens de 

guerra, 
Encravar huma pega, 
Descavalgdr huma ptca, 
Despardr, 
Tiro de p'ega, 
Trem de artilharia, 
Colubrina, 
Falconete, 
Petdrdo, 
Pedreiro, 

Bomb a, 

Bombdrda, 

Morteiro, 

Granada, 

Espingarda, 

PijUla, 

Carabina, 

Mosquete, 

Machadinha, . 

Langa, 

Alabdrda, 

Partasana, 

Pique, 

Caldr os piques para" rejijlir 

a cavalaria, 
Alfdnge, 
Espdda, 



Chain-fhots. 

A cannon bullet, cannon- 
ball., or carfnon-fhot. 
The carriage of a cannon. 
Gun-powder. 
A demi-cannon. 
A double cannon. 
A cannon for battery. 

A fwenty-four pounder. 

Caliber. 

To load. 

To prime. 

To level. 

Military ftores. 

To nail up a gun. 

To difmounta gun. 

To fire. 

A cannon (hot. 

The train of artillery. 

A culverin. 

A falconet. 

A petard. 

A fwivel gun, pederero, or 

paterero. 
A bomb. 

A great gun, a bombard. 
A mortar-piece. 
A granade. 
A firelock. 
A piftol. 
A carabine. 
A mufket. 
A battle-ax. 
A lance. 
An halbert. 
A partizan. 
A pike. 
To prefent the pikes againft 

the cavalry. 
Scymeter. 
A fword. 



c 3 



Desembainhar 



38 



PORTUGUESE 



Desanbainhdr a espada s 
Punho da e spa da, 
Mac da da espdda, 
Guar 7ii$ 0.0 da espdda, 
Folha da espdda, 
Meter mad a espada, 

Matdr, 

Ferir, 

Desbaratdr, 

Saquedr, 

Punka I, 

Bayoncta, 

Calar a bayoncta, 

Capacete, 

Morrido, 

Viseira, 

Gorjal, or go/a, 

Peito dt armas, 

Gourde a, 

Espalddr, 

Cojfolcte, 

Broquel, 

Escudo, 

A dag a, 

Say a de mdlha, 

Rey de drmas, 

Arduto, 
General^ 
Tenente general, 
Sargcnto mor de batalha, 
Sargento, 
S 'argent o mor, 
Mariscdl, or marichal, 
Mejlre de cdmpo general, 
Cpranei, 

Mejlro de xdmpo, 
CoronU de infant aria, 
Official de guerra, 
Brigadtiro, 
Tenente corknel, 
Ajudante de s argent o mor, 
Ajuddnte de tenente de mejire 
de cdmpo, 



To unfheath the fword. 

The handle of a fword. 

The pommel ot a fword. 

The hilt of a fword. 

The blade of a fword. 

To clap one's hand on one's 

fword. 
To kill. 
To wound. 
To rout. 
To fack. 
A poniard. 
A bayonet. 
,To fix the bayonet in the 

mufket. 
A head-piece, or helmet. 
A morrion. 

The vizor of an helmet. 
The gorget. 
A breaft- plate, 
A cuirafs. 
The back-plate. 
A corflet. 
A buckler. 
A flrield. 

Dagger, a fhort fword. 
A coat of mail. 
The king at arms, or king of 

heralds. 
A herald. 
A general. 

A lieutenant general. 
A major general. 
A ferjeant. 
Major. 
Marmal. 

Mafier de camp general. 
Colonel. 

Mafier de camp. 
Colonel of foot. 
An officer. 

Brigadier. » 

Lieutenant-colonel. 
Adjutant. 
Aid decamp. 

Capi tad 



GRAMMA R. 



39 



€apitdo, 

Pbjlo de capitdo, 

Tenente, 

Corneta, 

Alferes, 

Bandar as, 

Eft and arte, 

Alferes de cavalaria que traz 

o ejlandarte, 
Pag ad or, 
Provedbr, dos mantimentos 

de hu?na armada, 
Commijfdrio, 
Commijfdrio gerdl, 
Engenheiro, 

Aposentador do exercito, 
Cdbo dees quadra, 
Tambor, ou caixa, 
Tambor ou o que tocatambor, 
Baguitas, 
Cor deis de tambor, " 
Teques do tambor, 
Tocdr o tambor, 
Ahordda, ou general, 

Moflra, 

Pajfar moftra, 

Trombeta, 

Trombeteiro, ou trombeta, 

Pifdno, 

Soldo, 

So I dado, 

Soldddo que ejld de sentinella, 

Entrdr de guar da, 

Sentinella, 

Render a guar da, sentinellas, 

8cc. 
Bio car, or bloquedr, 
Infante, or soldddo de pi, 
Granadeiro, 
Bigodes, 
Drag a^i, 

Soldddo de cavdllo, 
M on tar a c avail o, 



Captain. 

Captaincy or captainfhip. 

Lieutenant. 

Cornet. 

Enfign. 

Colours. 

Standard. 

Standard-bearer. 

Agent. 
Purveyor. 

CommiiTary. 

Mutter-mailer. 

Engineer. 

Ouarter-mafler* 

Corporal. 

Drum. 

A drummer. 

Drum-flicks. 

Drum-firings. 

The beats of a drum. 

To beat a drum. 

The general, one of the beats 
of the drum. 

Mufler. 

To mufler, to review forces. 

A trumpet. 

A trumpeter. 

A filer or fife. 

Wages, or pay for foldiers. 

A foldier. 

Soldier on duty. 

To mount, or go upon the 
guard. 

Duty, centinel. 

To relieve the guard, &c. 

To block up. 
A foot foldier. 
Grenadier. 
Whifkers. 
Dragoon. 

Trooper, or cavalier. 
To get on horfeback. 
C 4 Guar da 



40 



PORTUG UESE 



Apedr se, 

Guar da da pejfoa real, or 

archeiro, 
Cavalleiro armddo de couraga, 
Mosqueleiro, 
Soldddo com espingarda, 
Alabardeiro^ 
Genisero, 

So Ida do armddo com lanca, 
Soldddo que leva pique, or 

piqueiro, 
Be/ieiro, ou soldddo queptle- 

ja com be/la y 
Ga/ladsr, 

Mineiro, ou minador, 
Bambardeiro, 
O tiro da artdharia, ou o 

espdeo que a ^bala despa- 

rdda corre> 
Artilheiro, 

A arte da artilharia, 

General da artilharia, 

Aventureiro, 

Recrutas, 

Explorador, ou corredor de 

exercito, 
Espia, 
que live viveres do exercito, 

ou vivandeiro, 
Soldddo quejciz correrias, 

Atabdle, 

Jnfanterta, 

Cavalaria, 

C aval aria ligeira, 

Van guar da, 

Corpo de batalha, 

Retagudrda, 

Corpo de reserva, 

Corpo de gudrda, . 

Pique te, 

Ala. 



To alight. 
Life-guard-man. 

Cuiraflier. 

Mufketeer. 

Fufeiier. 

Halberdier. 

Janiffary. 

A fpearman. 

A pikeman. 

Crofs-bow-man. 

A pioneer. 
Miner. 

A bombardier. 
Gunftiot, or the fpace to 
which a fhot can be thrown. 



Batalhdd) 



Matrofs, alfo a gunner, or 

cannoneer. 
Gunnery. 

General of the artillery. 
A volunteer. 
Recruits. 
Scout. 

Spy. 
Sutler. 

A marauder, a foldier that 

goes a marauding. 
Kettle-drum. 
The infantry. 
Cavalry. 
Light- horfe. 
The vanguard. 
The main body of an army. 
The rear. 

The corps de referve. 
The corps de guard. 
The piquets of an army, or 

piquet guard. 
The wing of an army. 
Battalion. 

De/lacamentc, 



GRAMMAR. 



41 



Dejlacamento, 

RegvntntVy 

Companhia> 

Esquadrdo, 

Mochila, 

Bagdgem, ou bag age, 

Batedbres do cdmpo, 

Almdzem, ou armdzem, 

Mural has, 

Amca, ou ameya, 

Parapeito, 

Cajlello, 

Forte, 

Fdrtaliza, 

Fortijicagdi, 

Torre, 

Citadel la, 

Baluc.rte, 

Fileira, 

Cortina, 

Meya hi a, 

Troneira, 

Terra-plena, 

Rebelhn, ou Revelim, 

Contrascdrpa, 

Barreira, 

Falsabrdga, 

Guarita, 

Casamata, 

Corredor,owejlradacncoberta 

Cejloens, 

Ejlacdda, ou palijfada, 

Reduto, 

At a lay a, 

Mdnta, ou Mantelete, 

Faxina, 

Mina, 

Contramina, 

Fazer vodr a mind, 

Trincheira, 

Abrir as trincheiras, 

Real, 

Vivere j,ou munigoens de boca. 



Detachment 

Regiment. 

A company. 

A fquadron. 

Knapfack. 

Baggage. 

Difcoverers. 

Armory. 

Walls/ 

A battlement. 

The parapet. 

A cattle. 

A fort. 

A fortrefs. 

Fortification. 

A tower. 

A citadel. 

Bulwark. 

A file. 

A curtain. 

Halt moon. 

A loop-hole; 

A rampart* 

A ravelin. 

Counterfcarp. 

A barrier. 

A faufsbraye. 

A ditch. 

A centry-box. 

A cafemate. 

The covert way. 

Gabions. 

A palifade. 

A redoubt. 

A watch tower. 

A mantelet, or cover for men 

from the {hot, 
Fafcines. 
A mine. 
A countermine. 
To fpring a mine. 
A trench. 

To open the trenches. 
Camp. 
Provifions. 

Bisonho, 



42 



PORTUGUESE 



Bisinho, 
Batdlka, 
Dar batdlha, 
Escaramilca, 
Sitio, 
Ou art el, 
Encamisdda, 
Sort/da, 
Bater, 
Brecka, 
Pont ad, 
Esc aid da, 
Affdlto, 
Dar a[fdlto, 
Tomdr por ajfalto, 
Chamdda, 
Capitular, 
Capltulaqdo, 
Tregoas, 
Guamifdo, 
Prebcjle, 
PreboJU- general, 
Leva, 
Levant dr soldddos, oufazer 

leva de gente, 
Levantdr o fiiio, 
Levantdr o cdmpo, 
AJfentdr o cdmpo, 
Cdmpo voldnte, 
Camp an ka, 
Mete'r-se em ca?npdnha, . 

Guerrcdr, 

Pe'ca de campdnha, 

Forrdgem, 

Quartets de inverno, 

Dar quartel, 

Aquarteldr-se, 

Mar char, 

Marchdr com bandeiras des- 

pregddas, 
Tocdr a recolke'r, 
Entregdr kuma prdca, 



A new foldier. 

A battle. 

To give battle. 

A fkirmifh. 

A fiege. 

A quarter. 

A camifado. 

A fally. 

To batter. 

A breach. 

A pontoon. 

An efcalade. 

An affault. 

To florai. 

To take by ftorm. 

The chamade. 

To capitulate. 

Capitulation. 

Truce. 

Garrison. 

A provoft. 

A provoft- marfhal. 

Levy. 

To raife men, to levy, or raise 

foldier s. 
To raife the fiege. 
To decamp. 
To pitch one's camp. 
A -flying camp. 
A campaign. 
To begin the campaign, to 

op6n the field. 
To war, 
A field-piece. 
A forage. 
Winter quarters. 
To give quarters. 
To take quarters. 
To march. 
To march with flying colours 

To found a retreat. 
To furrender a place. 



Navegagdd, 



GRAMMA R- 



43 



Navegacao, 



Navigation. 



Ndvio, 


A fhip. 


Ndo, 


A large (hip. 


Ndo de gu'erra, 


A man of war. 


Nao de carga, ou mercantzl, 


A merchant-fhip, a mer- 




chantman. 


Ndvio veleiro, 


A very good Taller, or a fhip 




that fails well. 


Ndvio ronceiro, 


A bad failer. 


Gale, 


A galley. 


Galeae* a, 


A galleafs. 


Galedo, 


A galleon. 


Galeuta, ou galeoto, 


A- galliot, a fmall galley. 


Co mitre, 


The boatswain of a galley. 


Frag at a, 


A frigate. 


Carrdca, 


A carrack. 


FuJU, 


A foift. 


Pindca, 


A pinnace. 


Bdrca de paffugevii 


A ferry-boat. 


Bdrco, 


A boat. 


Bdrca, 


A bark, a great boat. 


Canoa, 


A canoe. 


Gondola, 


Gondola, a fmall boat, much 




ufed in Venice. 


Esquife, 


A fkifF. 


Ckalupa, ou balandra t 


A floop. 


Chalupa pequena, 


A fhallop. 


Bergantim y 


A brigantine, or brig. 


Balsa, 


A float. 


Capitdna, 


The admiral's fhip. 


Almirdnta, 


The vice-admiral's fhip. 


Armada, 


A fleet, a navy. 


Frota, 


A fleet of merchant mips. 


Es quadra , 


A fquadron, part of a fleet. 


A bordo, 


A-board. 


Popa, 


The poop,, ftern, or Peerage. 


Proa, 


The prow, or head. 


Be fas de proa para dar cdga 


Chafe guns. 


ao mi?nigo i 




Tartdna, 


A tartan. 


Brulote, 


A fire-fhip. 


Patdxo, 


A patache. 


Falua, 


A felucca. 


Battl, or bateira^ 


A fmall bark, a wherry. • 




Caravela^ 



44 



PORTUGUESE 



Car av ela, 

Sorte de patdxo para servifo 

de huma ndo ae guerra que 

he mayor delle, 
Ndo de linha, 
Gudrda-cljla, 
Galecta da qudlse lancam as 

bombas, 
Ndvio que serve para andar 

a corso, 
Corsdrzo, 
Hydcle, 

Ndvio de transporte, 
Ndo da India Oriental, 
Ndo da India Occidental, 
Sorte de embar cacao pequena 
Hollandka de hum so mafia, 
Ndvio para levdr carvdo, 
Embar cagoens peauenas, 
Embar cacao, ou bar co grdnde 

que serve para levdr fa- 

zendas a bordo, 
Embar ca^do grdnde, ou ca- 

ravela, que serve pa yd 

commercedr pella cofta, 
Embar cacao de avizo, 
Paquete, 
Bar co de pescdr^ 
Ldncha, 
Remos, 
Pa do re mo, 
Sentina, 
Ldftro, ou lafto, 
Lajldr, ou lanfdr laftro do 

ndvio, 
Ma/to, or drvore t 
Mdjlo grdnde, 
Afdfio de mezena, 
Mafto da traquete, 
Majio do guar apes 9 
Gave a, 

Oitilha, 

Vcrga, ou entina, 



A caravel, 
A tender. 



A line of battle -fliip. 
A guard-fhip. 
Bomb-ketch. 

A cruifer. 

A privateer. 

Yacht. 

A tranfport. 

Eaft-India-man. 

Weft-India-fhip. 

A Dutch dogger. 

A collier. 
Small craft. 
A barge. 



A fly-boat, a large veflel ufed 
in the coafling trade. 

Advice-boat. 

Packet-boat. 

A fifhing-boat, or bufs. 

Cock-boat, a fcull. 

Oars. 

The blade of the oar. 

The well. 

Ballaft. 

To ballaft a {hip. 

A mail. 

The main-maft. 

The mizen-maft. 

The fore-maft. 

The bowfprit, or boltfprit. 

The round-top, main-top, or 

fcuttle of a maft. 
The keel. 
A yard. 

Laiz, 



GRAMMAR. 



45 



Laiz, ou extremidddes das 
vergas, 

Pranchas, que cobremos cos- 
todos do ndvio da parte 
defora, 

Vela, * 

Vela me fir a, or a veld do 
mcfio grande, 

Vela da Gavea, 

Vela do joanete do mdflo 
grdnde, 

Papafigos, 

Mezena, 

Gala, ou vela de cima da me- 
zena, 

Traauete, 

Velacho, 

Joanete do traauete, 

Cevadeira, 

Vela la tin a, 

Fazerjorca de vela, 

Majiareos, 

Maftareo da mezena, ou ma- 

Jlareo da gat a, 
Portinhola, 
Bandeiras, 

Fldmmulas ou galhardetes, 
Agulha de mar ear, 
Bit d cola, 

Cojiuras do ndvio, 
Leme, 

Can a do leme, 
Cuberta, 
Cuberta corrida, 
Escotilhas, 
Escotilhdo, 

Cajlello de popa t 
Cafiello de proa, 
Garrdr a an cor a. 



A'ncora, 



The yard-arms. 
Side-planks, or fide of a {hip. 



A fail. 

The main fheet. 

The main-top-fail. 
Main-top-gallant-fail. 

The mizen and fore- fail, 
Mizen fail. 
Mizen-top-fail. 

The fore-fail. 

The fore-top-fail. 

The fore-top gallant-fail. 

Thefprit-fail. 

A moulder of mutton fail. 

To crowd the fail. 

The topmafts, or top-gallant- 

mafts. 
Mizen-top-mafl. 

A port-hole. 
The colours. 
Streamers, pendants. 
The mariner's compafs* 
Bittacle. 

The seams of a fliip. 
Helm, or rudder. 
The whip, or whip-flafF. 
Deck. 

Flufti fore and aft. 
i The hatches ; fcuttles. 
A room by the hatches, ta 

keep the provifions. 
The hind cattle. 
The fore caflle. 
To drive ; or when a ihip 

drags on her anchor. 
The anchor. 



By vela is oftentimes meant the ship itself. 



Mctc, 



46 



PORTUGUESE 



Meier a dncora na lancha, 
ou bote depots de levant dla, 

A'ncora de rebbque, 

A'ncora de esperanca, 

U'nhas da ancora, 

A' r go la da ancora, 

E/tar a dncora a-piouc, 

Amarra, 

Picdr, ou coridr as amdrras, 

Sbnda, ou prumo, 

Cutelos, 

Mart, 

Bo sin a, 

Prepardr hum navio, de ve- 
to s, cor das, &c. 

Pllbto, 

Escrivdd, 

Pilotdgem, 

Carta de mar ear, 

Capitdo, 

Capitd'o tenente, 

Contrame/lre, 

Marinheiro, 

Camarbte, 

Marinheiro que he camardda 
ou pertence dames mo rancho 

Torment a , 

Borrasca, 

Bondnca, 

Calm aria, 

Vento em popa, 

Navio arrasado em popa, 

Derrbta, 
Alar a bo Una, 

Ir pel a bo Una, 

No da bo Una, 
Barlavento, 
Gaiihcr o barlavento, 
Barlaventidr, ou deitdr a 

barlavento, 
Sotavtnto, 



To boat the anchor. 

A kedger. 

Sheet anchor. 

Flooks. 

The ring of an anchor. 

Is for the anchor to be a-peak, 

A cable. 

To cut the cables. 

Sounding lead. 

Studding fails. 

The tide. 

A fpeaking trumpet. 

To rig a fhip. 

Pilot, or fteerfman, 

A purfer. 

Pilotage. 

Sea-chcirt. 

A captain. 

Firft lieutenant. 

A boatfwain. 

A failor. 

A cabin. 

A melTmate. 

A tempeft. 

A ftorm. 

Fair weather. 

Calm. 

The wind full a-flern, a fore- 
wind. 

A fhip that fails before the 
wind. 

The course, or way of a fhip. 

To (harp the main bowling, 
to haul up the bowling. 

To tack upon a wind, fail 
upon a bowline. 

The bowling knot. 

Windward. ; 

To get the wind. 

To ply to windward. 



Leeward. 



Ef covins. 



GRAMMAR. 



47 



Escovens, 

Escotas, 

Vela?ne, cordas, e o mdis que 

he necejfdrio para preparer 

humnavio, 
Cor da, 
Enxdrcias, 
Arribdr, 
Bombbrdo, 
E/iibbrdo, 
L6 y 
Meter de 16, 

Bomba y 

Ddr a bomba, 

Bdlde para deitar ago a na 
bomba, 

Escuma que sake da bomba de- 
pots de ter tirado a dgoa, 

Navio, cuja agoa se nao pode 
tirar com a bomba, 

Manga de cburopor bnde sake 
a ago a da bomba^ 

Brdfo da bomba t 

Far 61, 

Vento, 



Hawfers. 
Tacks. 

Tackle, or tackling, the rig- 
ging of a fhip. 

A rope. 

Shrouds. 

To put into a harbour. 

Larboard. 

Starboard. 

Loof. 

To loof, or keep the {hip 

nearer the wind. i 

A pump. 
To pump. 
Pump-can. 

Pump-fuck. 

A fhip that is floaked. 

Pump-dale. 

The pump-handle. . 
Li^ht, or lantern* 
Wind. 



Rosa da Agulha, ou dos 
Ventos- 



writ, 

Norte 4 a a nordeJie s 

Nor nordejie, 

Nordejle 4* a norte, 

Nordejle, 

Nordifte'f alejle, 

Les nord(fte, 

Lejie 4* a nordejle, 

Lejte, 

Lejie • 4 a a suejie, 

Les suejie, 

Suejie 4 a a lejie, 

Suejie, 

Suejie 4* a sul, 



The Fly of the Mariner': 
Compajs, 

North. 
N. by E. 
,N. N. E. 
M. E. by N, 
N. E. 

N. E. by'E* 
E. N, E. 
E. by N. 
Eaft. 
E. by S. 
E. S. E. 
S. E. by E. 
S. E. 
S. E. by S. 



Susuejit 



48 



PORTUGUESE 



Susue'ste, 

Sul 4 51 a sueste, 

Sul, 

Sul 4 a a sudoeste, 

Susudoeste, 

Sudoeste 4 3 sul, 

Sudoeste, 

Sudoeste 4* a oeste, 

Oe's sudoeste, 

Oeste 4 a a sudoeste, 

Oeste, ' 

Oeste 4* a nor oeste, 

Oe's nor oeste, 

Nor oeste 4* a oeste, 

Nor oeste, 

Noroeste 4* a norte. 

Nor nor oe's te, 

Norte 4 a a noroeste, 

Ventv travejfdb, ou travcjfia, 
Dar a embarcacdo a travez, 

Pairar, 

Espordo, 

C other hum cdbo, 

Largdr mais cabo+ 

Abrir agoa, 

Fazer a go a da, 

Arpab, 

Arpdr hum ndvio, 

Fatexa, 

Pedaco de Una bredda que se 
poem do redox do mdjlo e 
das bomb as para que a 
agoa ndo penitre^ 

Pajfadbr, 

Cor da com que sep rinde bote, 
ou lane ha dpopa do ndvio, 
Apito, 
Abadernas, 
Abita, 
Emprodr, 



S. S. E. 

S. by E. 

South. 

S. by W. 

S. S. W. 

S. W. by S. 

S.W. 

S. W. by W. 

w. s. w. 

W. by S. 
Weft. 
W. by N- 
W. N. W. 
N. W. by W. 
N. W. 
N. W. by N. 
N. N. W. 
N. by W. 

Contrary wind. 

To hull. 

To ply to and again in one'* 

ftation. 
Beak. 

To coil a cable. 
To pay more cable. 
To leak, or fpring a leak. 
To take in frefh water. 
A grapple. 
To grapple a fhip. 
Grapple. 
Tarpaulin. 



A fidd, or pin of iron to open 

the itrands of xopes. 
Boat-rope, or gift-rope. 

A boatfwain's calk 

Nippers. 

Bits. 

To fleer right forward, td 
turn the prow ftraight for- 
ward. 



G ulnar, 



GRAMMAR. 



49 



Crinnar o navio, 

Parte superior, ou mats alta 

da popa de hum navio, 
Apagafanoes, 
Arreigddas, 
~ Brioes, 
Barredouras, 
Bartidouro, 
Bajldrdos, 
Bigota, 
Botalos, 
Bracedr, 
Brdgos, 

Bragueiro, or vergueiro, 
Brandaes, 
Bit far day, 
Cacholas, 
Caddjie, 
Caderndl, 

Cavernas, 

Colhedores, 

Compajfdr hum navio, 

Cojfouros, , 

Craca, 

EJlar hum navio lane ado a 

bdnda, 
Cabrejiante, 
Dar cdga, 
Curvas, 

Me/as da guarnifad, 
De/a/ire, 
Enbornaes, 
Fordo, 
Mdca, 
Convez, 

Camarete do cirurgiuo, , 
FrUe, 
Carga, 
O'rdem que o capital/ recebe 

para dar a vela, 
A ace am de imbarcdr Je, 
Dejhnbdrque, 
Embargo, 



To yaw or make yaws; 
The tafferek 

Leech-lines. 

Puttocks. 

Bunt lines. 

Bow-ftudding-fails: 

Boat's fkit. 

Parrels. 

A dead-eye. 

Studding-fail-boOms» 

To brace; 

Braces. 

The rudder's rope. 

Baek-ftays. 

Breaft-hooks. 

Cheeks. 

Stand-pofh 

A large block with more than 

one (hive. 
The floor-timbers. 
Lines of the (hrouds. 
To trim a (hip. 
Trucks. 
The foulnefs of the (hip's 

bottom. 
Is for a fhip to heel. 

The capftan. 

To chafe. 

The knees. 

Chain-wales. 

Boat's fkit. 

Scupper-holes. 

The hold of a fhip; 

Hammock. 

Deck or quarter-deck. 

Cockpit. 

Freight. 

Cargo* 

Sailing orders. 

Embarkation. 

Difembarking. 

Embargo. 



D 



Ancoragzm s 



50 



PORTUGUESE 



Ancorage?n, 
Batalha naval, * 
Caravela mexeriqueira, ou de 

ejpia, 
Arriar, ou arrear, 
Arrear as velas, 
An- ear bandeira, 
Levantarferro, levdrancoras 

levar ferro, levar-Je, ou 

levar, 
Leva, 

Bokdr a pe'$a, 

Pega de leva, 

Rebocdr, oulevdrde reboque, 

Fazer cojiuras, 

Pajfagem, 

Pafageiro, 

Pidgem, 

Naviocujo capital tern cartas 

de repres alias, 
Querendr hum ndvio, 
Brear as cojiuras do ndvio, 
liar d cojla, 
Solucdr a ndo 9 

Naufragdr, 

Naufrdgio, 

Patrao, ou meflre de not, 

Carpenteiro de navies, x 

EJialeiro, 

Embarcar, 

Embarcar, 

Grumeie, 

Rapdz que ferve como moco 

do navio, 
Rapaz quefirve do capital, 
Calafaie, 

Calafetdr hum navioi 
Calafeto t 



Anchorage. 

Sea-fight. 

A (hip fof efpiaL 

To veer. 
To ftrike fail* 
To ftrike the flag. 
To weigh anchor. 



The a£tion of weighing cr 
taking up the anchor. 

To move a gun towards (lar- 
board or larboard. 

The fignal gun. 

To tow. 

To fplice. 

Paffage. 

Passenger. 

Voyage. 

Letters of marque. 

To careen a (hip. 
To pay the feams of a (hip. 
To run a-ground or on more. 
Is for a fhip to roll, or to float 

in rough water. 
To fuffer a wreck, to be 

wrecked. 
Shipwreck. 
Shipmafter. 
Shipwright. 
Stock. 
To fhip. 
To go aboard, to take fhip- 

ping. 
The meaneft fort of failor, a** 

fervant to the failor^. 
Ship-boy. 

A cabin-boy. 
A calker. 
To calk a (hip, 

Oakham, 



Arfenai, 



G R A M U A R 



51 



Arfendl, ou ribtira das ndos, 

Emmd/iedr hum navio, 

Remar, 
Remador, 
For pa do, 
Btjpenfetro, 

Marinheiros, e ioda a outra 
gente que pertence do navio, 
Chitfma, 
Guarnicdo da ndo, 

fobrecarga do ndvio, 

Balejlilha, 

Quadrante, 

Outante, 

Be re, 

Paravante, 

Situacdo de humd cojla, ilka, 

&c. a refpeito de qualquir 

outro lugar, 
Quarentena, 
Baliza, 
Larga, 
Amarar, 
Capar a vela, 

Cdcear hum navio, 



Lancar hum ndvio go mar, 

Fugir, 

Entrdr com vento frifco e 

bom no po'rto, 
Bordo, 

Bordo, ou bdnda, 
Ndvio de alto bordo, 
Cdqa, 

Pre/a, Ou tomddia, 
E/tdr de vergadalto, 
rentos demon odd, ou gercer, 
Andar de conferva^ 



An arfenal, a fiore-houfe, or 

magazine. 
To fit a fhip, or Vessel, with 

mails. 
To row. 
Rower. 
Galley-flave. 
Steward. 
The crew of a fhip. 

Crew of galley flaves. 
Marines, foldiers who fervfc 

on board of fhips. 
Supercargo. 
Crofs-ftaff. 
Quadrant. 
Hadley's quadrant, 
Aft. 
Fore. 
The bearings 



Quarantine. 

Sea-mark. 

Large. 

To bear off. 

To turn the fail to the wind 
fide. 

It is faid of a {hip that is hur- 
ried away from her courfe 
by flrong winds, tides, &c r 

To launch a fhip. 

To bear away. 

To bear in the harbour* 

Tack. 
Broadfide. 

Firit rate man of war» 
Chace. 

Prize, or capture. 
To fland for the offing. 
Trade winds. 

To keep company together, 
to sail under a convoy. 

Bar, 



D 2 



¥1 



PORTUGUESE 






Bar, oufazer hum bordo, To tack the fhip, or tack 

about, or to bring her head 
about. 

EJlar a capa, ou por-fe a To lie by at fea, to back the 
cdpa, fails. 



Do Commercio, e do que Ihe 
pertfcice. 

Conta, 

Conta de venda, 

Fazer huma conta, 

Pedir contas, 

Dar a conta, 

C'onta corrente, „ - 

Dinheiro de contddo, 

Ac$ao, 

que negocea em co?nprdr e 
vender accoens, 

Ballanco, 

Fdrdo, 

Banco, 

Banaueiro, 

Queora, 

Falido, ou quebrddo, 

Ajujie, ou concerto , 

Troca, 

Portador, 

Lancador, 

que lanca mdis, 

Letra de cdmbio, 

Negocidr huma letra de cam- 
bio, 

Conta, 

Parti da, 

Conhecimento, 

Ef oritur a de obrigacdo, 

Gudrdalivros, ou o que em 
huma edsa de negecio tern 
a feu cargo os livros, 

Occupacdo, or negocio, ' 

Comprador, 

Dinheiro, 

Pirte, ou carnto, 



Of Trade, and of Things re- 
lating to it. 

Account. 

Account of fales. 

To caft up an account. 

To carl to an account. 

To pay on account. 

Account current. 

Ready money. 

Stoqk. 

Jobber. 

Balance. 
Bale. 
Bank. 

Banker. • ; 

Bankruptcy. 
Bankrupt. 
Bargain. „ 
Barter. 
Bearer. 
Bidder. 
Out-bidder. 

Bill of exchange, a draught. 
To negotiate a bill of ex- 
change. 
Bill. 
Parcel. 

Bill of lading. 
Bond, engagement. 
Book-keeper. 



Businefs. 
Buyer. 
Cam. 
Carriage, 

Cazcire, 



GRAMMAR. 



5$ 



Caxeiro, ou o que guar da a 


A caftiier, or cam-keeper. 


caixa, 




Cento, 


Cent. 


Certiddo, 


Certificate. 


Cdmbio, 


Change, exchange. 


Freguez, v • 
Gdjtos, 


Chap, chapman, or cuilomcr 
Charges. 


BardtGs 


Cheap.. 


Cdro, 


Dear. 


Rectbo da alfandegd, 


Clearance, or cocket. 


CommiJJdo, 


Commiflion. 


Mercdncia, 


Commodity. 


Compromijfo, 


Compromife. 


Conjignacdo, ' 
Confumo, 


Confignment. 


Confumption.. 


Conteudo, 


Contents, 


Contrdto, 


Contract. 


Correspondencia, 


Correspondence, 


Correfpondente, 


Correfpondent. 


Prefo, 


Price, rate. 


Aljandega, 


Cuftom-houfe. 


Guar das d'alfandega, 


Cuftom-houfe officers. 


Guar das que ejidd vigidndo 


Tidefeien, or tide waiters. 


ate que os ndvios ejiejdo 




defcarregddos, 




Feitoria, 


Factory, fettlement. 


Efcritbrio, 


Counting-houfe* 


Credito, 


Credit. 


AcredoTt 


Creditor. 


Cor rente, 


Current. 


Cojtume, 


Cuftom. 


Data, 


' Date. 


Contratador, 


Dealer. 


Trdfego, ou negocio, 


Dealing, traffick. 


Divida, 


Debt. 


Devedor, 


Debtor. 


Dinheiro defembdcddo, 


Difburfement, 


Defconto, 


Difcount. 


Extrdc7o,'ou copia, 


Docket. 


Depofito, 


Depofite* 


Defconto nos pagamentos que 


Drawback, 


ft fdzem a dinheiro de con- 




tddo, ou por qualqwr ou- 




tra razdb, 




A c redo r imp ortuno, 


Dun/ 




* D 3 Cif 



S4 



PORTUGUESE 



Copia, 

Corretor, 

Corretor de letras de cdmbio, 

A/fegurador, oufegurador, 

Endojfo, 

Endojfador, 

Abarcador, 

Levantaminto de prego, 

Affento no regijto, 

Equwalente, 

Exigencia, 

De/peza, 

Extracfdo, 

Extbrfdo, 

Feitor, 

Feira, 

Fio y ou ardme no qual fe en- 

Ji.oospapeis Hum efcntorio, 

Qidtro, a?icc, fkc.por ctnio, 

Fretdr, 

Frcte, 

que fr eta hum ndvio, 

Cabeddl, ou quantia de din* 

heiro dejlinddo para algu- 

ma coujci, 
Gdnho, 
que gdnha, 
Fazendas ou ejfeitas % 
EJired, 
Efcritura, 
Entrdda, 

Negocidnte qui introduz faz- 
endas numaprd^a ou reino 

Ren da, 

Intercjfe, 

Communica^dS^OMCommerciOy 

Inventdmo, 

Insufficiencia, ou jdlta de 
meyos para p agar , 

Factura, 

A'rras, 

Efcritura de arrendamento, 

Arrendaddr t 

Livro de razdo* 



Duplicate. 

A broker. 

Exchange-broker. 

Infurer or under-writer, 

Endorfement. 

Endorfer. 

EngrofTer. 

Enhancement. 

Entry. 

Equivalent. 

Exigency. 

Expence. 

Export, or exportation. 

Extortion. 

Fa£k>r. 

Fair. 

File for papers. 

Four, five, &c per cent. 

To freight a (hip. 

Freight. 

A freighter. 

Fund. 



Gain, or profit. 

Gainer. 

Goods, effects. 

Handfel. 

Hand-writing. 

A cuflom for imported com- 

modities. 
Importer, 

Income. 
Intereft. 

Intercourfe. 

Inventory. 

Infolvency. 

Invoice. 
Jointure. 
Leafe. 
LefTee. 
Ledger- book 




gmprejtim?s 



GRAMMAR. 



55 



Empreftimo, 

Dinheiro emprejlado, 

Carta, 

Sobrefcrito da carta, 

Feckdr huma carta, 

Feckarhuma carta com finite, 

Mala em que o correo trdz 

as cartas, 
Hyp 6 thee a, 

Acredbr kypothecdrw, 
O que hypothec a, 
Fiador, 
Pagamento, 
Fait a de pagamento, 
Efcrito de divida, 
D'ono, 

Far do pequeno t 
Serapilheira, 
Brabdnte, 
Mdco de c-drtas, 
Companheiro de dlguem no 

negocio, oujocio, 
Socieddde, ou companhia no 

negocio, 
Penhor, 
Contrato do feguro dos mer- 

cancias, 
Seguro, 
Segurdr, 

Protejlar huma letra, 
Aceitdr huma letra, 
Protcfto, 
Sacdr huma letra. 



Loan. 

Money lent. ( 

Letter. 

The direction of a letter. 

To make or clofe up a letter. 

To make and feal up a letter. 

Mail, 

Mortgage, 

Mortgagee. 

Mortgager. 

Bail. 

Payment. 

Non-payment. 

Note, or promiffory note? 

Owner. 

Pack, a trufs. 

Packcloth, wrapper, 

Packthread. 

Packet of letters. 

Partner. 

Partnerfhip* 

Pawn, or pledge. 
Policy of infurance. 

In fu ranee. 

To infure. 

To proteft a bill. 

To accept a bill. 

Proteft. 

To draw a bill. 



Correo aondefe lancao as cartas^ Poft-office. 

Correo que leva cdrtas, 

Porte de cartas, 

Premio ou dinheiro que Je 

pdga bos Jegur adores, 
Dinheiro que Je pdga dos 

marinheiros por terem 

carregddo o ndvio, 
Capital, 

Perdas e ddnos, 
Importancia, 
Importdncia liquida, 



or letter carrier. 



Poftman, 

Poftage. 

Premium 

Primage, 



Principal, <?r capita!* 
Lofles and damages. 
Proceed. 
Neat proceed. 



D 4 



Promejfa, 



M 



PORTUGUESE 



promefsa, 


Promife. 


Bens, 


Property. 


Fontualiddde, 


Punctuality. 


Cb?npra % 


Purchafe. 


Recibo, 


Receipt. 


Recdmbio, 


Re-exchange. 


A'rbitro, ou louvddo. 


Referee or umpire. 


Louvumvnto, ou arbitrio, 


Reference. 


Regatdo, 


Regrater. 


Quitacdo, 


Releafe. 


Remejsa, 


Remittance. 


Venda, das coufas por miudo, 


Retail. 


c o?7io fa zem os mercador es 




de retalko, 




Mercador de retalko, ou tra- 


Retailer. 


peiro, 




Riquezas, 


Riches, wealth. 


Venda, 


Sale, or vent. 


Fadrdo % 


A pattern. 


Amoftra, 


Sample. 


Sinete, 


Seal. 


Lacre, 


Sealing-wax. 


Ajufla7?icnto de contas, 
Loja, 


Settlement of accounts 


Shop. 


Mercador que te7n loja, 


Shop-keeper. 


Livro em que o mercador de 


Shop-book.. 


loja temjuas contas, 




quefaz contrabdndo, 


Smuggler. 


Fazenda-de contrabdndo, 


Contraband, or proh 



Faze'r contrabdndo,, 

Modelo, ou Jiel dos pezos e 

medidas pub lie as, 
Al maze 771, 
Sobrefcrevente, 
Sobfc lip/do, 
Tar a, 

Faze n da roim t 
Rifco, 
jfuros, 

Pr<>, ■ 

Ufureiro, 
VJura, 



goods, goods fmuggled, or 
run. 

To run, to fmuggle prohi- 
bited goods. 

Standard meafure. 

Ware-houfe. 

Subfcriber. 

Subfcription. 

Tare and Tret. 

Tram of goods. 

Rifk. 

Intereft. 

Ufance. 

Ufurer. 

Ufurv. 



Irbrjfc 



GRAMMAR. 



'57 



Obrjai 

Mercancias, 

Valor , 

Avaria, 

Direitos, 

Tributo, ou contribuifao, 

Tax a, 

Si [a, 

Sijeiro, 

Cdes, 

Direito que fe paga, por def- 

embar car faze ndqs no cdes, 
Collector do mefmo direito, ou 

tributo, 
Dizimos, 

Dizi?nador, ou dizimeiro, 
Zoufa vidrdda, Jem Jer da 

China, 
Mercador de Jo bra do, 
Ven da qu efefa zporpartidas, 



Wafer. 

Wares. 

Worth. 

Average. 

Duties or cuflroiru 

Cefs, tribute. 

A fet rate, affize.. 

Excife. 

Exciseman. 

Wharf.. 

Wharfage. 

Wharfinger. 

Tenths, or Tithes. 
Tithe-gatherer. 
Dutch ware. 

Wholefale dealer. 
Wholefale. 



Da Moeda, ou DinheiroPor- 
tugue'z. 

This mark f is prefixed 

*Redl, 

Des retSy 

Vintem, 

Tojlab, ou 5 ventems, 

4 Tojioens, ou hum cnifado, 

Crufado novo, ou 24 vintens, 

# Toftoens, 

Hum quarto de euro, ou 12 
to/Uens, 

* Milreis, ou 10 tojioens, 
16 Tojioens ', 

Meya moeda de ouro, 
3,000, ou 32 tojioens, 
Moeda de ouro de 4,800, 
Meya dobra, ou 6,400, 
Dcbra, ou I2j8oo, 



Of the Portuguese Coin. 

to the imaginary money. 

A ree, equal to ~^d. 
ip rees, ~^d, 
A vintin, i^d. 
Ateftoon, 6|//. 
• A crufade, 2s. 3^. 
A new crufade, -is, 8f<£ 
8 teftoons, 4J. 6d. 
12 teftoons, 6s. gd. 

A milree, $s. y\d. 
16 teitoons, gs. 
Half moidore, 135. 6d. 
32 teitoons, 181. 
A moidore, 1/. ys. 
Joanefe, il. 16s. 
128 teftoons. 3/. 12s. 



58 



PO RTUGUESE 



COLLECCAO COLLECTION 



DE. 



Adagios Portugueses. 
A A' go a o da, a «/ \oa o leva, 



Na ago a envblta pcfca o pef- 
cador, 

Efta cbmo o peixe 7% ago a, 

Trazera agoapardo moinho, 

Levar dgoa ao mar, 

As agoas ejidb baixas, 

O que nao-pbde al fer, deves 

jbffrer, 
Come cbmo hum aldrve, 
Meter a path a na albarda, 
Alazad tojlado antes merle 

que canfado, 
Huma disgrdga alcanna a 

butra, 
EJldr na aide a, e ndo ver as 

cafas, 



Quern trabalha, tern alfaya, 
Fdllo-lke cm alhos, refponde- 

■me em bugdlho.s, 
Em tempo nevado o dlho vale 

hum cavdllo, 



OF 



Portuguese Proverbs. 



\$T H A T is got over the 
** devil's back will be 
fpent under his belly; alfo 
lightly come, lightly go. 

To fifh in troubled waters 
(to make a benefit of pub- 
lic troubles.) 

He lives in clover. 

To bring grift to the mill. 

To carry coals to Newcaftle. 

He or fhe is at a low ebb. 

What can't be cured mull be 
endured. 

He eats like a threfher. 

To cheat, to impofe upon. 

A dark forrel horfe will die 
before he'll jade. 

One mifchief draws on ano-» 
ther. 

We fay; you can't fee wood 
for trees : or to be like the 
butcher that looked for 
his knife when he had it 
in his mouth. 

He that works has furniture. 

I talk of chalk and you of 
cheefe. 

Garlick in the foggy weather 
is as good as a horfe ; it 
means that garlick is a 
good defence for travellers 
againft dampnefs and cold 
weather. 

Tizo 



GRAMMAR. 



59 



Tezo come hum hlhq, 



Sua alma, fya palma, 
Na almoeda tern a barb a 
queda, 



Tagdr os altos de vdfio, 

Quern dma a beltrdo, dma a 

feu cad, 
Cada audi dma feu femel- 

hatite, 
Tdmbem os ameagados comem 
pad, 

Qontas de perto, e amigos de 

longe, 
Nao/edeveperder a amizade 

por da ca a quella palha, 
Tarn bom he Pedro c'omo feu 

dmo, 
Furtdr o carneiro, e dar os 

pes pello amor de Deos, 
Nem hum dido fax mad, nem 

huma andonnha verad, 

Levdr palhas, e aralhos, 
£fa area abirta ojujto pecca, 

Pe hum argueiro , fazer .hum 

cavalleiro, 
€$m arte, a com engdno fe 

vive meyo anno; com en- 

gano, e com artefe vive a 

outra parte, 
Quern a boa qrvore fe chtga, 

boa fombra o cobre, 

Afno morto, cevada do rdbo, 

Afno que tern feme, c&rdos 
. ceme 9 



As ftiff as garlick ; that is a. 
healthy, flrong, robuft per- 
fon. 

As you brew, even fo bake. 

At a fale keep your beard-on 
your chin ftill ; that is, let 
not your beard wag too 
faft in bidding, left you 
overbid and repent. 

To have but little or no fenfe 
at all. 

Love me, love my dog. 

Like will to like, or like loves 

like. 
Threatened folks eat bread ; 

we fay, threatened folks 

live long. 
JEven reckonings make long 

friends. 
An inch breaks no fquares. 

Like mafter, like man. 

We fay, to fteal a goofe and 

give the giblets in alms. 
One fwallow does not ma*ke 

fummer. Una hirundo non 
facit ver, fays Horace* 
To fweep flakes. 
That is, it is opportunity 

makes the thief. 
We fay to make mountains 

of mole-hills. 
That is, all a man's life is a 

cheat. 



That is, he that relies on 

good worthy people, reaps 

a benefit. 
A day after the fair, or after 

meat, muftard. 
We fay, hungry dogs will eat 

dirty pudding. 

Sop* 



60 



PORTUGUESE 



Sofa de mel nao Je fez fara 

a boca do asno, 
Mais quero afno que me leve, 

que cav alio que me derrube, 

Mais val ma avenfa que boa 

fentenca, 
Ouem nao se aventiira, nao 
dndaacavdllo, n em emmu la 
Nao deites azeite no fo'go, 
Boca nao admittefddor, 
Da ?ndo a boca Je per de a/of a, 

E?n boca cerrdda nao entra 

mo sea, 
Ouem tern boca vai a Rhna, 



Telia boca morre o feixe, 

Cdda bofarinheiro louvaseus 

alfinetes, 
Ouem (em qua fro, egdjlacin- 

co, nao ha mtjtir bolsa nem 

bolfinho, 
Cdbarvdipellavinhapor onde 

vai a may, vdi afilka % 
Matar dous coelhos de hiima 

cajaddda, 
Quern cuniaseus males, ef fan- 

to. 



Meiidr a cafa do to'uro, 



Viva el rey^ e da cd a cdfa % 



Good things are not fit for 

fools. 
Better be an old man's dar- 
ling, than a young man's 

warliitgt 
It is better to agree at any 

rate, than go to law. 
Nothing venture, nothing 

have. 
Do not throw oil into the fire. 
The belly has no ears. 
Much falls between the cup 

and the lip. 
A clofe mouth catches no 

flies. 
That is, a man may go any 

where, if he has language 

to fpeak for himfelt and 

afk his way. 
Much talking brings much 

woe. 
Every man thinks his own 

geefe fwans'. 
Ke that hath four and fpends 

five hath no need of a 

purfe. 
Like father like fon. 

We fay, to kill two birds 
with one stone. 

The perfon who fings makes 
eafy his misfortunes ; that 
is,, finging caufes him not 
to reflecl on it fo much as 
he otherwife would. 

To throw one's cloak at the 
bull ; that is, to venture 
all a man has to fave his 
life. 

Let the king live, and give 
me the cloak ; that is fpo- 
ken of perfons who, under 
a pretence of authority, 
rob and plunder other peo- 
ple 4 and at the fame time 



Audi 



GRAMMA R. 



■61 



Anddr de cap a cahida, 

cJ5 com raiva ds feu do no 
trava, 

Quern com caens ft lanca, cism 

pulgas fe levdnta % 
A came de lobo dente de cab*, 



Quern faz cdsa na praca, 
huns dizem que he alta, 
sutros que he baixa, 



A cavdllo dado nao allies o 

dente \ 
Quemquer cavallo sem tacha, 

sem elle se dcha, 
Ma terra dos cegos, o torto 

he rey 9 
Cobra boa Jama, e deita-te a 

dormir, 
Fazer as contas sem a hos- 

peda, 
Do contddo come o lobo, 



Em chsa de ladrdl naofdlles 
em cor da , 



Do cduro Ihc sahem as cor- 
reas t 



pretend they are doing jus- 
tice to the power repofed 
in their hands. 

To ,be behind-hand in the 
world. 

A mad dog bites his own maf- 
ter ; there is no trufting to 
madmen, <?rpeoplein a rage. 

We fay, lie with beggars and 
you will get fleas. 

That is, to return railing for 

-railing; or, as our modern 

proverb fays, give him a 

Rowland for his Oliver ; 

the Latins fay, par pari re- 

■ fir re. 

That is, a man in public bufi- 
nefscan'tpleafe everybody; 
or, as Solon fays ; 'tis rare 
that ftatesmen can all par- 
ties pleafe. 

Never look in the mouth of 
a gift horfe. 

'Tis a good horfe that never 
ftumbles. 

In a country of blind men, he 
that has one eye is the king. 

When your name is up, you 
may lie a-bed till noon. 

To reckon without the hof- 
tefs ; or as we fay, the hofh 

The wolf eats of what is 
counted ; that is, thieves 
will fteal, though they 
know it will be miffed, 
much more if they think 
it will not. 

You mould not mention a 
halter to any whofe rela- 
tions or friends have fuf- 
fer'd by it ; that is, no man 
mould be hit in the teeth 
of his disgrace. 

The thongs come out of his 

(kin ; that is, he pays for it. 

CartSr 



PORTUGUESE 



62 

Cor tar o vtjtido con for me o 

panno, 
Criai o corvo, tirdrvos-ka o 

olho, 



Tanta culpa tern o ladr'ao como 

o confentidbr, 
Dadivas que brant do pen has, 



Melhor ke fazer de balde que 
ejldr deb aide, 

Deitdr azeite no f ago, 

Nao ke o demo tarn feo como 

o pintdo, 
Primeirofao denies, que pa* 

rentes, 



La vai a lingoa, hide o dente 

grit a, 
Oudndo cuidas meter o dente 

emseguro,toparaz o duro, 



Dar com a lingoa. nos denies, 

Quern nao jalla, nao o ouve 
Deos, 

Ventura te de Deos, filho ; 
que saber pduco te bajta, 



Cada qua! por fi, e Beos por 

todos, 
Em bons dias, boas obras, 



To cut one's coat according 
to the cloth. 

It is faid of a perfon that, be« 

ing received in diftrefs, de. 

t frauds or grows too great 

for him that entertained 

him. 

The receiver is as bad as the 
thief. 

Gifts break rocks ; that is, 
kindnefs overcomes the 
hardeft hearts ; and bribes 
or prefents corrupt the 
mo ft refolved. 

It is better to work for no- 
thing than be lazy and do 
nothing at all. 

To make bad worfe. Horace 
fays, Oleumaddere camino. 

We fay, the lion is not fo 
fierce as his picture. 

We fay, near is my coat, but 
nearer is my skin, &c. Te- 
rence fays, Heus proximus 
fum egomet mih i . 

To fcratch where it itches. 

Harm watch, harm catch, 
Horace fays, 
— et fragili quazrens Mi- 

dere dentem, 
—Offendet folido 

TV contradict one's felf, to 
belie. 

A man may hold his tongue 
in an ill time ; alfofpare to 
fpeak andfpare to fpeed. 

God give you good' luck, 
child, for a little learning 
will ferve your turn j be- 
caufe it is fortune that raif- 
es men more than merit. 

Every one for himfelf, and 
God for all. 

The better days the better 

Part 



GRAMMA R. 



65 



Para dia defad cercjo, 



Todo pode o dinheiro, 

O homem propdem, e Deos 

difpoem, 
Dor??ie co mo hum arganaz, 
A bom enfendedor pbucas pa- 

Uvras y 
Qdto efcaldado da dgoa Jria 

ha medo, 
No efcudelldr veras quern te 

quir bem, ou ma I, 

Efmouldu fad Mattheus, ef- 
molou para osjeus, 

Nao ha melhbr efpelho que. a 
amigo velho, 



Nem ejtopa com ticoens, nem 
mother com varUns, 



lalldr Jem cuiddr, he atirdr 
'Jem of rout ar % - 



Valla pouco e btm terte hdo 
por dlguem. 



^uem a fdma tern perdida, 
morto drida nejla vida, 

A quern md fdma tern, nem 
accompdnhes, nem dig as 
be?n, 

Aproyeitador de Jarelos, 
efperdkador defarinha, 



Naofdzem boajarinha t 



deed'* 
We fay, 

come 

vei\ 
Money: \ 
Man pre 

pofes. 
He fleer. 
A word 

We fay 
the fi 

That is 
are d 
beral: 

Charity 

There U 
glafs 
that i 
ilattei 
the ti 

That is, 
meni 
good 
tools. 

To let o] 
out r< 
fays, 
rando 

Talk li 
you'L 
body 
efteer 

He who 
tion 
whilH 

Do not 
nor 1 
has ai 

That is, 

at the 

wife . 

They c 



when two Sundays 
together, that is, ne- 

Toverns the world. 
)pofes, and God dif- 

>s like a dormoufe. 
to the wife is enough. 

, a burnt child dreads 

re. 

, people's. affections 

fcovered by their U- 

begins at home. 

; no "better looking 
than an old friend ; 
s, fuch a one will not 
; a m an, but tell him 
uth. 

con verfation of wo- 
is dar igerous ; it is not 

jeftijig with edged 

re's tongue run, with- 
jfleclcing on what one 
is like fhooting at 
m. 

rtle and well, and 
1 bti counted fome- 
; that is, you'll be 
ned. 

has loft his reputa- 
is as good as dead 
. living. 

keep company with./ 
)e fond, of one that 
i ill name. 

one that faves at the 
ot and lets it run out 
bung ; alfo, penny 
an cl pound foolilh. 
an ? t fet their horfes 



[uem 



64 



PORTUGUESE 



Quern ma afaz nellajaz, 
Agora da pao c me/, e depots 

dard pao efd, 
Lingda doce c'omo mel> e co- 

racdo amargbfo comofet, 
Bater o ferro qudndo efid 

quente, 

Quern com ferro ?ndta,aferro 

nurre, 
Carregddo de ferro, carre- 

gddo de medo, 



Quern tefdzfejja, nao focndo 
fazer, ou te ijuer engandr, 
ou te ha mi/iJr, 

Nad figs, nem profies, nem 
arrendes, vivvrds entre as 
gentes, 

Mijdr claro, dar humafiga 

do medico, 
Se nao bebe na tavernafblga 

nella, 
Achou forma pa'.rd ofeu fa- 

pdto, 

Nao fejdis forneiro fe tendes 
a cabeqa de manteiga, 



A'o homem oufado a for tuna 

ike da & mad, 
Roup a de f ranee zes, 

Cahir dafrigideira nas bra- 
fas, 

Dizem osfilhosaojoalheiro, 
o que ouvem dizer a feus 



together. 

Self do felt* harm. 

After fvveet meat comes four 
fauce. 

An honey tongue, an heart 
of gall. 

To beat the iron whilft it is 
hot, or, to make hay whilft 
the fun fhines. 

He who kiUs by the fw.ord 
dies by the fvvord. 

He who is loaded with iron 
is loaded with fear ; that 
is, he who loads himfelf 
with armour and weapons 
againfl: danger, difcovers 
he is much afraid. 

He that makes more of you 
than he is wont to do, either 
defigns to cheat you, or 
{land in need of you. 

Do not truft, nor contend 
no hire, and you'll live 
among men; that is, you'll 
live peaceably. 

Tell the truth and fhame the 
devil. 

We fay he does not fmoke 
but fmokes. 

He has found a laft to his 
fhoe ; that is, he has met 
with his match. 

Do not undertake to be a 
baker if your head is made 
of butter ; that is, do not 
take upon you any bufi~ 
nefs you are unfit for. 

Fortune favours the bold. 

Things left at random, or 
exp'ofed to be pillaged. 

To fall out of the frying-pan 
into the fire. 

Little pitchers have great 
ears. 

pd /5 



GRAMMAR. 



*5 



pays dofumeiro, 
Verto vdi ojumo dachama, 

Quern huma vez furta, fid 
nunca, 

Mai vai do fufo qudndo a 
bdrba ndo dnda em cima, 



Cada terra com feu ufo, cada 

roca com feu fufo, 
Ouantds cabefas, tdntas ca- 

rapugas, 
Quern (he doer a cabe$a que 

a aphte, 

St queres faber quern he 

in Had j metelhe a vara na 
mad; 
Nao ha r of a fern espinkos, 



Andar, anddr, <vir morrer a 
beira, 



Quern nao deve, nao teme, 
Quern quando pode, nao quer, 

quando quer, ndo pode, 
Homem honrado nao ha mif 

ter gab a do, 
Homem grande, bejla de pdo, 



J)eba'ixo de mdcdpajaz bom 
bebedor, 



We fay there is no fmoke 

without fome fire. 
He who once fleals is never 

trufty ; or, once a thief, 

always a thief. 
Alas for the fpindle when the 

beard is not over it ! By 

the fpindle is meant the 

woman, and by the beard 

is meant the man. 
So many countries, fo many 

cuftoms. 
Several men, fcveral minds. 

We fay, if any fool finds the 
cap fit him, let him put it 
on. 

Set a beggar on horfebaek, 
and he will ride to the 
devil. 

There is no rofe without 
thorns, there is no fvveet 
without fome fweat. 

To eat an whole ox "and 
faint at the tail. This pro- 
verb is fpoken when any 
body falls (hort of a thing, 
after having u fed all his 
endeavours. 

Out of debt out of danger. 

It is good to make hay while 
the fun ftiines. 

We fay, a good face needs 
no band. 

This proverb intimates, that 
things are not to be valued 
by their bulk, but accord- 
ing to their intrinfic worth 
and value ; and fo we fay, 
a lark is better than a 
kite. 

A tattered cloak may cover a 
good drinker; that is, men 
are not to be judged by 

# E outward 



66 



POR,T:U 



Qjummuiio abrjg^^p^y.co a- . 
perja, 

Ko cfUgue, qucm r 
mal.Luve, 



Quern em w.dis ^qfcQ^ngcia, 
y muis p;.{Jlojeq/'c c, 

Hofpcde to m % t h a h o n or , - 

tt r ■ 

LiojpedaJcrmojJ, dunojaz a 

(jolfa, , . 

nofpede e o pence aos tres 






. 



Hortajem cgoa; c a/a Jem tei- 
h a do ,. ?n o III c rje m a ?n c r , via - 
r i do [an cuidddo, de grcc.a 
he cdro, 



Hour a ao .bora pur a que te 
hcnrcy e ao nulo pa r h que te ■ 
ndo deJJionre, 

Hour a he des ainos a queje 

faz aos criddos; 
Officio de confelko, honrafem 

provcito, 



Homem apertelido , m eyocom- 
batidOi 



G U ES E 

outward appearance, 
AW grafp, .all Jo/e; or.cavet 
all, and ipfe all. 

..ari'peak:- knavi&ily fl?ajl\ 
"Hear' knavilhly, Terence 
fays, Qui per git ea, qua: 
. vult,-dicere,,..ea t % .quce ncn 
vitlt, audiei. 
That' is/the highefi charges 
are the more liable and 
nearer to the downfal. 
Fir ft ccme,_ $r%fe V ed, 
A beautiful; hoftefs, or land- 
lady, is bad for the purfe. 
Jrefn fifli, and new-come 
gneils, fmell when they 
are three days old. 
That is, a garden without 
..tc-r, a houfe .umiled, a 
wiie without love, and a 
careleis hufband, are all 
alike, being all {lark 
.nought. " 
Honour a good man, that he 
may honour you ; and an 
ill man, that he may not 
dimonour you. 
The honour done to fervants 
redounds to their matters. 
An office in the council is 
honour without profit ; 
that is, to be of the coun- 
cil of a town, by which 
nothing is got in Portugal, 
A man that is prepared, has 
half the battle over. 



GRAMMAR. 67 



D -I A L O G O S ' FAMILIAR 

familiares. DIALOGUES. 

DIALOGO I. DIALOGUE I, 

7^ENHA vm. muito bons /""^OOD morrow, fir. 

dias, >? 

Como ejld v?n,? ou como paf- How do you do, fir ? 

fa vm?. 

Be?n,na> ?nuito bem,voupaf- Well; not very well; fo, (o. 

fando, 

Muito bem para fervir a vm. Very well to ferve you. 

/i's or dens de vm. At your fervice. 

Fico-lhe muito obrigddo, I am obliged to you. 

Vm. rnuitos dnnos, I thank you. 

Como ejla, ou pdjfa a fenhor How does your brother do ? 

feu irmab ? 

Muito be??!, fiao muito bem, He is very well ; not very 

well. 

Kile terd gojlo de ver a vm. He will be glad to fee you. 

Ndo terei tempo para hir a I (hall have no time to fee 

velo hoje, him to day. 

fdcafavGr de affentarfe, Be plea fed to fit down. 

Da hitma cadeira do fenhor, Give a chair to the gentle- 
man. 

Nad he nece.Jfario, There's no occafion. 

Tenho que hir afdzer huma I muft go make a visit in th(j 

. vifita aqui nefla vifinhanca neighbourhood. 

Vm. te?n peffa, You are in hade. 

E'u logo vo/tarei, I'll be back, or return pre. 

fently. 

Adeos meufenhor, Farewel fir. 

Folga de ver a vm. com boa I am glad to fee you in good 

faude, health. 

Beijo as mads de vm. I kifs your band. 

Sou criado de vm. I am your fervant. 

Sou muito feu criado i Your moil humble fervant, 



68 



PORTUGUESE 



DIALOGO II. DIALOGUE II 



pari, fazer biirna ViTita de 
Manhaa. 



To v'ifit in the morning. 



flNDE ejtd ten a mo ? 
^ Ainda dor me ? 
N6J),fenhor, elleejlaacordddo 
Eft a elleja levant ddo ? 
Nad, fenhor, elle ainda ejld 

na cama, 
Que vergcnha de ejldr ainda 

na cama a ejlas horas ! 
O'ntem a ncitefui para, a cama 

tad tdrde, que ndd me pude 

levantar cedo ejla manhaa, 
Quejizerao vm ce -dcpoisde cea? 
JJatifamos, cantdmos i ri?nos ) 

ejugamos, 
A que j ego ? 
A' os centos, 
Qudnto me peza de o new ter 

fabido ! 
Quern ganhou} quern per deo? 
■Eu ganhei dez motdas, 
Ale que horas jugarao vm" s ? 
Ate duas horas dejpois da 

meya noite, 
A que horas foi v?n. para a 

cama? 
As tres, as tres horas e nicy a, 

Nad me admiro que vm.fe le- 
vant e td'o tbrde, 

Que horas [do? 

Que horas Ihe parece a vm, 
quejejao ? 

Pareceme que apenas fad oito ', 

8fm ! oito! ja derao dez, 

Qntdihcprecifo que me lev ante 
* quanio mats deprejfa pu- 



WHERE is vour mafter? 
Is he afleep ftill ? 
No, fir, he is awake. 
Is he up ? 
No, fir, he is ftill a-bed. 

What a fhame 'tis to be a-bed 

at this time a-day ! 
I went to bed fo late lad 

night I could not rife early 

this morning. 
What did you do after fupper ? 
We danced, we fung, we 

laughed, we played. 
At what game? 
We played at piquet. 
How grieved am I, I did not 

know it ! 
Who won ? who loft ? 
I won ten moidores. 
Till what hour did you play? 
Till two in the morning. 

At what o'clock did you go 

to bed ! 
At three, half an hour after 

three. 
I don't wonder at your rifing 

fo late. 
What's o'clock ? 
What do you think it is ? 

Scarce eight, I believe yet. 
How ! eight ! it has flruck 

ten. 
Then I muft rife with all 

fpecd. 



DIA» 



GRAMMAR. 



69 



X) I A L O G O III. DIALOGUE III. 



Q 



Para veflfr-fe. 

UEMe/ldaM? 
Que quer vm?. 



Defpdxa-te, acende lume, e 

vejte-me, 
Ha ?ntiito bom lume, 
Da-me a minha camifa, 
Eila aqui eJta,fenhof, 
Naoejia quente,eJidmuitofria 
Eu a aquentarei,fe vm.quizer 
Nab, nao ; trcize-me as min- 

has meyas de fcda, 
Huma deltas ejta rota, 
Da-lhe hump onto, concerta-a 
DH-a'ao que as concerta, 

Fi%ejle-bem, 

O'ndeejlaoas minhaschinelas? 

O'hde efla a minha roupa de 

chambre ? 
Pentea-me, 
Procura outro pente, 
Da-me mcu lenfo; 
Eis aqui hum lavado, 
Da-me que ejla na minha 

algibeira, 
Dei-o a lavandeira, elleejla- 

va $ujo, 
Trouxe ellejaaminha roupa ? 
Sim,fenhcr, e nadfdlta nada, 
Traze-me os meus calfoens, 
Que vejlido quer vm. pard 
^ hSje ? 

mefmo de intern, 
alfdiate ha de trazer logo 

ofiu vejlido, 
Batem a porta, ve la quern he, 

Quern he? 
He alfaidte, 
Deixa-o entrar, 



To dress one's self, 

Tjr7HO is there? 
* * What wili you pleafe 
to have ? 

Be quick, make a fire, drefs 
me. 

There is a fine fire, 

Give me my fhirt. 

Here it is, fir. 

'Tis not warm, 'tis quite cold* 

If you pleafe I'll warm it. 

No, no ; bring me my filk 
ftockings. 

One of them is torn. 

Stitch it a little, mend it. 

I have given it to the flock- 
ing mender. 

You have done right. 

Where are my flippers ? 

Where is my night gown? 

Comb my head. 

Look for another comb. 

Give me my handkerchief. 

Here is a clean one. 

Give me that which is in my 
pocket. 

I gave it to the waftier- wo- 
man, it was foul. 

Has fhe brought my linen ? 

Yes, there wants nothing. 

Bring me my breeches. 

What clothes will you wear 
to-day. 

Thofe I wore yeflerday. 

The taylor will bring your 
cloth fuit prefently. 

Somebody knocks, fee wh<? 
it is. 

Who is it ? 

It is the taylor. 

Let him come in, 

«E 3 



70 



PORTUGUESE 



D I A L O G O IV. DlALOGUEIV r 
O Senhor e o Alfaiate. . The Gentleman and the Taylor 



H^RAZE'IS o wcu vejlido ? 

S'?n,fenh6r, eilo aqui, 

Hd muito tempo que e/lou 

es per on do por elJe, 
Nad piid.e vir ate agora, 
Nao eji'ai* ■ tcabado, 
A in da nc.o eftdvajorrddo, 
Ouer vm. vejiira cafaca para 

ve.rfe I he e/tu bem P 
Vejamos se ejta bem fe it a, 

Tenho para mim que Ihe hdja 

de agraddr, 
Parece-me muito comprida, 

He coflumt agora de trazt- 

las compridas, 
Abotoaua, 
He muito apertdda, 
Assim deve fer para que Ihe 

estcja bem do corpo, 
Nao sad as mdngas demafia- 

damente Idrgas ? 
Nad, fenhdr, estdo-lhe admi- 

ravdmenU, 
Os calfcens fad muito aper- 

tddos ? 
E'sta he a meda de agora, 
E ' ste vestido esta-lhe bizar- 

ramente, 
He muito curio, muito com- 

prido , muito gr ande, muito 

pequeno, 
Tendes feito a vossa ccnia ? 
.Ndd,fenhor, nao tive tempo, 
Trazh-a amanhua, e pagdr* 

vos kei, 



T\0 vcu bring my fait oi 

-^clothes ? 

Yes, fir, here 'tis. 

You make me wait a great 

while. 
I could not come fooner. 
It was not finilhed. 
The lining was not sewed. 
Will you pleafe to try the 

clofe coat on ? 
Let us fee whether it be well 

made. 
I believe it will pleafe you. 

It feems to me to be very 

long. 
They wear them long now. 

Button me. 

It is too clofe. 

To fit properly, it ought to 

be clofe. 
Are not the fleeves too wide ? 

No, fir, they fit very well. 

The breeches are very nar- 
row. 

That is the fa (h ion. 

This fuit becomes you migh- 
ty well. 

'Tis too fhort, too long, too 
big, too little. 

Have you made your bill ? 
No, fir, I had no time. 
Bring it to-morrow, I'll pay 

YOU. 



D I A 




D:,I : A :r L : p. G.p 

Para aFmocar. 



r T K R>£-ZE nos'alguhvas'couju 
** para alnzocar,' 
$im^ ftnUf^ ha iuign<:gas i? 
■■- ptts'UihikQX,- [skitf! 
£<?/?# 1//72. afe prefunP&'f I - 

&'z», trdze-o ; -cwmremos 
hum a talhdda d'elle, 

Est en de hii n g ua rdh iMp o fi- 
bre aquella me/a, 

Da-nos pfatos,- fticas\ e^gdr- 

Ldvaos capos. 

Da hitma cadeird* do finJior, 

A]f'm&fe\ m Pi ; asscMe-ft' >do 

pe do lume, n I 

Nad teiih'o frio, aqui- faanei 

?nuito ban, 
Vtjamos se o vinhv he^ofkfi 

Da ca" a i quHlu ! g&r+hf&v&ih 

a que lie cop a, 
Fdga favor deprovar aqUeile 

vinho > 
Coma 4h>€ agrada-*; [ qiie ,, diz 

vm. delle ? 
Nad he mdo, he miiilwbem, 
Eis dqui< as Imgiiigaii,, lira 

a quelle prato, < o) 
Coma -v m J li ng nig as, \ { ' 
J a co mi at gum as \ ■ • ffids fdo 

muito boas, - ■ 
Da-me dt beber, 
A' [dude de vm. 
Bom proveito fdga a v?n. 
Da dt beber ao/enhor] '• 

E'u bebi ainda apor'a, 
Ospastelinhos eruobemhons t 

Estavao hum pouco muis co- 
idos que devido estar, : 



3 'g^¥mma:f: 91 

v,; b ka l,o g;u k-;:% 



To break/aft. 

BR>ING?>us- fomething for 
breakiaft. 
Yes , ( - fi r, There 'are fo me fau» 

fages and petty-patees. , 
Do you t crioo(e the gammon 

of bacon ? 
Yes, -hring it ; we will. eat a 

flice of it. 
Lay a napkin oh that table. 

Give" lis ' plates'; knives-, and 

forks. 
Rinfe cfc^ghtfles. ■: 
Reach the gentleman a chair, 
Sit downy fir ; fit by the- fire, 

I>am not cold, 1 mail be very 

well here. 
Let lis fee whether the wine 

be good. 
Give me that bottle and a 

glafs. ' ■■ 

Taite that wine, pray. 

How do you like it? what 

fay you to it? 
It is not r bad, it is very good,. 
Here are the faufages, take 
• away this plate. 
Eat fome faufages, fir. 
I have eat fome, they are very 

good. 
Give me fome drink. 
Your health, fir, 
Much good may it do you. 
Give the gentleman fome 

drink. 
I drank but juft now. 
The petty-patees were very 

good. 
They were baked a little too 

much. 
*E 4 ^ V?n. 



79 



PORTUGUESE 



Vm. nab come , 

Tenko comido tanto, que nao 
podereijantdr, 

Vm. estd zombandd^ vm. nab 

tern comido n&da, . 
Tenko comido : com .muito 

gcrsto, tanto das tinguigas 

cbmo do pre/unto, 



You do not eat. 

I have eat too much, I (haif 
not be able to eat any din- 
ner. 

You only j eft, you have eat 
nothing at ail. 

I have eat very heartily hoth 
of faufages and gammon 
of bacon. 



— 



DIALO GO VI. DUL.OGU E VI, 



Para fallar Portuguez. 

f^O'MO vdi vm.com o feu 
^ Portuguez ? 
Estavm.ja muito adiantddo 

nelle ? 
Aindame fait a muito; nao 

fti qua p. ndda, 
Dizem porem que vm. o fall a 

muito be?n, 
Prauvera a Deos que affim 

JW* >*■ > 

Us que dizem iJ[o,estdo ?nuito 

enganados, 
Esteja vm. na certeza que 

assim mo differ ao, 
Pbsso fallar algumas palav- 

ras que aprendi de cor, 
E unlcamente o que, he necef- 

fd riopard comec"a r a j alia r , 
comegdr nab he bastante y 

he precifo que vm. acabe, 
Falle vm.fempreou bcm> ou 

mal\ 
Tenko medo de dar erros, 

Nao tenka vm. medo; a lingo a 
Portuguela hdbkedifficil, 

Conhego isso, e' tdmbem que 
ella he muito engragdda, 

Oiie feliciddde feria. a minha 
Je hi ajoubesse bem !■ 



To /peak Portuguese. 

TTOW goes on your Por- 

■*■-*■ tuguefe ? 

Are you much improved in 

it now ? 
Far from it ; I know nothing 

almoft. 
It it faia\ however,, you fpeak 

it very well. 
Woujd to God it were true ! 

Thofe that fay fo are much 

miftaken. 
I allure you I was told fo. 

I can fay a few words which 
1 have learnt by heart. 

And fo much as is necef- 
fary to begin to fpeak. 

The beginning is not all, you 
mull make an end. 

Be always fpeaking, whetheT 
well, or ill. 

I am afraid to commit blun- 
ders. 

Never fear ; the Portuguefe 
language is not hard. 

I know it; and that it has 
abundance of graces. 

How happy mould I be, if I 
were mailer of it ! 

A ap* 



GRAMMAR. 



n 



A applicagdo he o unico meyo 

para aprende-la, 
Qudnto tempo ha que vm. a- 

prende ? 
Apenas ha hum mez, 
C6mo fe chamafeu m'ejlre ? 

Chama-fe 

Ha muito tempo que o con- 

hego, 
E'lle tern enfinddo a muitos 

dos mcus amigos, 
Nad Ihe diz elle ferprecifo que 
fdllefempre Portuguez ? 

Sim, fenhor, affim me diz 

muitas vexes, 
PoiSi porque n&dfdlla vm.? 
Com quern quer vm. que eu 

falle, 
Com os quefallarem com vm. 

E'u quizera fallar, mas nao 

me atrcvo, 
lie precifo que vm. nao tenha 

me do, nem fe peje dos que 

o ouvirem fallar, 



Application is the only way 
of learning it. 

How long have you been 
learning ? ; 

Scarce a month yet. 

What is your mailer's name? 

His name is- 

I have known him a great 
while. 

He has taught several friends 
of mine. 

Does not he tell you that you 
mull conftantly talk Por- 
tuguese ? 

Yes, sir, he often tells me so. 

Why do not you talk then ? 
Who would you have me 

talk with ? 
With those who (hall talk to 

you. 
I would fain talk, but dare 

not. 
You mufl not be afraid, you 

muft be bold. 



DIALOGO VII. DIALOGUE VII. 



G 



Do Tempo. 
U E tempo faz f 






tempo ejla admiravel, 

tempo eft a roim, 

Fazfrio ? Jaz calma ? 

Nad fazfrio, n do faz calma, 

Ch .ve ? nao chove ? 

Nad o creyo, 

vento ejla mudado, 

Terhnos chuva, 

iH'oje nao ha de c hover, 

Chove, chove a cantaros, 

E/la nevdndo, 

Troveja, 



Of the Weather. 

TIT HAT sort of weather, 

** is it ? 
It is fine weather. 
It is bad weather. 
Is it cold ? is it hot ? 
It is not cold, it is not hot. 
Does it rain ? does it not rain ? 
I do not believe it. 
The wind is changed. 
We (hall have rain. 
It will not rain to-day. 
It rains, it pours. t 
It snows. 
It thunders, 

Cah 



74 P'OR'TUpUESE 

Cake pedra, 
Re I amp ague a, 
Fa z ?nuita cu im a , 
Ge'ou a noite pa J] add ?■• 
Ndl, Jenhor, mas agora ejla 

;i :ando, 
Paiece-me que ha nevcezro, 



It hails. 

It lightens. 

It is very hot. 

Has it freezed to night ? 

No, 'sir. but it freezes now. 



Fm. nabfe en gen a, ajjlm he, 

Vm. tern hum grdnde cat. rro, 
on ejhlhcidio, 

Haqvinze dlas que o ttnfco, 

One h.) as fao, 

He e'edo, nab he iarde, 

JJc t:mpo dp a I mo car ? 

Poucojd'ta pardfircm h. ras 
de jan far, 

One far. m os depots de jan- 

~t..r? - 

Daremos hum pqff.yc^uire- 
mes pajfe.<r, 

Vdmos cLr huma vfrltd, 

Nad vamosfora com {fie tem- 
po, 



It appears to mc to be a great 

' fog- 

You are not miflaken, it is 
very true. 

You have caught a violent 
cold. 

I have had it this fortnight. 

What's o'clock ? 

'Tis early, 'tis not late. 

Is it breakfaft-time ? 

'Twill be dinner-time imme- 
diately. 

What (hall we do after din- 
ner ?■ 

We'll take a walk. 

Let us take a turn now. 
We mud not go abroad this 

weather. 



DIALOGO VIII. DIALOGUE VIII. 



Para 



i perguntar que novas ha. 



To 



enquire after news. 



fy U E va\i de novo ? ou que 

*£ novas ha} 

Sdbe vm, qlguma coufa de no- 
vo ? ou fa be vrii. algumas ? 

Nad tenho cuvido nadu de m vo 

De que fej. Ala pella ticlade ? 

Ndo fe fdlla de ridda, 

Nad tendes ouvido Jallur de 
g u err a, 

Nab xiuifo fa liar ndda djffo, 

Poiemjdlla-fe de kumcerco t 

Falldu-fe nijfo, mas nad lie 
verddde, 



XTTHAT news is ftirring ? 

Do you know any ? 

I have heard none. 
What's the talk of the town ? 
There's no talk of any thing. 
Have you heard no talk of 

war ? 
I have heard nothing of it. 
There's a talk however of a 

siege. 
There was such a discourse, 

but it- is not true. 

Antes 



GRAM MA R. 



7i 



A'ntcspello contrario fdlla-fe 

de paz t 
Ajfirn o creyo, 
Que fe diz na corte ? 
Fcdla~fe de huma viagem, 
Oil an do vos partge que el rey 

par tiro. ? 
Nddfefabe. Naoje diz quart- 

do, 
O'nde, ou pard cnde je diz 

que elle irk ?- 
Huns dizem que ira pard 

F/andres, e cutros pard 

^Alemdnha, 
E que diz a Gazeta f 
E'u nao a li 9 
He verddde o que fe diz do 

Sr. ? 

Pets que fe diz delle ? 
Dizem que ejld ferido mor- 

tahnente, 
Muito ?ne pefaria dtjfo ; elle 

he hum hcmem de bem, 
Quern ojerio ? 
Dous marctos que o invejli- 

rdo y 
Sabe-fe o porque ? 

A noticia que corre he, que 

deu num delle s hum cof~ 

corre.j, 
E'u nad creyo ifso ; nem eu 

tab pouco, 
Eilo vai, cedo saber e mo s a 

verddde. 



On the contrary there's a 

talk of peace. 
I believe so. 

What say they at court ? 
They talk of a voyage. 
When do you think the king 

will set out ? 
'Tis not known, they do not 

"say when. 
Where do they say he'll go ? 

Some say into Flanders, 
others into Germany. ' 

And what says the Gazette ? 

I have not read it. 

Is it true what's reported of 

Mr. ? 

What of him ? 

They say- he is mortally 

wounded. 
I fhould be sorry for that, 

he's an honeft man. 
Who wounded him ? 
Two rogues that set upon 

him. 
Is it known upon what ac- 
count ? 
The report is that he gave 

one of them a box on the 

ear. 
I don't believe it. Nor I 

neither. 
However, we (hall soon know 

the truth. 



D I A L O G O IX. 



DIALOGUE IX. 



Pa 



ra escrever. 



To write. 



T\A'LME huma foiha de 
**~^ pap el, huma penna> e hu- 
ma pone a de tinta^ 
1'de ao rneu quarto, eachareis 
em cima da mei a tudo o que 
vos for precijo, 



S~* IVE me a fbeet of pa- 
\P per, a pen, and a little 

ink. 
Step to my closet, you'll find 
on the table whatever you 
want, Ndo 



7 6 



PORTUGUESE 



Nao ha pennas, 

Ha gran de quantidade dellas 

na escrivaninha, 
Nad p reft do par a ndda, 
La ha outras, * 

Na o ejtdo apa rddas, 
Cnde ejla o vojfo catdvete ? 
Sabeis vos apardr pennas ? 
E'u aparo-as a mcu modo, 
E'fta nao ejla md, 
£m quanto acdbo ejla carta, 
fazclme o favor defechdr 

as cutras, e Jazer hum 

maco dellas, 
Quejello quer vm. que eu Ike 

ponlia ? 
Sella -o com o me a Jinete, cm 

com as minhas armas, 
Com que lucre quer v?n. que 
. as j edit % 
Fechai-as com o vermelho ou 

com o preto ; feja qual for, 

7id5 impbrta, 
Tern vm. pbjlo a data ? 
Parcce-me que Jim, ?nas ainda 

nao a ajjinei, 
A quanto s ejiamos hbje do 

mez ? 
A outo, a dez, a quinze, a 

vinte, 
Pbnde o sobrescrito? 
O'nde efld a area ? 
Vos nunc a tendes area, 

A hi ha algitma. no areeiro, 

Ahi ejld o feu criddo; quer 

vm. que elle leve as cartas 

do corrio, 
Leva as minhas cartas do 

correo, e ndoteesquecdsde 

pagdr o parte, 
Nad tenho dinheiro, 
Ahi ejla huma moeda de 6uro f 
Vaijdepre/fa, e van logo, 



There are no pens. 

There are a great many in 
the ftandifh. 

They are good for nothing. 

There are some others. 

They are not made. 

Where is your penknife ? 

Can ycu make pens ? 

I make them my own way. 

This is not bad. 

While I make an end of this 
letter, do me the favour to 
make a packet of the reft. 

What seal will you have me 

put to it ? 
Seal it with my cypher, or 

coat of arms. 
What wax fhall I put to it ? 

Put either red, or black, no 
matter which. 

Have you put the date ? 

I believe I have, but I have 
not signed it. 

What day of the month h 
this ? 

The eighth, the tenth, fif, 
teenth, twentieth. 

Put the superscription. 

Where is the powder ? 

You never have powder or 
sand. 

There's some in the sand 
box. 

There's your servant, will 
you let him carry the let- 
ters to the poll-house ? 

Carry my letters to the poft- 
ofHce, and don't forget to- 
pay poftage. 

I have no money. 

There's a moidore. 

Go quickly, and return as 
soon as possibly 

D I A- 



GRAMMAR. 



77 



P I A L O G O X, 



Q 



Para comprar. 
U E quer vm. 



Quero hum bom panno fino 

para hum veftido, 
Tenha vm. a bondade de en- 

trar, e vera o mats belo 

panno que hd em Londres, 
Deixe-me ver o melhor que 

vm. tem> 
Aquitem vm. hum excellenie, 

que agbrafe cojluma trazer, 
He hum bom pernio, mas a 

cor ndo me agrdda, 
Ahi tern vm. outra pega que 

tern o cor mats clara, 
Agrddame a cor, mas o panno 

ndo he forte, nao tern cor- 

po, 
Yeja ejia pica ; vm. nao ac- 

hara em nenhuma parte 

outra tad boa cbmo ella, 
Quant o pede vm. por cada 

ana detle ? 
Ofeujujloprego he — r— 

Sr. nao he meu coflumepor-me 
a regatear ; faca-mejavor 
dedizerme o ultimo preco, 

Ja dijfe a vm. que aquelle he 
o seu jujlo prego, 

He muito caro, dar Ihe hei a 
vm. — 

Ndo pojjo dar nada de abate, 
on naopojfo abater hum cei- 
til\ 

Vm. ndo ha de vender por es- 
se preco, 

Vm. quiz saber o ultimo pri - 
co t eett dijfe-lho, 



DIALOGUE X. 

To buy, 

VTTHAT do you want, fir? 
*™ What would youpleasc 

to have ? 
I want a good fine cloth to 

make me a suit of clothes. 
Be pleased to walk in, fir, 

you'll see the fineft in 

London. 
Shew me the beft you have. 

There's a very fine one, and 
what's worn at present. 

'Tis a good cloth, but I don't 
like the colour. 

There's another lighter piece. 

I like that colour well, but 

the cloth is not ftrong, 'tis 

too thin. 
Look upon this piece here, 

sir, you'll not find the like 

any where else. 
What do you afk for it an 

ell? 
Without exacting, it is 

worth • 

Sir, I am not used to ftand 

haggling ; pray tell me 

your loweft price. 
I have told you, sir, 'tis 

worth that. 
? Tis too dear, I'll give you — 

I can't bate a farthing. 



You fhall not have what you 

afk. 
You afked me the loweft 

price, and I have told 

you. 

Hora 



PORTUGUESE 



?s 



Bora vamos, ccrte vm. Id du- 

as anas delle, 
AJfeg'uro-lke.a vm. ccmo ho- 

mem de bem que /ou, que 

nab gankc nqda com vm. 
Ahi tern vm. cinco ?noedas de 

ouro, de me a dxm a si a, 
Tenha a bonds de 'de dar-me 

outra em lugdr dcjla, por- 

que nub he de pezo, 
Ahieftd outra, 
A Dcos, crlado de vm. 



Come, come, cut off two 

ells of it. 
I proteft, or the word of an 

honeft man, I don't get 

any thing by you. 
There's five" moidores, give 

me the change. 
Be pleased, sir, to let me have 

another for- this, it warns 

weight*. 
There's another. 
Farewell; sir, your servant. 



D I A L O G O XL DIALOGUE XL 



Para huma Jornada. 

SUA'NTAS leg'oas ha da- 
qui a N ? 
Ma auto legbas, 
Nos nab poderetnos chegdr la 

hoje, he muito tarde, 
Nab he fenab meyo dia, vm" s 
dinda tern bajicnte tempo, 

He a ajlrdda boa ? 

Nab he muito boa, pajfao-fe 

bbfques e rios, 
lid algum perigo nella ? 

Mao hd noticias dijjo ; he 
ejlrdda real em que Je en- 
contra gente a cada pojfo, 

Pois nab dizem que ha ladrc- 
ens nos bbsques ? 

Nab ha de que ter me do, ne?n 
de dia, nem de noite, 

Por ondefe vai ? 

Qudndo vm C£S ch eg a rem ao pe 
do outeiro, he precifo que 
to mem a mdo direita, 

Pois nao he necejfdrio fubir 
hum outeiro ? 



Fo 



r a "Journey. 



IT O W many leagues is it 
■■"*• from this place to N. ? 
It is eight leagues. 
We (hall not be able to get 

thither to day, it is too late. 
It is not more than twelve 

o'clock, you have time 

enough yet. 
Is the road good ? 
So, so ; there are woods and 

rivers to pass. 
Is there any danger upon that 

road ? 
There's no talk of it, it is a 

highway, where you meet 

people every moment. 
Do not they say there are 

robbers in the woods ? 
There's nothing to be feared 

either by day or night. 
Which way muft one take? 
When you come near the 

bill, you rouft take to the 

right hand. 
Is it not necessary to ascend 

a hill then ? 

Nao ■ 



GRAMMAR. 



79 



Nad, Sr. ncio ha cutro oute- 

iro fen -I huma pequena 

ladeiri, (ou descula) no 

basque, 
Cujtaaatmar com o caminho 

pello miyo dos bosques? 
Vm ces . new podem errc-lo, 
Logo Mut v?n ces fakir em do 
bofquc, lembrem-fe de tomdr 
a mao efquerda, 
Vm c< muito s annos, fico-lhe 

muito obrigado, 
Vdmos, vumos, fenhores, to- 

membs hum cava Ho, 
O'nde est:t o mar que z ? 
E'llefoi adiante\ 
E'lle h a de eft:, r efpera ndo por 

vgs logo ali for a da ciddde, 
Por que estd v?n Ci agora efpe- 

randol hora, vamo-nos 

daqui, acabemos, 
Fiquem-fe embora, fenhores, 

a Deos, 
Fdcdo vrri" muito boa jor- 

nada s 



No, fir, ; there is no other 
hill hut a little declivity in 
the wood. 

Is it a difficult way through 

the woods ? 
You can't lofe your way. 
As foon as you are out of the 

wood, remember to keep 

to the left hand. 
I thank you, fir, and am very 

much obliged to you. 
Come, come, gentlemen, let's 

takeahorfe. 
Where is the marquis ? 
He is gone before. 
He'll wait for you juft out 

of town. 
What do you ilay for now ? 

come, come, let's be gone, 

let's have done. 
Fare wel, gentlemen, fare- 

w-el. 
I with you a very good jour- 
ney. 



D I A L O. G O XII. DIALOGUE XII. 



Da Cea e da Pousada. Of the Supper and Lodging. 



pO'MOUE affim estamos 
*- / chegddos a estaldgem 9 
Apeemo-nos.,fnh6res, 
Pega nos cavdllos destes sen- 

hores, he trdta delles, 
Vejamos agira o que vm. nos 

hd de dar para cear, 
Hum capao, meya duzia de 

pombos, huma falada,feis 

codomiz.es, e huma duzia 

de calhundras, 
Querem vm ces mdis alguma 

coufa? 
I'sto he bastunte, dai nos al- 
um vinho quefeja bom y e 
\uma sobremesa. 



QO, we are arrived at the 

^ inn. 

Let's alight, gentlemen. 

Take thefe gentlemen's horf- 
es, and take care of them. 

Now let's fee what you'll 
give us for ("upper. 

A capon, half a dozen of pi- 
geons, a fallad, fix quails, 
and a dozen of larks. 

Will you have nothing elfe ? 

That's enough, give us fome 
good wine, and a defTert. 
Deixem 



So 



PORTUGUESE 



Deixem vm ( " uso por minha 
Conta, eu Ihes prometo que 
fiquem bemfervidos, 

Alumia dos fenhores, 

Dai-nos de cear o m'ais de- 
pressa que for possivel, 

Antes que vm <cs tenhao def- 
calcado as betas, e star a a 
ce'a na meja, 

Tende cuidado que trdgao 
para cima as nossas-malas 
e pistblas, 

Dejcalcdi-me as botas, e de- 
Jpois ireis verfe tern dado 
algumfeno aos cav alios, 

Levdi-os do rio, e tende cui- 
dado que Ihes dan alguma 
avea, 

E'u tern cuidado de to do, 
estijdo vm Ui de/'canfados, 

Senhbres, a ceaesldprbmpta, 
esta na me fa, 

Nos vamosja, 

Vamos cear, fenhores, para 
nos hirmos deitar cedo, 

Dai-nos agea para lavar as 

?naos, 
Sentemo-nos, Jenhores, fente- 

mo nos d mesa, 
Dai-nos de Leber, 
Afdude de vm CfS ??ieus fenhores, 
He bom o vinko ? 
Nao he ?nao, 

capcib ndo estd bem affado, 
Dai-nos kumas pbucas de 

lardnjas y e hum p one o de 

pimenta, 
Torque nab come vm" destes 

pbmbos ? 
Eu tenhecomido J}umpombo, 

e tres calhandras, 
Dize do estalajadeiro auelke 

querimos fallar, 



Let me alone, I'll pleafe you, 
I warrant you. 

Light the gentlemen. 

Let's have our (upper as 

foon as poflible. 
Before you have pulled your 

boots off, fupper (hall be 
' upon the table. 
Let our portmanteaus and 

piftols be carried up flairs. 

Pul, off my boots, and then 
you (hall go fee whether 
they have given the horfes 
any hay. 

You (hall carry them to the 
river, and take care they 
give them fome oats. 

I'll take care of everything, 
don't trouble yourfelf. 

Gentlemen, fupper is ready, 
it is upon the table. 

We'll come prefently. 

Let's go to fupper, gentle- 
men, that we may go to 
bed in good time. 

Give us water to wafh our 
hands. 

Let us fit down, gentlemen, 
let's fit down at table. 

Give us fome drink. 

To your health, gentlemen. 

Is the wine good ? 

It is not bad. 

The capon is not done enough 

Give us fome oranges with a 
little pepper. 

Why don't you eat of thefe 

pigeons ? 
I have eaten one pigeon and 

three larks. 
Tell the landlord we want to 

fpeak with him. 



D I A- 



GRAMMAR. 3i 

DIA'LOGO XIII. DIALOGUE XIII, 
Do faltar e do correr. Of jumping and running. 



17 R A vamos, quer vm. /^ O M E, will you go to 
faltar, ^ jumping? 

It is not good to jump imme- 



Ndo he bom faltar logo des- 
pots de comer, 

De que mo do de faltar gofla 
vm. mais? 

mais commit m he a pes jun- 
tos, 

Quer vm. quefaltemosfo com 
hum pe ? 

C'omo vm. quiver, 

Ejleh e h u. mfdltom u itogrdnde 

Ouantos pcsfaltou vm.? 

Mais de qudtro, 

Ap'ojlo que f alto por cima da- 

quelle barrdnco, 
Vm.falta com hum pao com- 

prido, 
Demos huma carreira, 
Oner vm. que corrdmos ape 

oil a cavdllo, 
De huma e outra forte, 
Diga vm. don deft ha de come- 

far , e ondefe ha deacabkr, 
Comecdmos a correr daqui. 

Correr tmos ate chegar a eftci 
arvore, 

Tenho cor rido trez vtzes 
desde o lugdr affinalado ate 
a arvore, 

Vm. naoefperoupello final pa- 
ra principidr a correr, 

Aquelle cavullo correo muito 
bem. 

Qudntas carrefras tern tile 
dado ? 

Tres ou quatro, 

Vm, tern ganhado\ 



diately after dinner. 
What leaping do you like. 

beR? 
The moll ufual is with one 

foot close to the other. 
Shall we hop with one leg? 

As you pleafe. 

This is a very great leap. 

How many feet have yoii 

leap'd? 
More than four. 
I lay I kap clearly over that 

ditch. 
You jump with a long flick, 

Let us run races. 

Shall we run on foot or on 

horfeback ? 
Both ways. 
Appoint the race. 

This will he the ftarting 

place. 
This tree (hall be the goal. 

I have run three times from 

the flarting-place to the 

tree. 
You did not flay for the fig- 

nal to flart. 
Thai horfe has run his race 

very well. 
How many heats has he tun ? 

Three or four. 

You have won the plate. 



»F 



CARTAS 



82 PORTUGUESE 



CARTAS 

SOBRE 

A Mer cartel a ou Negocio. 

Senhor F. F. Londres, 30 de Janeiro, 1808. 

AS de Vm ce de 3e. 15 do mez passado recebi 
em 5 do Corrente, pello Navio F. F. Capr- 
tao B. B. Mestre, e nellas advirto q~. carregara 
Vm c e, abordo do primeiro bom Navio destinado p a . 
esta praca, as fazendas q' recommendei a seu cur- 
dado na minha ultima, com esta vio mais mostrasj 
mas o que Ihe peco he de emcomendar a o tintu- 
reiro que as corres tenhao vivesa e q~. sejao de 
dura 3 pelio ultimo Navio mandei a vm ce , a conta 
da venda da partida das meas de seda como tam- 
bem dos 3 Caixcs de chapeos que. me vierao con- 
signados pello Navio A ; se se offerecerem mais de 
qualquer dos generos sobreditos sendo acomodados 
bem,' pode mandalos, por serem agora pedidos, 
com estacondicam que sejam da moda e de bom 
feitio; tenho contratado por suas 20 Pipas de a- 
zeite pellos primeiros navios de eafra e as 20 Fipas 
de Vinho tinto com as 20 Pipas e 3 quartos de 
Branco ja eslam abordo do Navio S. F. Capita© 
F mestre, dos quaes a Factura vai Inclusa, e os con- 
becimentos irao pello correio ; queira Deos que 
chegue a salvamento : sendo o que por ora se ofFe- 
rece. 

Mais obrigado Servidor de Vm ce . q~. S. M. P. 

LET- 



GRAM M A.R, 83 



LET T E.-R S 



ON 



Business, or Mercantile Affairs. 



Mr, R-F. London, the 30th of January, 1808, 

X7'OURS of the "3d and 15th of last Month, 
JL came to Hand pn the 5th Current ''by the Ship 
F. F. Captain B. B. Commander ; and therein Ptake 
Notice, that you intend to put on board the next 
good Ship bound hither, the Goods I recommended 
to your Care in' my last. Herewith I send you more 
Patterns, but I would desire you to be solicitous 
with your Dyer, that the Colours may be lively and 
durable^. By the last Ship I remitted you Account 
of Sales." of the Parcel of Silk Stockings, and the 
three Boxes of Hats, by the Ship A ; and if you 
meet with a Parcel of either, or both, to your Mind, 
please to send them, such Articles being now in 
Demand, but great Care must be taken of the Fa* 
shion and Make. I have taken care to secure your 
twenty Pipes of Oil for the first Ships in the 1 Season^ 
and put on board the Ship N. your twenty Pipes of 
Red, and twelve Pipes and three Hogsheads of 
White Wine, Capt. F. Commander, of which the 
Invoice goes herewith, and the Bills of Lading shall 
be sent by the post, and I hope will come safe to 
Hand ; which being all that is necessary at present, 
I remain, 

SIR, 

Your humble Servant, 

* F 2 



84 PORTUGUESE 

Senhor Jasinto Jones, 

Meu Senhor, 

EST AS servem pare avisar a Vm ce . como por 
este Navio, o Derby, tenho feito o Retorno do seu 
Cabedal em meu Poder em duas Bolsas de Diaman- 
tes montando a Pagodas 4396, 25 Fan. 10 Casks ten- 
doas registrado comforrne sua Ordem nos Livros 
da Companhia, incluzo esta o Conhecimento, junto 
com a Factura e sua Conta Corrente fechada, a qual 
dezeijo que chegue a Salvamento, e que lhe faca boa 
Conta ; eomo eu estou para Tornar com este Tres- 
passo para Europa, a minha chegadaa Londres, terei 
o Honor de ver a Vm ce . e darlhe huma exacta conta 
do Negocio na India, e sou Enteiramente, 

Fort St. George. Mais humilde Servidor, 

Nov. 12, 1808. i de Vm M . Q. S. M. B. 



Londres, a 4 Marco, 1808, 
A Lisboa. . > S r . Joao Ferrier, 

Meu Sen h or, 

ESTOU favorecido.com a de Vm ce de 3do Cor- 
rente, e acho que em Comprimento a minha Or- 
dem tern Vm ce . comprado os quinheirtos Barils de 
Arenques de fttmo a Livras onz.e por Lastre; eu nao 
tenho duvida que esse foi o menor preso porque 
Vm ce , os podia ter, e que sua boa Qualidade o 
Corresponda, meu Navio se esta preparando com 
toda a pressa para frir Buscalos : elle se pode care- 



GRAMMAR. €S 

Mr. James Jones, 

Sir, 

THESE will advise you, that by this Ship the 
Derby, I have made the return of your Stock in 
my Hands in two Bulses of Diamonds, amounting 
to Pagodas 4396, 25 Fan. 10 Casks, having re- 
gistered them according to your Order in the Com- 
pany's Books; inclosed is a Bill of Lading, together 
with invoice, and your Account current closed, 
which I wish may come safe to you, and turn to a 
good Account, as 1 am returning by this Conveyance 
into Europe; at my Arrival in London, I shall have 
the Honour to see you, and give you an exact Ac- 
count of the Trade in India. I am entirely, 

Sir, 

Fort St. George, Your humble Servant, 

Nov. 1"2, 1808. 



London, 4 March, 1808* 
To Lisbon. Mr. John Ferrier. 

Sir, 

v I AM favoured with yours of the 3d Current, 
and find, in Compliance to my Order, you have 
bought the five hundred Barrels of red Herrings, at 
11/. per Last, I make no doubt, but that was the 
lowest Price you could get them for, and the good- 
ness of them does answer it : my ship is getting 
ready with all Speed to go down to fetch them, and 
she may be laden at your Key, as she draws no 

* F 3 more 



86 PORTUGUESE 

gar em o seu Cays, sendo que nao tira mais de que 
nove Pes de Agua ; como Vm t,e . he servido de 
apontarme, que me apouparia de Gastos quatro pe- 
miques por Baril, eu julgo que elle podera levar sette 
centos Barils ou mais ; se assim for, quando elle che- 
gar, Vm ce . o podera despachar : o Capitao nao tera 
Ocaziap de qualquer dinheiro, assim que nao bavera 
mister de nernhum Suprimento. Agracleco a Vm ce . 
pella Informacao que me da em relacao dos Cam- 
bios de Lisboa a este Lugar: mas como eu olhopara 
Remessas do Dinheiro aqui tao ariscado em Let- 
tras do Exchequer. Vm ce . sera servido de s'acar 
sobre mim ao mais acomodado Cambio que lhe 
for possivel, e suas Lettras ao usual Curso, as quaes 
terao todo o.devido Honor, 

•Mui certo Servidor de Vm ce . que S. M.' B. 



Londres, 18 Marco, 1808. 

A Cadiz. Senhor Joao Fryer, 

Meu Senhor, 

DIVERSAS Cartas de Vm ce . me vierao a mao 
a seu Tempo, como tambem minha conta Corrente 
a qual tenho notado em Conformidade com Vm ce . 
sua ultima toy de 29 do Mez passado, na qual me 
dk Vm ce ; recifco das trez \Letras importantes seis 
Mill Pieces de Oito, £s quaes meo Irmao Joseph 
mandou a Vm ce . por minha Conta, e por minha Or- 
den:; eu farei hum triste Negocio com ellas depois 
do desembcjio de meu Dinheiro ha tanto Tempo, 
ademas que o Cambio me custou caro, eu Acho 
que seus Jimites a Vm ce . forao mais somenos que o 
Preco da Prata e Cambio, agora sendo que tenho es~ 

perado 



GRAMMA R. 87 

Kiore than nine Feet of Water, as' you are pleased 
to mention, which will save me the Charge of four 
Pence per Barrel ; I judge she will carry about se- 
ven hundred Barrels, or more ; if so, when she ar- 
rives, you may fit her up, the Captain will not have 
Occasion for any Money, so will want no Supply. 
I thank you for the Information you give me in re- 
lation to the Exchange between Lisbon and this 
Place; but as I look upon the Remittance of the 
Money hence, as hazardous in Exchequer Bills, you 
will be pleased to draw on me at the most commo- 
dious Exchange possible, and your Bills at the usual 
Course, which shall meet with all due Honour from, 

Sir, 

Your humble servant, 



London, March 18, 1808. 
To Cadiz. Mr. John Fryer, 

Sir, 

YOUR several Letters came to Hand in due 
Time, as did my Account Current, which I have 
noted in Conformity with you ; your last to me was 
of 29 of last Month, wherein you give me Receipt 
of the three Bills, amounting to. six thousand Pieces 
of Eight, which my Brother Joseph sent to you 
for my Account and by my Order ; I shall make 
but a sorry Bargain of them, after so long a Dis- 
bursement ; besides they cost me a dear Exchange; 
I find his Limits to you were much under the 
Price of Plate and Exchange : Now since I 
have waited all this Time, and there being 
no Probability of their falling, be pleased to send 

*'F 4 my 



SB PORTUGUESE 

perado todo este Tempo e nao havendo Probabilida- 
de de sua baixa, seja Vm ce servido de mandarine meu 
Dinheiro como vem o Cambio tanto para esta pra- 
ca, ou Amsterdam, como Vm ce . julgar me fara me- 
lhor Conta, se a Prata ou Cocbonilha baixar a pre- 
co que a Vm ce . Ihe pareca ser melbor do que por 
remessa de Cambio, em tal caso investa Vm ce meu 
Dinheiro em qualquer delles, que deixo in- 
teiramente a Vm ce . estando persuadido que Vm<*. 
actuara em meus Negocios como se forao seus pro- 
prios, eu me alegraria ouvir da cbegada da Frota 
que podera ser que desse algum alento ao Negocio 
para que huma pessoa podesse fazer algum emprego 
que ao presente nao Convida a nada sendo quanto 
se offrece. 

Servidor de Vm ce . que S. M. B. 



Londres, Mar90 21, 1808. 

A Cadiz, Senbor Joao Fryer. 

Senhor, 

DO outro-lado, esta a Copia da minha ultima 
de 18 do Corrente, eu snponho que meu Irmao Jo- 
seph tern feito algumas Remessas a Vm ce . por min- 
ha Conta, do que saberei a quantia pello primeiro 
Correio de Olanda ] com esta mando a Vm ce : tres 
Letras, importances quatrd Mil pesos de Outo, 
sobre a boa pessoa de Vm ce . a quern as endousei, 
valor em minha Conta, cujo Dinheiro, Vm ce . sera 
servido empregar, junto com aquelle que meu Ir- 
mao Joseph Ihe tiver remetido, em dous, ou tres 
JNavios de Guerra, e me akgrarei que isto chegue a 
Tempo bastante para alcancar ao Senhor John True- 
man, e os outros Navios de Guerra, em tal Caso, 
e nao de outro modo a podera Vm ee , sacar mais do 

que 



GRAMMAR. 89 

my Money, as the Exchange comes either for this 
Place or Amsterdam, which you judge will turn 
most to Account. If the Plate or Cochineal should 
fall to a Price, which you may conceive will answer 
better than by Remittance at a due Exchange, in 
such case invest my Money in either of them, which 
I do entirely leave to you, being persuaded, you 
will act in my Affairs equal to your own. I snould 
be glad to hear of the Fleet's Arrival ; for, perhaps, 
it might give some favourable turn to business, so 
that one could make some use of one's Money,, for 
at present, it does not invite one to any thing; 
which is all from, 



Sir, 



Your humble Servant. 






Londres, March 21, 1808, 
To Cadiz, Mr. John Fryer, 
Sir, , 

ON the other Side is a Copy of my last to you 
of the 18th instant 5 I suppose my Brother Joseph 
has made you some Remittances for my Account, 
of which I shall know the Sum by the first Dutch 
Post. I herewith send you three Bills, amounting 
to four thousand Pieces of Eight on your good Self, 
to whom I have indorsed them Value in my Ac- 
count y which Money please to employ, together 
with that my Brother Joseph has remitted you in 
two or three Men of War, and should be glad this 
should get time enough to reach Sir John True- 
man's, and the other Men of War : in such Case, 
and no other, you may draw over and above what 
is remitted you for my Account, ten thousand Du- 

c'ats, 



90 PORTUGUESE 

que se ihe tem remetido por minha Conta, Dez Mil 
Ducados, e ponhaos Vm ee . com o meu outro Inte- 
rese, em ties ou- quatro Navios de Guerra, e seja 
ser'.' do de observar que sem embargo que eu orde- 
nei a Vm ce . na Copia da minha antecedente, para 
carregar em buma Galcra ou Navio ?vlarcante, tres 
Mil Ducados, e para sacar ; eu revoco a Ditta Or- 
dem, e peco*a Vm ce . que nao carregue em Galera, 
ou 'Navio Marcante, mais de dous Mil Ducados, e 
que nao saque ao presente, mas somente que em- 
pregue o que tenbo remetido a Vm ce . e seja servi- 
do mandarme buma distincta Conta, com inteira in- 
formacao do Negocio para meu Governo, e fico 
com lodo o devido respeito. 

Mui certo Servidor de Vm ce . Q. S. M. B. 



Hum escritinbo que vai aherto a hum vezinho, 
ou Amigo, emqualquer ocasiao. 

AO Senbor G. S. que T. M. ou seu servo cri- 
ado beja a S. ]VL rail vezes, e que ]he faca a merce 
de lhe mar.dar pelio portador desta 

sendolhe precisamente ne- 
cessario nesta ocasiao, e sempre ficara mui promto 
as suas Ordens. 

' A. Q. D. G. 



A Carta ou Instrument/} de Procuracao. 

SAIBAM todos quantos este instrumento ou 
Carta de procuracao virem, que eu A. B. de Londres, 
homem : ] q negocio, tenbo nomeado e constituido q 

por 



GRAM. MA R. . 9 ! 

cats, and put it, with my other Interest on three or 
four Men of War ; and please to observe, that not- 
withstanding I ordered you in the foregoing Copy, 
to load in any- Galley or Merchantman, three 
thousand Ducats-, and to draw, I do revoke the 
said Order, and desire :you not to load in any Galley 
or Merchant-man, more than two thousand Ducats, 
and for the present not to draw, but only employ 
what I have remitted you, and please to send me a 
distinct Account of the Cost, with full Information 
of the Business for my Government, and I do re- 
main with due respect, 

Sir, 
Your humble Servant., 



A short open Escrito, or Message, to a Friend 
or Neighbour, for any Thing upon Occasion. 

TO Mr. G. S. that T. M. his most humble 
Servant, desires the favour of him to send by the 
Bearer 

haying at present immediate occasion for it, and he 
shall always remain obliged to him as his 

Humble Servant. 



A Letter of Attorney., 

KNOW all Men by these Presents, That I 
A. B. of London, Merchant, have named and con- 
stituted, and by these presents do name, ordain, 

appoint, 



92 PORTUGUESE 

por estes presentes, nomeo, ordeno, constituio *e 
faco o Senbor B. C. de o meo verdadeiro e 

Jegitimo prqcurador, por mim e em meu Nome e ao 
meu uso pode demandar, arecadarereceber deT.B. 
Mercador, a soma de a mim devida.por 

ditto T. B. dando e por esta concedendo ao meu 
ditto Procurador o meu poder plenario e autoridade 
de exercitar, 'de usar de todas taes accoes e outras 
cousas em dereito necessarias para a cobranca da 
ditta divida e em meu norae, de dar, e fazer quita^oes 
ou outras descargas,e geralmente de fazer e executar 
lia materia sobreditta tao plenariamente como se 
eu mesmo flzesse ou pudesse fazer, estando pessoal- 
roente presente ; ratificando, confirmando, e outor- 
gando tudo e qualquer cousa que o ditto meu procu- 
rador legitimamente fizer ou causar de se fazer ne]la 
popestes presentes. Em testemunha do que Assinei 
e sellei esta em aos 20 dias do mez de Marco de 
1808. por A. B. 

Assinado e Sellado adiante 

de T. A.)-p i 

^r t> { lestemunhas. 



A Carta ou o Instrumento de Fretamento. 

ESTA carta ou Instrumento de Fretamento 
contratado feito aos dias do mez de 

do Anno de do nacimento de nos- 

so Senbor Jesus Christo, &x. Entre T. B. Mestre 
debaixo de Deos do bom navio nomeado, 
de dozentas e cincoenta toneladas de carga P. M. 
que ao presente esta Surto e ancorado no Rio de 

de huma parte e E. T. M. B. L. &c.' ho- 
mens de negocio da outra parte : Certificao que o 
ditto Mestre tern dado em aluguel e fretado o Ditto 
Navio aos dittos homens de negocio e que elles 

OS 



GRAMMAR. 93 

appoint, and make my trusty friend, B. C. of 
Merchant, my true and lawful Attorney, for me, 
and in my Name, and to my Use, to Demand, sue 
for, recover, and receive of T. B. of 
Merchant, the Sum of to me due and ow- 

ing by and from the said T. B. giving, and hereby 
granting unto my said Attorney, my full Power 
and Authority to use and exercise all such Acts, 
Things, and Devices in the Law, as shall be ne- 
cessary for the recovering of the said Debt, and give 
Acquittance, or other Discharges, in my Name ; to 
make and give, and generally to do and execute on 
the Premises, as fully as myself might or could do, 
were I personally present ; ratifying, confirming and 
allowing all and whatsoever my said Attorney shall 
lawfully do, or cause to be done therein, by these 
Presents. In witness whereof I have hereunto set 
my Hand and Seal, in the 20th of March, 1807. 
Sealed and delivered 

In the Presence of A. B, 

T. A. 

M. B. 



The Copy of a Charter- Party of Affreightment. 

THIS Charter Party of Affreightment, in- 
dented, made the of the 
Month of Anno Domini, 
between T. A. Master, under God, of the good 
Ship or Vessel, called" the of the Burthen 
of Tuns, or thereabouts, now riding at An- 
chor, in the River of of the one Part, and 
E, T, M, B, L, &c. Merchants, of the other Part, 
witnesseth, that the said Master has granted and 
let the said Ship to freight unto the said Mer- 
chants, and that they the said Merchants have ac- 
cordingly 



94 PORTUGUESE 

os dittos Homens de negocio tern tornado em alu« 
guel pella viagem aos concertos e as condicoes, a- 
saber o ditto Mestre faz concerto, promete e 
otorga, por elle mesmo, os seus Testamenteiros, e 
Administradores, e com os , dittos homens de ne- 
gocio, e qualquer delles, ou seus, e a qualquer dos 
seusTestamenteiroSj Administradores, e Constituin- 
tes, por estes presentes ; que o ditto Navio forte e 
sao de quilha, e bem bastantemente provido* de 
mantimentos, enxarcias e gente, e aparelhado de 
todas as cousas convenientes enecessarias para fazer 
a viagem por diante declarada ; com o primeiro 
vento favoravel e bom tempo que Deos premittira 
despois da data destes presentes, partira do porto 
de com todas as taes fazendas e Merca- 

dorias que os dittos homens de negocio ou os Seus 
Constituintes, entrementes carregarao ou meterao 
abordo delle, e com elle em direitura dara a vela 
e aplicara ao como o vento e o tempo mais 

favorecerem ao ditto Navio na sua viagem; e em 
chegando tao perto do ditto lugar de elle 

o ditto Mestre ou os Seus Constituintes dentro de 
Dias de trabalho para se contarem logo 
despois de tal sua chegada, nao somente descarega- 
rao, entergarao as dittas fazendas e mercadorias 
rneridas abordo do dito Navio ao sobre ditto, 

aos dittos homens de negocio, aos seus Feitores ou 
Constituintes, ou a alguns ou algum delles em Sal- 
vamento ebem acondicionadas, salvante o risco.dos 
mares, e o tolhimento de principes e Governadores^ 
mas tarnbem receberao, tornarao a caregar, e toma- 
rao abordo do ditto Navio de e dos ditto homens 
de negocio, dos seus Feitores ou Constituintes ou 
de alguns ou algum delles, todas as taes tazendas e 
mercadorias que elles ou qualquer delles alicarega- 
rio ou njeterao abordo delle ate o comprimento 
inteiro da carga do ditto Navio; asaber : tanto 
quanto bem se podra arrumar debaixo da cuberta 

no 



graXjma r, n 

cordingly hired her for the Voyage, and upon the 
Terms and Conditions following : That is to say, 
the said Master does covenant, promise, and grant 
for himself, his Executors, and Administrators, to 
and with the said Merchants, and either of them, their 
and either of their Executors, Administrators, and 
Assigns, by these Presents ; That the said Ship, 
strong and sound, and well and sufficiently victu- 
alled, tackled, manned, and apparelled, with all 
Things fit, needful, and necessary for' the Per- 
formance of the Voyage hereafter mentioned, shall, 
with the first fair Wind and Weather, which God 
shall send, after the Date of these Presents, depart 
from the Port of with all such Goods 

and Merchandize as the said Merchants, or their 
Assigns, shall in the mean Time lade and put on 
board of her, and therewith directly sail, and apply 
unto as Wind and Weather shall best 

serve for the said Ship to sail, and being arrived as 
near to the said Place of he the said Mas- 

ter, or Assigns, shall and will, within 
working Days next, from and after such her Arri- 
val to be accounted, not only unlade and deliver 
the said Goods and Merchandize put on board the 
said Ship at aforesaid, unto the said Mer- 

chants, their Factors, or Assigns, or some or one 
of them, in Safety, and well conditioned, the Dan- 
gers of the Seas, and Restraint of Princes and Ru- 
lers excepted, but alsoshall and will receive, relade, 
and take on board the said Ship, of and from the 
said Merchants, their Factors, or Assigns, or some 
or one of them, all such Goods and Merchandize, 
as they or any of them shall there please to lade 
and put on board her, to the said Ship's full and 
corapleat Lading; that is to say, as much as can 
conveniently be stowed in the whole Hold, and 
between Decks, afore the main mast, Room only 
reserved for the said Ship's Provisions, Tackle, and 

Apparel, 



96 PORTUGUESE 

no conves, e adiante do masto grande, Salvante os 
lugar pellos mantimentos, enxarcias e aparelhos do 
ditto Navio, e os dittos dias de trabalho 

sendo acabados ou o ditto navio sendo ali mais de- 
pressa despachado, o que primeiro succeder elle o 
ditto Mestre ou os seus constituintes com a primeira 
boa occasiao de tempo e vento favoravel em derei- 
tura navigarao e tornarao a vir com o ditto Navio 
e a Sua Carga do ditto porto de descaregar, e reca- 
regar de aqui dentro de 

dias de trabalho logo despois da entrada 
do ditto Navio dada na alfandega desta ditto 

elle o ditto Mestre ou os seus Constituintes 
descaregarao e eutregarao as dittas fazendas e mer- 
cadorias carregadas abordo do ditto Navio ao seu 
descarregar e recarregar sobre ditto aos 

dittos homens de negocio, e os seus Testamenteiros, 
Administradores, ou Constituintes em salvamento, 
salvante o risco dos mares e o tolhimentp de Princi- 
pes e Governadores, e asim se acabara a ditta desti- 
nada Viagem E os dittos homens de nego- 

cio concertam, prometem, e otorgam por elles mes- 
mos e q'ualquer delles, ou seus, e qualquer de seus 
Testamenteiros, Administradores, e Constituintes 
por estes presentes :^qu'e os seus Testamentei- 

ros, Administradores, Feitores ou Constituintes nao 
somente descaregarao e recaregarao o ditto navio 
ao seu porto de descaregar, e recaregar de 
sobre ditto, e despacharao e descaregarao o mesmo 
neste na maneira e forma acima decla- 

rada : e dentro dos certos dias e tempos sobre no- 
meados ; Mas tambem por inteiro de todo o frete 
que se, veneer, para se pagare pedir por e durante 
esta presente destinada viagem; bem e verdadeira- 
mente pagarao ou Causarao que se pague ao ditto 
Mestre, aos seus Testamenteiros, Administradores 
ou Constituintes a summa cje 

de dinheiro corrente da na maneira e 

forma 



GRAMMAR. 97 

Apparel, and the faid working Days 

being expired, or the faid Ship there fooner dif- 
patched, which firft (hall happen, he the faid Mat- 
ter, pr his Affigns, fhairand will, with the then 
next Opportunity of Wind and Weather from her 
faid unlading and relading Port of aforefaid, 

dire£tly fail, return, and come back with the faid 
Ship and Lading unto the Port of and here 

within working Days next after the faid 

Ship fliall be entered in the Cuftom-Houfe of this 
faid he the faid Mailer, or his Affigns* 

fhall and will unlade, and deliver the faid Goods and 
Merchandizes, laden on board the faid Ship at her 
lading and relading aforefaid, unto the faid 

Merchants, their Executors, Adminiftrators, or 
Affigns, in fafety, and well conditioned, the Dan- 
gers of the Seas, and Reftraint of Princes and Ru- 
lers, excepted, and fo end the faid intended Voyage; 
and the faid Merchants do covenant, promife, and 
grant, for themfelves, and either of Jhem, their, 
and either of their Executors and Adminiftrators, 
to and with the faid Matter, his Executors and Ad- 
miniftrators, and Affigns, by thefe Prefents, that 
their Executors, Adminiftrators, Factors, 
or Affigns, fhall and will not only unlade and re- 
lade the faid £hip, at her unlading and relading Port 
of aforefaid, and difpatch and difcharge the 

fame at this in the Manner and Form as 

above expreffed, and within the refpective Days 
and Times above mentioned, but alfo mall and 
will, in full of all Freight to be due, payable, or 
demandable, for or during this prefent intended 
Voyage, well and duly pay, or caufe to be paid, 
unto the faid Mailer, his Executors, Adminiftrators, 
or Affigns, the Sum of 

of lawful Money of in the 

Manner and' Form following : That is to fay, 
Part thereof within 

* G Days 



98 PORTUGUESE 

forma feguinte ; Afaber parte delle 

dentro em dias defpois da entrada 

do ditto navio dado na alfandega de 

Item mais delle dentro em dias proxi- 

mo feguintes, e o reftante do ditto frete inteiro 
dentro em dias logo ; defpois da defcarga 

do ditto Navio aqni em fobre ditto, E 

acordafe reciprocamente por e entre ambas as par- 
tes por elles mefmos, os feus particulars Teftamen- 
teiros, e Adminiftradores que todos os gaftos dos 
portos que fe vencerem para pagarfe ou pedirfe, du- 
rante efta prefente deftinada viagem -, ferao pagados 
e fatisfeitos na maneira e forma feguente ; Afaber 
delles pellos dittos homens de negocio ou 
feus Teftamenteiros ou Conftituintes : Alem dilTo, 
por efte fe concerta que podra fer e feja licito aos e 
pellos dittos homens de negocio, os feus feitores ou 
Conftituintes de reter o ditto navio em detenca ao 
feu porto defcarga e recarga fobre ditto, e tam- 
bem a fobre ditto tanto tempo e tantos dias que 
fe requeirao, alem dos dias certos acima apontados 
falvo que nao paflem dias por inteiro ; 

Elles os dittos homens de negocio, os feus Feitores, 
Conftituintes por cada-hum e cada tal dia pagando 
ao ditto Meftre ou aos feus Conftituintes de dia em 
dia como mefmo fe veneer para fe pagar, qualquer 
coufa fobreditta em contrario nao obftante; e pello 
comprimento de todas, e de cada huma das coufas 
acima declaradas, as quaes par parte e pello que to- 
ca ao ditto Meftre, aos feus Teftamenteiros, Ad- 
miniftradores ou Conftituintes e cada hum delles 
sao e devem de fer avidas, tidas, obfervadas e 
compridas, O ditto Meftre fe obriga a ft mefmo, os 
feus Teftamenteiros, e Adminiftradores, juntamente 
com o ditto Navio, o feu frete, enxarcias e aparelhos 
aos dittos homens de negocio, aos feus Teftamen- 
teiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituentes, e cada hum 
delleS na foma ou pena de dinheiro corrente de 

para 




GRAMMAR. 99 

Days after the faid Ship (hall . be entered into the 
Cuftom Houfe of Item, 

more thereof within Days then next fol- 

lowing, and the remaining part of the faid whole 
Freight within Days next after the 

faid Ship fhall be delivered after lading here at 
aforefaid ; and it is mutually agreed by and 
between the faid Parties to thefe Prefents, for them- 
felves, their feveral Executors and Adminiftrators, 
That all Port Charges which fhall grow due, pay- 
able, or demandable, during this prefent intended 
Voyage, fhall be paid and fatisfied in the Manner 
and Form following; That is to fay, thereof by 
the faid Merchants, their Executors, Factors, or 
Affigns, and the other thereof by the faid 

Matter, his Executors or Affigns : Further, it is 
hereby agreed, that it fhall and maybe lawful unto 
and for the faid Merchants, their Fa£k>rs, or Af- 
figns, to keep the faid Ship in Demurrage at her 
unlading and relading Port above mentioned, and 
alfo at aforefaid, oyer and above the re- 

fpecied Days aforementioned, fuch other Time and 
Number of Days as will be requifite, fo as the fame 
exceed not Days in the whole, they the 

laid Merchants, their Factors, for each and every 
fuch Day, paying unto the faid Mailer, or his 
Affigns Day by Day, where the fame fhall 

^grow due and payable, any thing aforefaid to the 
contrary notwithftanding ; and for the Perform- 
ance of all and lingular the Premifes, which on 
the Part and Behalf of the faid Mailer, his Execu- 
tors, Adminiilrators, and Affigns, and every of 
them, are and ought to be well and truly holden, 
obferved,and performed, the faid Mailer doth bind 
and oblige himfelf, his Executors and Adminiflra- 
tors, together with the faid Ship and her Freight, 
Tackle and Apparel unto the faid Merchants, their 
"Executors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, and every 
* G 2 of 



- 



100 PORTUGUESE 

para fe pagar bem e verdareiramente por eftes pre- 
fentes e tambem pello comprimento de todas e de 
eada huma das coufas fobre dittas, os quaes por parte 
e pello que toea aos dittos bomens de negocio, aos 
feus Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores, Conftituin- 
tes ou qualquer delles, Sao e devem de fer guar- 
dadas, pagadas e Compridas; os dittos bomens de 
inegocio fe obrigao a fi mefmos, os feus Teftamen- 
teiros, e Adminiftradores, junta e feparadamente 
com a fuas fazendas que fe caregarao abordo do dit- 
to Navio nefta prefente deftinada viagem, ao ditto 
Meftre aos feus Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores e 
Conftituintes, e a cada bum delles, na femelhante 
Soma da pena de de Semelbante dinbeiro 

corrente de para fer pagado bem e verdadei- 

mente por eftas prefentes ; Em Teftimunba no que 
as partes Sobredittas aftinarao e Selarao reciproca- 
mente eftas prefentes Cartas de fretamento contra- 
tadasj ao dia e anno primeiro acima declarado. 

T. B. 
Sellado entregue 
adiante de 
A. B. C. D. 



A Police de Seguro. 

Em o Nome de Deos, Amen. 

Tanto no feu proprio nome, como por 
ou em o nome ou nomes- de todos e cada peiloa 
ou peffoas a quern o mefmo pertence, pofta ou po-* 
dra pertencer, em parte ou em todo faz o Seguro, 
caufa all mefmo e a elles, e a cada bum delles de 
affegurarfe, perdidos ou nao perdidos 

fobre qualquer genero de fazendas e Mer- 
cadorias qualquer carregadas ou para fe carregarem 
abordo do bom Navio por nome da Carga 

do 



GRAMMA R, 101 

'df them, in the Sum or Penalty of Pounds 

of lawful Money of well and truly to be 

paid by these trefents, and likewife for the Per- 
formance of all and (ingular the Premifes, which 
on the Part and Behalf of the faid Merchants their 
Executors, Adminiftrators, and Ailigns, or any 
of them, are and ought to be kept, paid, and per- 
formed, the faid Merchants do bind and oblige 
themfelves, their Executors, and Administrators, 
jointly and feverally, together with their Goods, to 
be laden on board the said Ship, this prefent intend- 
ed Voyage, uwto the faid Mafter, his Executors, 
Administrators, and Affigns, and every of them, 
in the like Sum and Penalty of of like 

lawful Money of alfo well and truly to 

be paid by these Prefents. In Witnefs whereof, the 
Parties aforefaid to thefe prefent Charter-Parties in- 
dented, have interchangeably put their Hands and 
Seals the Day and Year firft above written. 

T.EL 
Sealed and delivered in 
the Prefence of 
A.B. C. D. 



A Policy of Ajfurance* 

\ IN the Name of God, Amen, 

■as well in his own Name, as for and in the Name 
and Names of all and every other Perfon and 
Perfons to whom the fame doth, may or fhall ap- 
pertain, in Part, or in all, does make Afturance, 
and caufes himfelf and them., and -every of them, 
to be.infured, loft, or not loft upon 

any kind of Goods and Merchandize whatfoever, 
laden or to be laden aboard the good Ship called 
the Burthen Tons, 

.* G 3 or 



102 PORTUGUESE 

de toneladas, P. M. do que he Meftrfc 

debaixo de Deos C. T. M. ou quern quer que 
for por Meftpe do -ditto Navio ou o Meftre delle fe 
nomea ou nomeara ; principiando a aventura fobre 
as dittas fazendas e Mercadorias de, e logo defoois 
de carregallas abordo do ditto Navio e affim 

fe continuara e ficara ate que o ditto Navio com as 
dittas fazendas e Mercadorias quaesquer chegar 

e as mefmas ahi defcarregadas em Salva- 
mento ; e fera licito pello ditto navio, nefta via- 
gem, de parar e deterfe em quaefquer portos ou lu- 
gares fern prejuizo a efte Seguro. As 

dittas fazendas e Mercadorias por concerto, sao e 
ferao avaliadas em Sem que fe de outra 

contra dellas mefmas, Tocante as Venturas e rifcos 
com que nos os afleguradores contentamonos e que 
tomaincs fobre nos nefta viagem, Ellas sao dos 
Mares, das naos de guerra, de fogo, inimigos, 
Coffairos, ladroes, Roubadores, Jettezonas ou ia- 
zendas perdidas e deitadas no mar, lettres de Marte, 
e contra Marte, fobrefaltos tomadias no Mar, cita- 
c,6es, tolhimentos e detencas de todos os Reys, 
Principes e povos de nacao condicao ou qualidade 
qualquer, barratria e contraries enganofas do meftre e 
dos Marinheiros, e de todos os ourrcs perigos ; per- 
das e defaftres que ja vierao ou que virao ou pre- 
juizo, defaproveitamento ou dano das dittas fazen- 
das e mercadorias, ou de algua parte dellas. E fe 
acafo fucceder a-Iguma perda ou defventura, fera li- 
cito aos AiTeguradores, Feitores, Servos e Conftitu- 
intes de mandar fazer diiigencias e trabalhar por, 
em, e acerca da defeza, Salvamento, e recobramento 
das dittas fazendas e mercadorias, ou dealguma parte 
dellas fern prejuizo ao defte Seguro, aos gaftos do 
que nos os Afleguradores contribuiremoscada hum 
conforme a Sua contia nelle aftegurada ; e nos os 
Afleguradores eftamos de acordo e concerto que 
efta efcritura e feguro tera tanta forca e valor como 

a mais 



GRAMMA R. 103 

or thereabouts ; wherefore P. M. is Mailer, under 
God, for this prefers t Voyage or who- 

foever elk fhall go for Mailer in the faid Ship, or 
by whatfoever Name or Names the faid Ship, or 
the Mailer thereof, is or fhall be named or called ; 
beginning the Adventure upon the faid Goods and 
Merchandife from and immediately following the 
Lading thereof aboard the faid Ship 
and fo fhall continue and endure until the faid Ship, 
with the faid Goods and Merchandife whatfoever 
fhall be arrived and the fame there fafely 

landed ; and it mail be lawful for the faid Ship in 
this Voyage to flop and flay at any Port or Places 
without prejudice to this AiTurance. 
The faid Goods and Merchandife by Agreement, 
are and fhall be valued at without fur- 

ther Account to be given for the fame, touching 
the Adventures and Perils which we the AfTurers 
are contented to bear, and do tabe upon us in this 
Voyage, they are of the Seas, Men of War, Fire, 
Enemies, Pirates, Rovers, Thieves, Jetfons, Let- 
ters of Marque and Counter-marque, Surprifals, 
Takings of Sea, Arrells, Reilraints, and Detain- 
ments of all Kings, Princes, and People of what 
Nation, Conditions, or Quality foever, Raratry of 
the Mafler and Mariners, and of all other Perils, 
LofTes and Misfortunes, that have or fhall come 
to the Hurt, Detriment, or Damage of the faid 
Goods and Merchandife, or any part thereof ; and 
in Cafe of any Lofs' or Misfortune, it fhall be law- 
ful to the allured Faclors, Servants, and Affigns, 
to fue, labour, and travel, for, in, and about the 
Defence, Safeguard, and Recovery of the faid 
Goods and Merchandife or any part thereof, with- 
out Prejudice to this AiTurance, to the Charges 
whereof, we the AfTurers will contribute each one 
according to the Rate and Quantity of his Sum 
herein affured : And it is agreed bv us the Infurers, 

* Q% that 



104 . PORTUGUESE 

a maisauthentica Police ou efcritura deSegurodantes 
feita em qualquer parte de E affim nos os AfTegu- 
radores fomos contentes e por efle prometemos e 
obrigamonos cada hum por fua propria parte, os 
noffos Eredeiros, Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores 
e Conftituintes pello. verdadeiro comprimento das 
coufas acima declaradas, confeffando que efta* 
rnos pagos e fatisfeitos do que fe nos deve aconta 
defte Seguro. 

Em teflimunha do que nos os Afleguradores, affi- 
namos ao pe defte com as contias afseguradas, 
Si?. 



Eu A. B. Sou Contente com efle Seguro \ 



por cem livras Efterl. L. em de 



k 



O Conbecimento, 

DIGO eu T. B. de Meflre ou 

Capitao que fou do Navio que Deos falve por 
Nome que ao prefente efta furto e 

ancorado no porte de para com o favor 

de Deos feguir a fua viagem ao pcrto de 
aonde he minha direita defcarga, que he verdade, 
que recebi, e tenho carregado dentro do ditto 
Navio debaixo de cuberta enxuto e bem acondicio- 
nado de Marcado da marca de fora o 

qual me obrigo e prometo, ievandome Deos a bom 
falvamento o ditto Navio ao ditto Porto de entre* 
gar em nome do -fobreditto a T. M. 
auzente a quern feus poder tiver pagando- 

me de frete para aflSm comprir e guardar, 

obrigo minha peflba e bems e ditto Navio em cer- 
tefa do qual dei tres conhecimentos de hum theor 
afiinados por mim qu por meu Efcrivao, hum com- 

prido 



GRAMMAR. los 

that this Writing and AfTurance fhall be of as much 
Force and Effe6t, as the fureft Policy or Writing of 
Assurance heretofore made in < or 

elfewhere in and fo we the Aflurers 

are contented, and do hereby promife and bind 
ourfelves, each one for his own Part, our Heirs., 
Executors, and Affigns, to the Affured, their Exe- 
cutors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, for the true 
Performance of the Premifes, confeffing ourfelves 
paid the Confideration due unto us for this AfTu- 
rance, by In Witnefs whereof, we 
the Affurers have fubfcribed our Names and Sums 
affured in 

I A. R. am contented with this AfTurance for 
One hundred Pounds. Witnefs my Hand? „ r 
The 15th of March, 1808. \*» Am 






A Bill of Lading. 



SHIPPED, by the Grace of God, in good Or- 
der, and well-conditioned, by in and 
upon the good Ship called the where- 
of is Matter under God, for this pre- 
fent Voyage and now riding at Anchor 
in and, by God's Grace, bound for 
to fay being marked and numbered as in 
the Margin and are to be delivered in like 
good Order, and well-conditioned, at the afore- 
faid Port of the Danger of the Seas only 
excepted, unto Mr. or his Affigns, he 
or they paying for the faid Goods 
with Primage and Average, as is accuitomed. In 
Witnefs whereof, the Mailer and Purfer of the 
faid Ship has affirmed to three Bills of Lading, 
all of this Tenor and Date ; the one of which 
three Bills being accomplished, the other two to 

r ftand 



log PORT U G UESE 

prido os outros nao valham ; feito em 
14 de Marco de 1808 Anno.. 

Do que contem nao'fei. 



O Instrumento on Efcriiura de Compromiflo. 

A TODOS quantos efle prefente Inftrumento 
ou Efcrjtura de Compromiflo virem, de nos Acre- 
dores de G. M. Mercador de Saude ; 

Em como ditto G. M. ao prefente fka devendo e 
em dereito deve a nos os Acredores delle ditto G. 
M. varias e diverfas fummas e Dinheiro, &c. As 
quas em rasao de muitas dividas e algumas dellas 
mui grandes, que tambem em dereito fe Ihe devem 
a elle, nem fe podem arrecadar fern alguma dilacao 
de tempo, e por ferem algumas dellas irrecuperaveis 
fern demanda, elle eila por ora muito defabilitado 
de fazer pagamento a nos os seus Acredores da 
noiTa inteira e julla divida conforme a fua vontade e 
defejo 5 ao refpeito de que, elle nos pede com todo 
o encarecimento que nos os dittos Acredores, ecada 
hum de nos foifemos fervidos de dar e conceder a 
elle o Ditto G. M. aos feus Teilamenteiros, Admi- 
nirtradores,ou Conftituintes, tanta larguefao dilacao 
de tempo pello pagamento e fatisfacao de noilas 
dividas particulares que Ihe parecer jufto e rasao 
pello alcance e cobranca das diUas dividas - y Afaber, 
que nos e cada hum de nos fkafTemos contentes a 
to mar e receber de.noffas dividas inteira fern 
para fe repartirem em partes, para fe pa- 

garem em pagamentos diverfos na maneira 

e forma Seguinte : Afaber, o prhneiro pagamento 
della ha de fer e o redo pagar-fe-ha em 

proximo pelia inteira paga e Satisfacao 

das dittas dividas efpeceficadas ; E pello mais pie- 
nario comprimento dos varies pagamentos fobre^ 

dittos 



GRAMMAR. 107 

fhnd void. And fo God fend the good Ship to 
her defired Port in Safety. Amen. Dated in 
on 14th of March 1808. 

Infide and Contents unknown. 



A Letter of Licence. 

TO all People, to whom this prefent Writing 
fhall come, We the Creditors of G. M. of 

Merchant, fend greeting. Whereas the 
faid G. M. at this prefent Time, does ftand in- 
debted, and doesjuftly owe unto us the faid Credi- 
tors of him the faid G. M. divers and fundry Sums 
of Money, &c. which, by reafon of many Debts, 
and fome of them very great, that are Jikewife 
juftly owing unto him, and cannot be had or re- 
covered without fome Refpite of Time, and fome 
of them not without Suit, he is very much di fa- 
bled at prefent to make Payment unto us the 
faid Creditors, our whole and jult Debt, as he feems 
willing and defirous ; in confideration whereof, he 
inftantly defires us, That we the faid Creditors, and 
every one of us, would be pleafed to give and grant 
unto the faid G. M. his Executors, Adminiftrators, 
or Affigns, fuch Liberty or Refpite of Time, for the 
Payment and Satisfaction of our feveral Debts, as 
he thinks reafonable for the obtaining, getting, and 
recovering of the faid Debts : vizf. That we and 
every one of us would be content to take, and ac- 
cept of our whole Debts in to be divided 
in Parts, to be paid at feveral 
Payments, in Manner and Form following : viz. 
The lirft Payment thereof to be and the 
Refidue to be paid at next . in 
full Payment and Satisfaction of the faid feveral 
Debts : And for the more full Performance of the 
faid feveral Payments aforefaid, in fuch Manner and 

Form 



iOs PORTUGUESE 

dittos em tal maneira e forma corao acima fe limita 
e declara, ao verdadeiro intento deftas prefentes elle 
o ditto G. M. ao ou antes do fera obrigado 

a nos os dittos acredores na mefma conformidade, 
por huma obrigacao que fe fara na melhor forma 
de dereito com todos e cada hum dos pagamentos 
na maneira em cima limitada, hum certo lugar ou 
lugares convenientes de nos os dittos Acredores nc- 
meados, e a pena deeada huma das obrigacoesha de 
ier dobrada da Summa inteira inclufa nella mefma 
para fer a nos entregue e a cada hum de nos, os no- 
ilbs Teftamenteiros, ou Conftituintes. ao ou antes do 
proximo Seguinte data della ; por efta 
caufa Saiba-fe; que nos os dittos Acredores aqui 
cm baixo affinados, e cada hum de nos para fi em 
particular, e por feus Teftamenteiros, Adminiftra- 
dores e Conftituintes ao refpeito do emcima efpeci- 
iicado e declarado, por eftes prefentes de vontade 
propria confentimos, contratamos, prometemos e 
concordamos ao e com o ditto G. M. ou feus Tefta- 
inenteiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituintes* por ef- 
tes prefentes que nos os dittos Acredores, e cada hum 
de nos, os noflos Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores 
e Conftituintes, aceitaremos do ditto G. M. dos feus 
Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituintes, to- 
das e cada huma de taes dividas e contias ciinheiro 
do ditto G. M, a nos e cada hum de'nos, de vidas 
e vencidas na virtude detaes^obrigac > oens,Seguranca 
«u Segurancas fobredittas para fe pagarem em tal 
niodo e maneira, e aos taes dias e tempos que aci- 
ma fe limitao e requerem. E alem diflfo, que nos 
os dittos Acredores e cada hum de nos, ou ncflbs e 
cada hum de noflos Teftamenteiros, Adminiftrado- 
res e Conftituintes, em conformidade ao entregue da 
ditta Obrigacao a nos e a cada hum de noflos Tef- 
tamenteiros, Adminiftradores, e Conftituintes ao 
cufto do ditto G. M. os feus Teftamenteiros, Admi- 
niftradores, e Conftituintes, SeJlaremos aflinaremos e 

na 



GRAMMA R. 10.9 

Form as is above limited and declared, according 
to the true meaning of tbefe Prefents, he the faid 
G. M. fiiall and will, at, or before the ' be- 

come bound unto us the faid Creditors refpeciively.,. 
by one Obligation in due Form of Law to be made, 
including all and every one of the Payments in fuch: 
Sort as is above limited, at fbme convenient Place 
or Places by each of us the faid Creditors 

to be nominated and appointed, and the Penalty of 
every Obligation to be doubled the whole Sum in- 
cluded in the Condition of the fame to be delivered 
unto us,and every one of us,our Executors or Affigns.,. 
at or before the , next enfuing the Date- 

hereof: Know ye therefore, that we the faid Cre- 
ditors, whofe Names are here under-written, and 
every one of us for his own Part, and for his Execu- 
tors, Adminiftrators and Affigns, for the Conside- 
ration above fpecified and exprefted, do by thefe 
Prefents willingly confent, covenant, promife and 
agree to and with the faid G. M. his Execu- 
tors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, to accept 
of the faid G. M. his Executors and Affigns, all and 
every of the faid Debts and Sums of Money by 
the faid G. M. unto us, and every one of us, owing,, 
and paying upon fuch Obligations, ArTu ranee and 
Affurances, as aforefaid, to be paid in fuch Man- 
ner and Sort, and at fuch Days and Times, as 
is above limited and required. And further, that 
, we the £aid Creditors, and every of us, our y 
and every of our Executors, Adminiftrators, and 
Affigns refpec&vely, upon the Delivery of the 
faid Obligation to us, and to every of us, and every 
of our Executors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, (hall 
and will, at the Charge of the faid G. M. his Execu- 
tors,, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, feal, fubferibe^ 
and, in due Form of Law, deliver to the faid 
G. M. our fufficient general Rejeafe, for him, his 
Executors, Adminiftrators^ or A Signs, to bear Date 

and 



■BB^—--^ ?M 



110 PORTUGUESE 

na melhor forma e dereito entregaremos ao ditto 
G. M. a noifa geral e fufficiente defcarga, para fer 
rendida por elie o ditto G. M. ou feus Teftamentei- 
roSjAdminiftradores, e Conftituintes a data e a limita- 
^ao antes do dia e data delta obrigacao nova ; em 
teftimunha do que a efla temos affinado e fellado ao 
dia e no anno, &c. 



A Letra de Cambio. 

Londres, por 300 Milreia. 

A VISTA defta minha primeira Letra de Cam- 
bio, pagara Vm. ao Senhor T. M. ou Ordem a 
Contia de trefentos Milreis em dinheiro corrente 
de Portugal, o Valor recebido do Senhor T. D. a 
tempo fara bom pagamento, lancando-a na conta 
como por avifo de 
Ao Senhor T. M. Mercador S. D. V. M. 

em Lifbba. T. M. 



Lisboa em do 1807, por 250/. Starl. 

A QUARENTA Dias Vifta defta minha Se- 
gunda Letra de Cambio, (a primeira nao fendo paga- 
da)pagara Vm. ao Senhor F.G.&Companhia,ou Or- 
dem a Summa de dozentas e Cinquenta libras Efter- 
linas em moeda corrente de Ingalaterra, o valor re- 
cebido do Senhor J. D. a tempo fara bom pagamento 
acentando-a na conta com por avifo de 

Ao Senhor T. B. Mercador. H. 5, 

em Londres. 



O 



GRAMMAR. Ill 

and Limitation, before the Day of the Date of 
this new Obligation to be made for the Debt. 
In Witnefs whereof, we have hereunto fet our 
Hands and Seals. Dated the 15th of May, 1808. 



Bills of Exchange. 

London, 5th of June 1808, for 300 Milreas. 

AT Sight of this my fir ft Bill of Exchange, 
pleafe to pay to Mr. T. M. or Order, the Sum 
of Three. Hundred Milreas in current Money of 
Portuga!, Value received of Mr. T. D. at Time, 
make good Payment, placing it to Account, as 
per Advice, from, SIR, 

To Mr. T. M. Merchant Yours, H S. 

in Lifhon. T. M. 



Lisbon, 7th of June 1S08, for 250/. Sterling. 

AT Forty days Sight, of this my fecond 
Bill of Exchange, my fir ft and third not being 
paid, pleafe to pay to Mr. F. G. and Company, or 
Order, the Sum of two Hundred and fifty Pounds 
Sterling, in current Money of England, Value re- 
ceived of Mr. J. D. at Time, make good Pay- 
ment, and place it to Account, as per Advice, 
from SIR, 

To Mr. T. B. Merchant Yours, H. S. 

in London, F. P, 



A 



112 PORTUGUESE 



Oprote/io de buma Letra de Cambio. 

SAIBAM todas a quem efta prefente efcritu- 
ra tocar que aos do mez de, do an- 

no de ao requerimento de P./C. Mer- 

cador de eu M. N. Tabiliao de 

notas jurado e admitido pella autoridade del Pvei, 
&x. fui a caia da morada do Senhor T. B. fobre 
quem a Letra de Cambio emcima referida he faca- 
da, e moftrei a original ao ditto T. B. requerendo 
a fua accitacao della: o que me refpondeo que nao 
aceitaria a ditta L^tra por humas raioens que efcre- 
veile ao Senhor T. P. o facador ; pella qual rasao 
eu o ditto Tabiliao proteftei, por eftes prefentes 
protefto, tanto contra o ditto F. P. o facador como 
tambem contra o ditto T. B. fobre. quem e facada, 
demais contra todas as outras pefToas, Endorfadores, 
ou outras nella intereffados, por todos os Cambios, 
Recambios, danos e interefles quaefquer: Em pre- 
fen$a de H. J. S. T. chamados .por Teftemunhas a 
efte prefente a&o feito no meu Efcritorio em o dia 
e anno acima declarado. 

M. N. Notario Publico. 



Farias Formas de Recibos* 

Dinheiro recibido por inteiro. 

RECEB1 i Janeiro, do Senhor Thomas Crew, 
Seis Livras Sete Chilins Seis peniques por inteiro 
■comprimento de todas as contas, por 

Dinhei7*o recibido por Conta de men Amo, 

RECEBI a 22 de Fevreiro, do Sr. Jonas Lee, 
quatro Livras e Cinco Chilins por Conta de meu 
dmo Moifcs Trull, por*. 



GRAMMAR. 113 

A Protest of a Bill of Exchange. 

KNOW all Persons whom this present Writ- 
ing may concern, that the of in the 
Year at the Request of Mr. P. C. of 
Merchant, T. M. N. Public Notary, fworn and ad- 
mitted by Authority of his most sacred Majefly, 
did go to the Dwelling-houfe or Habitation of Mr. 
T. B. upon whom the above named Bill of Ex- 
change is drawn, and mewed the Original unto 
the faid Mr. T. B. demanding his Acceptance of the 
fame, who anfwered me' he fhould not accept the 
fame Bill, for fome Reasons he fhould write Mr. F.P. 
the Drawer , Wherefore Ithe faid Notary did pro- 
ted, and by these Prefents protefl, as well againft 
the faid F. P, the Drawer, as likewife againft the 
faid T. B. upon whom it is drawn ; 'as alfo againft 
all other Perfons, Inddrfers, or others therein con- 
cerned, for all Changes, Rechanges, Damages and 
Intereft whatsoever, in Prefence of H. J. and S. T. 
called for Witnesses to this present Acl, done in 
my Office in the Day and Year above men- 
tioned. M. N. Notary Public. 






Various Forms of Receipts. 

Money received in Full. 



RECEIVED lft January 1808, of Mr. Thomas 
Crew, Six Pounds Seven Shillings and Sixpence, in 
full of all Demands per 

For another s Use. 

RECEIVED 22d February, 1808, of Mr. Jonas 
Lee, Four Pounds Five Shillings, for the Use of my 
Matter Moses Trust, per 

* H Money 



ii| PORTUGUESE 

D Metro recebido em parte. 

RECEBI a 30 de Marco, 1808, do Sr. Jacinto 
Cook, Cinco Livras Cinco Chilins, em parte de doze 
Livras e dez Chilins, por Contade meu pai Antonio 
Truelove, por 

Dinheiro recebido em parte de Contas que rido ejiao 
ajujadas. 

RECEBI a 24 de Abril 1808, da Senhora Mar- 
tha Rich, por maos de Pedro Cornet, onze Livras 
a Conta, por 

Quando hum Rol ou Conta fe paga por inteiro. 

RECEBI a 15 de Mayo, 1808, acontia de efta 
Conta, por 

Quando fe paga dinheiro a Conta de hum rol. 

RECEBI a 6 de Junho, 1808, Sete livras em 
parte defta Conta, por 



Notas ou Obrigafoens quefaz hum Homem 
quando toma dinheiro emprestado. 

Londres, 4 de Junho, 1808. 

EU abaixo firmado prometo pagar ao Sr. E. D. 
Banqueiro do Thesouro de sua Majeftade do Excife, 
ou a iua ordem quarenta dias defpois da data defta 
obrigacao quatro centas e trinta Jivras por valor re- 
cebido 

£.430 p Chriftovio Wade. 

EU abaixo firmado prometo pagar ao Sr. Paulo 
Barker cavalheiro ou a fua ordem em fendo reque- 
rido trezentas, e noventa, e quatro livras dous Chi- 
lins 



GRAMMAR, lis 



Money received in Part. 

RECEIVED 30th of March, 1808, of Mr. 
James Cook, Five Pounds Ten Shillings, in Fart of 
Twelve Pounds Ten Shillings, for my Father Antho- 
ny Truelove, per 

Money received on Accounts unfetlled. 

RECEIVED 24th April 1808, of Mrs. Mar- 
tha Rich, by the Hands of Peter Cornet, Eleven 
Pounds on Account, per 

When a Bill is paid in Full. 

RECEIVED 15th May, 1808, the full Contents 
hereof, per 

When a Bill is paid in Pari, 

RECEIVED 26th June, 1808, Seven Pounds 
in Part hereof, per 



Promijfoiy Notes for a Mans Self. 

London, June 4th 1808. 

I PROMISE to pay to Mr. Edward Draper* 
Calhiet of his Majefty's Revenue of Excife, or Order> 
forty Days after Date, Four Hundred and Thirty 
Pounds. Value received 

£. 430 per Chriftopher Wade. 

I PROMISE to pay to Paul Barker, Efq. or 
Order, on demand, Three hundred and ninety- 
four Pounds, Two Shillings, and Six-pence, 
*H2 



116 * PORTUGUESE 

lins e Seis peniques por valor recebido hoje 17 dc 
Julho, 1808. 

£. 394 2 6 per Philip Venham. 

EU abaixo firmado prometo pagar ao Sr. J. T. 
ou a fua ordem, quarenta e nove livras, e tres 
Chilins 6 mezes defpois da data defta obrigagao por 
valor recebido em verdade do que afignei hoje 24 
de Agofto 1808. 

£. 49 3 

N. B. Obfervefe que em notas ou obriga^oens 
fempre fe declara a foma recebida fern a qual nao 
§ao de nenhama for$a nem tern Authoridade. 



GRAMMAR. 117 

Value received this 17th of July, 1808. 
£. 394 2 6 per Philip Venham. 



I PROMISE to pay to Mr. J. T. or Order, Forty 

nine Pounds Three Shillings, fix Months after Date 

Value received. Witnefs ray Hand this 24th of 

Auguft, 1808. per William Jones. 

£ 49 S 



N. B. Obferve in Promiflbry Notes that the 
words Value received are mentioned, or they are 
of no Force. 



H3 



118 PORTUGUESE 



A NEW 



PORTUGUESE 



GRAMMAR. 



PART IV. 



CONTAINING 

Several ufeful and entertaining Pajfages, where- 
of the greatejl Part is collected from the bejl 
Portuguefe Writers, fuch as Andrade, Bar- 
ros, Camoens, Lobo, &c. 

ENTRE os bons ditos de Souzeni, poeta Perfi^ 
ano, se conta, que bebendo com outro poeta, 
seu amigo, certo ]icor,fe queixava, de que era mu- 
ito quente & dizendolhe, amigo, pobre de ti que 
daqui a poucos dias te farad beber no inferno agoas 
fulfureas, & ardentes, que te abrazarao as entran- 
has ; nao importa, replicou Souzeni ; baftara que 
me lembre algum dos teus verfos, que ellas fe farao 
mais frias, que neve. 

Catharine* 



GRAMMAR. 119 

Catkarina Parthenay fobrinha da celebre Anna 

Parthenay, deu efta bella refpofta a Henrique IV. 

fa'iba vojfa mag (Ie que eu fiu muito pobre para fer fua 

conforte ; e que no mefmo tempo defcendo de humafamilia 

muito iliustre, para fer fua dam a, 

Huma Princeza Cathoiica, e de rara virtude vendo 
reduzido o Marichal de Saxonia as agonias da 
morte, diffe, que era para fentir o nao fe poder re- 
zar hum De prqfundis pella alma de hum que tinha 
feito cantar tantos Te Deum. 

A Dom Chrlftovao de Moura, Marquez de Caf- 
tello Rodrigo, e Vice Rev de Portugal por Dom 
Philipe Terceiro, hindo por huma fala do Paco de 
Lifboa, hum foldado honrado, que tinha bem fer- 
vido na India, lhedavahum memorial, e pedia, que 
fe lembraffe dos feus papeis, porque havia largo 
tempo, que andava pretendendo. Refpondeo-lhe 
o Marquez, que havia muita Gente para defpachar, 
e nao fe podiao defpachar todos com brevidade ; o 
foldado adiantando o pafso fe atravefsou diante fern 
defcompoficao, e fazendo parar o ViceRey Jhe difse 
com grande confianca;/f«&?r Dom Chriflovao defpdche 
Vs. os homensy e deixe a Gente. O Marquez aceitou 
o memorial, e o defpachou no mefmo dia. 

Mandandohum Fidalgo em Lifboa abrir em hu- 
ma ruaos Alicerces para fe fazerem humas cafas, fern 
licenca da camera, pafsando por alii o procuracior 
da cidade, poz pena aos officiaes, que nao trabal- 
hafsem na obra fern licenca dos Vereadores; e os 
officiaes dizendo-o ao Fidalgo mandou-lhes eile que 
nao deixaffem de trabalhar, e que nao fizeffem ca- 
fo do que dizia aquelle villao ruim ; tornando-o 
procurator da cidade por alii e achando os officiaes 
trabalhando, mandou que deflem com elles no tron- 
co -, e nao faltando quern lhe contaffe o que o Fi- 
dalgo differa, teve-o em olho 3 e no tempo que el- 
*H4 le 



120 PORTUGUESE 

Je hia atraveflando pello Rocio para fua cafa, fahio- 
Ihe ao caminho a cavallo, e com huma lanca que 
levava* dando na fua fombra, Ihe dilfe : porque o 
que difsefies, foi em minha aufencia, dou em vof- 
fa fombra, fe mo tiveffeis dito no rofto, dera na 
voifa peffoa. 

Abou Han'tfah, o mais celebre doutor dos Muf- 
fulmanes, tendo recebido huma bofetada, diflfe ao 
que o iinha infultado : eu poderia vingarme, pa- 
gandovos na mefma moeda $ mas nao o quero fazer. 
Poderia accufarvos ao caiife : mas nao quero fer ao 
cufador. Poderia nas minbas orac.oens queixarme a 
Deos defla affront a ; mas nem i(fo quero fazer. Por 
fim poderia pedir a Deos, que fe quer no dja do juizo 
vos caftigaffe ; porem o mefmo fenhor me livre de 
femelbante penfamento ; mas antes, fe fuccedeffe 
que nefte inflante chegafle aquelle formidavei dia ; 
e fe a minha interceffao tiveffe alguma efficacia para 
com Deos, nao quizera por companheiro fe nao a 
vos para entrar no Paraifo. Que admiravel exem- 
plo para os Chriftaos aprenderem a perdoar as injii- 
rias ! 

De Peregrinacam. 

Paffadas quefe dao peregrinando, fao degraos para 
a cafa do defengano. Das fuasfontes sahem os rios 
muito pequenos, e crefcem correndo, e Jevao mares 
ao mar. Homens, que da fua terra nao sahem, sao 
navios, que acabao no eftaleiro. A fabedoda como 
vinda do ceo, anda nefle globo terreftre perigrina, 
nao he facil achala fenao peregrinando ; errando por 
efte mundo, fe apprende a nao cometter erros. Va- 
pores, que na terra eram lodo, apartados della fe 
fazam elirellas. Aos homens que querem luzir, 
deve a patria iervir, como aos planeras o horizonte, 
de berco, para enfayo do feu luzimento, longe do 
ponto ortivo, e remontados a mais alta regiao, apurao 
as influencias, e duplicaq as luzes. Que nome teriao 

hoje 



GRA M M A R. 121 

hoje no mundo Socrates, Pithagoras, e Platao, e 011- 
tros r,abios da antiguidade, fe a modo de cepos, ou 
troncos, que aonde nafcerao fazem rais, e no feu 
primeirochaoapodrecem,naobufcaraoforadaPatria 
as noticias, que lhes faltavao. Nao fe ornara Her- 
cules com os defpojos dos Monftros, que domou, fe 
os nao fora bufcar pelo mundo ; a fua dilatada viagem 
devem os Argon an tas a conquifla do vello de ouroi 
Se nao correra Ulyjfes remotos climas, fora a Aioea 
de Ithaca de tpda a fua gloria o theatro. Homens 
perpetuamente caseiros, sao gallos, que fo fabem 
do feu poleiro. Sabios peregrinos, imitao no feu 
curso as fontes, que pafsando por veasde prata, ouro, 
efmeraldas, e faffiras, tomao, e comfigo levao a flor 
de fuas preciofas qualidades. Zombe embora Pin- 
tarco dos que louviio a peregrinacao, e diga, que 
fe parjacem com os que julgao as ellrellas erranres 
mais nobres, e felices, que as fixas. Nao a efcola 
mais util para a vida, que as muitas vidas ou modos 
de viver, que na variedade das Nacoens fe obferva. 
Vem fe muitas coufasnunca villas; aprendemfe mui- 
tas, que fe nao fabiao, faz fe o honsem capaz de toda 
a cafta de negocios, e folga de ver efte mundo, antes 
de fahir delle. Ate para os principes, que das fuas 
cortes fazem na terra o feu paraifo, born he que pe- 
regrinem, para conhecerem o mundo, que elles 
gqvernao. Os cqmmodos, as delicias, os obfequi- 
ps dos fubditos, podem dar a conhecer a bum homem, 
que nafceo foberano, mas com efte conhecimento, 
nao o fazem digno da foberaqia : fe nao fahira Al- 
exandre da fua Macedonia, nao paffara dos liniites 
de regulo e nao chegara a avaffailar o mundo. 

Do Tempo fniuro. 

Trate o homem do prefente, e nao quoira pene- 
trar no futuro ; quern de tao longe poem a mira, 
m\o pode dar no alvo. Muitas vezes bom he igno- 
rar o que ha de fucceder; porque fe for bem, a di- 

lacaq 



122 PORTUGUESE 

lacao ha tormento ; e fe for mao, o trabalho he fem 
proveito. Para futuros, nao bafeguranca. AoEm- 
baixador, que na guerra movida por Link XL Rey 
de France, a Carlos Duque de Borgonba, procurava 
attrabir ao Emperador Frederico, com promerla de 
que fe repartjrem com elle os defpqjos, e os eftados, 
refpondeo o dito Emperador com efle apologo : tres 
cacadoies com a efperanca de apanbarembum urfo, 
fe comprometterao na reparticao delle. Chegados a 
boca da caverna, fabio a fera com tao grande impe- 
to, que bum dos cacadores botou a fugir, outro 
fubio a buma arvore, e o outro fe eftendeo no cbao 
fingindo-fe morto ; chegoufe o urfo a elle, poz lbe 
o focinbo no nariz, e nos ouvidos, e nao lbe conce- 
cendo folego, nem final de vida, o deixou por mor- 
to. O que eftava na arvore, difle ao companheiro ; 
homem, que te diffe o urfo, quando te fallou a puri- 
dade, com o focinbo nos ouvidos? Difleme que 
era mal feito, difpor da pelle, e carne do urfo, an- 
tes de o verem morto. Com iflo o Emperador deu 
a entender ao Embaixador, que era precifo apanhar 
primeiro ao Duque de Borgonha, que depois fe 
trataria de reparticao dos feus eflados. Dos fuccef- 
fos do tempo futuro, fo Deos tern certeza. 

Dos Ricos. 

Os Antigos Patriarcbas era5 ricos fo em gado. 
Os Banqueiros fao ricos emdinheiro. OsPrincipes 
sao ricos em terras, & Senhorios. Em lugares efte- 
reis, fem hervas, nem plantas produz a narureza o 
ouro, para mostrar que os amadores das riquezasnao 
tern fe, nem bonra. Os ricos facinorofos, que ain- 
da que celebrados nas biftorias, sao o opprobrio da 
fua pofteridade, poderiao ter boa fama, fe Jhes nao 
facilitara'efle metal a execucao de feus danados 
intentos. Em todas as idades forao as riquezas an- 
tagoniftas da vir'tude ; ellas inventarao os mais en- 
ormes delitos s ellas enfmarao os filhos a tirar a feus 

pais 



GRAM M A R. 123 

pais a vida ; enfinarao os poderofos a opprimir os 
innocentes, arruinar as familias, faquear os templos, 
& defpir os altares; ellas induzirao os amigos a que 
faltaffem a fe, incitarao os vaffallos a negar aos prin- 
cipes a obediencia, a os libidinofos derao meyos para 
violar a pudicicia das donzellas, e eftragar a honra 
dos maridos : finalmente ellas ainda que boas para 
a vida civil, sao caufa de todos os males ; e potto 
que os sabios fe fouberao aproveitar dellas, o cobica, 
e o mao ufo das mefmas, encherao o mundo todo 
de criminofos. Homens ricos ordinariamente fe 
perdem, por terem muito, e faberem pouco ; def- 
prezao o faber, porque Ihes parece, que para todo 
o genero de vida, Ihes bafla o ter. A Ariftiv lpa 
perguntou Dionyfio, porque razao os filofofos Itq- 
quentavao as cazas dos ricos, e nao os ricos as dos 
filofofos. Refponaeo Ariftippo, que os filofofos 
conhecem o que Ihes falta, e os ricos ignorao o de 
que necefsitao. Senhores ricos, e filofofos pobres, 
nao podem fazer coufas grandes, porque a eftes Ihes 
falta dinheiro, e aquelles efpirito. Dizia Diogenes, 
que muitos ricos sao como as plantas, que nafcem 
em defertos, e defpenhadeiros, porque dos frutos, 
que ellas dao, nao comem os homens, mas corvos, 
bilhafres, e feras ; tambem as riquezas de muitos 
nao fao para fugeitos benemeritos, mas para cho- 
carreiros, efpadachins, rufioes, e meretrizes. 

De Liber alidade, 

A liberalidade he huma virtude moral que fabe 
difpender as riquezas em bom ufo. Ariftotles diz, 
que he virtude, que com o dinheiro, e fazenda fe mo- 
flra benefica aos homens. Segundo a defini^ao dos 
filofofos modernos, he virtude moderada do affecto 
humano no dar, e no receber riquezas humanas, uni- 
camente pelo motivo do honefto. Na liberalidade 
nao fao a£tos incompativeis o dar e o receber, nem 
liberal fe ha de envergonhar de receber ; por- 
que 



124 PORTUGUESE 

que dar fempre, e nunca receber, be caminbo cer- 
to para em breves espacos nao ter mais que dar. 
Brevemente fe fecaiiao os.rios, feo mar dando fem- 
pre do feu, nao recebefle do alheio, mas dando, 
e recebendo, fe faz o circulo de perpetuo movi- 
mento, com que fe fuftenta o mar e fe fertiliza a 
terra. O liberal nao da para receber, mas recebendo 
para dar, da no mefmo tempo que recebe, receben- 
do de huns com a mao, e dando aos outros com at- 
tencao. Pintarao os antigos a liberalidade em flgura 
de molher, com a cornucopia em buma mao, e bum 
compaflb na outra. Na cornucopia llgnificavao a 
inclinacao em dar ; e no compaflb denotavao asme- 
didas, que a prudencia ba de guardar nas dadivas. 
Dar com exceffo, be extinguir a liberalidade ; o 
rnuito oleo apaga a luz; conferva fe efta virtude 
com efFufao moderada ; dar pouco a pouco, e em 
diverfos tempos, be faborear o gofto de dar ; quern 
da com attencao, efta com animo de dar mais. Nao 
he bem fecbar a area de forte que fe nao poffa abrir ; 
nem convem abriila de maceira, que fe nao torne a 
fecbar. Chuvas de ouro sao farguezas de Deofes ; 
ainda afimi andou Jupiter moderado nefta preciofa 
profuzao ; porque nao cabe de pancada a agua da 
cbuvamas a gota, e gota fe diftribue. Porem ao 
rigor delta ley nao eftao obrigados os Principes, 
que tern muito que dar ; porque o feu melhor the- 
fouro he o coracao dos fubditos ; tanto mais fe aug- 
roenta efre erario, quanto mais o da fazenda real fe 
defpeja. Repartindo Alexandre com os Macedo- 
nios os feus dominios, fe abrio caminho para con- 
quirlar o mundo. Principalmente com litteratos, e 
homens doutos foi liberalifiimo. A Ariftoteles em 
remuneracao do trabalbo que tomou em indagar a 
natureza ; e propriedades dos animaes, deo de hum 
jacto o valor de quatrocentos e oitentamil escudos. 
De Cyro, cognominado o Grande, efcreve Atbeneo, 
que a Pytbareo, feu domeftico, flzera bum donati- 
ve de fete cidades. De Julio Cezar efcreve Seneca, 

que 



GH A M M A R. 125 

que dasfuas victorias nao queria outro proveito, que 
o poder, e o gofto de difiribuir com os feus folda- 
dos os defpojos. Em nenhuma coufa mais fe pare- 
cem os monarcas com Deos, que em dar ; celebra 
Cafliodoro o liberalidade de hum Principe, que pa- 
ra alegrar o povo, nao reparava em fazer gaftos ex- 
orbitant^. Efte genero de larguezas nao arruina o 
eftado, porque alivia o povo. Nem eftas devem 
fer eftrago : fo Deos, cujos thefouros fao inexhauf- 
tos, pode dar fempre, e a todos. Entre os antigos Ro- 
manos era inviolavel a ley, que mandava que nin- 
guem gaftaffe em fefta publica, fern prover do ne- 
ceffario os pobres do feu bairro : tomavao por a- 
fronta, que andaffem hu»s homens por portas, quan- 
do eftavao outros brindando nas mefas. A efte 
propofito dizia Platao, que na cidade em que muito 
pobre mendiga, ha muito ladrao que furta. Mas 
para que he dar regras, e ajuntar documentos, para 
huma virtude, que a mofina, ou a cobica defterrou 
do mundo. Hoje a liberalidade he como aquelles 
rios que fumidos na terra, nunca mais sao vistos. 

Da Liberdade. 

A liberdade he hum eftado natural, no qual tern o 
homen todos os movimentos da fua vontade inde- 
pendentes, elivres. Efta he a liberdade da alma, a 
que nem as influencias dos aftros, nem a prefciencia 
divina, nem os divinos decretos, nem os amea^os dos 
tirannos neceffitao a querer, ou nao querer ; porque 
Deos a deo ao homem, com livre alvedrio, e poder 
abfoluto, para obfervar, ou quebrantar fua divina 
lei. Ocorpo pelo contrario he fugeito a todo o ge- 
nero de cativeiros. Forma fe na prifao do ventre 
materno, apenas nafcido, flea en^ollo, e prefo nas 
faxas; livre defta efcravidao cahe na da puericia 
fugeito aos acoutes; nos conflns da adolefcencia, 
efp^rao por elletirannicas paixoes,e crueis appetites 

pari 



126 PORTUGUESE 

para o defpojar do refto da liberdade ; cada arte, ou 
cada fciencia a que fe applica, he hutna carga de re- 
gras, huma oppressao de preceitos. Em idade 
mayor ; achaques, e doengas o encravao na cama, 
donde cahe para a cova, em hum cativeiro que nao 
tern refgate. Ainda affim, no meyo de todas as 
penfoes, e prisoes da fua trifle vida, logra o homen 
no feu trato huma certa liberdade, daqual ninguem 
fe quer privar, por nao viv6r violentado. Ate os 
animaes, as feras, e os mais vis infectos, procurao 
defender, e confervar a liberdade, que lhes deo a 
natureza. Finalmente os elementes, ainda que infen- 
siveis, fe esforeao para veneer os obftaculos, que os 
cativao : voara o fogo hum monte, por nao flcar 
conftipado namina; indignada do freyo de hum 
dique trefbordara a agua, e alagarahumaprovincia : 
impaciente de claufura de lugares fubterraneos, aba- 
lara o ar hum reino, e com horriveis tremores 
abi ira a cidades inteiras profundas fepulturas. Nao 
he logo maravilha, que facao os homens tantos ex- 
tremos para confervarem a liberdade propria do feu 
eftado. Diogenes aquelle famofo defprezador de 
quanto cubi^a a ambi^ao dos homens, para fe ver 
livre das fugei^oes defte mundo, fe revolvia no feu 
dolio, como planeta de dirTerente esfera, e tendo 
valor para recufar a gra9a de Alexandre, nao teve 
animo para fe fugeitar ao jugo da Corte. Nao quere- 
mos lenhor, por brando que elle feja, (dizia Demof- 
thenes) receoso da domini^ao da Antipater. A 
liberdade he hum bem que fe nao deve perder fe nao 
com o fangue. Nao he fenhor de fi, quern a outrem 
fugeitou a lingua. Hum fo homem, que queira, 
e faiba fallar a tempo, faz callar, e tremer a muitos ^ 
pode fer caufa da confervac^ao de hum reino, que o 
iilencio- perderia. Nefte perigo eileve o imperio 
Romano, reinando Tiberio, tempo em que (fegundo 
efcreve TacitoJ o fallar era delito. Nao tern outro 
agoute as culpas dos grandes, que o de huma lingua, 
generofamente folta, Abftenhafe de obrar mal, 

quem 



GRAMMA R. 127 

quern quizer que fe falle bem. A verdade muda 
introduz a tirannia. Teve graca huma 11109a, filha 
de certo bomem rico de Lifbba, a qual perguntada, 
porque nao queria c afar com hum fugeito, que a 
pedia a feu pay fern dote ; difie que por nao perder 
a liberdade, que as outras mulheres tern, quando 
tendo dirTerengas com feus maridos, podem com 
razao dizer, que os comprarao com o que ellas lhes 
derao em cafamento. 

Das Dem&ndas* 

Litigios fao chagas do eftado, e minas das familias.. 
Qualquer demanda he huma furia infernal, qua 
tudo defcompoem, e tira a todos do feu lugar 
cultura da terra tira ao lavrador, do commercio 
ao mercador, do altar ao facerdote. Litigios sao os 
filhos do Chaos e da noite, tudo nelles sao con- 
fusoes, e trevas. Sao hum funefto compofto de 
todos os males , tern na ira inceudios, no rancor 
veneno, no dolo ciladas, na vinganga rayos. Diante 
das demandas anda o dezejo da fazenda alheya ; aos 
lados a falfldade, o engano, a mentira, a perfidia: 
vem atraz o arrependiaiento, e a pobreza, com pes 
de chumbo fe ha de entrarem litigios, e fugir delles 
com azas de aguia, fempre procurao os bons politi- 
cos atalhar os litigios, e abafallos no feu nafcimento. 
Com efte intento fizerao os Cyrenios huma ley, pela 
qual os homens litigiofos e demandiftas erao cha- 
mados para diante dos Juizes, chamados Ephoros, 
e efte depois de os multar, os declaravao infames. 
Dizia Catao, que para, bem fe haviao encher as au- 
diencias, de eitrepes, e abrolhos, para as partes nao 
irern pleitear fern perigo.de quebrar as pernas. Os 
antigos Romanos lavantarao na fua mayor audiencia 
a eftatua de Marfyas, com huma corda na mao dan- 
do a entender,que quern fern razao movefle demanda 
a alguem, encorreria na mefma pena que o dito 
Marfyas, 2 quern por contender com Apollo teme- 

rariamente 



128 PORTUGUESE 

rariamente fobre as ventagens da mufica, os juizes 
mandarao dar garrote. Antigamente os juizes dei- 
xavao pendurados ern hum prego todos os- pleitos 
problematicos, ou feitos, em que havia razoes para 
julgar pro e contra. For iflb Claudio Henrique, 
julgador Parifienfe, em huma das fuasoracoes foren- 
fez traz o cazo da mulher de Smyrna, que por haver 
dado peconha a feu marido, os Areopagitas, feus 
juizes, a abfolverao para cem annos, por quanto 
clle mefmo feu marido havia morto hum filho do 
primeiro cafamento da dita mulher, e na caufa 
intentada havia compenfacao de delito. Toda a 
pefioa, que fe poem a litigar, fe engolfa em hum 
mar de provas, futilezas, e trapacas, que tern por 
praya, e porto, a pobreza, e a morte. O peyor he,, 
que nefte conflicte, o gatlo he das partes ; e o pro- 
veito dos advogados. Em quanto com asraas pelejao 
os ratos, vem o minhoto, e papa tudo. A rapoza que 
vio o leao, e o urfo canfados de pelejar fobre o logro 
de humapreza,ainda quenaturalmentemuito timida, 
fe foi chegando, e levou comsigo a materia da con- 
tenda. As ruinas de dous enriquecem o terceiro* 

Da Lifonja. 

A lifonja he huma nimia complacencia, eafTectada 
flneza em louvar as prendas, obras, ou palavras 
alheyas. Mai fuave, doce veneno, Yicio cortesao, 
brando verdugo da verdade, efcandalo dos ammos 
generofos, e fo de efpiritos humildesindigna eftima- 
<^ao. O boy, ruftico quadrupede, permitte que o 
ecfeitem ; o leao, generofa fera facode de fi os enfei- 
tes da cama. Compoz Ariftobulo hum livro, cheyo 
de lifcnjas, fobre a Victoria que Alexandre alcancara 
del rey Poro ; tomou o magnanimo principe o livro, 
e larcando o ao mar, diffe; merece" o author feme- 
Ihante Caftigo. Tambem da fua corte lancou Alex- 
andre ao fan.ofo efcuhor Staficrates, que fe orTere- 
cera a fazeiihe de todo o monte Athos huma eftatua. 
Notavel artifice he o liioi jeiro, para todas as caras 

tem 



GRAMMAR. 129 

tern cartas, e calcados para todos os pes ; mas todas 
as fuas obras fao pofticas, e todo o feu artificio 
fingimento. A fua mayor deftreza efta em confor- 
mar o som da fua lyra com a picada da Tarantula. 
Com efta aflbnancia, ou confonancia fe fez Sejand 
tao absoluto fenhor da vontade de Tiberio, que 
fendo efte Principe para todos diffimulado, fo era 
facil, e fincero para Sejano. O Lifonjeiro, para viver 
a fombra do feu Principe, fe faz do feu Principe fom- 
bra, que affim como a fombra he bugio dp corpo, 
anda com elle, e com elle para ; com elle fe deita, 
e fe Ievanta ; fe tern corcova, fe encurva ; e fe coxea, 
claudica; affim para o lifonjeiro he perfei^ao arreme- 
dar ate os defeitos do principe. Na corte de Anti- 
gono, que tinha o collo torto, os cortesaos fe flzerao 
torcicollos. Efta depravada imitacao do Principe he 
ruina da monarchia, porque he veneno da verdade. 
Nao tern efta mayor inimigo, que o falfete do inte- 
reffe, que ordinariamente faz o compaffo na mufica 
dos palacianos. Pinta-fe a lisonja em figura de mu- 
Iher tocando huma frauta, com hum veado aos pes, 
adormecido ao fom defte instrument©; no veado fe 
reprefenta o Principe, que vencido da fuavidade da 
lifonja, fecha os olhos a verdade. Com cem olhos 
guardava Argos a lo, convertidaem vacca, comecou 
'Mercurio a tocar tarn fuavemente, que os cem olhos 
de Argos fe fecharao, e teve Mercurio poder para lhe 
tirar com a vacca a vida. A's falfas adulac.oes dos 
Aulicos de Vitellio attributa a hiftoria a cegueira do 
orgulho, e crueldade ciefte Principe. E'ra VefpafU 
ano de natural brando, e benigno, com lifonjeiras 
falfidades o induzirao feus cortesaos a carregar de 
tributos o povo. Finalmente muitas vezes mayores 
danos faz a lingua do lisonjeiro, que a espada do 
inimigo. 

JDa Vinganga. 
Toda a vingar^a particular* e privada,he ufurpa- 
cao do poder, e da juftica publica, e divina. Des- 

* I prez.ao 



^^^^■^ 



m POllTUGUES E 

prezaonobres animos as injurias de fogeitos vulgares. 
Nao fez Achilles caso das calumnias de Therfites ; 
Filippe de Macedonia, e Cefar forao infensiveis aos 
tiros da maledicencia. Zombou a Agui de Efopo 
da peca, que lhe fez o rato ; pareceolhe-indigno da 
fua ira, bicho ncjento. O vingarse nao he reftaurar 
o creditOjhe confirmarfe defacreditado. Com feri- 
das alhevas nao fe curao as proprias, com fangue 
nao fe efmaltao injurias. Enfurecerfe aos defacatos 
de hum furiofo, he fazerfe efpelho da fua braveza ; 
rebater calumnias, he fazerfe ecco de aggravos. Se 
a cada bataria de ondas respondera o penhafco com 
huma pedra, brevemente fe deftruiria o penhafco. 
Anelarvingancas,he teraberta, efrescahuma ferida, 
a qual efquecida, eftaria encourada. Injurias lem- 
bradas fe perpetuao, porque fe fazem hereditarias, 
ellas sao a unica coufa, que nefle mundo o tempo 
nao gafta ; enterrados renafcem, semelhantes aos 
rios, que depois de correr debaixo da terra, tornao 
a inundar os campos. Os que com moftras de ami- 
fade disfarcao o dez6jo de fe vingar, sao como a 
nuvem, que vio o profeta Ezequiel ; era cercada de 
hum circulo de ouro, mas trazia dentro em fi rayos, 
e tormenras. A mais nobre vinganea he moftrar o 
offendido, que fe pode vingar do ofFensor ; o nao 
vingarfe, he moftrar, que nao fentio a offenfa ; e nao 
fentilla,' he prova de animo invulneravel. A im- 
paffibilidade he attributo divino. As mulheres sao 
vingativas, porque sao frageisj a fua fenfibilrdade he 
demoftracao da fua fraqueza. 

Da Loquacid&de. 

Ha hornens, que nao viv£ndo de ar, como oca. 
malconte, continuamente tem a boca aberta, edella 
cahe hum diluvio de palavras, que inunda os ouvi- 
dos, e afloga a genre. Quando ha trovoadas, em- 
mud^cem as raas ; efies sao raas, que em charcos de 
pantanofas parlendas atroao o mundo. Huns meti- 
dos a politicos, tudo reduzem a razoens de eftado ; 

chovem 



GRAMMAR. 131 

cbovem da sua boca Democracias, Aristocracias, 
Oligarchias, Ochlocracias, Capitolios, e Areopagos, 
Triumviratos, e Dictaturas, Plebiscites, e Senatus- 
consultos, Leys Municipaes, e Castrenses ; compa- 
raoo governo. dos Cesares com o dos nossos Princi- 
pes, as modernas com as antigas republicas, os cos- 
tumes de hoje com os dos antepassados, e com in- 
fructuosa navegacao correndo mares de sabedoria, 
ventilao quest5es, sem dar fundo as materias. Ou- 
tros presumidos de geographos, sem tropecar cor- 
xem (co mo diz o vulgo) as sete partidas do mundo ; 
puxao por zonas, e remotos climas, acarretao isth- 
mos, e peninsulas, terras arcticas, antarcticas, e au- 
straes incognitas, e quando parece que poem fim, 
pegao em longitudes, e com latitudes se estendem. 
Que diremos do poeta loquaz, mimoso das Musa?, 
e fanfarrao do Parnasso ? A qualquer phrase poe- 
tica, sente cocegas. nos ouvidos, e nao ouve fallar 
em verfos, que logo os nao traga todos a balla. Hex- 
ametros, e Pentametros, lam bos, Saphicos, Ado- 
nicos, Chcriambicos ; da regras, e preceitos para 
Coplas Reaes, e Redondilhas, para Sonetos, enca- 
deados,e retrogados ; allega com poetas nacionaes 
e eftranhos ; amontoa todos os termos da E'pica, 
Lyrica, Dramatica, Dithyrambica ; a ouvillo bebe 
de hum gole toda a Hipocrene, e procura efgotar 
de hum jacto a Caballina fonte. Compara Plutar~ 
cos aos loquazes com vafos vafios, que foao mais que 
os cheyos. A hum grande fallador, que depois de 
huma larga pratica pedio a Ariftoteles, que Ihe 
perdoafle a moleftia ; refpondeo o filofofo : nao tenho 
que perdoar, que eu nao tomei fentido no que di- 
feftes. Careon, homem loquaz, pedindo a Isocra- 
tes, que lhe enfinafle Rhetorica, pedio Ifocrates 
dobrado falario : e perguntando Careon a razao das 
duas pagas, refpondeo Ifocrates : quero huma para 
enfinarte a fallar, e quero outra, para enfinarte a 
callar. Grandes falladores fao bespas, que todo o 
dia eftao zunindo, e nao fazern mel nem cera. Ho- 
* I 2 mem 



132 PORTUGUESE 

mem lequaz (dizia Solon) he cidade sem muros 7 
casa fem porta, navio fern piloto, e cavallo femfre- 
yo. Em cavallo defbocado ninguem fe poem fem 
medo, fem pre fe deve temer boca defenfreada. Foi 
tomada a cidade de Athenas, e deftruida por Silla, 
porque na loja de hum barbeiro os efpias defte 
general ouvirao particar na parte mais fraca da dita 
cidade. 

Da Malediccncia. 

O dizer mal, he propio dos que nao podem fazer 
mal. De todos diz mal Pasquinho, que nao tern 
p6s nem maos, e ainda que eftivera inteirico, por 
fer eftatua, e flgura immovel, nao pode fazer mal. 
Dizem que o Papa Adriano VI. Ihe mandara di- 
zer, que o faria lanc,ar no rio Tybre ; refpondeo 
Pafquinho : Tambem debaixo da agua canta a 
laa. Nem esta fora de razao, chamarse raa o mal- 
dizente, porque sempre a sua voz he o rouco som 
de hum charco ; e assim como as raas, que infestarao 
a corte de Pharao, sujarao a prata, o ouro, e as mais 
ricas alfayas de palacio, assim se pagao os maldi- 
zentes a coroa, e tiaras. No proximo nao enxergao 
os olhos do maldizente se nao defeitos. O alvo das 
seus intentos he denigrir, procurar ter fama, infa- 
mando, funda em detracc.ao o seu augmento, c 
de vituperios espera louvor. O maldizente he o 
tigre da republica : nao sofre armonias deencomios 
alheyos ; a sua Jingua he cauda de cscorpiao, sem- 
pre em acto de picar ; sabe achar cicatriz, aonde 
nao houve chaga ; nao poupa vivos, nem mortos, 
•nem a amigos, muito menos a inimigos ; he ver- 
dugo da reputacao, e homicida do credito ; semea 
confusoens, e colhe discofdias. Notavel defeito he 
este da lingua humana, para os applausos muda, 
para vituperios eloquente. Tcda a antiguidade 
nos deo so treV, ou quatro bons panegy'ricos, todas 
as satiras parecerao excellentes. Aos seus piques 

deve 



GRAMMAR. 133 

deve Tacito a fua eftima^o ; muito mais agrada, 
quando moteja de Tiberio, do que quando celebra 
a German ico ; final mente todos o gabao, porque 
nunca gabou a ninguem. Mas a virtude, ainda que 
perfeguida de maledicos, nao defconfia. Nenhum 
homem grande, quando calumniado, fe reputa 
pequeno. Tres grandes Emperadores, Theodofio, 
Arcadio, e Honorio, pai, filho, e neto, fizerao hurna 
lei, aqual manda, que os que cegos da paixao dizem 
mal, fejao perdoados, porque a fua maledicencia, 
fe procedeo de poucojuizo, merece defculpa ; fe 
de furor, piedade : fe de malinidade, efquecimento 

e defprezo, 

* 

Proiogo de Jacinto Freyre de Andrade. 

Sao os prologos hum anticipado remedio aos a- 
chaques dos Jivros, porque andao fempre de com- 
panhia os erros, e as defculpas. Eu por hora me 
defvio do caminbo trilhado, nam quero pedir per- 
dao de nada: quern achar que dizer, nao me 
perdoe, (nem fera neceffario encomendalo.) Se 
me notarem o livro de roim, nao negarao que he 
breve, e efcreto em lingoa Fortuguefa, que tantos 
engenhos modemos, ou temem ou defprezao, 
como filhos ingratos ao primeiro leite, fervindo fe de 
vozes eftrangeiras, por onde paflarao como hofpedes, 
fern refpeito aquellas veneraveis Cans, e ancianida- 
de madura de noffa linguagem autiga. Efcrevi efta 
hiftoria com verdade de memorias fieis, fern que a 
penna, ou o affeclo alteraffe o menor accidente. 
Antes que efte papel fabiffe dos borroens, fei que 
muitos o taxarao de efcaffo, dizendo, que houvera 
de dilatar a hiftoria com allufoens, e paflbs da efcri- 
iura, que o fizefTem mais crecido ; efles compram os 
livros pello pezo, nam pello feitio : da mais que 
nam permittem, tarn licencioza penna as leys da hi- 
Itoria. Outros queriam que me valeffe do eftrepito 
de vozes novas, a que chamam cultura, deixando 
* 13 a es- 



134 P OR TUG UESE 

e eftrada limpa por caminhos fragozos, e trocando 
com eftimacao pueril, o que he melhor, pello que 
mais se ufa. Mas como nam determine! lifongear 
a goftos eftragados, quiz antes com a fmgeleza da 
verdade fervir ao aplaufo dos melhores, que a fama 
popular, e errada. 

Prologo do Conde da Ericeira aofeu Portugal 
Rejlaurado. 

Efta ceremonia, leitor, de efcrever Prologo, 
mais por efcufar a cenfura de que falto a ley de dar 
principio com elle a huma hiftoria tao grave, que 
por me parecer a ley precifa, me refolvo a obfer- 
vala: porque difcurfado o frm com que fe eftabe- 
leceo, avalio por inutil elle trabalho, entendendo 
que na efcolha da hiftoria, e no acerto do efcrevella 
consifte toda a fortuna dos authores. Porque nem 
a arnizade dos leitores pode encobrir os defeitos do 
eferitor, nem efcurecerlhe os acertos o odio ; e entre 
eftes dous extremos, (ordinariamente viciofos) fe le- 
vanta o tribunal da juftica dos deilntereflados, por 
independentes, ou por nao conhecidos, que coftu- 
mao dar ou louvor por premio aos benemeritos, e a 
cenfura por caftigo aos culpados. 

Huma das may ores emprezas do mundo he a re- 
folucao de efcrever huma hiftoria : porque alem de 
innumeravel multidao de inconvenientes, que he 
neceffario que fe vencjio, e de hum trabalho ex- 
ceffivo, que he precifo, que fe fuppere ; no mefmo 
tempo em que fe pretende lograr o fru£to de tantas 
diligencias, tendo fe vencido formar o intento, ven- 
eer a licao, aflentar o eftilo, colher as noticias, lan- 
car os borradores, tiralos em limpo, conferilos, e 
apuralos,quando quern efcreve fe anima na emprenfa 
do livro que efcreveo ao porapofo titulo de author, 
entao comeca fer reo, e reo julgado com tao ex- 
cefsiva tirannia, que tendo lingua para fallar de tan- 
tas pefsoas, como sao as que comprehende qualquer 

volume 



GRAMMAR. 135 

volume, a nao pode ter para deixar de fer condem- 
nado fern fer ouvido. Julgo por muito errada a 
opiniao commua, que affenta, que a hiftoria be pa- 
ralelo da pintura : porque he tanto mais privilegiado 
o pintorqueo eferitor,que teve lugar Ape]les,pon- 
do em publico huma figura que havia pintado, de 
3he emendar a roupa, que hum artifice dellas lhe 
condemnou por imperfeita, e de caftigaf o ouzadia 
de outro, que nao fendo pintor fe attreveo a ar- 
guirlhe o periil da figura. Nao he concedida aos 
efcritores tanta liberdade : porque no mefmo ponto 
que os fineres do prelo acabarao de fellar a hiftoria 
que efcreverao, logo perderao toda a ac^ao de emen- 
dala, e na difficuldade de fatisfazer a hum mundo de 
juizos diverfos, fica provado o defangano, de que 
nao pode haver hiftoria bem avaiiada de todos. O 
fol por que cofldma tao repetidamente offerecerfe do 
berco do oriente ao tumulo do occafo aos olhos do 
univerfo, fe ex poem a cenfura dos que fern penetrar 
a majeftade do feu refplandor, e a utilida.de dos feus 
rayos, fugeitando a razao ao appetite, huns o con- 
demnao de claro quando e calma os aperta, outros 
de efcuro quando o frio os afflige, fern reparar que 
os latidos do cao celefte, que amedrentao na cani- 
cula os vapores, de que as nuvens no inverno fe for- 
mao, fao, e nao o fol,culpados no rigor da calma, como 
as nuvens na afpereza do frio. Que importa, que a 
verdade da hiftoria, epureza do eftilo aformemcomo 
o fol perfeita, fe os leytores pretendem avaliala como 
querem, e nao como merece. 

A eftas, e outras muitas difficuldades fe fujeita 
quern fe refolve a efcrever huma hiftoria que pela 
opiniao commua dos hiftoriadores coftuma fer fe 
feculos paffados, em que mais defarTogados os ani- 
mos entrao adefcubrir a verdade dos fucceflbs. Po- 
rem quaes ferao os inconvenientes, quaes perigos 
quafi invenciveis, a que fe arrqja quern tomou a 
te meraria refolucao de imprimir em fua vida a 
hiftoria do feu tempo. Em verdade que ate imagi- 

* 1 4 nadc 



136 PORTUGUESE 

nado faz horror efte intento: porque oppoftas, e 
incompativeis as obrigacoens forcofas aos rifcos ma* 
rjifeftos, nao parece polTivel, apurados, deftilarem 
hum compofto profeito ; pois faltar a verdade flea 
fendo infamia do author, defcobrilla nas accoens 
defacertadas, cahe em defcredito dos comprehendi- 
dos. Encarecer os benemeritos, fera inveia dos in- 
dignos : louvar os viciofos, opprobrio dos beneme- 
ritos : contar todosos fueceffos, he empenho inven- 
eivel : callar alguns pode fer queixa dos intereffados. 
Nos cafos grandes, e ainda nos inferiores ajuftaremfe 
todos em que fao verdadeiramente contados, difficul- 
tofamente fe podera confeguir: porque eu experi- 
mented achando-me em quatro batalhas, e em 
outros encontros, com muitos rail homens, nao se 
defcobrirem dous que concord affem no mefmo faclo ; 
e tenho alcancado que a razao defta variedade vem 
a fer, que como hum fo homem nao he poflivel afli- 
flir a todos os fuecetfbs de hum confliclo, entenden- 
do erradamente que cahe no defcredito de nao ter 
parte em tantas accoens diverfas, todas as que nao 
pode alcan^ar com a vifta defacreditapor fabulofas. 
Se pois me nao foi poffivel contar fern contradicao 
em varias converfacoens hum fo fuccefTo na prefenca 
dos que fe acharao nelle ; como poderei confeguir 
facilmente efcrevendo tantas batalhas, fitios, intre- 
prezas, e encontros fuccedidos a valerofa nacao 
Portugueza per efpaco de vinte e oito annos nas 
quatro partes do mundo, julgarem todos a narracao 
das viclorias por verdadeiras, e por certos os motivos 
das emprezas militares, e politicas, feguindofe ordi- 
nariamente defte erro de difcurfos, e falta de noticias 
huma queixa perpetua contra quern efcreve, e em 
alguns hum odio eterno, que muitas vezes fe def- 
affoga pelos caminhos de 'delirio. A q^Qj pois, la- 
biryntho de efiradas confufas, a elie encanto de fan- 
tasmasdisformes me perfuadio a arrojarme o entran- 
havel amor- da minha patria, dequefe compoz com 
p fangue a natureza, fundado no jufto temor de que 

nao 



G RAM- MAR. 137 

nao occultMem mortaes, as urnas do efquecimento, 

asac^oens gloriofas de tantos heroes excel lentes: ao 

crescentandofe e estas razoens outro mayor eftimulo, 

que foi avaliar como obrigacao precifa defcobrir os 

motivos do principio, e remate defta hiftoria de 

Portugal reftaurado, que me animei a efcrever, pois 

como Alpha, e Omega, divino fymbolo dos Gregos, 

forao verdadeiramente os dous polos (fe unidos pela 

natureza, pelos accidentes diverfos) que me perfua- 

diraq a abracar efte grande empenho, pretendendo 

moftrar claramente ao mundo, affim a jufti'ca com 

que o Sereniffimo Rey D. Joao IV. de immortal 

memoria fe reftituio a Coroa de Portugal, como a 

jufta razao com que o excellente Principe D, Pedro, 

fegundo Tito, delicia dos homens, fern mais caufa, 

que a defenfa, confervacao, efeguranca defte reyno, 

tomou fobre feus generofos hombres o governo del- 

le, julgando o por menos pezado que a coroa, que 

com tanta admiracao dos meftres da politica, des- 

preza. Nao me obrigando, fo o zelo da honra de 

patria a defcobrir os fundamentos de tao grandes 

fucceflbs, fe nao tambem a feguranca da minha opi- 

riiao que amei fempre mais que a propria vida; por- 

que como logrei a fortuna de ter na guerra parte nas 

mayores vi£torias, que fe confeguirao nefte reyno, 

jera neceftario moftrar que a guerra foi jufta, para 

que as accoensfejulgaiTem porvirtuofas. E como da 

mefmaforte me fuccedeo ferhum dos que aiiiftirao as 

heroicas refolucoens do Principe D. Pedro, era pre- 

cifo manifeftar, que forao juftificadas, para me livrar 

de calurnnia dos que fern noticias verdadeiras difcur- 

iaflem afataiidade del Rey D. Afibnfo VI. fern enten- 

derem que foi depbfto pelos tres eftados do reyno 

por incapaz do governo delle, e por inutil para a 

fuccefiao da coroa. 

Alem deltas tao urgentescaufas, nao forao menos 
poderofas para me levar a efte intenro, aiTim a 
magoa (como j a' re fieri) de ver que infenfivelmente 
hia o tempo confumindo a noticia de tantas accoens 

heroicas 



138 PORTUGUESE 

heroicas, por fa] tar quern fe refolvefle a efcrevelJas, 
porq.ue fo ate o anno de 16.6$. que efcreveo com 
erraclasnoticias Joao Bautifta Viraugua Venezianoos 
fucceifos delte reyno, e o conde Mayolino nas fuas 
guerras civis, fe acha memoria delles. Como a pe- 
na da pouca verdade com que todos os authores 
Caftelhanos, que fe animarao a fallar na guerra 
fuccedida entre as duas coroas a referirao : porque 
nao fo tratarao de encobrir com ficcoens a grandeza 
das noffas victorias, fenao que cahirao na ignoran- 
cia do errar os tempos das campanhas, preferindo 
as fucceffivas as antecedentes, os nomes aos fitios 
das provincias onde acontecerao, e aos cabos, e 
officiaes que fe acharao nellas, feguindo o mefmo 
delicto que condenarao a bum author Francez, que 
imprimindo bum livro, em que afHrmava, que Fran- 
cifco I. Rey de Franca nao fora prezo na batalha de 
Pavia. E perguntandolhe a razao porque calumni- 
ava a fua verdade, lancando ao mundo aquella men- 
tira, refpondeo, que nos feculos futuros quern leiTe 
a fua biftoria, e a dos Caftelhanos, daria credito a 
opiniao a que fe affeic^arTe. Eftes forao os motivos 
que me perfuadirao tao difficultofo empenho, ani- 
mandome juntamente a tomaUo por minba conta as 
muitas circunftancias, que me babilitarao ; porque 
alem de herdar de antigos, e valerofos avos fer a 
verdade alma da vida, como he da hiftoria, tive a 
fortuna de me criar no paco com o foberano, e 
eiclarecido Principe D. Tbeocloiio, affiftindolhe 
continuamente aprendendo com elle a primeira gra- 
matica e a licao das hiftorias. Nefle. tempo fiz me- 
moria das primeiras politicas com que el Rey D. 
Joao deo principio ao governo defte reyno. 

De quinze annos comecei a fervir na guerra, em 
que pailei por todos os poftos tao vagarofamente 
como qualquer foldado da fortuna, e cbeguei ao 
mayor emprego de governador das armas. Acheime 
em todas as occafioens grandesdaprovincia de Alen- 

teja 



GRAMMAR. 139 

tejo do anno de 1650 ate a batalha de Montes 
Claros, e fiii voto em todos os negocios de mayor 
confideracao. A guerra das provincias aonde nao 
affifii, e a das conquiftas confer* com os cabos e 
officiaes qi e fe acharao em todas as emprezas, de- 
pois de exanvnar os papeis mais intimos em que a 
curiofidade de varias peiloas fe havia exercitado. 

As negocea^oens fora do reyno, que tocarao a dif- 
ferentes iugeiios, efcrevo por informacio de cada 
hum delles, e pelos Hvros em que os embaixadores 
lanc^rao as embaixadas. Os mais negocios pelos 
documentos das fecretarias de eftado, e guerra, buf- 
cando em todos, alem deftas noticias, a feguranc.a 
de teliimimhas defmtereffadas, que tiverao fem de- 
pendencia parte em todos os fucceffos politico?, e 
militares. 

Dez annos de trabalho me levou efte primeiro 
volume; no difcurfo defle tempo nao houve peffoa 
douta ou intelligente que fe animafle a examinal- 
lo, a quern o nao entregaffe, fugeitando me a qual- 
quer cenfura que fe me apontava, e emendando o 
que fe me advertia, ainda que foffe contra o pro- 
prio entendimento, entendendo, que como efta hi- 
lioria nao ha de fer fo fatisfaejio do meu juizo, fe 
nao dos alheyos, iico melhor livrado em ter por de- 
fenfores os -que a emendarem. He documento, que 
felicemente devo ao fobre todos prudentiilimo dif- 
curfo do Principe noffo fenhor. Antes que come- 
e.affe a escrevella, paffei por efpac,o de dous annos a$ 
hiftorias mais feletas antigas, e modernas, conhe- 
cendo, que era neceffario affentar o eftylo : porque 
nao coftumao deizar a \\qjk> dos Hvros muitas horas 
de exereicio, haviao levado a inclinacao a equivocos, 
e termos poeticos, frafe de que os primeiros annos 
mais continuamente fe alimentarao, e de que me 
fez apartar o mais que me foi poflivel a doutrina 
dos meftres da historia, e a dos preceitos historicos de 
IMafcarde Italiano, e de padre Mene Francez, que 

nefta 



140 PORTUGUESE 

nefta idade com grande elegancia fe empregarao 
nefte afTumpto. Nos ultimos dous annos padeci 
mayor trabalho : porque tocandome nelles a occupa- 
cao de Vedor da Fazenda da Reparticao da India, 
que coftuma deixar poucas boras livres, as que me 
fkavao de defcanco, empregava nefte exercicio, con- 
hecendo, que paiTar d.ia fern lancar linba, he perder 
do tempo a melhor ioya, que ategora nao tern ha- 
vido milagreque foffe poderofo para reftauralla. 

Humo das mayores fatisfacoens que tenho alean- 
cado nefte meu emprego, be imprimirfe quafi jun- 
tamente com efle livro, os que com tanto Jouvor 
proprio, acorn tanta honra da nacao Portugueza ef- 
creveo o moderno Livio Manoel de Faria e Souza ; 
e como en todos chegao os fucceflbs, que refere 
nas quatro partes do mundo, da fundacao de Por- 
tugal ate o anno de 1640, flea com a minha hifto- 
ria enflada a de Portugal ate a paz celebrada entre 
efta coroa, e de Caftella, que be o affumpto que 
comprehendem eftes dous volumes. 

Agora, leytor, ou pio, ou malevolo, ou definter- 
eflado, he necefiario affiar o difcurfo, e eu feguro 
que muito menos ha de cuftar aos leytores arguir, 
do que a mim me tern cuftado o efcrever. E fe al- 
guma fatisfacao fe entender que mereco pelo meu 
trabalho, nao quero mayor recompenfa que o re- 
conhecimento, de que ategora nao fahio ao mundo 
hiftoria mais verdadeira: pois fern effeicao, odio, 
efpeianca, ou temor, nao perdoei a requifito algum 
neceflario para a biitoria, que me -ficafie por efcre- 
ver, parecendome fo efcuzado relatar defeitos par- 
ticulares, tendo por opiniao, que os que fe arroja<- 
rao adefcobrillosmerecemmais o titulode faty'ricos 
que de hilloriadores, exceptuando aquelles que re- 
ierirao vicios, de que depende a narracao da fua hi- 
ftoria, como be neceffario que me aconteca quando 
chegar a referir os fuccefibs da vida del Rey D. 
Affonfo VI. 

Nao 



GRAMM A R. Hi 

'Nao podia Tito Livio eximirfe de contar os ex- 
cefifos de Tarquino, originando fe da fua laciva a 
mudanca de Reys a Republica no Imperio Romano ; 
mas pudera Quinto Curcio encobrir os vicios de 
Alexandre Magno, que nao Ihe embaracaraoas vic- 
torias da Alia. Precifo foi a Joao de Mariana relatar 
a cegueira de Henrique ViII.de Inglaterra na in- 
digna affeicao de Anna Bolena. Mas pudera Hen- 
rique Caterino de Avila diffimular os diverti- 
mentos de Henrique III. de Franca, que nao per- 
tencerao ao governo da fua monarquia. Faminiano 
Eftrada os defconcertos de Chapirn Vitello, e o 
Cardeal Bentivoglio nas fuas memorias hiftoricas os 
vicios de alguns Cardeaes do facro collegio, eoutros 
muitos que ufarao defta indigna liberdade. Deico- 
briremfe os defeitos que nao prejudicarao a inter- 
efles publicos, muitas vezes fervem aos leytores mais 
de eftimulo, que de emenda, ufando dos exempla- 
res para defculpa dos vicios que pretendem feguir, 
e he Deos verdadeira teftimunha de que o meu prin- 
cipal intento, he atalhar todos os que podem offen- 
der a fua divina mageiiade, e fer prejudiciaes a glo- 
ria defta monatquia. 

Ao muito poderofo e Chriftianiflimo Principe el Rey Dom 
Joao 110JJ0 fenhor, dejie no me o terceiro de Portugal, 
Pro logo de Joao de Barros, em as primeiras quatro 
Decadas da fua Afia. 

TOD AS las coufas, muito poderofo Rey e fenhor 
noflb, tern tanto amor a confervacao de feu proprio 
fer, que quanto lhe he pofsivel, trabalhao em feu 
mod'o por fe fazerem perpetuas. As naturaes em 
que fomente obra a natureza, e nao a induftria hu- 
mana, cadahuma delias em ti mefma tem huma virtu- 
de generaliva, que quando devinamente fao defpof- 
tas, ainda que periguem em sua corrupcao : e(Ta 

mefma 



142 PORTUGUESE 

mefma natureza as torna renovar em novo Fer, 
com que ficao vivas e confervadas em fua propria ef- 
pecie. E as outras coufas que nao fao obras da na- 
tureza, mas feitos e a£tos humanos, eftas porque 
nao tinhao virtude animada de gerar outras femel- 
hantes a fi, e por a brevidade da vida do homem, 
acabavao com feu autor: os mefmos homens por 
confervar feu nome em a memoria dellas, buscarao 
•hum divino artificio, que reprefentade em futuro, o 
que elles obravao em prefente. O qual artificio, 
pero que a inven^ao delle fe de a diverfos autores : 
mais parece por Deos rnfpirado, que inventado por 
algum humano entendimento. E que bem como 
lhe aprouve que mediante o padar, lingua, dentes, 
e beicos, hum refpiro de ar movida dos bofes cau- 
fado de huma potencia, a que os Latinos chamao 
affatus, fe formaffe em palavras fignificativas, para 
que os ouvidos feu natural objecto, reprefentaffem 
ao intendimento diverfos fignificados e conceptos, 
fegundo a difpoficao dellas: affi quiz que mediante 
os chara£teres das letras, de que ufainos, difpoftas 
na ordem fignificaiiva da valia que cada nacao deu 
ao feu alfabeto, a vifta obje£to receptivo deftes cha- 
ra£teres, mediante elles, formaffe a effencia das cou- 
fas, e os racionaes conceptos, ao modo de como a 
fala em feu officio os denuncia. E ainda quiz que 
efto modo de elocucao artificial de letras, por bene- 
fkio de perpetuidade precedeffe ao natural da fala. 
Porquo efta, fendo animada, nao tern mais vida que 
o inftante de fua pronunciacao, e paffa a femelhanca 
do tempo, que nao tern regreffo : e as letras fendo 
buns chara£teres mortos, e nao animados, conthem 
em fi efpirito devida, pois a dao acerca de nos a todas 
las coufas. Ca ellas sao buns elementos, que lhe dao 
affiftencia : a as fazem paflar em futuro com fua mul- 
tiplicacao de annos em annos, por modo mais excel- 
1'ente, do que faz a natureza. Pois vemos que efta 
natureza para gerar alguma coufa, corrompe e altera 
os elementos, de que he compofta, e as letras fendo 

elementos/ 



GRAMMAR. MS 

tlementos, de que fe compoem e forma a fignifica" 
cao das coufas, nem o entendimento (pofto que feja 
pafsivo na intelligencia dellas pelo modo de como 
vem a elle :) mas vaofe multiplicando na parte me- 
morativa por ufo de frequentacao, tao efpiritual em 
habit o de perpetuidade, que por meyo dellas no fim 
do mundo, tao prefentes ferao aquelles que entao 
forem, noffas pefsoas, feitos, e dittos ; como hoje 
por efta cuflodia literal, be vivo o quefezerao e dif- 
feramos primeiros, que forao no principio delle. E 
porque o fru&o defies a£tos humanos, he mui dif- 
ferente do fru£to natural, que fe produze da femente 
das coufas, por eile natural fe nacer no mefmo ho- 
mem, para cujo ufo todas forao criadas, e o fruclo 
das obras delles he eterno, poisprocede do entendi- 
mento e vontade, onde fe fabricao e aceptao todas, 
que por ferem partes efpirituaes, as fazem eternas : 
ficadaqui a cadahum de noshuma natural e juflaobri- 
gacao, que affi devemos fer diiigentes e folicitos em 
guard ar em futuro noifas obras, para com ellas apro- 
veitarmos em bom exemplo, como protos e con- 
flantes na operacao prefente dellas, pera cornmum e 
temporal proveito de nolfos naturaes. E vendo eu 
que nefla diligencia de encomendar as coufas a 
cuflodia das letras (confervadoras de todalas obras) a 
nacao Portugueza he tao defcuidada de fi, quao 
pronta e diligente em os feitos que Ihe competent por 
milicia, e que mais fe preza de fazer, que dizer ; 
quiz nefta parte, ufar ante do officio de eftrangeiro, 
que da condicao de natural ; defpoendome a efere- 
ver o que elles fezerlo do defcobrimento e conquifia 
do Oriente, por fe nao perderem da memoria dos ho- 
mens, que vierem defpois de nos, tao gloriofos feitos, 
como vemos ferem perdidos de voffos progenitores, 
mayoresem louvor do que lemos em suas chronica;* 
(fegundo moiixao alguns fragmentos de particulars 
efcripturas). E na acepta^o defte trabalbo e perigo 
a que me defpues, antes querc fer tido por tao ousado 
como foi o derradeiro dos trinta e tantos efcriptores 
que efcreverao a paffagem e expedicao que Alexan- 
dre 



144 PORTUGUESE 

dre fez em Aila, o qual temeo pouco o que delle 
podiao dizer, tendo tantos ante si : que imitar o 
defcuido de muitos, a quern efte meu trabalho por 
officio e profissao competia. Fois havendo cento 
e vinte annos (porque de tantos trafta efta ef- 
criptura) que voffas armas e padroes de vi£t6riaS 
tern tornado pofle, nao fomente de toda a terra 
maritima de A'frica e Afia, mas ainda de outros 
mayores mundos, do que Alexandre lamentava, por 
nao ter noticia delles : nao houve alguem que fe an* 
tremeterTe a fer primeiro nefte meu trabalho, fo- 
mente Gomez Eanes de Zurara Chronifta mor defies 
reynos em as coulas do tempo do Infante Dom Hen- 
rique (do qual nos confefsamos tomar a mayor parte 
dos feus fundamentos, por nao roubar o feu a cuio 
he.) No cometer do qual trabalho, vendo eu a 
mageftade e grandeza da obra, nao fui tao atrevido 
que logo como ifto defejei, pufeffe maos a ella ; antes 
tomci por cautella defte cometimento, uzar do modo 
que tern os architectures. Os quaes primeiro que 
ponhao mao na obra a tracao e debuxao, e de fi 
aprefentao eftes deliniamentos de fua imaginacao, 
ao fenhor de cujo ha de fer o edificio. Porque ella 
materia, de que eu queria tractar, era dos trium- 
phos defte reyno, dos quaes nao fe podia falar fern 
licenca do autor delles, que, naquelle tempo defte 
meu propofito era el Rey voffo padre de gloriofa 
memoria : eftando fua Alteza em Evora o anno de 
quinhentos e vinte, Ihe aprofentei hum debuxo feito 
em nome de voffa Alteza, porque com efte titulo 
ante ella fofie acepto. O qual debuxo nao era al- 
guma vatrachomiomachia, guerra de raas e ratos, 
como fez Homero por exercitar feu engenho, ante 
que efcrevefle a guerra dos Gregos e Troyanos : 
mas foi huma pintura metaphorica de exercitos, e 
vitorias humanas, nefta figura racional do Empera- 
dor Clarimundo, titulo da traca (conforme a idadc 
que eu entao tinha) a fimde aparar o eftilo de min- 
ha poilibilidade pera efta voffa Afia. A qual pin- 
tura, 



GRAMMAR. lis 

tura, por fer em nome de voffa Alteza, affi conten- 
tou a el rey voflb padre, defpois que foube fer ima- 
gem defta que ora tracto, que logo me pagou meu 
trabalho : dizendo aver dias que defejava eftas cousas 
das partes do oriente ferem pofias em efcriptura, 
mas que nunca achara peffoa de que o confiaffe, que 
fe me eu atrevia a efta obra, (como o debuxo mof- 
trava) o meu trabalho nao seria ante elle perdido. 
Por a qual confiar^a Ihe beijei a mao pefante pef- 
foas que hoje fao vivas : por a pratica fer hum pou- 
co alta lendolhe e hum ou dous capitulos da mof- 
tra e debuxo. E e fraud o pero abrir os aiiceces defle 
grande edificio, com o fervor da idade e favor das 
palavras de confian^a que fe de mi tinha : aprouve 
a Deos levar a el Rey voffo padre aquelle celeflial 
affento, que fe da aos Catholicos e Chriftianiffirnos 
Principes, com que flquei fufpenfo deila empreza. 

Socedendotambem logo proverme voffa Alteza dos 
officios de thefoureiro da cafa de India e Mina, e 
defpois de feitor das mefmas cafas, carregos que com. 
seu pezo fazem acuruaravida, poislevaotodolosdias 
deila, e com a occupacao e negocio de suas armadas 
e commercios,afogao e cattivao todo liberal engenho. 
Mas parece que affi eilava ordenado de cima, que 
nao fomente me.coub.effe por forte da vida, os tra~ 
balhos de feitorizar os commercios de Africa e Afia : 
mas ainda efcrevor os feitos, que voffos vaffalos na 
milicia e conquifta dellas fezerao. Porque correndo 
o tempo, e achando eu entre algumas cartas que el 
Rey voffo padre antes daminha offerta, tinha escripto 
a Dom Fracifco d'Almeida, e a Affonfo d'Albo- 
querque, que conquiftarao e governarao a India, 
encomendandolhe que miudamente Ihe efcreveffem 
as coufas e feitos daquellas partes, com tencao de 
as mandar por em efcripto, e que voffa Alteza 
com a mefma tencao no anno de quinhentos e trinta 
e hum, tambem o efcreveo aNuno d'Acunha, que 
naquelle tempo a governava, mandandolhe fobre- 
fto regimentos feitos por Lourenco de Caceres, a 

* K quem 



146 PORTUGUESE 

quern tinha encomendado a efcriptura deftas partes, 
o que nao houve effeito, e feria por ventura por elle 
falecer : determine!, por fe nao dilatar efte dezejo 
que voffa Alteza tinha, e eu pagar a confianca que el 
Rey voffo padre de mim teve, repartir o tempo da 
vida, dando os dias ao officio, e parte das noites a 
efta efcritura da voffa Afia : e affi compri com o regi- 
mento do officio, e com o dezejo que fempre tive 
defta empreza. E como os homens pela mayor 
parte sao mais prontos em dar de fi fruclos volun- 
taries, que os encomendados, imitando nifto a terra 
sua madre, a qual he mais viva em dar as fementes 
que nella jazem por natureza, que as que lhe en- 
comendamos por agricultura: parece que me obri- 
gou ella a que patrizaffe, e que por diligencia pre- 
valeceffe mais em mim a natureza que della tenho, 
que quanto outros tern reeebido por obriga^o de 
officio, profiflao de vida, e agricultura de benefi- 
ces. Pois nao tendo eu outra coufa mais viva para 
tomar efta empreza, que hum zelo da gloria que fe 
deve a voffas armas, e fama a meus naturaes, que 
militando nellas, verterao feu fangue e vida : fui o 
primeiro que brotei efte fruclo de efcriptura defta 
voffa Afia, fe he licito, por fer de arvore agrefte, 
ruftica, e nao agricultada, poder merecer efte nome 
de fruclo ante voffa real mageftade. 

Pro/ogo na Chronica del Ret Dom Emanuel, dirigidapor 
Damiao de Goes ao feremjjimo Principe Dom Hen- 
rique, Infante de Portugal. 

Muitos, e graves authores nos principios de fuas 
chronicas trabalaram em louvar na hiftoria, da qual 
rudo o que dixeram foi fempre muito menos do 
que fe devia dizer, porque affi como ella he infi- 
nita, affi feus louvores nao tern flm, nem termo a 
que se poffam reduzir, e pois tudo o trattado nefta 
parte, he quaii nada em compar^am do que deve 
fer, voitarei daqui a vela, para por a proa nefta : 

na 



GRAMMAR. 147 

ha qual por 9erto nao ousara, nem devera de tocar, 
fe me nao fora man dado por V. A. por fer de quali- 
dade, que depois dalgumas pessoas a terem come^a- 
da el Rei dom Joam vosso irmao que fancta gloria 
haja, lhes mandou tomar o que ja tinhao efcrito* 
para se acabar por outros, de cujas habilidades tinha 
maior opiniao, em maos dos quaes flcou atte feu fa- 
le9imento. E considerando V. A. que pois estas 
pessoas, de que fe tanto sperava^ nam tinham feito 
em tempo de trinta e sette annos, que ha que el 
Rei Dom Emanuel vofTo pay fale^eo, coufa que re- 
fpondeffe ao merecimento de tal neg^io, fern fe 
lembrar de quao fraco eu devo fer para hum taman- 
ho pefo, me mandou nefte anno do Senhor de 
M.D.LVIII. que daquillo em que muitos, como 
em coufa defefperada, fe nam atreverao por a mao* 
tomafle eu o cuidado^ o que fiz com maior oufa- 
dia do que a meu fraco juizo convinha, movido 
com tudo por fos dous refpeitos, o hum por eu fer 
fectura do dito fenhor Rei vofTo pai, criado em fua 
cafa, e em feu fervico, desde idade de nove annos, 
o outro por me parecer que fe nam movera V. A. 
a me mandar coufa em que confiftiam todolos feitos> 
e louvores, defte feliciffimo rei, e daquelles que o 
ferviram na guerra, e na paz, fenam por confiar de 
mi o mais fubftancial que no efcrever das chronicas 
fe requere, que he com verdade dar a cadahum o 
louvor ou reprehenfam que mere9e. Pelas quaes 
razoes matrevi a tomar efle trabalho, o qual tal 
qual he, me pare9eo que nao devia, nem era bem que 
dedicafle fe nam a V. A. como a pr^ipal author 
de la fama, e gloria del Rei feu pai fairem em luz, 
e nam perecer a lembran9a das coufas notaveis que 
aconte9eram aos Portugueses por todo o difcurfo 
de feu regnado. 



* K 2 Di 



148 . PORT U'G UESE 



De Francifco Rodriguez Lobo no feu Pajior Peregrine. 

Chegarao as ferranas ao pe da fonte com efra 
alegria, e faudarao ao peregrino, que com inveja da, 
quella liberdade as eftava olhando, e em quanto 
(lavando os cantaros) com graciofas perguntas im- 
portunarao a fonte, o velho pegureiro fe veyo afien- 
tar junto deile, e perguntandolhe donde era, e o 
que alii bufcava, vierao a travar pratica, da qual 
Lereno entendeo que o ferrano era homem fingelo, 
e tao de vidro, que fe lhe via pello rofto o cora^o, e 
pellor amor com que eUe tratava a gente daquella 
condicao, lhe foi de hum lanco em outro, pergun- 
tando da vida, e do cuidado que tinha na ferra, pois 
naquella companhia o via tarn contente, ao que o 
velho refpondeo defla maneira : ha mais de feflenta 
annos que naci detraz daquelle penedo que daqut 
apparece no alta da ferra, e de entao ate agora, nem 
vi mais terra que a que delle fe defcobre, nem defe- 
jei outra, de quantas ouvi gabar a meus naturaes, 
nunca tive de meu outro bem mayor, que nao de- 
feiar os alheos, nem outro mal que me defle mais 
cuidad, que as occafioens que o tempo me offere- 
ceo de poder pofluir o que os homens eflimao, e 
fentem tanto perder, como sao enganos ; fou tao 
pobre do que a fortuna reparte, que cada hora que 
me quifer tomar conta de tantos annos, lhe nao fi- 
carei devendo, nem hum defejo ; vivo de guardar 
gado doutros donos, fou fiel em o tratar, diligente 
no paflo, e remedio delle, rico com a parte que me 
cabe da fua laa, e do feu leite, porque della me 
vifto, e delle me fuftento, nem quando os frutos 
sao poucos me laftimo, nem quando as novidades sao 
mayores me alvoroco : contentame o bem, nao me 
c.ocobra o mal ; tenho huma cabana em que vivo, 
feita por minha propria mao das arvores deftas bren- 
has, nao acharas dentro coufa que deva direitos a 
vaidade, todos sao inftrumentos neceffarios ao meu 

officio 



GRA MM A R. 149 

officio de guardador, e fe alguma eoufa fobeja, fera 
das que ainda sao mais importantes para a vida, da 
qui me alevanto contente, e aqui me recolho de- 
fcancado, porque nem aeordo com os penfa- 
mentos na ventura, nem adormeco com elles re- 
parados em bens que en ; ganao, e em males que 
os homens efcolhem de feu grado : de noite qualquer 
eftreila que vejo, be a minha, porque todas favo- 
recem o meu eilado, de dia fern pre o fol me ap- 
parece de hua cor, porque o vejo com os oinos 
livres. Teuho efle inftrumento, a cujo fom canto, 
quando he bem me alegro, porque canto para me 
alegrar, e quando pello contrario me nao peza 
muito, porque o nao fa 90 por alegrar outrem, 
quando ha frio, e neve na ferra, tambem ba Jenha 
neftes montes, e fogo nelias pedras com que me 
deffendo, quando a calma he grande, com o abrigo 
defcas arvores, e a vefinbanga das fontes me recreo, 
affim sao os meus manjares, como be a minha vida, 
nem ella me pede os que Ihe facio clano, nem eu os 
tenbo, o men veflido be sempre defta cor, porque 
em qualquer coufa (ainda de menos conta) he a 
xnudanca perigofa. O mayor trabalho que- tenbo, 
he os pailores com que trato,, porque cada bum tern 
huma vontade, e bum entendimento, e eu me bei de 
fervir fo do meu para com todos ; porem de tal 
maneira ufo delle, que me nao da. do fuceffo que 
pode acontecer ; ao avarento nao Ihe p.e9o nada 
nem Ihe aconfelho que de a outrem, nem Ihe louvo o 
nao dar nada a ninguem, e affim nem Ihe rain to, 
nem o molefto. Ao foberbo, nem me fa90 grande 
por nao ficar com elle era contenda, nem aos outros 
pequenos, porque com elles fe nao alevante mais. - 
Ao ingrato, ou o nao firvo, porque me nao magoe, 
pu quando o sirva, lembrome que a fua ma natureza 
nao pode tirar o pre90 da obra, que de fi he boa. Ao 
fallador, calome : ao calado, defcubrome com tento. 
Ao doudo, nao lbe atalho a furia : ao nefcio, na5 
trabalho por lbe dar razao ; ao pobre nao lbe devo; 
*K3 ao 



150 PORTUGUESE 

ao rico nao lhe pe90 ; ao vao nao o gabo, nem *, 
reprendo ; ao lifonjeiro nao o creo e defte modo 
com todos eftou bem, e nenhum me faz mal. Nao 
digo verdades que amarguem, nam tenho amizades 
que me profanem : nao adquiro Fazendas que outros 
me invejem, porque nefte tempo, das melhores tres 
coufas delle, nacem as mais danofas que ha no mun- 
do : da verdade odio, da converfacao defprefo : da 
prcfperidade inveja ; fou qual me ves, e qual te eu 
digo, nao quero parecer outroV nem fer mais do 
que pareco : venho muitas vezes a efta fonte, que 
me pegou a fua condicao, falla verdade a todos, e 
com nenhum tern differen9a ; cuftumeime a eftas 
fuas agaos, que ainda que sao amargofas, sao sau- 
daveis, apagao pecouha, desfazem feiti90s, e valem 
contra mordiduras de bicha. Senifto que me ouvifte 
achas alguma coufa que te contente, e queres hir 
comi^o, pois ja he tarde, te hofpedarei da minha 
cabana, na qua] podes entrar sem temor, dormir 
fern perigo, e fahir fern faudade ; comeras de ieite, 
ouviras dos contos, e partiras quando quizeres. 
Em quanto o velho pegureiro Jfto dizia, eilava o 
paftor lancando contas a fua vida, com grande 
inveja do que aquelle lhe contava da fua, e no ca- 
bo lhe refpondeo com hum fufpiro. Ah ditofo fer- 
rano, as eftrellas te confervem nefte eflado, para 
que nunca conhecas a differenca delle : tu fo vives, 
tu so deves ao ceo eftar izento das leis da ventura, 
mais he para invejar tua pobreza, que a mayor vai- 
dade do mundo, mais para eilimar a tua cabana, 
que os mais luflrofos edificios delle, mais para fe 
dezejar a tua liberdade, que os mandos e fenhorios, 
com que os homens fe cativao, e engrandecem, e 
mais para fe bufcar a tua companhia, que o mayor 
thefouro, eu nao quero mais della por agora, que 
partirme chorando pello que te ouvi. A efte tem- 
po fe partiao ja as ferranas, que o chamarao, elle fe 
defpedio do peregrino, dandolhe hum pequeno vafo 
de cortica que ievafie daquella agoa, e tocando a fua 

rabeca 



GRAMMAR. * 151 

rabeca fe apartou, e o paftor ficou em batalha com 
males proprios, que a vifta dos bens alheos tomarao 
for9a contra hum fujeito, que elles ja tinhao de todo 
defbaratado. 

Nao pareceo a Lereno o Lugar acommodado para 
paffar nelle a noite, e quafi arrependido de nao 
aceitar o ofJerecimento do ferrano, tomou outro 
caminho que hia mais pella fralda da ferra, imaginan- 
do que perto averia alguma aldea, em que fe reco- 
Ihefe, e andahdo por elle o que ficava do dia, Jhe 
veyo a faltar na entrada de hum valle, que, por hu- 
ma parte eftava cheo de arvores altas, e efpeffas, 
que apertadas de dous outeiros que as aftbmbravao, 
e com a claridade das eftrellas que por entre os ra- 
mos as feria, fe moviao vagarofamente fobre huma 
lagoa, feita de hum ribeiro que decia do monte, na 
qual a fombra e .movimento dos ramos, a luz que 
por entre elleslhe vinha mprTraiido o efcuro das a- 
goas, e alguns arrebatados faltos das roucas fans, fa- 
zendo hum temerofo ecco nos ouvidos, e na vifta, 
hum medroib payor, com trifteza, e receo conftran- 
giao o coracao do defterrado paftor. E vendo que 
dalli para diante Ihe ficava outra vez o caminho da 
ferra, fe abrigou a hum tronco que tinha as coftas 
no ribeiro, que com o murmuro da agoa Ihe podia 
ajudar a grangear o fono,e.aI!i lancado entre as her- 
vas, e os ramos nao podendo adormec.er, cantava 
defta maneira. 



Entre eftes arvores trifles 
Que a fombra da noite cobre 
E com manfo movimento 
Trifles penfamentos movera, 

Ao longo defte ribeiro 
Que por entre as pedras corre 
Fazendo hum doce rugido 
Que o mudo filencio rompe, 

* K 4 Da~ 



152 PORTUGUESE 

Debaixo defte arvoredo 
Que dos carregados montes 
Tomando a cor, vai perdendo 
Vifta, graga, fornbra, e cores. 

Perguntar quero a meus males 
Pols fei que os males refpondem 
Se exprimentei quanto cuftao 
Que me digao quanto podem. 

Se podem matar, que efperao ? 
Se dar vida, qual efcolhem ? 
Pois a que entre elles padego 
He vida que fempre morre. 

Mil annos ha que a fuftento 
E inda que mil annos conte 
He porque em pezares crecem 
Como para os goflos fogem. 

Conjurarao fe contra ell a 
Dous cegos que eftao conformes 
Contra a razao, e o dezejo, 
Que he hum amor, outro a forte. 

Mandarao me defterrado, 
E eu vou fern faber aonde, 
Se fei que ambos vao comigo 
E que fe eu ando elles correm> 

Males, fe aveis de acabarme, 
Para que fao tantos golpes ? 
Que o menor deiles pedia 
Hum fofrimento de bronze ? 

Contra mi vos, e a ventura 
E eu fern outros valedores, 
Mais que fo meus penfamentos 
Para que me fago forte ? 



Se 



GRAMMAR. 153 

Se quereis viver comigo, 

Porque temeis voffa morte? 

Que os males nao durao mais, 

Que em quanto hum triste os efconde. 

Defcubrime algum reme'dio 
De efperancas, que eflas podem 
Suitentarme, e fuftentarvos 
Nefte valle, e noutros montes. 

Porque inda que fam veneno 
Que vai matando de lonje, 
Crioufe com elle a vida 
Que Ihe tern pofto outro nome. 

Que he iflo ! nao refpondeis ? 
Mas outrem por vos refponde, 
Que aos males pedir razao 
He pedir firmeza a forte. 



Do Camoens, 

EMvas linda Inez porta em forTego, 
De teus annos colhendo o doce fruto, 
Naquelle engano da alma, ledo, e cego, 
Que a fortuna nao deixa durar muito : 
Nos faudofos campos do mondego, 
De teus formofos olhos nunca enxuto, 
Aos montes enfinando, e as ervinhas. 
O nome, que no peito efcrito tinhas. 

Do teu principe alii te refpondiao 

As lembrancas, que no alma lhe moravao, 
Que fempre ante feus olhos te traziao : 
Quando dos teus fermofos fe apartavao : 
De noite em doces fonhos, que mentiao, 
De dia em penfamentos, que voavao : 
E quanto em fim cuidava, e quanto via, 
Erao tudo memorias da alegria. 

D*outras 



154 PORTUGUESE 

D'outras bellas fenhoras, princezas, 
Os dezejados talamos engeita, 
Que tudo em fira, tu puro amor defprezas, 
Quando hum gefto, fuave te fugeita : 
Vendo eftas namoradas eftranhezas, 
O velho pay fefudo, que refpeita, 
O murmurar do povo e fantasia. 
Do filhoj que cafarfe na queria. 

Tirar Inez ao mundo determina, 
Por lhe tirar o filho, que tern prefo, 
Crendo co fangue fo da morte indina, 
Matar do firme amor o fogo acefo : 
Que furor confentio, que a efpada fina, 
Que pode fuftentar o graride pefo 
Do furor Mauro, foffe I e van tad a, 
Contra huma fraca dama delicada ? 

Traziao a os borriferos algozes 
Ante o Rey, ja movido a piedade, 
Mas o povo com falfas, e ferozes 
Razoens, a morte crua o perfuade. 
Ella com triftes e piedofas voz zs 9 
Sahidas fo de magoa e faudade 
Do feu Principe e filhos que deixava, 
Que mais que a propria morte a magoava. 

Para o ceo criftalino levantando 
Com lagrimas os olhos piedofos, 
Os olhos, porque as maos lhe eflava atando 
Hum dos duros miniftros rigurofos : 
E depois nos meninos atentando, 
Que tao queridos tinha, e tao mimofos^ 
Cuja orfandade como mai temia, 
Para o avo cruel afri dizia. 

Se ja nas brutas feras, cuja mente 
Natura fez cruel de nafcimento ; 
E nas aves agreftes, que fomente 
Nas rapinas aerias tem o intento, 
Com pequenas crian9as vio a gente* 
Terem piedofo fentimento, 



Como 



GRAMMAR. 155 

Como eoa may de Nino ja moftrarao, 
E cos Irmaos, que Roma edificarao. 

O tu que tens de humano o gefto, e peito, 
Se de humano he matar huma donzella 
Fraca, e fern forca fo por ter fugeito 
O coracao, a quern foube vencella 
A eftas criancinhas tern refpeito 
Pois o nao tens a morte efcura della, 
Movate a piedade fua, e minha, 
Pois te nao move a culpa, que nao titiha. 

E fe vencendo a Maura refiftencia 3 
A morte fabes dar com fogo, e ferro, 
Sabe tambem dar vida com clemencia, 
A quern para perdeIJa nao fez erro : 
Mas fe te afli merece efta innocencia, 
Poemme em perpetuo e mifero defterro, 
Na Scythia fria, ou la na Libia ardente, 
Onde em ]agrimas viva eternamente. 

Poemme onde fe ufe toda a feridade, 
Entre leoens, tigres, e verei 
Se nelles achar poffo a piedade, 
Que entre peitos riumanos nao'achei; 
Alii co amor intrinfeco, e vontade, 
NaqueJle por quern morro, criarei 
Eftas reliquias fuas, que a qui vifte, 
Que refrigerio fejao da mai trifle. 

Queria perdoar Ihe o rey benino, 
Movido das palavras, que o magoao, 
Mas o pertinaz povo, e feu defino, 
(Que defta forte o quiz) lhe nao perdoao : 
Arrancao das efpadas de 390 fino, 
Os que por bom tal feko alii pregoao, 
Contra huma dama, os peitos carniceiros, 
Ferozes vos mostraes, e cavalleiros. 

Qual contra a linda moca Policena, 
Confola§ao extrema da may velha, 

Porque 



156 PORTUGUESE 

Porque a fombra de Achiles a condena, 
Co ferro o duro Pirro fe aparelha : 
Mas ella os olhos, com que o ar ferena 
(Bern como paciente, e manfa ovelha) 
Na mifera may polios, que endoudece, 
Ao duro facrifi'cio fe orTerece. 

Taes contra Inez os brutos matadores, 
No collo de alabaftro, que foflinha 
As obras, co que amor matou de amores 
A 'quelle, que depois a fez rainba : 
As efpadas banbando, e as brancas Mores, 
Que ella dos olbos seus regadas tinha, 
Se incarnicavao fervidos, e irofos, 
No futu.ro caftigo nao cuidofos. 

Bern puderas, o fol, da vifta defies, 
Teus rayos apartar aquelle dia, 
Como da feva mefa de Thyeftes 
Quando os filhos por mao de Atreu comia: 
Vos o concavos valles que pudeftes, 
A voz extrema ouvir da boca fria, 
O nome do feu Pedro, que Ihe ouvilles, 
Por muito grande espaco repetiftes, 

Am* como e bonina, que cortada 

Antes de tempo foi, Candida, e bella, 
Sendo das maos lafcivas mal tratada, 
Da menina, que a trouxe na capella, 
O cbeiro traz perdido, e a cor murchada, 
Tal efta morta a pallida donzella, 
Secas do rofto as rofas, e perdida 
A branca, e viva cor, co a doce vida. 

As filhas do Mondego a morte efcura, 
Longo tempo cborando memorarao, 
E por memoria eterna em fonte pura, 
As lagrimas cboradas transform?rao : 
O nome lhe puzerao, que inda dura, 
Dos amores de Inez, que alii paffarao ; 
Vede, que frefca fonte rega as flores, 
Que lagrimas Jfao a egoa, e o nome amores. 

Da 



GRAMMAR. 157 



Do Mefmo. 

Porem ja cincos foes erao paffados, 
Que dalli nos partiramos, coriando 
Os mares nunca de outrem navegados, 
Profperamente os ventos affoprando : 
Quando huma noite aftando defcuidados, 
Na cortadora proa vigiando, 
Huma nuve que os ares efcurece, 
Sobre noffas cabec,as apparece. 

Tarn temorafa vinha, e carregada, 

Que poz nos cora^oens hum grande medo, 
Bramindo o negro mar de longe brada, 
Como fe deffe"em vao nalgum rochedo : 
O poteftade, di'fle, fublimada, 
Que amea.90 divino, ou que fegredo, 
Efte clima, e efte mar nos aprefenta, 
Que mor coufa parece, que tormenta? 

Nao acabava, quando huma figura 
Se nos mostra no ar, robufta, e valida, 
De disforme, e grandiffima eftatura, 
O rofto carregado, a barba efquallida : 
Os olhos encovados, e a poftura 
Medonha, e ma, e a cor terrena, e pallida^ 
A boca negra, os dentes amarellos. 

Tarn grande era de membros, que bem poffo 
Certificarte, que efte era o fegundo, 
De Rhodes eftranhiflimo Coloftb, 
Que hum dos fete milagres foi do mundo: 
Cu to de voz nos falla horrendp, e grotto* 
Que pareceo fahir do mar profundo, 
Arrepiaofe as carnes, e o cabello, 
A mi, e a todos, fo de ouviloj e velo. 

Do 



158 PORTUGUESE 



Do Costa. 

Logo o poldro de generofa cafta, 
Nos Campos anda mais alto, e foberbo, 
E poem a tempo as dobradieas pernas. 
E primeiro fe atreve ir o caminho, ' 
E ten tar os arrebatados rios, 
E arrerr^arfe ao mar nao conhecido ; 
Nem dos eflrondos vaos fe teme, e efpanta y 
O pefco90 tern alto e tern pequena 
A cab^a, e a barriga breve, e curta ; 
As codas tern muy gordas, e carnudas, 
E com as polpas o animofo peito 
Se moftra proporcionadamente gordo. 
Os mais fermofos sao caftanhos claros, 
E os que tern de cor verde-mar os olhos; 
A mais ma cor tern alvos, e meladosj 
O generofo nao fabe eftar quedo ; 
Se algumas armas derao fom de longe, 
As orelhas levanta, e abayxa, e treme 
Cos membros todos, e nas ventas volve 
Hum recolhido fogo, reprimindo-o : 
A coma tern efpelTa, a qual defcanca 
Sendo lan^ada no direito quarto; * 
Mas pellos lombos pafla a larga efpinha,, 
Rapando cava a terra, e grandemente 
A unha, que he de corno duro, foa. 



Da Sauddde. 

Quinta effencia da dor, noite temida, 
Em cuja fombra he monftro a claridade, 
Mortes, inftantes iiglos, que a vontade 
Com a pena do temor mede atrevida, 

De 



GRAMMAR. 

Dc bens perdidos Argos homicida, 
Felice pompa da infelicidade, 
Alma da pena, Trifle Saudade, 
Vivo morrer de huma defunta vida. 

Abrac,os cos tormentos/ que padec/) 

Por quern a mefma pena a gloria tenho 
Com vofco animo trifles penfamentos. 

A voffos males devo o que merec^ 
Que a pezar da ventura a tirar venho 
Da auzencia fe 3 da dor merecimentos. 



159 



FINIS 



T. C. Hansard, PRIXTER, Peterbarough-aurt , Fltet-street. 



631 































































































N -V 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 






* x- O-. 



^A v o - 



PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 






,v 









-O v X 



* o. 










-/- 



s°' <i° 



A° 




_ 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



hIMI il il I.I 11,111 ll , mil 
003 183 739 A 



